C OMMENTAR Y

ON THE

HINDU SYSTEM OFMEDICINE.

T. A. WISE,M. D.

MEMBER OF THE ROYAL COLLEGE OF SUR GEONS , AND OF THE ROYAL MEDICAL AND CH IRURGICAL SOCIETY ; CORRE SPONDING MEMBER OF

THE Z OOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, AND OF THE

PHILOMATIC SOCIETY OF PARIS .

B E N G A L M E D I C A L S E R V I C E .

CALCUTTA

SOLD BY MESSRS . THACKER AND CO ., AND MESSRS . OSTELL,

LEPAGE AND CO . , CALCUTTA .

AND BY

SM ITH, ELDER AND CO . , CORNHILL, LONDON.

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS .

CONTENTS.

Pag e

page i to xx

BOOK I .

History ofMedicine .

I .—Origin ofMedicin e,

II .—Rank ofPhysician s and duties ofTeachers,

III .—Character and duties ofpupils,

IV .—Duties ofthe Physician, ofthe attendan ts, and

ofthe patient,CHAPTER V .

—Recompence ofthe Physician , .

BOOK II .

Ana tomy and Pkysiology .

CHAPTE R I.—Elements Ofthe

CHAPTER II .—Gen eration ,

CHAPTER III .-Growth and function sOfthe body,

CHAPTER IV .—Structure ofthe Corporeal part ofthe body,

SECT ION I .

—Humors ; air, bile, and phlegm, .

SECTION II .—Essential p arts

Chyle, blood, flesh, fat, bon e, brain , spinal marrow,

marrow, semen, strength and vitality,SECTION III—Excretions ; alvine evacuation s, urin e, per

SECTION IV.—Joints

,

SECT ION V .- Ligamen ts, &c . ,

SECTION VI .—Muscles,

SECTION VII .—Vessels

,

SECTION VIII .—Celular tissue and fascia,

SECTION IX .-Organ s or receptacles,

SECTION X .—Orifices Ofthe body,

SECTION XI.—Skin,

SECTION XII —SupplementaryParts,SECT ION XIII .

—Dissection Ofthe human

CHAPTER V .—Vital Parts,

CHAPTER VI .-Spiritual parts OIthe body,

CHAPTER VII.-Temperaments, .

CHAPTER VIII .—Ages,

CHAPTER IX .—Death

CHAPTER I.-Hyg eology,

SECTION I .-Relative duties, climate, seasons,

SECTION II .—Personal duties, rising from bed, cleaning

the mouth, anointing the body, exercise, shampooing,bathing, clothing, houses, food, sleeping,

CHAPTER II .—Ma teria Medica

,

SECTION l .-Gen eral remarks on Simple Medicines from

the vegetable, an imal, and min eral kingdoms, 14

CHAPTER III .—Pfiarmacy and p rep arations ofmedicine, 1 25

SECTION 1 .—Weights andMeasures, 1 25

SECTION 2 .—Preparation and arrangemen t of medi cin es

, 1 27

SECTION 3 .

—Forms ofmedicin es, powders, fresh juice ofplants, pastes, infusion s and decoction s, extracts, roast

ing, spirituous mixtures, pills, electuaries, oils,SECTION 4 .

—Doses ofMedicines,SE CTION 5 .

—Admin istration ofmedicin es, .

SECTION 6 .—Uses Of Medicin es ; medicin es for curing

di seases ofair, bile, and phlegm diaphoretic medicines,

emetics, purgatives, en emata, inj ection s for the urethra,errhin es

,gargles, emmenagogues, diuretics, scialogo

gues, local and in ternal stimulan ts, astringen t ton ics

alteratives, chemical agen ts,CHAPTER IV .

—Surg ery .

SECTION l .

—Anatomy,SECTION 2 .

— Surgical diseases, inflammation , ulcers, fistu

la, surgical instrumen ts, practical instruction s, bandages, 1 59SECTION 3 .

-Description of Surgical Instrumen ts and

bandages,SE CTION 4 .

—Bloodletting , venesection ,scarifications, cup

ping,leeches,

SECTION 5 .— Styptics,

SECTION 6—Cauteries, actual, potential,SECTION 7 .

—Scalds and Burns,SECTION 8 .

—Directionsfor performing operations, wounds,accidents, fractures, di slocations,

BOOK IV.

Practice of Pity/sic .

CHAPTER I.—General remarks on Disease, .

SECT ION 1 .—Introductory remarks, n ature ofdisease, clas

sification of disease, causes of disease, description of

di seases,SE CTION 2 .

—Diagnosis

SE CT ION 3 .

—Prognosis,SECTION 4 .

—General treatmen t Ofdiseases,CHAPTER II .

—Description and treatmen t ofparticular diseases

SECTION I .

CLASS I.—Diseases of til e humors,

Air bile, phlegm,

SECTION II.

Diseases af eeting the General S'ustem.

CLASS II .

ORDER l .

—Fevers,

Gen eral symptoms and treatmen t . Sp ecies,— con tinued

remitten t, acciden tal, in termitten t varieties, .

ORDER 2 .

— Small-pox,

ORDER 3 .—Acute Rheumatism,

ORDER 4 .—Swellings,

ORDER 5w—Fatn essORDER 6 .

-Emaciation ,

ORDER 7 .—Burning ofthe body,

ORDER 8 .

— Jaundice,ORDER 9 .

-Nervous diseases,

ORDER 1 2 —Urticaria (I)ORDER 13 and 14 .

—Erysipelas, carbuncle, boils .

ORDER 15 .—Hoemorrhagia,

SECTION III .

Diseases of tire reg ions of the body .

CLASS III —Diseases af ecting tii e mind,

ORDER 1 .—Swoon ing

,

ORDER 2 .

—Epilepsy,ORDER 3 .

—Madn ess,ORDER 4 .

—Possessed person s,CLASS IV .

—Diseases of the head and neck

ORDER l .—Diseases ofthe Head,

ORDER 2 .—Ditto Ears,

ORDER 3 .—Ditto Nose,

vi

ORDER 4 .—Diseases ofthe Eyes,

Description of the eye, inflammatlon, diseases of thecoloured part ofthe eye, ofthe membranes, ofthe white

part, ofthe joinings, Ofthe eye-lids, treatment,

ORDER 5 .-Diseases of the mouth

,—diseases of the lips,

gums, teeth, tongue, palate,ORDER 6 .

—Diseases Ofthe n eck, throat,hoarseness, goitre,scrofulous swellings tumors ofthe n eck,

CLASS V.—Diseases of the Chest .

ORDER 1 -Asthma,ORDER 2 . Cough,ORDER 3 .

—PhthisisPulmonalis, .

ORDER 4 —Hiccup,ORDER 5 —Diseases ofthe IIeart

,

CLASS VI.—Diseases of the Abdomen .

ORDER l .—Dyspepsia, . 32 7

ORDER 2 .—Indigestion, 328

ORDER 3 .—Drumbelly, 330

ORDER 4 .—Con stipation, .

ih.

ORDER 5 .—Cholera, ih.

ORDER 6 .—Vomiting, 332

ORDER 7 —Dysen tery, .333

ORDER 8 .—Diarrhoea, 337

ORDER 9 .—Swelling of the abdomen, .

ih.

ORDER 1 0 .—Cholic, .

34 1

ORDER 1 1 .—Worms,

348

ORDER 1 2 .—Retention ofdi scharges, . 350

ORDER 1 3 .—Unh ealthy discharges, 353

ORDER l 4 .—Vomiting ofbile, .

ih.

ORDER 1 5 .—Enlargemen t ofthe Abdomen , 354

CLASS VII.—Diseases of the urinary organs, and of the org ans of

g enera tion .

ORDER I.—Diseases ofthe urin e and bladder, suppression

ofurine, Urinary Caculi,ORDER II .

—Diseases of the male organ s Of gen eration ,

sores, history Ofthe ven erial disease, phymosis, paryphymosis, structures,

ORDER III .—Diseases ofthe female organ s ofgeneration ,

ofthe vagina, Menorrhage, dismenorrhoea, utero-vaginal

tumors, impotency,CLASS VIII .

—D iseases of the R ectum and Anus .

ORDER I.—Piles, 2 Stricture ofthe rectum ; 3, fistula-in

ano 4, ulcers round the anus ; 5, prolapsus ani,

CLASS IX .—Diseases ofthe extremi ties .

ORDER 1 .—White

ORDER 2 .—Elephan tiasis,

ORDER 3 .—Slight diseases of the extrem ities, of the

sole ofthe feet , and UIcers ofthe axilla and

groin s,CLASS X.

—Diseases p roduced by PoisonsORDER l .

—Vegetable andmineral,ORDER 2 .

—Animal poisons,ORDER 3 .

—Hydrophobia,CLASS XI . —Trivial diseases, baldness, warts, &c

BOOK V.

Midwifery, and diseases ofWomen and Children .

CHAPTER I.—Treatment of women during pregnancy and

Treatment ofthe Infant, 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CHAPTER II .—Means ofpreventing abortion ,

Food during the diII'

erent mon ths ofUtero-Crestation ,

Preternatural Parturition,Diseases Ofthe Mammae,Varieties ofMilk,

CHAPTER III . —Diseases ofInfan ts,Purulen t Ophthalmia OfInfants,

Marasmus,Diseases produced by Devils,

PRELIMINARY REMARKS.

IN every coun try individuals are to be found who occupythemselves in endeavours to discover the m ean s ofalleviating

pain , and ofcuring diseases. In Europe espec ially, the dif

feren t coun tries were so conn ected tog ethe r as to en able the

physician to profit by the discover ies ofhis n eighbours, and

the historian to trace the progress Ofthe sc ien c es among the

various races ofmankind from the Indus to theAtlan tic,and

from the time when m edic in e em e rged from the obscurity of

an c ien t fable to the p resen t age .

‘

During this long p eriod we

kn ow the individuals and the people who have added to our

medical kn owledg e, and can prove that all these differen t sys

tems have a common source being orig inally derived from

the fam ily ofH ippocrates. Those distinguished ben efac tors of

man k ind first explain ed the n ature and treatmen t ofdiseases,

and reduced to theory the various phenomena Ofthe human

body. The Grec ian Philosophers were assisted by the

Egyptian sages, who app ear to have Obtain ed much of their

knowledge from some mysterious n ation ofthe east . Egypt,after having had her in stitution s destroyed by the sword of

the con queror, became the seat of Grec ian learn ing ; which

was afterwards tran sferred to the east, where under the foster

ing care of the Caliphs of Bagdad medicin e was cultivated

with dilig ence and success. I t received still farther additions

from the east ; and thus improved it was con veyed by the

Muhammadan conquerors in to Spain . From thence i t was

commun icated to other parts of Europe ; where it has exer

c ised the gen ius ofmany g reat men, with so : much advan tage

to suffering human ity.

Among the sacred records ofthe H indus there isf

a system

of m edic in e, prepared at a very early period, that app ears

to form n o part Ofthe medical sc ien ce, and is n ot supposed

to have en lighten ed the o ther nations ofthe earth : a system

ii

forwhich the H indus claim an an tiquity far beyond the period

to which the history Ofthe heroic age is supposed to ex tend.

The following commen tary is in tended to describe the

H indu scien ce ofmedic ine . In sulated in their position , and

residing in a rich and fruitful coun try, the H indus appear tohave been satisfied W ith the kn owledge and power which

they had acquired at a very early period, and affectionatelyattached to their own coun try, they retain ed for ag es their

own Op in ions and practices, am idst various revolut ion s.

Their coun try was repeatedly overrun by the Muhammadan s,

who destroyed and persecuted them with the most relen tless

c ruelty, w ithout making any impression on their relig ious

belief, or dimin ishing the respect and ven eration which theybore to their sacred records. Freed for a time from their

persecutors, their luxurian t coun try quickly resumed its

former fruitfuln ess ; and the in tellig en t and industrious in

habitan ts, under peaceful and sagac ious prin ces, who promo

ted the happin ess Of their subjects rather than in creased

their own power by conquest, were soon restored to their

former prosperity. The descrip tion Ofthe medical profession

by a people, so remarkable for the early period at which

they reached an advan ced state Of power and learn ing, must

be in teresting, as i t will en able us to trace the exten t and

modifications Of c ivilization In a n ation un conn ected w ith

any other, and in structive as po in ting out the mean s by

which such an advan cemen t in the social state was aecom

plished.

In tracing the progress of Philosophy among such a peo

ple, it -is n ecessary to observe, that human n ature exhibits a

gen eral resemblan ce among all n ation s while the absen ce of

absolute iden tity, is accoun ted for by the influen ce ofclimate,habits, customs, and political state . Hen ce there ex ists a

certain resemblan ce in the gen eral Speculation s ofdifferen t

n ations, which, however erron eous in many respects, must

be ackn owledged to have some foundation as regards the

fac ts upon which they are based. This will be poin ted

out in the following work, and will be Of use as defin ing,with more exactness, particular Op in ions. Doubtful fac tsin medic in e may thus be illustrated and established, and

distant analog ies between ten ets detected, which will corro

iii

borate the testimony ofhistory, and lead us to compare those

first prin c iples, upon which system s are founded. With thisin ten tion I propose, in the following work, to follow the

classification pursued by the Hindus, in som e Of the ir m inor

particulars, and Shall add as much of the ir reason ing on

facts, as will en able the reader to understand the ir systembut, in order that the value Of these ; an cien t records may be

be tter apprec iated, I have reduc ed the medical knowledge Of

the an c ien t H indus to what I suppose to be, the order best

adapted for exhib iting its real value .

In a second part, it is my in ten t ion to trace the declin e of

the m edi cal profession in India, and the best mean s Of

removing the state of ignoran ce, which n ow prevails over the

Whole ofH industan .

This work has g rown upon me imperc eptibly. In terested

in the H istory of the m edical sc ien ce, for a numb e r of

years I had employed my le isure in n o ting the developmen t

ofsystems in differen t schools and n ation s, and was induced

at an early period Of my r esiden ce in Bengal, to exam inethe H indu m edical Shastras. I translated and compared

what I con sidered the m ost valuable parts ofdifferen t manu

scripts, when I found that my materials had accumulated so

much, that they were too bulky for my orig inal purpose it

then occurred to m e that the following commen tary m ight beworthy Ofb e ing published separately, as con tain ing in terest

ing information , which had n ot hitherto b een placed before the

public . An accomplished scholar had inde edg iven an in terest

ing accoun t Of H indu opin ion s regarding certain diseasesa persevering traveller had afforded a Sketch ofc ertain Opi

n ion s con tain ed in the H indu medical Shastras, as tran slated

in to the Tib e tan languag e 51‘

an an tiquarian , and a distin

guished physic ian had g iven som e Of their p eculiar op in ion s,as found in the m edical works of the south ofIndia ;I and

an able lec turer had combin ed all this information with im

Professor Wilson , Tran . Med. and Phy . Society Calcutta, vol .1 , Orien tal Magazine for March, 1 823 .

1‘ Mr. A. Soma de Koros, Journal Asiatic Society, Calcutta No .

37, January, 1 835 .

1 Dr. Heyne’

s Tracts on India, and Ainslie’s Materia MedicaIndica, Lond.

—ED .

iv

portan t additions ofhis own but a comprehensive View of

their system of medic ine, which it is the in ten tion Ofthe

p resen t work to supply, 1s still wan ting to complete our

information on the subject .

While o ther bran ches Of H indu philosophy have been

made the frequen t subjec t of discussion , and much that

is curious and importan t has been discovered by European

philosophers, it is remarkable in to what n eg lec t the medi

cal Shastras have fallen ; from the con temp t with which

the conquerors of H industan regarded the scien tific kn ow

ledge Of the H indus. This explain s, why their system of

medic ine was desp ised, and their works n eglec ted, and for

gotten . When the English studen t directed his atten tion to

the San skrit language, he seldom extended his examination

to the medical Shastras, with which the b rahman s were

rarely con versan t ; and when he did study the subject, it wasin a cursory mann er, and he in gen eral was in competen t

to judge ofthe real value ofsuch professional works. Under

such c ircumstan ces Sir William Jon es asserts, that thereis no eviden ce that in any language OfAsia there exists on e

orig inal treatise On medicine con sidered as sc ien ce .

” Even

Medicine and Surgery,”

says Mill, to the cultivation of

which so obvious and powerful an in terest invites, have

scarcely, beyond the deg ree Of most un cultivated tribes, at

tracted the rude understandings ofthe H indus.

”

The following Commen tary on the most an c ien t records of

the H indu medic in e w ill suffic ien tly refute such Opin ions ;and will at the same time prove, that these works con tain

much that is in teresting and in structive .

An other cause, which produced the n eg lec t ofthe H indu

Medical Scien ce on the part Ofthe Muhammadan conquerors

OfH industan, is that theywere so prepossessed in favor Oftheir

own system ofmedic in e, as to have little respec t for that Of

a vanquished people . More lately, the diffusion ofthe Eu

r0pean system Ofmedic in e Operated as a discouragemen t to

the study ofthe San skrit works and the prejudice again st

the n ational system grew stronger, as the an cien t Medi

cal Works became more inaccessible from their rarity,and imperfect copies were substituted, as the ignorance of

Royle on the antiquity ofHindu medicine, 1 838 .

the people increased. The expense of drugs was also cousi

derable, and the diffi culty Ofprocuring them g enuine b ecame

greater, as they were less sought aft er and apprec iated, which

led to the in troduc tion Ofinferior substitutes. Thus confiden ce

in these m edical prescription s dim in ished stillmore and the

con se quen ce Ofsuch n eglect was, to in crease the prejudice

against the an cien t sc ien ce even among the H indus, and to lead

to the substitution of superstition and quackery. The sys

tem OfBhutaredya, which in c luded the Offering up Ofcertain

prayers and in can tation s, was in troduced ; as well as the

worshipping Ofvillage gods, for the cure Ofdiseases, as pro

per m edical assistan ce b ecame more difficult, to meet the

pressing wan ts of the p eople . The n ative pract ice of

m edic ine may n ow be said to be in this lamen table state

Of depression O ver all H industan ; but, it was far o ther

w ise, as cultivated by the anc ien t H indus. A very few

p ractition ers may still be found in the n eighbourhood of

c ities, in the service Of r ich individuals in whose families

the an c ien t treatises Of the ir forefathers are studied, and

tran smit ted from g en eration to g en eration . I have had

the happin ess ofkn ow ing such a fam ily Ofhereditary physi

c ian s, rich, independen t, and much respec ted.* Among

such, the an cien t Medical Works are SO highly valued ;

that the influen ce Ofstation , ran k, and mon ey, will Often be

in effec tually exerted in procuring these manuscripts. In

some cases, it is even diffi cult to obtain p erm ission to Oopy

such works, at the own er’s house ; from a b elief that all

the good to be derived from the ir possession , which God had

b estowed on the individual and his fam ily, would van ish

on the work b e ing sold, or even the precepts commun icated

to unauthorized individuals .

The climate, and the materials of which these an cien t

Works are composed, render them very liable to be destroyed. Some are already lost, and the difficulty ofprocuringcorrec t Copies Ofthe remainder, is yearly in creasing . Un

der these c ircumstan ces, it is believed that the follow ingCommen tary will be con sidered in teresting, as embody

After some enquiry I find there are not more than four or five

persons, in this part OfIndia, who are acquainted with the Hindu

Medical Shastras.

VI

ing all that is considered worthy Of preservation in the an

c ien t Hindu medical writings. These treatises appear to have

been prepared at a very early date . In Order to investigate

this very importan t fac t, it will be n ecessary to make_

a few

remarks on the history, literature, chron ology, and sc ien ces

Ofthe H indus which are all so combin ed with each o ther,and in terwoven with their theology, as to require elucidation ,before the orig inality oftheir m edical system can be proved,some Oftheir theoritical n otion s understood, and the p robable

age de termined, in which the medical wr itings were prepared.

1st. History. That portion Ofthe Caucasian race Ofman

kind, which inhabited the fertile plain s south Of the loftyrange Ofmoun tains ex tending eastward from the Casp ianSea, and forming the n orthern boundary ofmodern H industan , was probably the origin al stock Ofthe H indu nationa n ation which from the most an c ien t testimony, as well as

from the character Ofits soc ial in stitution s, is con sidered to

have been coeval w ith the first formation Ofm en in to soc ial

commun ities. These early inhabitan ts ofthe world in creasedso rapidly in number and power, that at the aera ofthe build

ing ofBabel, they are described as“ journ eying from the

East and,as resolving, on their arrival in the land of

Shinar, to build a c ity and tower, whose top may reach in toheaven .

”From them, and from his g reat progen itor, Shem,

Abraham probably Obtain ed all the learn ing then kn own .

It Was the kn owledge acquired by sthe privileged class Of

brahmans, and the habits of industry Of the o ther classes,join ed to their Skill in adding to the comforts and elegan c iesOflife, that Cxplain ed the power and r iches Ofthese easternn ations at that remote period, and which caused them to

be regarded as proverbially possessed of the “ w isdom Of

the East,”( 1 Kings ch . iv .

,v . Little, however, was

‘

known Of the H indu n ation previous to the con quest Of

Alexander . That g reat monarch Carried his arms beyond

the Indus ; and on e of his successors, Seleucus Nicator,advan ced as far as the Gang es. I t is in teresting to n ote

the language of the historian of the Macedon ian hero .

After his vic tory over Porus, Alexander, in his harangue to

his troops, assures them,that they were n ow go ing to

en ter those famous coun tries so abundan t in riches, that

vii

even what they had found and seen in Persia would appear

as n othing in comparison to them .

”(Quin tus Curtius, lib .

x ., ch . H erodotus, Diodorus, and Arr iam, describe the

streng th of the H indu armies, the number Of their war

chariots, the excellen ce Of their arms and appoin tmen ts, and

the strength of their fo rtresses ; and Strabo and Plutarch

agree w ith them in asserting the high state of c ivil ization to

which India had then attain ed and that it was full Of larg e

and rich c ities, had roads with m ile - ston es, and inn s for the

accommodation of travellers, and carried on a considerable

trade with their n e ighbours .

A people, who had distin guished themselves at such an

early age, by the ir power and riches, as well as by their

successful cultivation of the scienc es, may b e supposed to

have studied w ith much care the m eans of succouring the

wounded andmaimed, ofalleviating pain , and curing diseases.

The H indu history Ofm edicin e proves this to have been the

case ; for on e of the fourteen ratnas, or precious Objects,which the ir gods are believed to have produced by churn ingthe ocean , was a learn ed physic ian . This proves ofwhat

importan ce they considered the healing art, and accords with

the Opin ion ofthe b est informed ofthe an c ien ts. Arrian in

forms us, that, in the expedition ofAlexander to India, the

Grecian physicians found n o remedy again st the bites of

snakes ; but the Indian s cured those who happened to fall

under that m isfortun e .

” For this reason ,” Nearchus tells

us, Alexander, having all the most skilful Indian s about his

p erson , caused p roclamation to be made throughout the

camp, that whoever m ight be bitten by on e of these snakes

Should forthwith repair to the royal pavilion to be cured.

These physician s are also said to have made other cures but,as the inhabitan ts have a very temperate climate, they are n ot

subject to many varieties Ofdisease . However, ifany amongthem feel themselves much indisposed, they apply to the ir

Sophists (brahman s) , who, bywonderful, and even more than

human mean s, cure whatever will admit of

2d. Literature . The San skrit language, so majestic,SO

richly reflected, and SO an c ien t, is still viewed as the n a

Arrian’

s Indian History, Edited by Mr. Brooke, Loud. 1 729 ,vol. ii . ch. 1 5, p . 232 .

viii

tional language, not on ly from its being that in which the

o ldest works in Indian literature are composed, but also as it

was at on e time the language ofa considerable part ofIndia,espec ially of those reg ion s n ear the Ganges, as the Provin ceofBahar, in which were laid the scen es ofmany ofthe most

an cien t Indian poems .

The early period at which San skrit was cultivated, and the

success with which the study was attended, prove the great

capac ity ofthose who made it the Object ofpursuit . In some

cases, it seems to have been blended with other languages,and in others it probably absorbed the dialec ts ofthe abori

g ines. Its analogy to the languages with which scholars arefam iliar, and its conn ec tion with the local relig ion , arts, and

scien ces, like those ofGreece andRome, render the study ex

ceedingly in teresting, and exc ite a desire to become acquaint

ed with its literary remain s, con tain ing as they do m emorials

of an an cien t theology, ofpoetry, sc ien ce, and philosophy,which have exerted an influen ce over the most distinguished

n ation s ofan tiquity, and to which even Europe is indebted

for the rudimen ts ofher learn ing .

3d. Chronology . The H indus divide their Chronology in tofour ages (yugs) . The three first were probably fan c iful .During each of these ages, mankind was Supposed to havelost a part equal to on e fourth oftruth and moral rec titude,un til the last, or w icked age (kali yug ) , in which man becomes

wholly depraved and sinful . It is probable that the second age

(dwapar yug ), is the ren ovated world, described byMoses, in

which we find a chaos, or the wreck ofa former world, uponthe surface ofwhich moved the Spirit ofGod. The Swdyam

bhara, Adimo, orAdorn , was the man -woman ofthe H indus ;

who was separated in to a male and female, like our first

paren ts, and became the first progen itors ofmankind. Bybo th accoun ts, the life ofman extended to on e thousand

years and the days oftheir godswere as a thousandyears of

mortals, to which St . Peter seems afterwards to alludesi‘

The H indus pretend that the presen t age, or kali yug, be

gan in the year B. C . 3 10 1 or with the en tran ce Of the sun

in to the Sign A'

swin, the first ofthe 27 Nakshatras,

l

or man

Methusalem died at the age ofnine hundredand sixty-n ine years.

1” See his Second General Epistle, ch . iii . v. 8 .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

X

b e considered as forming . a criterion by which we mayjudg e of the ir pre tension s to orig inality. The date of their

astronomical tables can not now be de termin ed, but the iraccuracy is un questionable . According to their astronomy the

Z odiac was divided in to twen ty-seven con stellation s ; the ecliptic in to signs, degrees, andm inutes ; the plan es ofthe sun and

moon , the leng th ofthe solar year, the accelerated motion of

the moon , the in equality of the prec ession ofthe equin oxes,&c . was probably obtain ed by the Europ ean s from the Hin

dus, and formed the foundation ofthe astronom ical know

ledge, which was improved and extended by the gen ius ofthe

vvest .

The Hindu n otions ofPhilosophy are likewise orig inal, and

as they explain some oftheir Opin ion s regarding the physiolo

gy ofthe body, or microcosm, I shall add a few remarks on

this curious subj ect . According to the H indu philosophers

Space was

first created by Brahmafl< in which the five elea

men ts of the material world (e ther, air, fire, water, and

e arth)frwere confusedly m ingled together . He separated

thein , and assign ed to each its proper place, for the perform

an ce of its office . He first separated the subtile ether,which has the quality of conveying sound, from which was

derived the pure and po ten t air, a vehicle ofscen ts, and eu

dowed i t with the quality of touch and sound ; from ether

p roc eeded light or fire, making obj ects visible, dispelling

gloom, and had the qualities of figure, touch, and sound.

From light proceededwater, w ith the quality of touch, sound,colour, and taste ; and from water was deposited earth, with

the qualities of touch, sound, colour, taste, and smell . In

each ofthe elemen ts oforgan s was con tain edmore or less of

the qualiti es of happ in ess, ac tion , and in ertn ess. From

satwa-

gun, the first quality in Spac e, arose the power of

hearing, in which organ is con tain ed much of the elemen t

ofpure ether, and in this mann er the perception of sound is

conveyed to the soul by mean s ofthe m ind air, in like man

Brahma the Great God ; Parama tma (a irma n) , theSupreme Being Pradha

’

na (Hana) , Nature I'shwara (W ) , the

Supreme Ruler ofthe Universe .

TSee page 30 .

x i

n er, conveys the sen se of touch or fe eling through the skin

fire,Sight through the eye water, taste through the tongue

and earth, smelling through the n ose to the soul . The

whole of these five elem en ts, and the ir fun c tion s, g ive birth

to the power of thought and dec ision . From the second, or

active quality (Raja-

gnn) in space, arose sp eech ; from the

sam e quality in air,arose the power of the hands ; in light,

that ofthe fe et in water, that ofg en eration and, in matter,

that Of expulsion . The five sen ses, the five organ s ofac tion ,the heart, which comprises sen se and ac tion w ith m ind, are

an imated by the soul from the embryo state .

The soul desires kn owledg e , and, through the chann el of

the m ind, ac ts on vision , and produc es the p erc eption of

Visible Obj ects through the ear, the p erc eption of sound ;

through the skin , touch, &c . I t invigorates the five ac tive

m embers, the five p erc eptive m embers, fiv e elem en ts, &c . It

is pure, b eholds everything as an indifferen t spectator, while

un ited with matter ; in the same way as the eye is affec ted

by light, the pot of water by the fire, iron by the magn et ,fire by fuel, the shadow by the substan ce, the arrow by the

string ofthe bow, so does the D ivin e particle act through the

material organ ic world.

The soul, when i t ex ists in the body, has the qualities of

p iety, morality, and justice,— ofhappin ess and m isery, - of

con tin en ce and lust, -Ofanger, folly, arrogan ce, avarice, and

ign oran c e,—of en ergy, b reathing, dej ec tion s, w ill, and nu

derstanding ,—of m en tal judgmen t

,m emory, kn owledg e, ef

fort, and sen sibility.

The combination of the soul and body g ives rise to the

differen t disposit ion s ofp erson s, which are derivedfrom Pri

lcriti, or Nature .

1 st . A'

happy disposition (Satwa is said to be derived

from Vishnnxt If, in excess,i t affords light, and produc es

knowledge and happin ess, the p erson avo ids bad, and strivesto p erform good action s he has patien c e ; is a lover oftruth,holin ess, faith, knowledge, and understanding ; has n o bad

desire ; possesses a good memory ; is charitable, just, firm,

From Satwa, good, and gun, a quality .

1” From Vish, to overspread.

and is devoid of anger ; is con ten ted, and without avaricehen ce, when gydni

”(from gydn, wisdom) appears at all

the gates of the body, it indicates that Sotwa-gun predomin ates Within . When such a person dies, his soul is con veyedto the reg ion s ofthose immaculate beingswho are acquain tedw ith the Most H igh . He becomes a Deva .

2d. An active disposition (Raja-

gnn)* proceeds from

Brahma, and sign ifies desire, the love ofgain , industry, and

commen cemen t ofworks : and produces unhappin ess when

in excess. Such a person is m iserable, inquiet, unforg iving,and pervaricating . He has n o mercy is haughty, proud,lascivious, in temperate, passionate, chang eable, and covetous.

When a person with such a disposition dies, his soul re-an i

mates an other body ofa differen t and inferior n ature .

3d. When an in ert or wicked disposition (Tama-ganfi‘ is

in excess, it proceeds from Siva , and is in dicated by a wan t

ofen ergy and love of re tiremen t, secrecy, and distraction of

thought he n e ither believes in God n or in an other state of

existen ce ; he is a great sinn er is without understanding or

knowledge, so as to be un able to take care ofhis wealth and

is sen sual, slothful, procrastin ating, and stup id. When such

a person dies, his soul is conceived again in the womb of

irrational an imals .

Each ofthese disposition s confine the in corruptible Spirit

of the body. The Satwa-gnn, being pure, clear, and free

from defects, insp ires the soul with sweet and pleasan t con

sequen ces—the fruit of wisdom . The Raja-

gnn is of a pas

sive n ature, arising from the effects of worldly desire, and

imprison s the soul with the sen se of sloth, in tox ication ,and the feelings p roduced by action . The Tama-

gun,

being the offspring of Ignoran ce, is the confounder ofall the

faculties ofthe m ind. As on e or o ther of these qualities pre

dominates so w ill the charac ter ofthe individual be formed.

The harmon ious action ofthe five elemen ts and their quali

ties constitutes health ; and the in crease or dim inution ofon e

or more ofthe humors, formed from the elemen ts, produc es

disease . To reduce these humors when superabundan t, and

in crease them when wan ting, were the prin c iples upon which

From Raja, to desire, and gun, quality.

T From Tama, darkness, and gun, quality.

IIiii'

the ir system ofcure was based. To accomplish these objects

a stric t reg imen was enforced, and certain articles offood and

particular m edic in es were prescribed to in crease or dimin ishthese elemen ts according as they were supposed to have deviated from the healthy proportion .

*

An other peculiarity of the H indu beliefis the supposed

separation of the human race in to four classes in order that

they might be multiplied. Each of these classes has differ

en t qualities, distin ction s, and occupation s .

1st CLAss.—The Brahman s, the emblems of wisdom,

proceeded from Brahma’s mouth ; and their occupation is

to p ray, to read, and to in struc t .

2ud CLAss .—The Khetriya, the emblem ofstreng th, came

from his arms ; and they are destined to hold the land, todefend, and to govern .

3rd CLAss .-The Baishya (or ep itome ofn ourishmen t) are

Sprung from Brahma’s n ave l and their provin ce is to culti

vate the land, to traffic ; and, by these m ean s to provide

man, in the social state, with the n ecessaries oflife .

4th CLAss .—The Sudra, the emblem Of subj ection, pro

ceeded from Brahma’s feet ; and are in tended to labour, to

serve, to travel, &c .

As the Brahmans were allowed to marry in to the o ther

classes, there were, at an early p eriod, other distin ction s to

be made . The offspring ofthe Brahman with the daughter

of a Baishya, was called Ambasta, or, more common ly,Baidya ; and it is stated in Menu, that their profession is

Medicin e .

The early age at which this division ofthe H indu nation in

to castes tookplace, each ofwhichwas devoted to a particular

b ranch ofthe useful or ornamen tal arts, rap idly accelerated

the advan cemen t ofkn owledge . I t enabled this people to

accumulate the experien ce of gen eration s, and to acquire a

There is a class of physicians, according to Megasthenes,

among the Germanes (Brahmans) who rely most on diet and reg imen ,

and next on external applications, having a great distrust of the effectsofmore powerful modes oftreatment. They are also said at that earlyperiod ( about A. D . 300 ) to have employed charms in aid oftheir medic ines. ( Strabo, lib . xv.)

xiv

degree ofexpertness, and to develope an ex ten t ofing enuity,that, even in the presen t advan ced state of the arts in Eu

rope, has scarcely b een equalled. The distin ction s of sec ts

likewise enabled the n ation to set apart the most distinguish

ed class, in order that they m ight devo te themselves to the

acquisit ion of knowledge ; and the Brahman s thus b ecame,

like the Druids and Mon ks of Europ e, at a much later pe

riod, the great improvers, and, by their skill and en terprise,taught the n ation how much happ in ess and comfort m ight

be extrac ted from the rich resources of n ature . The kn ow

ledge of a remedy to assuage pain , or ofa pr in c iple in the

preven tion or cure ofa‘

disease, was too importan t a disco

very n ot to be recorded and the physic ian s were so sensible

of the vast importan ce of such kn owledg e, as to seek n ot

on ly to retain them in the ir fam ilies but likew ise to test the ir

accuracy, and to modify an d extend them according to their

own experien ce .

The difficulties of the subject, and the Impor tan ce of

health, while these induced the H indu sages to accumulate

observation s, must have proved to them the weakn ess ofthe ir

unassisted faculties, and their ignoran ce ofthe Operations of

n ature, which led them to call in the assistan ce oftheir gods

e ither as practition ers, or as coun sellorsfil<

The following are the n am es of H indu gods, who were

supposed to possess a kn owledge ofthe medical profession .

Brahma, the creator, or creative prin c iple .

Siva, the destroyer, or destroying prin c iple .

Indra, the king ofheaven .

Surya, the god ofthe sun .

Dhanwantari, the g reat physICIan , king ofBenares .

Ashwinihumaras, the twin physic ian s ofthe gods.

Daka, the Prajdp ati .

Rishis—Obree.

Baraddsa .

Pardsara .

“ This was more natural from their believing that sickness was a

proof of guilt ofthe person in the present or in a former state ofexisten ce ; so that even in the time ofAlexander it was con sidered dis~

gra/ceful for the holy sophists (brahmans) to be sick ; and they put an

end to themselveswhen they fell into that calamity. (Strabo, lib . xv . )

xv

No goddess ofmedic ine is represen ted as having flourishedun til at a late period, when the small-pox made its appear

ance and comm itted g reat ravages i n H industan .

Particular gods are supposed to superin tend differen t partsOfthe body, and it is to them that prayers are offered up be

fore operation s are perform ed or m edicin es exhibited. The

following are the chiefOf the ir gods :

superin tends the tongue .

life .

Indra, firmamen t streng th.

Baruna, water, understanding .

Surya, sun,

Chandra, moon , understandingVishnu, preserver, . courage .

Brahma, creator, soul .

Samudra, ocean , navel .

Dhruba, stars, eyebrows.

These are the chief, although all the gods have particular

duties assigned to them to an swer particular ends, and are

accordingly propitiated in their several charac ters.

These deities were supposed, at differen t periods, to have

tals, the m ean s Of preven ting and curing diseases. The

following are the prin cipal medical works that were thus im

p arted to the H indus

l . The A'

yur Veda is the most anc ien t system ofmedic in e,and is of the highest authority. The age in which it was

w ritten is n ot kn ow n , and fragmen ts on ly of the MS. are

n ow procurable . From the tersen ess of the description s,there is said to have been con siderable difli culty in under

standing it, and many comm en taries were w ritten on the sub

jcet, and it is to them alone we have to refer . In the first

part ofthe following work I have g iven an accoun t of this

curious Veda, which is said to have been prepared by Brahma

in the Satya Yug .

2 . The second work, called A'

yugranta, is said to have

been written by Siva in the Tretd Yug a . Part of this work

is said to be recorded in some ofthe Tantras .

3 . The nature ofmedicines and diseases is treated ofin

xvi

some ofthe Purdnas, particularly in the Ugni Purdn . These

works were prepared by Deities and R ishis, and some of

them are still procurable .

4 . We find the names ofthe following authors in the Ma

habharata they are said to have flourished under Yudhis

thira, in the beg inn ing ofthe Kali Yuga .

Name ofthe Work .

Author’s Name .Found.

Supposed to be irrecoverable .

Atri SangitaUgn i BesaCharaka .

Bhila Bhila Tantra .

Jatukarna Jutukarna Tantra.

Parasara. Parasara Sangita.

HaritaKarpari Karpari Tan tra.

DhanwantariS h t

Sushrutaus ru a

These works are supposed to have been prepared by differ

en t Munis, on the plan in a great measure of the orig inal

A'

yur Veda . The anatom ical part appears to have been pre

pared from actual dissec tion . The following is a list ofthe

prin cipal medical works which are n ow found in H industan ,after the great works of Charaka and Sushruta . They are

arrangedin the probable order in which theywere prepared

Aupadhan aha, a system ofSurgery.

Aurabhra, Do .

Bhila Tan tra, a system ofMedic in e .

Jatukarna Sang ita, Do .

Parasara, Do .

Hérita, Do .

Bhagavata, Do .

Bhava-prakasa, Do .

Todrananda, Do .

Chakradatta, Do .

Prachararan tabali, Do .

Sarangadhara, Do .

Written, according to Bently, A. D . 600 ?

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

xviii

orig inals, or more probably from translation s made at a still

earlier period in to the language ofPersiafi’<

O thers suppo se that the Vedas were compiled in the four

teen th cen tury before Christ—t (see Asiatic R esearches, vol.viii . p . and the A

'

yar Veda supplemen t added proba

bly some cen turies afterwards, about the time ofMenu’

s code

oflaws (B. C . 900 P) .

This remarkable code appears to have b e en written at a

time when the prejudic es ofcaste, &c . did not ex ist ; and

when look ing at the Sun or stroking a cow w ere sufi cien t to

purify a person who had touched a human bon e .

AS the result ofthe above remarks it app ears that at a veryearly age the H indus had made much greater advan c es in

c ivilization , and the arts and sc ienc es than any other an c ien t

people and while the n ation s ofthe west have been slowlyadvan c ing in c ivilization during the last two thousand years,the Hindus, by the depressing influen ce of foreign subjuga

tion , are at presen t in a lower soc ial condition than they ap

pear to have been in , three c en turies before the Christian era

I t was most probably at this early p eriod that they studied

the healing art with such success as to enable them to pro

duce systematic works on m edic ine, derived from that sourceofkn owledge which the prejudice of man k ind is so much

Opposed to . Sushruta informs us that a learn ed physic ianmust comb ine a kn owledge of books, or theoretical know

ledge w ith dissection ofthe human body, and p ractice . This

explain s why the an c ien t system ofH indu medic in e was so

complete in all its parts, and so perman en t in its influen ce

and warran ts the inferen ce that several cen turies were re

quired to form it . ig

In comparing these Medical Works, and comp iling the

See the Remarks byProfessorWilson on the Indian Physicians at theCourt ofBagdad ; by Rev . W . Cureton—Journal of the R . A. Society,

vol. vi. p . 1 05 .

1“ Mr. Colebrooke arrived at this con clusion from a passage from the

Jyotish of one of the Vedas, when'

the northern Solstitial point isreckon ed to be in the middle ofAslesha and the southern at the beg inn ing of Sravishtha, or Dhanishtha and then declares What he hadelsewhere shown

~that such was the Situation ofthose cardinal points in

the Fourteen th Century before the Christian era,

1 SeeProfessorWilson’

sNote onMill’sHistory ofIndia, vol. II. p. 232 .

xix

following Commen taries, I have rejected some portions as

worthless, while I retain ed all such parts as appeared peculiar

in theory, or importan t in prac tice . I have som etim es beenoblig ed to resto re passages altered by the carelessn ess or

ign oran ce ofcompilers, or of comm en tators . I t is probableo ther portions m ight have been om itted or en larged withadvan tag e I b elieve, howev er, i t w ill be found, that I have

e rred more fre quen tly in the latter than in the former parti

on lar . For arriving at the true mean ing ofwords and ex

pression s, I have had the assistan ce ofable Pandits, ofthese

I must particularly men tion the assistan c e I have derivedfrom Abhaycharan Tarkapan chan an , n ow superin tenden t ofthe Bengali departmen t of the College of Muhammad

Mohsem, Hoogly, and ofMadhusudan Gupta, Lecturer of

Anatomy to the Medical Colleg e, Calcutta, whose accurateknowledge ofthe m edical Shastras is combin ed with an ex

tensive kn owledg e ofthe sciences ofEurope .

To the g en eral reader I beg leave to state,that I have

embodied what I con c e ived to be importan t and curiousin these most an c ien t records ofm edicin e ; and I trust that

the publication w ill be of use in removing that blindreveren ce which an imperfec t knowledge of the MedicalShastras is so liable to eng ender among theNative physicians,and which has operated most p ern iciously in retarding theadvan cemen t of kn owledge ; while at the same time it willassist in g iving the proper degree of c redit to the an c ien tH indu philosophers . An exam ination of the ir wo rks willcon vey an idea ofthe exten t and accuracy ofthe kn owledgeofthe an cien t H indus, and will en abl e the physic ian to com

pare it with that ofEurop e, amongst its an c ien t inhabitan ts,

as well as the modern s. AS utility is the p rin c ipal objec t ofthis compilation , I have added such remarks, as appeared to

me importan t in illustrating the history ofcertain diseases,such as syphilis, small- pox, &c .

The orthog raphy and pronun c iation of the Sanskrit pro

per n am es w ill be suffic ien tly correc t ifat ten tion be paid tothe following rules

l st . The con sonan ts to be pron oun ced as in Eng lish.2md. The vow els as in the Italian language . The long

vowels will be distinguished by the following marks

XX

5. is to be sounded lik'

e’

a in papa.

a ay in say.

i cc in see .

0 O in so .

11 oo in too .

I regret to find many errors in the orthography ofn am es,and in on e or two places the Opin ion s ofthe Modern s have

been statedwith those ofthe An c ien ts. These errorswould

n ot have occurred had I n ot b een obliged, on a ccoun t of ill

health, to leave India ; and had I n ot on my re turn to this

coun try, b een station ed at a distan ce from Calcutta, as the

work passed through the p ress. I feel most g rateful to

those friends who kindly, and ably, assisted me in the

emergen cy.

Dacca, 20th Sep tember 1845 .

A

C O MM ENTAR Y

ON TH!

H INDU SYSTEM OF MED IC INE .

B O O K I .

THIS BOOK WILL BE DEVOTED TO THE C ONSIDER ATION on THE OR IG IN

AND HISTORY OP MED ICINE ; OP THE RANK OP PRACTITIONER I

AND DUTIES OP TE ACHER S ; OP THE CHAR ACTER AND DUTIES or

PUPILS ; OP THE DUTIES or THE PHYSIC IAN,ATTENDANTS, AND

PATIENT AND or THE RECOMPENCE OP PRACTITIONER S.

CHAPTER I.

Orig in and History ofMedicine .

IN the sacred works of the Hindus it is recorded that the fourimmortal Vedas named R ig, Yajur, Sama, and Atharva werereceived from Bramba, one having been produced from each ofhis

four mouths. These works were the original code ofdivin e legisla

tion , and con tained all the knowledge required bymankind during the

Satya YugaT, or the first age, during which man remained pros

perous, virtuous, happy, and free from disease .

In the second age, or TretaYuga, a thi rd Ofmankind were repro

bate and disease appeared,,-life was curtailed, andmemory impaired.

From ved, to know. Besides the four Vedas, the Hindus have othersacred records ; as the Shastres, or commen taries upon the Vedas, nowthe great rule of faith . Eighteen of the most celebrated Puranas werewri tten by Vyasa, the compiler,

”an in spired Brahman

,one ofthe seven

immortal beings Of the regal race of Purfi. He was aided by othercelebratedPandits such as Paila,Vaisam Payana, Jaymini, and Sfimantfi .

Be sides these, the Hindus have numerous other commentators of theirsacred works.

TFrom Satya, truth and Yug a, age .

A

2

In the third age, orDwapara Yuga, halfof the human race weredepraved and during the Kali Yuga, the presen t age, the corruptionof mankind was such as to cause a still farther curtailment oflife,and embittered it by numerous diseases.

Bramba, however, had such compassion on man’

s weakn ess and

suffering, that, he produced a second class Of sacred books calledUpavédas

*one Of whi ch named Ayur-veda, which was in tend

ed to teach the proper mann er Of living in this world, by pre

v en ting and curing diseases in the presen t state and whil e theindi vidual thus enjoyed health he may perform the various purposes

Ofthi s world, and thereby ensure hi s happin ess and prosperity inanother state .

O ther Shastres say that this Ayur-veda was Obtain ed from Siva.

It is the sacredmedi cal record of the Hindus and is ofthe highest

antiquity, and authority. Thi s work is said to have con sisted of

one thousand section s, Of a hundred stan zas each, or a lack Of

verses ( slokas) . Bramba, pitying the weakn ess and suffering of

mankind, and the impossibility of their learning so large a work,ab ridged it, and divided it in to eight parts ( tantra) . Little Of

the original work has escaped the destructive ravages of time .Fragmen ts only have been preserved, in the works of commen

tators but, as all their information on the scienc e was derived from

what was considered the full and true accoun t of every branch of

the healing art, we are enabled, through theirworks, to judge Of the

arrangemen t Ofthe great original these di vision s are as follows

l st.—Salya, Surgery, included the mode’

Of removing external

substances acc iden tly in troduced into the body, as grass, wood,ston es, iron , earth, bon es, hair, and nails. Pus, which has not been

evacuated, and also the mean s ofremoving the dead child from its

mother ofhealing wounds inflicted by sharp instrum en ts, as kn ives

Of applying bandages, and using surgical instrumen ts, in the dif

ferent operation s Ofapplying escharotics and fire and of the treat

men t ofdifferen t kinds of inflammation , absc esses, and other sur

gical diseases.

2nd.—Sdldkya, includes the description andthe treatmen t Ofexter

nal and organic diseases of the eyes, ears, mouth,nose, and oth er

di seases which are situated above the clavicles.

These two divisions constitute the surgi cal diseases ofmodern

schools.

Joined to , or appended to . A kind Of supplementary Vida, said tob e derived immediately from the Vedas. There are four of these, thefirst is cal led Ayur-veda ; Ayus, signifying the period of living ; and ved,to know.

3

3rd.—Kdyachikitsd. That is describes the di seases which affect

the whole body as fevers, dysen tery ( otesara),hematemisis (raktapeta) , con sumption ( sosha) , man ia (numada) , epil esy (apasnara) ,Leprosy (kusta) , diabetes, (bamutra) , gonorrhma (maha) , and other

di seases Of the same kind.

Thi s may be con sidered as con stituting the practice ofPhysic .

4t/z. —Bl mtavidya , or the mean s ofrestoring the deranged faculties

ofthe mind, supposed to be produced by demoni acal possession s

as by the anger ofthe God’

s (D evtas) , devils ( asurs) , or anotherkind ofdevils (gandarba ) , demigods or devils ( Jakslza ) , gian ts

resembling devils spirits Of deadmen (p etrigrilza ) , and

other kinds Ofdevils (p ilzoclzas) .These various demigods, when en raged, were supposed to en ter

into the person , and produce the various diseases ofthe mind which

could on ly be removed by prayers,medicin es, ablutions, and Offerings

to the offended deity.

5 t/z.—Kaumdrablzritya , comprised the treatmen t ofInfan ts,the

effects Ofbad milk and improper di et the nature ofinfan t diseases,including those produced by the displeasure Of c ertain demigods

( G mlm) In thi s division also was included the treatmen t of

wet-nurses when their milk was bad.

6 th.—Agada tan tm . In thi s di vi sion the admin istration ofan tidotes

for poisons was considered as for preven ting the effects and di seasesproduced by min eral, vegetable, and animal poisons as the bitesofdangerous serpen ts, insects, 8 m.

7 th.—R asdyanatan tra treated ofthose medi cin es whi ch cure dis

eases in gen eral, and restore youth, beauty, and happin ess. Thi s division embraced chemistry, Or more properly alchemy as the chi ef

end Of the chemical combinations described in it are mostly metal

lurgic, and the in ten tion was to di scover the un iversal medicin e,the panacea that would render health perman en t and life perpetual .Such a medi c in e was supposed to preserve the en ergies of youth,strengthen memory, lengthen life, and preven t as well as curedi seases.

8th. Vdjikarana -tan tm . Thi s di vision made known the bestmeans of increasing the human race, by poin ting ou t the mode bywhi ch ton e was given to the weaken ed organs Of gen eration, whenthe sensibili ty ofthese parts became dim in ished or deranged.

These remarks, on the division ofthi s most ancien t work, as given

Many ofthe diseases ofchildren are still supposed to be producedby the entrance of devils, into the child’

s body ; which are expelled byparticular prayers Offered up to Panchanana ( Siva )

A 2

4

in Susruta, 8m ,are the only parts which have come down to us.

They afford the most incon testable evidence ofthe HinduMedical

writing s having be en the result of Observation and experience ;

although the authors assig ned a

’

divin e origin to them,in order to

increase the resp ect paid to the books , and t o the mselves. Theythus seem to have arrang ed the diseases according

t o the frequency

of the assistance required from the art, and in the order in which

the knowledg e ofmedicin e nat urally advanced.

The sacred Agar Veda con tained also a description of the

structure ofthe human body obtained from dissect ion an ac count

ofthe causes and diseases to which it is subj ec t, reduced to a syste

ma tic form ; the enumeration of many useful remedies ; and the

precepts for preserving health, and curing diseases.

In some of the shastres (Gharaka, Susruta) it is stated that Bram

ha first inst ruct ed Dale/tea the Prajap a ti , the father ofDarya, in

the Ayafr Veda, as he was an ocean of wisdom. He wrote a

book named the Cii i/zitsa-Dars/iana, and by him it was commun i

cated to the two Aaiiwi ’as, or Offspring of the Sun ( Surja) . Others

say tha t Bramha gave the Agar Veda to Sarja, who like the Phoebus

ofthe Greeks, was supposed to be the fountain ofmedical knowledg e

among the Hindus . The Ashwins became the medical attendants

of the Gods, wrote works on medic in e named C7i ikitsa -ra tna tantra,

and the Bram/wgya . By their remarka ble cures, the Asliwina he

came very celebrated. When the fifth head ofBramba was cut off

by Bayraba, it wasjohred again by them,so great was their know

ledg e of Surgery. They also cured immediately the wounds in

th e battle between the Gods and g iants ( asara ) . Indra

had another opportunity of judgi ng oftheir knowledge by their

curing his paralytic arm. Many other remarkable cures were ao

complished by the two Ashwins . On witnessing these effec ts Indrabecame desirous of exa min ing the Ayar-oeda, and he was taughtby the Ashwins.

Some time after this,mankind, in consequence oftheir wickedn ess,became divided into sec ts, ignorant, restless, unhappy, and afflicted

w ith numerous painful, and dangerous diseases and as health is theorigin of desire, virtue , holiness, riches, and external happiness, sodisease diminishes strength, energy, faith, knowledge, holiness, andlength of l ife . It also debilitates the senses

, and defiles and

destroys the soul.The sacred Sages (Munis) were grieved at a spectacle so melan

choly, and, in order to search for a remedy, Bkaradwaja , Atreya ,

with numerous sages, met in the Hima leya Mountains.

According to Charaka their names were as follows

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

6

The understandings ofthese sages being opened, by the instruc a

tion they received, and they distinguished the peculiarities of di s:

eases, the qualities of medic in es, and gain ed much distinction bythe cures they performed. They are said to have lived in healthto a very old age . These sages wrote works called by their ownnames, as Agn ibesatan tm , Bilela tan tm ,

Ja tukarnasanfiim, Pur

asa’

zm sanfii ta, Haritascm/zi ta and Kskyarap am’

tan tm .

These works were read before the assembly ofthe sages (R ishis) ,who were so much pleased with their arrangemen t, and the instruotion conveyed, that with a noise whi ch reached to Heaven theyresounded the praises of the authors. Agn ibesa was de

clared to have produced the best practical work,and after it was

corrected by Charaka it received his name. He therefore becamethe instructor ofpractition ers upon earth, as the i ap a ti were inHeaven ; and thi s is the most ancient and the most celebratedHinduMedi cal work.

As it is arranged in the form of dialogues between the master

and his pupils, the plan i s desultory for although it follows

the division in to eight parts ofthe Ayur Véda, the subj ects dis

cussed seem naturally to have arisen at the conferences, between

the master and students. Thus,the 1 st division contains the

Materia Medica, the arrangemen t, and the uses ofMedi cin es, the

rank ofpractition ers, the origin ofmedicin e, 8 m.

The following may be offered as an example ofthe mann er in

whi ch philosophical subj ects are treated in one ofthe chapters of

Gharaka. They are the questions asked by the pupil Agn ibesa, which were answered by Atreyu their teacher. What

is the soul ? How is it produced ? What is the cause oftheformation of the body ? Is the soul ignoran t or wise ? Is it

eternal or destructable ? What are the temperam ents ? What

are the diseases ? What are the proofs of the existance of the

soul ? Why do some pundits say that the soul is inert, independen t, represses the passion s (bhassi) , omn ipresen t, and omn ipo

ten t ? Why do they call the soul ketm g an, or emanation of

the deity ? Why is it call ed witn ess of the actions of the body

( Sdki) If in ert, why do we see its action s ? Ifindependent ,

why does it enter the body ? When a represser of the pas

sions (bhassi), why is it always desirous of enjoying the passions, andgreaving over our misfortun es ? If the soul is omnipresen t; whydoes it n ot feel the

‘

pains ofothers Ifomni scl ent why do we not see

it in moun tain s, and hills, and other thi ngs ? Does the soul exist

before or after the formation of the body ? If the soul is the

science or witness, has it any other judge ? How does it support

the pain s of disease Do practition ers employmeans to preventdisease, to cure them when presen t, and what is the treat

men t ? What is the cause of pain in di sease, and where is itsituated ? How many kinds ofpain s are there ? How are the painsremovedThe work ofGharaka is ofthe highest rank but from the author’s

wan t of exact anatomical and pathological knowledge, hismann er of

treating the subj ect, and arrangemen t ofdi seases it is often obscure,although hi s descriptions may be accurate . In thi s work simple me

di cines are described, aswell as their combinations. These remedies

in creased in number, and became more extravag an t in their combi

nations, in the theraputical departmen t ofmore modern works.

In other works ofauthority, it is stated that when the Vedas werelost in the deluge theywere recovered by the great serpen t Anan taupon the thousand head ofwhi ch the world rests; At the churn ing

ofthe ocean by the gods (Bae tas), and demons (Asuras) , the waterofthe ocean was converted in to milk, and then in to butter

,from

which precious gifts (mmas) were derived. Among these was

Dhanwan tari, the physician , or holy sage, the possessor ofthe water

oflife (Amm'

mT) drank by the immortals.

Dhanwantari was instructed in the Ayur Véda by Indra, andpractised medicin e with great success in Heaven

,and becam e cele

brated there : But witn essing the ignoran ce and misery ofmankin d,and the frequency and fatali ty of the diseases which afflicted them

,

he descended upon earth to cure their maladies, and to instruct

them in the means ofpreven ting, as well as ofcuring diseases. He

b ecam e king ofKasi, or Benares

,and acqui red much celebrity by

the cures which he performed. Thedi vin e sages,aware ofhis great

knowledge, and wi tn essing the misery of mankind in consequenceoftheir ignorance, resolved to petition Dhanwan tari to assist them .

With this in ten tion Oup udhnuba , Baitum na,Aurablzm , Powh

kalaba ta, Karabim'

a, Goup uraa, R ukeeta

,Susruta

, were selected

to visit D evadasa or Dhanwan tari, king ofKasi, formerly the

practition er ofHeaven . On their arrival at Benares, they foundthat Dhanwantari had retired to the Jungles. They followed him to

hi s retiremen t, and as they approached him aftermutual salutations,they delivered the following address Deign Sovereign Ruler,to bestow upon us the power of preventing and curing the manydiseases under whi ch mankind is sufi

’

ering,—affecting their bodi es

( Sarira ) , tormenting their minds (Manah) , and which, with the nu

A devta also Vishnu ; which is to say the end, endless, eternal,boundle ss.

1‘ Amrita, that which gives life

8

merous accidental (agun ta) and natural diseases dis

tress them so much that they seem to be without friends. Their

seeming destitution grieves us much, and we pray that you will

bestow upon us a work to instruct us in the cause, the nature,and the cure of di seases for retain ing health, and for promotingthe welfare ofthe soul in another world Like scholars, we come

to receive this information from you. Dhanwantari answered,“ Your wishes shall be gran ted.

”The sages then informed their

preceptor that as they were all ofthe same sect ; one of them should

ask the questions, and write down the answers required, and theothers observe the an swers.

Susruta, son of Visdmz’

tra, a contemporary ofRama, was chosen

to be the person to be instructed in Medicin e . Dhanwantari sa1d

that Ayur-véda is for the cure of diseases, and for the preservation

ofhealth. But it is too voluminous to be recollected by the presen t

degen erate race of mankind he therefore recommended Sursuta toabridge it, and to arrange it mto parts, so as to be easily understoodby every one who perused it with attention .

The work which Susruta prepared is still preserved, and afterGharaka, it is the oldest book in Medicin e which theHindus possess,and is still ofhigh authority. The mann er in whi ch it was producedis as followsDhanwantari asked his pupils, on what shall I first lecture ? They

answered, on Surgery ; because formerly there were no diseasesamong the gods, and wounds were the first injuries which requi redt reatmen t . Besides the practice ofsurgery is more respected

, as

affording immediate relief, and is conn ected with the practice of

medicin e although the latter has no conn exion with surgery.This

was agreed to ; and we find the explanation ofthe eight parts ofAyur-véda, in six Books ofSusruta

, as followsl st.—Surgery (Sutra Sthana) , in which is considered the or1g1n

of medic in e the rules for teaching, the duty of practition ers,

the selec tion and uses of in strumen ts and medicin es, the influence

of the weather on health, and the practice to be followed aftersurgical operation s. Then follows the description of the dis

eases of the humours and surgical diseases ; the restoration ofdefective ears and noses and the removal of extran eous substances whi ch have en tered the body the differen t stages ofinflammation with their treatmen t

, differen t forms of wounds

and ulcers, and the regimen of patien ts labouring under surgicaldiseases. The description of good and bad diet ; of prognosis ; thekind ofmessengers to be employed by the sick and of diseases,

From Su, well and Sruta, Shastres.

9

produc ed by the deranged action s of the senses, and of in curable

diseases. Then follows the preparations requi red for accompanying

a rajah in war, the duty of the pract ition ers, the differen ce of cli

mates, the differen t c lasses ofmedicin es according to their sensib lequalities, a description ofthe fluids, and ofthe different preparation s,and articles of food. These subj ects are treated of in forty-sixchapters.

2nd.—Nosology (Nidana Sthana) the description and Diagnosis

ofdiseases produced by vitiated humours, or derangemen ts of blood,bile

, wind, and phlegm . The symptoms and causes of Rheumaticdiseases, ofpiles, ston e, fistulo-in -ano, leprosy, diabetes, gonorrhoea,and asc itis the symptoms of unnatural presen tations in midwifery,large in ternal absc esses, erysipelas, scrofula, hydrocele, ven erealdiseases, and diseases of the mouth. These subj ects are consideredin sixteen chapters.

3rd.—Anatomy (Sarira Sthana) , or structure of the body. The

description of the soul, and the elemen tary parts ofthe body ; ofpuberty ofconception ofthe growth of the differen t parts ofthebody of bleeding of the treatmen t ofpregnancy, and of infan ts.

This di vision has ten chapters.

4th.—Therapia (Chikitsa Sthana) , in which the exhibition of

medic in es, the hi story of infiammation s, the treatmen t offractures,rheumatic di seases, piles, ston e, fistula-in -ano

,leprosy, diabetes,

and dropsy are given the manner ofextracting the child in unusualpositions, the remedies for restoring health and strength, and for

prolonging life the means ofpreven ting diseases ; the use ofclystersand of errhin es, and the use of the smoke of differen t substances.

These are considered in forty differen t chapters.

5 th.—Toxocology (Kalpa Sthana) . The mean s ofdistinguishing

poison ed food, and description s ofdifferen t min eral, vegetable, and

an imal poisons, with their an tidotes is given under this head. This

division is treated of in eight chapters.

6 tk.—The supplemen tary section (Locales Uttara Sthana) in clu

des various local diseases ; as those of the eye, nose, ears, and head,w ith their treatmen t the symptoms and treatmen t offever, and its

varieties dysen tery con sumption ; gulma diseases ofthe heartjaundice discharges of blood, and fain ting . This is fo llowed bythe treatmen t of in toxication , of cough, hiccough, asthma

,hoarse

n ess of voice, worms, sterterous vomiting, cholera, dispepsia, and

disuria. It also treats ofmadn ess, epilepsy, apoplexy, the differen ttastes of substan c es with their effec ts the means of retain ing health

,

and the different opin ions of practition ers regarding the humours.

These subj ects are treated in sixty-six chapters.

B

10

It thus appears that the ancien t commen tators on the ayur-veda

did not allow the prejudices that now exist against touching the

dead Body, to in terfere with that importan t and n ecessary branch

ofknowledge, whi ch can alon e be acquired by dissec tion .

The Gharaka and Susruta are the ground work of the morerecen t medical systems ; in which the ir authors have un iformlyadhered to the classification , and gen eral details ofthe originals.

But these imitators being ignoran t of anatomy, a nd the usual

causes of diseases, are still more defective in their descriptionsparticularly when they did not follow the more anc ien t writers.

It was by mean s of the works ofGharaka and Susruta that all

the sages (Mun is) are alleged to have been instructed l n medic in e

and the variety ofopin ion to be found in the treatises they after

wards wrote, was in consequence of the shortn ess of their com

pilations, their poetical form, and the great exten t and difficulty of

the subj ect . These Sages are said to have practised medic ine as

a means ofaccomplishing much good to mankind and they became

famous by the number of lives which they saved. Those who

were taught by Gharaka, became Physicians and the followers of

Susruta, Surgeon s.

Gharaka is superior to Susruta in the accuracy ofhis descrip

ti ons, in the classification of di seases, and in the plan of treatmen t

whi ch he recommends. Whi le Susruta is prin c ipally celebrated

for his anatomical descriptions, and judic ious princ iples of surg erywhich his work con tain s.

To such authorities the Hindu practition ers invariably looked, tothe en tire n eglect of that careful and con tinued examination ofthe

progress ofdiseases, by which alon e their true nature, and succ essful treatmen t are discovered. The works of these commen tators

embraced the whole syst em,and the erron eous prin c iples upon

whi ch their theoretical speculation s were built is not detected, inc on sequen ce of the con trac ted space occupied l n their descrip

tions, which discard m inute observation s on disease,or spec ific

details regarding the opin ions ofothers.

The two followingMedical works deserve to be men tion ed here .

Babha ta compiled a treatise called Ostongo-reedoya . Thi s was

princ ipally taken from Gharaka and Susruta. The mann er oftreating the subj ect, and the arrangemen ts are much the sam e . It iswritten in a clear style, and the author explains passages whichwere not before understood, in the original works.

About three hundred years ago, a compilation was made from all

the most c elebrated medical works, and called Baéopm kasa . The

author collected all that was most precious from the works left by

1 1

o ther sag es, and named the work after himself. By its clearness,and excellen t arrangemen t thi s work explain s the

‘

difficul ties of

the more anc ien t medical Shastres, forgotten , and corrupted.This

work was compiled for the use ofprac tition ers, and is prefered bythem

,as it gi ves an admirable accoun t ofall the practical parts of

the Hindu medical sc ience .

CHAPTER II .

R ank ofPractitioners, and Duties of Teachers.

IN the Puranas it is stated that a young woman of the Va isya

c aste,called Ambd, was serving as a men ial to Ga laba

,the Mun i .

He was much pleased with her, andwhil e blessing her, informed her,that she would have a beautiful and respected son . She told this toher paren ts, who asked the sage how that could be, as she was not

married and that the birth ofa chi ld would bring disgrace uponthe whole fami ly. The sage told them that it would be so that

the chi ld should be called Vi rablzadra ( very fortunate) , that hewould be much respected, and his profession would be that ofme

dic ine . This child was the first of the Vaidya, or Medical caste .His ' thirteen sons we re taught by the sacred Sages the works

they hadwritten , and they became most learn ed pundits,and skilful

physician s. It is from their descendan ts that the Hindu physic iansare derived, and now form the caste ofVaidhyas. These physic ianshave free acc ess to various Shastres, or commen taries on the sacredwritings. Brahman s learn the medical Shastres for their advan tageKhetriyas for the ben efit of their health

, and Vaidyas for theirsubsistence . The two first castes are n ot allowed to receive anypecun iary recompense for their assistanc e to the sick.

O ther castes may learn the medical works when they are hon est,learn ed, and men of good descen t . Even those of the degradedSudra caste may be taught the Ayur-veda, under such c ircumstanc es.

Teacher The feet ofthe Teacher is the origin ofall happin ess,and, like a light in a dark room,

he will illuminate the con tracted,and dark mind of the pupil ; or

, as quicksilver, properly mixedwith other m etals and exposed to heat, will be changed to gold,so will the words that come out ofhis mouth be pure and valuable .”

Or one who understands trays ( i . e . ) the Ayur-ved, or MedicalShastre .

1 2

In the anc ien t works 1 t is stated that the teachers ofthe medi calprofession were R ishis, or Asc etic sages. They con veyed theirinstruction in the form of lectures, which were delivered in open

public plac es, at which many studen ts attended. These sages tra

velled about with their pupi ls, curing diseases, so as to afford them

the means ofwitn essing the effects ofdifferen t mann ers and customs,

and differen t medic in es, climates, and forms ofdiseases. The pu

pils kept notes of these lectures, and many ofthese compil ation s are

still in existen ce .At presen t the Teacher instructs three or four pupils, in many

cases hi s relations, who are main tain ed at their own houses. In

other cases the Teacher supports them . They continue five or six

years reading the Shastres, seeing the preparation ofmedic in es, and

their employm en t,for the cure ofthe sick. The teacher in many

cases receives no emolum en t from his pupils, being con ten t wi th

the honor and merit ofbestowing kn owledge . This merit is consi

dered to be of the very first order ; procuring for him renown in

this world, and the highest ben efits in a future state. In most cases

however, an allowance is made to such Teachers by their rich n eigh

bours.

A good teacher is like rain falling upon the germ inating seed, andshould “ possess the following qualifications —A perfect knowledgeof the Shastres, join ed to extensive practical knowledge and skill.He should be kind and humble to every one ; he should have no defectsofbody, and should always be ready to expose the good, rather thanthe bad qualities ofothers he shouldbe clean and n eat in his person ,and possess and exhibit to his pupils all kinds ofmedi c in es and in strumen ts. He should always be in creasing his knowledge ofbooks,and should n either be angry by the improprieties of others, norfatigued by their importuni ties. He should be kind and considerateto hi s pupils and be able to explain the most complicated statemen ts,in the simplest, and most perspicuous language . Such a person as

this, who in structs a pupil, when of good paren tage, is like theseasonable cloud and rain upon the corn field, which quickly ma

tures its valuable produce .Such a man is not therefore aged, though hi s hair is gray. The

Gods con sidered as aged, the person who, though young in years,

has read, and understands the vedas. As an elephan t made ofwood,or an an telope made of earth, such is an un learn ed Brahman who

has n othi ng but the n ame .” (Menu, p . 44 . and 1 56

Should a Teacher give improper in struc tions to his pupil, or peruse wi th him bad books, he will bear the weight ofthe sin

'

ofhis

pupil, and the seeds whi ch he sows will not produc e good frui ts.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 4

Rajah, and after death the Teacher will go to the heaven ofIndra

( Indraloka) .

The successful studen t should be active in hi s duties, and no t

fatigued by hi s studies, he_

should possess gravity, a good memory,acute sen ses, and con siderable acquirem en ts.

Without such qualification s and indi cations the youth should

be rej ec ted.

These studen ts of medi c ine en ter their names as the pupils of

some celebrated Brahman or Vaidya, who teach the sc ienc e of

medic in e . When the studen t has learn ed on e branch ofthe medical

art, or that followed by hi s Father, he is not allowed to change it

for another branch, al though he can change hi s profession at

any time.A fortunate day is to be selected for the pupil to commenc e read

ing the Shastres. On that occasion he is to be clean in his person,and the place in whi ch he is to study should be puri fied. A raisedpart of the room,

a cubit square, is to be clean ed with cows’dung

and strew'

ed wi th Kusa grass, after which fire is to be placed upon it,

with several kinds ofsacred wood, upon which ghee is to be poured,while prayers (man tras) are repeated. The pupil whi le beingin itiated should stand n ear the fire with his face towards the east .The master (Guru) and other Brahmans are then to pray over some

dried rice, and the Guru should sprinkle water over the assembly.

He is then to plac e a Brahman on his right hand, over which he

prays as he throws a mixture ofcurdled milk, hon ey, and ghee overthe sacred fire. The scholar does the same, and his lesson begin s.

The Guru declares that he must henc eforth discard lust, anger,covetousn ess, ignoranc e, lazin ess, van ity, pride, envy, revenge, cruelty, lying, and evil action s. He must always

'

be engaged in thesearch after truth, and in the performance ofgood ac tions he mustbe clean in hi s person , wear a humble and peculiar kind ofcc

cured c lothes and his beard and nails should not be cut duringthe period ofhis study.

He must always respect his teacher and paren ts put the dustof their feet upon hi s head, and obey them in every thi ng. He isthus addressed by the guruWhen I say youmay eat, drink, sleep, and rise from bed, you

must immediately obey. Ifthe scholar does not perform all this hesin s, hi s understanding will dimin ish, a nd hi s glorywill be quenched.

”

Whatever I say you must beli eve, and carefully follow my

instruction s. You must"

be careful to ac t so as, to please me,and

if I do not acknowledge your good actions, I shall sin and myknowledge will be barren .

”

5

In the treatment of the diseases ofBrahmans, Gurus, and the

poor and helpless or people who come from a distance, you mustbe as careful as you would be ofyour own relation s, by which you

wi ll make more friends, acquire virtue, wealth, and a good name .You must not be di spleased at my treating you as a son

, a

servan t, or a beggar, you must harbour no bad thoughts, you

must be moderate in the indulgence ofyour appetites, and you mustbe con tented with a small recompence . By

'

n ight and by day youranxious desire should always be to con sider how you are to curethe sick under your care . You will avoid bad company, and

n either gi ve medicin es to a culprit who has been condemn ed by a

Rajah, to a woman whose husband and guardian s are absen t, norrec eive any thing but food fi

'

om a Wife, without the consen t ofthe

husband. You must avoid en tering a house, as a medical man ,

wi thout an invitation , you must walk slowly, without gazing, andobserve deliberately, but you must only observe the patien t

, and the

symptoms of hi s di sease and you must not express the period ofa

fatal di sease . You must n ot vaun t your own kn owledge, for althoughthe learn ed may be pleased, the ignoran t will be angry at the ex

hibition of learn ing in such a situation . Aft er visitin g the sick,should the disease be compli cated, you must detail the symptoms

,

and consult other physic ians as to their nature and treatmen t .As the shastres con tain the prec epts ofnumerous prophets and

great physicians with their description s of diseases reduc ed to a

proper order, you must study them with care by which the stupidand illiterate pupil will be instructed in hi s duties, and the intelligen t and industrious in the mann er in whi ch that knowledge is to beimproved and extended.

The Shastres are not to be read on un lucky (astam i) days, orwhen the sun is obscured by clouds on the two first days of a n ew

moon ; when it thunders ; at un seasonable times ; at the morn ingdawn , or even ing twilight . The studen t must not study on holidays,or the day on which he meets a corpse, on which the Governor oftheprovince is sick, when fighting occurs, or when war approaches.

”

The Brahman s were first called Brahmanha, and when they havereceived the string they are called Dwija, or twic e born in like man

n er, the Physicians are call ed Ambashta, and Vaidya (fai

rer) fi'

om

Veda (331) when they have acqui red the ayur-veda, or medical shastres. Besides the Ayur-veda, the physician requi res to kn ow differen tother sc ien c es. But ifa Vaidya does not know or does not followthe precepts of the Shastres, he will be like a thi ef; and such a

person exercising medicine, will commit as great a sin

, as beating a

Brahman .

1 6

The preceptor, during the time he teaches his pupil, shouldwear

two piec es ofcloth, hi s mind should be calm,and he should be regu

lar in his attendance .In teachi ng, the progress ofthe studen t must be at first slow,

com

mencing with the nomen clature ofthe profession, and then acquiring

single subj ects, and lastly the whole system . He must first read slowlyand distinctly, without much effort, and avoid a mon oton ous in tonation

,or acquiring a dislike to the subj ect . The in struction should be

given without pain to the instructed and sweet gen tle speech mustbe used by a Preceptor who cherishes virtue . W hen at hi s lesson ,care must be taken n ot to allow any one to pass between the pupil

and Teacher, as it will in terrupt the supposed passage of goodqualities from the latter to the former.Ifthe Studen t seek for long life, he should eat with hi s face to the

east iffor exal ted fame, to the south iffor prosperity, to the westif for truth and its reward, to the n orth. (Menu p . 2 8 ch 2 52 )When a studen t has studied m edi c in e, and has understood

,

examin ed, and remembered the symptoms of disease with the

actions ofmedic ines and has acted for himself,he is to receive the

authority ofthe Rajah to practice medicin e .

CHAPTER IV.

Duties of the Physician, of his a ttendan ts, and of the Pa tien t.

There are four circumstances required in the cure ofa disease,

a physician a disease that is known a reasonable patien t and

medi c in es, in strum en ts, and attendan ts. Each of these subjects wi llbe con sidered in thi s order.D uties of a Physician . The duty ofa Physic ian relates to his

person , character, acquiremen ts, and Observan ces.

Person . The Physic ian should possess a healthy body he shouldkeep hi s nails and beard short ; hi s body pure, hi s c lothes clean

,

and wear shoes, and a small turban . He should carry an umbrella,

and stick in hi s hand.

Should the Practitioner not know his duty, the cure ofthe diseasewill be tedious and imperfect it will also be so when the pulsecannot be .felt at the root of the n eck, and when the senses are

affec ted. In such cases the Practition er should always inform the

relation s and friends of the sick person of the state in which heis in

,before prescribing .

Character . The successful studen t, after leaving his preceptor,should be c leanly in his person , love and obey his Teacher, and should

be active and studious to find out the proper mean ing ofthe difficul t

passages helhad learned by heart . Shoul d these passages not be nuderstood, or should the studen t kn ow the Shastres

, and not practicethe profession , he will be like an ass carrying a heavy load offragran twood wi thout discovering, and enjoying the fragranc e ofhis burthen .

The Physician should possess a goodmemory, and be always amiable, cheerful, and collected. His language should be mild

, candidand encouraging, rather like that ofa friend than an acquain tance,and he should be always ready to assist the sick. His heart should bepure and charitable, and he should carefully follow the in structionsof his Guru, and of hi s predecessors. Such a physician should

possess a character for strict veracity, of calm temper, and ofthe

greatest sobriety, and chastity. He should be a man ofsense andbenevolen ce, and his constan t study should be how he is to do good.

As a person may be afraid of his father and mother, friends, and

guru, but not ofhis Physic ian so the physic ian should be more kindand considerate to the sick than a father

, a mother, a friend, or a guru.

To these qualities should be added,that of affection for learn ed

friends, the constan t habit ofvisiting the sick, and seeing them treatedby experienced persons. Without such a combination ofqualities,knowledge will retard rather than advan ce his progress. He shouldknow the causes and varieties of di sease, and the means of pre

ven ting and curing them,and have the reputation ofaccomplish

ing cures quickly. He should study to remove curable diseases, butmust avoid treating healthy persons. A good physician will con tinueto visit hi s patien ts diligen tly, examin e them carefully, and be notfearful, but give medic in es always when the patien t can live : But

ifa physician attempts to treat an incurable di sease, it will dimini sh

hi s reputation , friends, and riches.

Acquiremen ts. A good Physician should be acquainted with his

profession , but so various are the qualifications that the combination

is rarely to be found, even in heaven . He should be acquainted,l st.—With the in troductory remarks of Sutrusthcina, which

considers the relation of customs and habits, and the knowledge

of those duties whi ch the Shastres regulate, with reference to

disease .

2nd. Shrira , or structure ofthe body.

3rd. which includes the 1nvas1on (Purbura ) and

symptoms (Rup a ) ofdiseases.

4th.—Chihitsa and up asciya concerning the regimen and the

Medicines which cure diseases.

6

1 8

5 ih. Upadraha, including all unusual symptoms whi ch deve s

lope themselves in the course ofdisease as delirium, thirst, 8 m.

6 th.—Kolp a, con cern ing poisons.

To such acquirements, the physic ian must have practised hi s pro

fession as well as studied the shastres, which were compassionatelyrevealed by the Gods. Without such a knowledge ofbooks he will be

confused, like a soldier afraid in the tim e ofaction ,will be a great sin

ner, and should be capitallypun ished by the rajah . On the other hand,a wan t ofpractical knowledge will impede his advan cemen t, and hissen ses wi ll be bewildered, when called on to treat acute di seases.

Such a physic ian will not be esteemed by the great, as he cannot pratic e with success when only in structed in halfhi s duty. Such a per

son is the murderer ofhis spec ies, and the medi c in e prescribed byhim

may be compared to poison , or lightn ing—such ignoranc e preven ts

all the good effects ofremedi es. As the two wheels ofa chariot,or the two wings of a bird, assist in their progress, so will theknowledge of the Shastres, and of practic e, lead the physician to

proceed wi th safety and success in the treatmen t of the diseased

but, should the physician wan t either ofthese essen tial qualifications,his progress will be impeded, as one wing or one wheel will impede

the progress ofthe bird, or the chariot . It is the combination of

both these qualification s which is required when medic in e be

comes like the water of immortali ty (Amrita ) . Such a physic ian , ifhe is to acqui re celebrity, must still daily endeavour to improve

his mind by an atten tive perusal of scien tific books. If such a.

physician does not gain mon ey after he has been taught the Shastres

it is his own fault .

When '

such a Vydya is spoken to by a patien t in a peevish or

hasty mann er, he will remain calm,mild

, and courageous and

cherish a cheerful hope of being able to save the sufferer’s life.

The practition er should avoid frivolous or improper language, particularly with females he should not sit down upon the same bed

,

and the only presen ts he should receive from them is food. He

should be frank, commun icative, impartial, and liberal, yet everrigid in exacting an adherence to whatever regimen or rul es he maythink it n ecessary to enjoin . Should death occur under the care ofsuch an earthly sain t

,it can on ly be considered as his in evitable

fate, and not the con sequence ofpresumptuous ignorance .The presence of a physic ian for the cure of a disease ismost

importan t indeed, as indispensable as a pilot is to a boat, as a

coachman in guiding a chariot, or as a gen eral to an army. If a

physician is not con sulted when a person is ill, he will soon die, as

a lamp exposed to wind is con tinually liable to be extinguished.

1 9

Some severe diseases are cured immediately, by a good physicianbut simple diseases are increased much by the want ofearly assis

tance . At the commencement, like a young plan t, it‘ is readi ly

rooted up, but as it expands and grows in strength the '

difiiculties are

much increased. Even for a slight di sease the assistanc e ofa pract ition er will be ofmuch use ; for as a large man at the bottom ofa

pit may ge t out by long con tinued exertion, hi s extrication Wi ll bemuch fac ilitated by the assistance ofa friendly hand. As in war

, a

sword may defendmany, so in the hand of.an en emy it will destroy.

In like mann er the shastres and water may become the cause of

destruction in stead ofben efit to mankind.

Some practitioners have many instrumen ts and medicin e whichthey do not kn ow how to use, such are calculated to deceive and

by their arrogan t mann ers, and being without a knowledg e ofthe

shastres,are en emies to mankind, and are called Ckfiadmacieara .

Those who possess the favourable qualities ofPhysic ian s, wi thout then ecessary kn owledge, are called Pratz

'

rdp aka and those who knowthe medi cal shastres, and are well acquain ted wi th the causes

,

symptoms, and means ofcuring disease, and their preven tion

, wi ll

be fit to be the physic ian to a Rajah . Such persons are called SidlaiS tidhaka.

The first two are sometimes allowed to practice by the n eglectof the Rajah, and they may be known by their van ity, and ill willtowards the good physic ian . Such persons flatter the patien tsfriends, are di ligen t, take reduced fees, are hesitating and doubtfulin performing difficul t operation s, and pretend that their bad successis caused by the bad attendan ts, 8 m. such persons avoid the so

c iety oflearn ed persons as they would a jungle .Still some patien ts will be saved when under the care of such a

physic ian , as a worm in destroying one of the sac red shastres will

sometim es leave in its depredations the rude represen tation s of

some ofthe sacred letters. A bad physician may cure one patien t,

by which he endeavours to establish his fame, without con sidering

the thousands he has killed such a person is like a boat in a storm

Without a pilot, or a blind man in the performance ofany work, and

is to be looked upon as the angel ofdeath . Ifsuch a fellow has

hi s fancy inflamed, he is like a deadly serpent, and should be

avoided.

The Practition er who knows the value ofquicksilver, 850 . is like a

god ; on e who knows the qualities of herbs and roots is like a man

one who knows the use of the kn ife and of fire resembles a demon

(Asur) and those who know the proper prayers to be offered upin the time ofsickn ess is like a prophet .

c 2

The following characters will never be respected as Physic iansWhen the person is born in , and inhabits a village which has a bad

name, or visits the sick without b eing called. A badPhysician does

not pay respect to the Brahmans, spiri tual Teachers, ortsuperiors ; he

leaves the duties due to the memory of hi s father unfulfil led wears

bad clothes, speaks on improper subjects, and in an improper

mann er, or n either speaks nor gives medicin es. Such a person does

not pay respect t o astrologers, to the season s and times, to the

influence of the plan ets, to the opin ion offriends, or acknowledges

the power ofholy men . Such a physician will n ever be respected

and the great physic ian , Dhanwan tar i himself, possessed of such

quali ties, would not be liked or esteemed.

Should a proud physician rej ect the shastres, and the advice of

his Guru, all sorts of evils will follow him 5 and ifhe cannot repeat

the usual prayers, is ignoran t of the nature ofdisease, and takes

money, he should be puni shed by the Rajah, as a thi ef. Should a

physic ian speak disrespectfully of the shastres, or incorrectly ofthe

Ayur-c ede , or of astrology, the same puni shment shall be inflicted,on him as that for killing a Brahman .

From these observation s, it appears that the duties ofa physicianrequires the exercise of sound judgemen t, un impeachable in tegrity,profound learn ing, embracing an intimate acquain tance with manyshastres, and a constan t and extensive practice ofhis profession .

To these qualities must be join ed unremitting atten tion, a goodheart and di sposition , a kn owledge of the appearance and varietiesofdisease, and the mann er of preparing

, and exhibiting the proper

remedies.

A physic ian should not visit the en emy of a Rajah as he

should always speak the truth, avoid speaking disrespectfully of

an cestors, and ofother good, exalted, and pious persons. He is not

to walk with the wi cked, foolish, or low-born person s, or wi th thepatien ts en emy. He must avoid riding on wicked horses, elephan ts,or the like, living in empty houses, or in places where bodi es areburn t in very retired places, con tain ing wild beasts or reptiles,where people are quarrelling, espec ially with cutting in strumen ts intheir hands, or an imals armedwith horn s. He is carefully to avoidwalking behind biers con tain ing dead bodies, moving in the shadowofthe images ofthe Gods, ofcows, Brahmans, or in the smoke of

burn ing bodies, di seased persons, or great sinners. The physician

as well as other person s should n either look at the rising nor set

ting sun . He should n either inform a person that a cow is eating

what belongs to him , nor speak ill ofa Rajah. He should not walk

upon the tops of rocks, beat the water or earthwith his hands or

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

22

money will increase and ifa bad man it will dimin ish. Should theperson be at enmity With a soothsayer, he will become poor ; wi th a

physician , he will soon die ; and with a Brahman toil will be the

on ly recompence he will get for his exertions, and he will soon lose

his life .

Should the air at the time be cool, and pleasan tly scented it is

favourable but ifwith a strong wind blowing with a disagreeable

smell, the prognosis ofthe di sease should be more guarded. These

and various other indications are explainded in the Medical works,

and seem to be founded on the Hindu beliefin fatalism a system,

though suffic ien tly plausablewi th the ignoran t, is fraught wi th many

and great evils.

Useful indication s are supposed to be derived from the dreams of

the physician, as well as from those ofthe sick person and a long

list of the good and bad subj ects ofdreams are given . In gen eral,

favourable dreams consist in seeing brahmans, cows, rajahs, c lean

water, splendid houses, 8 m. and the reverse in seeing the person

cleaning himself,riding on an unclean an imal

,low caste person s,

dead acquaintances, kill ing or fighting,un clean an imals, falling down

a prec ipice, loss of eye-sight, and other impure obj ects or defects,

&c . The good and bad dreams in differen t diseases is likewise

given , which seem to be good or bad accordi ng to the greater

or less importance of the changes ofthe symptoms which theyindicate .The physic ian should first ask questions at the attendant regarding

the disease what things he has eaten , and what he has don e to produce, or to influenc e the disease. The physic ian should then markthe signs oflongiv ity in his patien t . These are long arms and fingerslarge eyes, forehead, trunk, teeth, mouth

, and hands,feet

, and

shoulders. Persons will live to an old age who have long respiraa

tion s, and a large spac e between the mamilae,the fore-legs short and

fleshy, the n eck short, and speak and act sen sibly. A person with a

large body and good voice, deep navel, vessels and join ts well formed,much hair on the body, the external ears long, the body strong,m ore particularly the head, quickly dries when wet with oil orwater,from above downwards, and the senses are good : such a person

will live long, and should be treated by the physician . The wan t ofsuch signs will indicate a short life, not exceeding 50 years and

when moderate in their mann er of living, and rich, they will not

exceed the age of 70 years. When such a person has not been diseased from his birth

,has grown fat gradually, aswell as in hi s know

ledge of the shastres, he wi ll live long. The person will live a

moderate period when the lin es on the palms ofhis,

hands, and long

23

longitudinal lin es on the back are well formed, but with large extera

nal ears, and the end ofthe nose promin en t, the person may live 70

years. When the bon es ofthe fingers and forearm are short,testi

cles pendulous, breast and back con tracted, ears short, nose pro

minen t, and gums are seen on laughing, and eyes are not steady,such a person will live 50 years. Then follows the proper proportions ofboth the large and small members, and the proportions of

the size of each part of the body for indicating the length of

the person s life.It is n ecessary to recollect that a good Brahman , and a R ajah,

will be cured ofa di sease with difficulty, as they will not alwaystake the proper remedi es, and the physician is afraid to urge hi s

in struction s strongly. The same is the case with women, children,and old people, who do not observe the proper direction s. In

like mann er,those who do not explain their complaints, who are

weak in in tellect, are poor, and avaritious who will not spend theirmon ey, or have bad tempers or di spositions, are dissipated, and are

wi thout friends, will be cured of their diseases with difficulty, asthey wi ll not strictly follow the direction s of the physicians. In

such cases the di sease may be rendered incurable .2nd. T/ze ZVa ture of flze Disease. The physician (chikitsaka

'

)should n ext mark the nature ofthe disease, the seasons of the year,and enquire from what coun try the patien t comes. He is to markwhi ch ofthe humours (dizcitu) are diseased, and how they can be cured.

There are three kinds of these dutiesl st.—To cure the diseases ofwind (vayu) , bile (pitta) , and phl egm

( kaph) whi ch occur without causing other di seases. These derangements are the usual cause of disease, and produce the change of

di sposition , and the peculiar feelings ofthe sick besides one diseasemay produc e another

, whi ch sometimes dimin ishes the symptoms

ofthe first .2nd—When a disease is presen t, how it is to be cured? and

3rd.—When a primary and secondary disease are present, and

require to be cured ?

The physician is to observe the gen eral appearance ofthe sick

person , his age, and the condition of his body, his temperamen tand strength, the state of the mind, and the food which he

has been used to. He should exam in e the symptoms of the

disease with his eyes ; consider the probable resul t ofthe disease

by his judgemen t, and its similarity with other diseases as thereis a good and a bad form of every disease . The symptoms enu

merated in the shastres, should be observed, more espec ially the

state of the pulse, of the tongue as to moisture and dryn ess, the

24

condition ofthe bowels, urine, and sleep hi s gen eral feeling, more

especially the state of the nose, head, hands, feet and abdomen .

The state of the patien t’

s appetite and in ternal fire ; the part of

the body attacked, and the state ofthe various vessels (semi) , and

the abdomen (kastha) particularly where the stomach presses upon

the food to digest it where the undigested portion is

situated (amasia) where digestion takes place (p akasaya ) ; and

where the dej ection s are retain ed (moldsaya ) n ext the bladder andpelvis. The seat ofthe blood (Jokerit, the . ) the heart (hit) and thelungs (phuspus) are to be considered and the period when the

di sease increases, and in termissions occur . The kind of caste,temper, and disposition ; the degree offear ; the state ofthe dejections ; and, in females, the state of the catamin ia

,8 m. Ifthe patien t

cannot speak, those about him should be asked the usual questions

about the disease .

The disease is n ext to be examin ed by the five active senses, and

by speech . By the touch is distinguished the feverish heat or cold

n ess ofthe surface, the dryn ess or moisture, the softn ess or hardn ess,

the size of the vessels, and the irregularities of the skin . By the

hearing, the passage ofair in deep seated abscesses, wounds and

in the in testin esi by coughing,By the signs of longivity and strength of the body, and the

changes in the colour ofthe skin, as leprosy, and various forms

ofcutan eous diseases by the state ofthe tongue and ofthe urin e

the quan tity of whi ch is to be noted, and the quality, which is

known by ants being fond of it, by the sight, and by the smell. In

l ike mann er the other secretions and discharges, as from ulcers,&c ., are to be examin ed.

By speech, the Practition er learns the time of invasion and pro

gress ofthe disease, the sex and habit ofbody the nature and de

gree of pain and the state of the appetite, the strength, and the

evacuations. Un less the disease is well explain ed, seen , and known

the practition er will not understand it, and will bemade fooli sh byhi s ignorance whereas the knowledge, and judgmen t ofthe physi

oian, like a lamp which illuminates a room, enables him to under

stand the nature ofthe diseases ofthe body.

The physician has special duties to perform to a Rajah as theydiffer from other men not in the formation of the body, but bytheir nature, which is to command and to pardon . These qualitiesare received from God and, as an exalted being, he is distinguishedby the superiority ofhis voic e and mann er, by the puren ess ofhisheart, and by the justn ess ofhi s actions. The physic ian should becareful in the time ofwar, to point out the road he is to travel of

25

his water, food, and shelter and of the food of his horses and ele

phan ts. The physic ian is to live n ear the person of the R ajah, and be

like his shadow, or his standard. Medic in es and in strumen ts shouldalways be at hand ; and he should be allowed to have free in tercourse with the sick. But the care of the physic ian should not

end here . It should extend to the water, and the food of the army,

as well as ofthe beasts ofburthen which the en emy mayendeavour

to destroy by poison*

. The good physician Will detect this, and maybe the mean s of saving the army.

3rd. Medic ines and Instrumen ts. Wh en called to a patien t, the

practition er is first to remark if there is still life, and strength, in

the sick person his age, temperamen t, and coun try, and this knowledge will modify the kindand quan tity ofm edic in e to be given . As

long as life remain s in the root ofthe throat, and the sen ses remain

perfect, the physician may give medic in es, as the person , under suchc ircum stan c es, may be cured. Even old, inveterate, and incurable diseases

,may be alleviated by a judi c ious lin e of treatment .

If, therefore, a prac tition er, after the n ec essary examination ,

knows

the disease, and that it may be cured even with difficulty, his duty is

to endeavour to allev iate the sufferings ofhis patien t . Should the

alloted period of his life upon earth have expired, he will die

n otwithstanding the best direc ted means for his recovery. It isproper, however, that much caution be used in the employmen tof medic in e in fatal diseases, as a physic ian may alleviate pain

, but

cannot gi ve life and by admin istering medicin es in such cases, with

out previously stating the danger the patien t is in to his relation s, hewill on ly bring discredit on himself, and on his profession . Takingsuch precautions, the practition er may gi ve medic in e even when thepatien t is sen seless

,w ithout any pulse, and on ly breathe s.

The m edic in es proper for the indiv idual case, and the mann er in

which it will be most proper to admin ister them, must be carefullyobserved care must also be taken that the medic in es be obtain ed

from a good soil and n eighbourhood. Those from . HimalayaMoun tain s are the best . The physician should, however, not on lykn ow the names but likewise the various qualities ofthese medic in es.

For this purpose he should pen etrate forests,and climb moun tain s, to

examin e them in their natural situation s and should n ot despise theinformation obtain ed from hun ters and shepherds, who may havehad opportun ities ofwitn essing their effects.

The Burmese are said to sprinkle the dococt ion ofsome poisonousplan ts upon the tree s, so as to de stroy the elephants belo nging to the irenemies.

26

“

.The medi c in es should be coll ected on a fortunate day, and at a

lucky hour . They sh ould be gathered by the physician himself,

with suitable prayers. Should a person ofanother caste touch or prepare the medicin es, and n ot the physic ian who prescribes, they will berendered in ert, even should a Brahmun have prepared them . Whenthe proper medic in e has been gathered and prepared in the prescribed mann er, and adm in istered at the proper tim e, the effec t will beas if Vishnu

i

had admini stered, and en tered in to the'gbody of the

sick person ; but the medic in e wil l be of n o use to the sick un lessadmin istered by a physic ian , as it will o the rwise be like the lump

ofprepared clay, wi thout the aid ofthe potter to fashion it . A phy

sician should, therefore, be his own apothecary, preparing and pre

scribing those medi c in es which are peculi arly appropriate to each

particular case, and being unkn own to others, con stitutes on e ofhi s

peculiar excellencies.

T he q ualities of medi c in es, depend on their colour, smell, andkind ofjuice . The active power of medic in e should be great, but

the quan tity should be small . These quan tities should be carefullyobserved, and the medi cin es given at the proper season , and stage

ofthe di sease .The person ’s disease is then to be examin ed, the state of the hu

mours and blood ; the . seven essen tial parts (dhatu) , and lastly the

evacuation s. He is n ext to dec ide on the nature of the disease,admini ster the proper medic in es, and g ive direction s regarding di et

and regimen .

It is ofmuch imp ortan ce that the disease be treated at the pro

p er time and the patien t be of the proper degree of strength to

admi t ofthe disease being cured. Ac tive treatmen t shoul d n ot

be employed in a slight di sease, nor a mild treatm en t in an acute

di sease . Should the treatmen t employed be doing no good, i tshould be changed ; but when the symptoms are yieldi ng, under

a p art icular plan of treatmen t, it should be fcon tinued.

That kind of treatmen t w ill be succ essful which dim ini shes thed isease, by equalizing all the humours and that is bad treatmen t

,

which increases one, as it dimin ishes an other humour . The treat

men t should be comm en c ed from the first appearance, ofthe disease

as it is like fire, poison , or the en emy, and a small portion deranges

Should a physic ian exhibit medicin es the first day he has seen

the patient , without properly ascertain ing the nature of the disease,he will be like the angel of death (Yama) . Such medic in es as

cure vital air, bile, and phl egm when diseased, are not disagreeable

to the person do not produce any bad effec ts and, gi ven at the

27

proper time, are the remedies to be employed. A Vaidhya should

prepare the medi c in es although this is stated in other shastres tobe the provin ce of Brahman s. The susruta shastre says that anycompeten t person may admi n ister medi c in e, but the Vai dya de

c lares whoever does n ot take m edic in e from this caste will go to

hell . Even Brahmans are declared to have n o authority in the

prac tic e of physio . Any other caste preparing or touching medi

c in e, but the physician who orders its preparation , will render itin ert .4 th Messeng er and a ttendan ts. The person who is sent for the

physician should n ot be of low caste, a fool, one of questionableverac ity, or a great sinn er he should not appear before the physi e

c ian di stressed from fatigue, by a rapid journ ey, or appear to be fearful of the result of the sick person s ailmen t . The messengerwho has his hair kn otted, clothes old or wet

, or is scan tily or slovenly dressed, carries a cutting in strumen t

, &c ., as a sword or stick, holds

ashes in hi s hands, will be as the angel ofdeath . Ifhe be a Dandi

or Faqir, or is deform ed, or defective in a member, orrides upon

an ass, cam el, or buffaloe ; or wears a band ofred flowers roundhi s n eck, the progn osis is unfavourable . Ifthe Messenger has hi sbody anoin ted with oil, or if covered wi th the deposit ofa river, or

blood be flowing from hi s body or ifhe be ofa bad temper or di sposition , so as to speak hastily or indi scretely it will be unfavour ~

able . If he rubs hi s shoulders, back, head, or hair with hi s handwhile speaking, it will be like a decree of Yama

, the angel of

death. Should the Messenger arrive so as to meet the physic ian on

the south, and the physic ian not wishi ng to visit the sick or if the:

messenger stands on one foot, sn eezes, or stumbles at the patien t orphysic ian

’

s house, these sign s are unfavourable . Should he find

the practition er wi th hi s fac e turn ed towards the south ; with cut

ting in strum en ts n ear him ; in an un clean situation ; naked,bath

ing , eating, sleeping, or making holes in any thing ; these sign s are

unfavourable . It is also a bad omen when the Messenger finds thephysic ian preparing a body for the fun eral pile

,killing birds or

the‘like, or boiling or preparing medi cin es with fire . Should the

messenger arrive at the house of the physician at twelve at n ight,or at n oon , or when certain stars are in the ascendan t the prognosisis unfavourable .The messenger should always presen t a presen t to the physic ian ,

He shoul d be of the sam e caste as the sick person , and should be

dressed in clean whi te c lothes, have a good appearan ce, and be

strong and in telligen t ; of a mild disposition, and know the luckyseasons, and the shastres.

28

The medic in es should be given by a healthy dependant, possessed

ofan am iable character, so as to preven t the machination s of the

patients en emies.

The friend who relates the progress ofthe disease must be exact

in his description s, and be careful that the patien t takes the medi

5tk. Duty of the Pa tien t. A person rej ecting a Vaidya, or physician , will be pun ished in Hell whereas when a Vaidya is employed

the patien t will go to heaven , even should he not be able to see

the sacredGanges in his dying mom en ts* .

The diseased person will carefully recollect the di rections ofthe

physic ian , must follow them with exactn ess, and must not be afraid

of the effects of the medi c in es which have been ordered.

Should the disease commen c e at an unfavourable time, or if

the physician visits the patien t at n ight, or during an unlucky hour,or should he have been born e at an unfavourable mom en t

,the person

wi ll die ofthe disease. A patien t with a good disposition , with hi sbody of the natural colour, and with the sign s oflongivity who is

patient, has a strong mind, sen ses perfect, with no fatal symptoms,

and has confidence in hi s physic ian , is easily treated, andwill havethe best chan c e of being cured. Should the patien t be strong, thedisease curable, and he has riches to defray the n ecessary expen ce, and follow the usual customs and direction s of the physi

cian and his mind is favourably influenced by the shastres, andhas faith in his physic ian , he will recover . The prognosis willbe unfavourable when the sick person is impatien t

, angry, and

di sobedi en t wan ting in courage, is ungrateful, and desponds also,with those who have no confidence in the prac tition er

,fatal symp

toms will quickly follow . Person s at enm ity with the physic ian ,and endeavour to dec eive him, are cured with difficulty, and

are to be avoided as much as possible .‘

The patien t will die wholives in the house of a person who despises the physic ian . The

differen t appearan ces observ ed on the physic ian’

s approaching and

leaving ‘hi s patien t will vary hi s progn osis.

The patien t is to expec t to be visited in the morn ing, after °the

customary prayers and ablution s, 1 s to prepare the medicin e as ordered, and is to sit in a clean , conven i en t part ofthe house for both th e

sick person, and the physic lan .

Many respec table Hindus will onlyrece ive medicines from a Vaidya .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

B O O K I I .

ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY.

UNDER THIS HEAD WILL BE C ONSIDERED THE THEORY OF THE ELEMENTS

GENERATION, AnD GR OWTH or THE BODY ; NATURE OE THE 0 0 3 .

POR IAL ( ANATOMY ) , VITAL , AND SPIRITUAL PARTs ; OE THE TEM

PERAMENTS AND OF DEATH .

CHAPTER I .

E lemen ts of the Body .

At an early period the Hindu Philosophers reduced the material

world to five elemen tary prin ciples, and primary qualities ; by the

agen cy of whi ch, they explain ed the appearan c e, composition , and

condition ofthe world, and the struc tur e and fun ction s of the Body.

The five elemen tary prin ciples were earth, water, air,fire

,and ether.

The peculiar qualities of each ofthe elemen ts are as follow

The Earth has smell (gandha) the water, taste ( rasa) the air,

touch ( sparsa) the fire,colour ( rupa) and the pure ether, sound

( sabda) . Besides these they have likewise the following qualities

E arth, whi ch is the heaviest elem en t, is possessed ofthe qualities

of smell, sound, tangibility, visib ility, and taste . It en ters largelyin to the formation of the body, and ofall solid and heavy substan ces.

Wa ter possesses sound, tangibili ty, visibility, and taste ; bestows

the sen se of cooln ess, fluidity, weight, and smoothn ess on bodiesand has much the quality of happin ess ( satwaguna) , and of in ertn ess ( tamaguna) , and is tran sparen t produc ing light

, and weight.It forms the differen t fluids of the body.

Air is possessed of sonorousn ess, tangibili ty, and lightn ess ; andfrom having the quality of action ( raja guna) in excess, it has themoving powers, and qualities Ofbodies.

F ire possesses soun d, tangibili ty, and visibili ty, and gives taste.The medical property offire is to afford heat, digestion , colour, light,and beauty to the body. It produces the passions, bodily strength,and valour of the individual and from possessing much of the

3 1

quality ofgoodness ( satwa) , and passion ( raja guna) , it gives it lightn ess, and movemen t .In Vi ewmg the wonderful operation s ofnature

, the HinduPhi losophers seem to have been soon arrested by the beautiful and variedadaptation Ofdesign to the end

, by the order, harmony, and mutual

dependance whi ch pervades the whole of nature . Thi s seems to

have led them to the con clusion,that in ert matter was in suffic ien t

Of itself to produc e such effects, and that there was a fifth elemen tfor performing the Operation s ofthe body, like the great soul whi chregulates those Of the world. This induc ed them to add

, at an

early period, an other or spiritual elemen t to those of in ert matter,

whi ch they called pure ether (akasa) whi ch was supposed to beseparated from the others, and possessed the property of sound

, and

form . It predom inates in the organ of hearing, and fills up the

porosities of living bodies, and their hollow cavities, as those Of

the bon es, and is full ofthe quality Of goodn ess ( Satwa guna) .Thi s Elemen t is altogether undistinguishable by our sen ses

, and is

only made kn own to us through the eviden c e of our understandi ng.

These elemen ts are all nourish ing to the body, and are con tain edin differen t proportion s in every sort offood so that after digestion,each elemen t, by an inheren t property, join s with that whi ch alreadyforms a part Ofthe fabric ofthe body, in the following mann er skin

,

vessels,bon e, hair, and flesh, are made up prin c ipally Of the elemen t

Ofearth ; alvin e evacuation s (mala) , urin e, semen , blood, and phlegm,

ofwater ; hunger, thi rst, and in sen sibili ty, are produced by firemovemen t, con sc ienc e, term in ation ofa work, retaining happin ess, byair and desire

,revenge

,stupidity, fear, shame, is produced by an

excess of pure ether. There being both an active or warm,and a

passive, or cold prin c iple, which are in creased and strengthen ed

by the rays ofthe sun and moon .

The body or microcosm,is also divided in to differen t parts,which

correspond with those of the globe. It has its moun tain s, its cold

and hot situation s, with the various ocean s. Each Ofthe fluids are

also.

influenced by one of the seven plan ets which regulate their

condi tion .

The same reason ing, whi ch was supposed applicable to the external

world, was used for the explanation of the con stitution , and fabric

Of the an imal system. Hence, all living bodies, among which

vegetable bodies are placed, are supposed to be composed ofthe

five elemen ts, wi th the elemen t produc ing action or life superadded.

Living bodies are produced from vapour, vegetation , incubation , and

parturition as insects, plan ts, birds, fishes, reptiles, and an imals.

32

Of the latter, man is the chief, and in proportion to the complicatedstructure ofhis body so is his liability to disease .

The essen tial or elemen tary parts, when m ixed, form vital bodies,which are divided in to two classes, one of which is stationary, theother moveable (jangama) . This class is produced from the Womb

(jaraynja) , as an imals (pasu) , and man (manusha) . 2ud, from eggs

( andaja) , as birds, snakes ( sadoso) , 3rd,from the warmth ofthe

earth, asworms, an ts,mosquetoes, fleas, and 4th, (udjbidgo) such

as break their habitation , and thus gain their liberty, as frogs,The second or stationary class con sists offour varieties

l st. Vanasp ati or trees in which the fruit is without flowers.

2 nd. Vriksfia trees with flowers and frui ts.

3rd. Verada, creepers.

4th. Asudie, annuals.

The sam e elemen ts and qualities, by their combination and actionsconstitute the human body which is govern ed by an independen tprin ciple, or soul, which acts through the medium of the members ;and is an emanation from the great soul Of the World in to whichafter c ertain purification s, it is again absorbed. As long as the soulremains in conn exi on with the body, the diseases with whi ch it isafflicted may be removed and it is proper that during all thist lme, remedies should be employed for the purpose .

The following is the Hindu theory Ofthe formation ofthe body

CHAPTER II.

Gen era tion .

It is stated in medical works, that as the mould rec eives the

seed which is to form the future plan t, so the men ses ofthe female

receives the semen of the male, which germinates in it . Hence

in treating of gen eration , the secretion of the men ses is first con

sidered.

When the men ses appear mon thly, the female ismoi st, plump, has

desire ; and is happy, with her hair flying about . Her eyes are

languishing ; her sides, arms, breasts, thighs, and hips are in a

state of excitemen t . The men ses con tinue for seven teen days,

during which the woman may be impregnated, and not at any otherseason . During the flow of the men ses the mouth of the uterus

,

whi ch is like the mouth Of a rue fish, is Open like the water lily,exposed to the rays Of the sun and after this season , the mouth of

the uterus again con tracts, and c lo ses like the petals Of the lily,when the ben ign influen c e Ofthe sun is absen t .

33

The menses are ofa red colour, like the blood ofa hare, or of_la0

dye .It should n ot stain c loth, when it falls upon it ; and shouldbe

w ithout smé l. The mense s are der ived from the two vessels ofthe

uterus, which d ischarg e the ir con ten ts by the influenc e ofthe vital

a ir,into the ut erus and vagina . The men ses rema in till the 50 th

y ear, when the woman is ofa weak con stitution ; but it icontinue s

longer,when the individual is strong.

During the discharge of the menses, much atten tion is required

to be Observed regarding the conduc t of the woman , as the state

ofthe paren ts at the time ofconception wi ll affect the offspring in

a very powerful mann er . During the first three days ofthe dis

charge, the woman should remain pure, she must sit and sleep in a

purified situation , up on the sacred g rass (kush) she must eat

out ofa n ew earthen vessel, or from a leaf, she must not sleepduring the day while the menses flow, or her Offspring will be verysluggish : should she shut her eyes at the time ofconception

,the

c hild wi ll be blind ; Should she shed tears, the child’s eyes will besore ; should she cut her nails during the flow ofthe menses

, the

child Wi ll be deformed ; should she ano in t or bathe herselfduringthese thre e days, the infan t will be afflicted with leprosy shouldshe laugh or speak loud, the infan t will be unhappy and deaf; andshould she fatigue herself, the Offspring will be employed in low

occupations.

The father should n eithe r be very Old,nor very young . Ifthe

father is not twen ty-five, and thewoman beyond sixteen, the offspringwill die in the uterus, if it be born alive it will live but a shorttime, or if the infant lives the sen ses and other parts will be inc omplete . Therefore a very young man

, or a very old woman

should be avoided. They should be in good health,the gen ital

organ s fre e from disease , and the female should ne ither be hun

gry, nor have eaten recen tly before conn exion . The semen shouldbe received into the menses as a seed dropped in to a good mould,and like it germinate, produc ing conc eption . As milk taken into

the stomach nourishes the child, so the semen requires to be

an imated with the menses to form the germ.

Should con ception take place on the l st or 2ud day ofthe menses,the offspring wil l die soon after birth. Ifcon ceived on the third

day, the child will be weak, diseased, and deformed, and will die

at an earlyiage.

Ifthe husband is not at home on the fourth day ofthe menses,

the wife is first to regard the sun after bathing, as the best obj ect in

order that her offspring may resemble that luminary in his qualities of

bestowing strength‘ and beauty, and should the first obj ect she sees,an

a

after bathing on the 4th day, be a deformed individual,her ofl

’

spring

will also be so . The female is n ext to perform the n ecessary ceremo

n ies to ensure Offspring with the assistance ofthe Brahmuns she is

to eat in the afternoon ofthe fourth day, bathe, rub her body with

scented Oil, put on clean clothes, and ornamen ts, and at night visit

her husband. But should there be a great discharge of the menses

on this day, she must n ot visit her husband as the semen will be

washed away as by a swollen river, and w ill thus preven t conception . Such cases are to be treated as other cases OfMenorrhagia.

When the female conc eives on the 4th, 6 th, 8th, l 0th, and 1 2th

days Ofthe menses they are the fortunate days. It i s when concep

tion occurs,towards the last of these days, that t he offspring will

live long and have few diseases. If conception occurs after the

1 2th day,it is unfavourable to the Offspring . When conc eption

occurs on the un equal days of the men ses, a female child will be

born while on the equal a male will be produced.

Numerous forms of irregularities, and diseases of the men ses

preven t conception, the pri nc ipal of which are derangemen ts Of

the humours, in which cases the air, bile, and phlegm stop the

flow ofthe menses, by closing the passages by which this evacua

tion flows.

When the menses are irregular, or are stopped, the woman should

live on fish, a kind of pulse called kulotlza , linseed ( tel) , masculi,

butter, curdled milk, ac ids, and sura (a kind ofwin e) .

Durga asked Siva the nature ofthe body, Siva answered know,

0 Durga !that the body is formed by a mixture ofthe energy Of

the mal e and female, in this way : During a fortun ate conn exi on

the heat produced g ives the semen the quali ty of the water, and

the air conveys it to the urethra of the male, from which itpasses in to the vagina. When it en ters the uterus it mixes with theheating qualities ofthe sun , whi ch the menses possesses, and forms

the embryo . It is when the mixture takes plac e, and has becomesolid, by their respective qualities Ofcold and heat to whi ch the soulis added. Should the germ have more ofthe qualities ofthe semen

,

a male child will be formed, and of the menses a female child ;and should the quali ties of both be equal, the child will be a

hermaphrodite.

Signs of concep tion . The indications ofcon ception , during theday it has taken place are the woman feeling fatigued, languid,and thi rsty, a weakn ess of the two thighs, a reten tion of the

semen and blood in the uterus, and a throbbing in the vagina.Tfie signs of Pregnancy, are the skin roundthe n ipplesbecoming

ofa dark colour, and the hair upon the body becoming more distinct

35

and prominen t . The person feels weak, the eyelidsheavy, and the

eye lashes closed ; much saliva is secreted sickn ess and vomitingo ccur ; and even pleasan t smelli ng thi ngs are disliked

, and producesickn ess. In thi s condition the woman must not approach her husband she must avoid fasting, vomiting, or strong purgatives grief

or fear stretching or severe coughing dragging heavy weights

riding on horseback sleeping during the day ; or sitting up at

n ight . She must not be bled, nor strain in passing her dej ections.

During Pregnancy, if the woman is not gratified with what she

wishes to eat, and the air is deranged, the child will be crooked

and cripple, or Wi ll be small in size,dumb, or cannot speak distinct

ly will be blind, or have his eyes defective, or will be an unbeliever

in the sacred shastres. In other such cases these defects are pro

duced by acts ofprevious wickedn ess ofhis own , or ofhis paren ts

in a former state of existenc e .

Whatever is wan ted by the pregnan t woman should therefore be

supplied, when a perfec t chi ld will be born . If the woman desires

to see a Rajah, the child will be great and rich should the mother

wish to adorn herself, the chi ld will be well formed and vainshould the mother wish to see a holy man

,the child will be holy,

and just, and if she longs to see ferocious an imals the Offspring willbe of that description . In like mann er the desire for particular sortsof food indicates the disposition of the infan t and the form ofhis

body. When the mother wishes to eat buffalo s flesh the child willhave blood-shot eyes, much hair, and he will be warlike and whenhog’s flesh, he will be sluggish, and sleepy.

If any injury be don e to the mother, or she suffers in any way,

the child in like mann er suffers. The menses, after conc eption , goes

in part to form the placen ta, and as the blood flows every mon th, it

coagulates to form the embryo ; an upper layer being added everymonth to the embryo, and another portion to the breasts, of the

mother by which the mammae are increased in size .The period ofdelivery extends from n in e to twelve mon ths, and

after this time when the female is not delivered, the abdominal

swelling must be considered as the effect ofdisease .

CHAPTER III ;

Growth andfunctions of the Body .

There is no peculiar organ for the semen, but it is supposed to

be contained in every part ofthe body, as butter is in the milk,Lor

E 2

36

sugar in the sugar-cane . There is a duct on the right side ofthe

mouth of the urinary bladder, where it is collected, and passes

through the urethra in the time of coition .

The menses ofthe woman disappears when she conceives, and it

circulates towards the mammae where it i s collected and produces

The germ thus formed contains a small proport ion ofthe five ele

men tsl

each of which assists in promoting the developement of

the other elements, and of the body in gen eral . Jiva or the

soul is last engendered, and like fire produc ed by'

a burn ing glass,the mixture of the menses and semen produce heat. When the

air separates the particles of the semen it produces twins, triplets,When one ofthe constituen t parts of the embryo is unheal

thy, the conception will be so and, ifboth the menses and semen

are impure, as when the paren ts are affected with leprosy, the off

spring will also be afflicted with this disease .

The germ in the uterus is like a shrub, the vessels ofwhich are

connec ted with the uterus, by which the blood ofthe mother is cir

culated in it, and n ourished. The germ is n ear the fire ofthe mother

at the navel, is inflated by the air (vayu) and fire, whi ch the embryo

contain s, by whi ch it is expanded into its differen t parts, forming

the vessels, circulating the jui ces, and from whi ch its membersare formed ; like the potter giving figure to the piece ofclay uponhis Wheel.In the first mon th, the mixture ofthe semen andmenses forms a

small mass like a pea (kolala) ; seven days after conception it hasthe form ofa bubble, or inflated bag . On the ten th it is red, andon the fifteenth it resembles a small round piece of flesh Thisshortly enlarg es in the same imperceptible way as the Moon en largesin size (Jyotistatwa) At one mon th it has small fibres proceedingfrom it, and is an imated with life (Prana) . The point ofthe vert ebralcolumn

, is to the body, what Moun t Samera is to the world, and inthat point the gods ofthe body reside (Bramba, Vishnu,Should the germ become ofa circular form (pinda) , it denotes a

male an oblong form (Pashie) a femal e ; and an iregular form

(Arbuda) a hermaphrodi te . In the third month five emin en cesappear, which when developed become the hands, feet, and head.

The other smaller parts of the body are then but imperfectly

In the fourth month the members are more distinctly developedand the heart of the fetus being perfectly formed, life receives itsactive powers, and has a desire for the assistance of sense and ao

tivity. Life then acts as in its former state of existence.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

38

vessels, ligaments, are produced from the semen, and resemble the

same parts in the father and the soft parts as flesh, blood, fat,’

marrow,heart, navel, liver, spleen , in testin es, are formed princ ipally

from the blood ofthe mother, and resemble her.

The growth and strength of the body, the differen t colours and

the duration of life, are produced from the ( rasa) according to the

qualities ofthe food ofdifferen t kinds gen erally taken by the parents.

The sen ses,knowledge ofthe arts, and life ( j iva) , happin ess, m isery,

are produced from the paren t’s good or bad ac tions in a form er state

of existen c e .

The fetus in utero is ben t on itselfwith his head upwards, and

mouth towards the spin e of the mother. His hands and feet are

ben t, and during parturition the air turn s the body and brings

the head downwards, and he knows hi s former hi story. The uterus

is a dark and di sagreeable place, which the Brahman s eledge is a

kind of purgatory. If the mother eats proper food, the child re

ceives its nour ishmen t from the umb elical cord whi ch is conn ect

ed With the mother, and by mean s of the cord the blood is con

veyed to the fetus which thereby grows.

The sex ofthe infan t is known by the right mammae con tain ing

milk first, the right eye being larger than the left, the woman wish

ing food ofthe masculin e kind, and dreaming ofthe water lili es of

differen t species, and her mouth, and the colour ofher lips ofan

agreeable colour . The opposite indication s are the proofof an in

fan t being of the male sex. Twins are kn own by a depression along

the cen tre of the abdomen and when the two sides ofthe abdomen

are depressed, and the lower end is a little prom in en t, with a depres

sion in the middl e, a hermaphrodi te is kn own to be con tain ed in

the uterus.

The small vessels in the embryo produce first its growth, before

the members are produced. The m ixture ofthe semen and blood

or embryo in crease, and life en ters it the air separates the

different members, the fire prepares the elemen ts,the water

moistens, the earth stiffens, and the sky (akasa) increases the fetus.

When the embryo has hands, feet, mouth, nose, ears, buttocks,then it is called the human body, and is composed ofsix princ ipal

parts ; four extremities, the trunk, head, abdomen,back, umbilicus,

forehead, chin , nose, n eck, bladder, are the single parts of the body.

The pairs are the ears,eyes, nostrils, eyebrows, temples, shoulders,

cheeks, axillas, mammae,testicles, sides, buttocks, kn ees, arms

,thighs

,

The body has n in e orifices, like a house with n in e doors. Theyare the urethra, anus

,

“mouth,nostrils, eyes, and ears : The vagin a

forms the tenth in the female . There are ten -hugers-and ten toes. The

39

other parts ofthe body are the skin , Kolah, ( tissues) fluids (dhatu)dej ections, (mala) and humours (dossoh) ; with the liver, spleen,

‘lungs, pancreas, heart, stomach, urinary and gall bladders the

in testin es,kidni es, vessels, ligamen ts, tendon s, membran es, median

conn ection s of the body; bon es, join ts, muscles, vital parts, theveins

,arteries, n erves, and capillary vessels, eSOphagus, W ind

pipe,Saunaka says that the head is first formed, because it is

the princ ipal part ofall the organ s Of sen se . Kritabirya says that

the heart is first formed, because it is the seat of the mind and

knowledge . O thers that the umbiliacus is first formed,because

from that c en tre the other members grow. Some say the trunk, andothers that the hands and feet are first formed, as they are the root

of the activemembers. Dhanwan tari says that all these opin ion s areincorrect, and that all the members are formed at the same time butare

,extremely small

,as the first sprig of the bamboo con tains the

leaves, of the future plan t ; and as a constituen t part ofthe

mangoe is on ly visible in its state of ripen ess, and cannot be

detected when the tree is green .

With the child is produced, the period of his life,his actions

,

whether virtuous or vicious his acqu iremen t ofriches, or experience

ofthe sen ses, and death, will be varied according to the actions heperform ed in his former state of existen ce . The acuten ess Ofhis

senses,the exten t ofknowledge, the duration Ofhis life, and hap

piness or misery, being produced from the soul so the strength,

colour, health, memory, will be derived from the nature Of the food

used by the paren ts.

As long as the elemen ts remain in due proportion,the body re

main s in health, this state is called Prahriti,and when increased

or dimin ished in its proper proportion s it is call ed Vikriti .On these qualities

,and to these alon e, the physic ian at

tends. From the elemen ts, the eleven sen ses are produced to

p erform their peculiar ofli ces,as the sound of the ear

, &c ., and

is confined to it .The parts Ofthe fetus areformed in the followingmann erThe Liver and spleen are formed from the blood ; Lungs from

its froth and the large in testin es ( c ecum) from its impurities.

The essential parts of blood and phl egm are concocted by the fireOf

‘

the body, in to which the air (vayu) en ters, and forms the intestin es,anus, and bladder. The tongue is formed from the essen tial partsofblood, phlegm, and flesh.

Air, with the assistance of a proper degree ofheat

,separates

the soft parts, and forms canals, and passing between the flesh forms

40

the different muscles. When these canals are filled up with marrow

they form n erves.This Opin ion arises from their supposing that the

brain and spinal marrow are the marrow ofthese bon es. The air

entering among the soft parts forms the difi'

eren t receptacles

ofthe body, as the stomachiand kidnies,Which are derived from the

essen tial parts of the blood. The testicles, and its appendages are

formed from the pure part of flesh, blood, phlegm,and fat . The

heart is formed by the essen tial parts of blood and phl egm,to

which all the principal arteries are conn ected, by whi ch life is pre

resembles a water lily, Wi th its head turned downwards,

it is in activity, and when asleep it is

h ,

It is the seat ofthe understanding and ifthe quali ty of

darkn ess and ignorancepredominates (tamaguna) the person sl eeps,

and when the ( satwaguna)prevails the person remain s awake .

th, der ived from Vishnu, and the ignorant

Sleep is a kind Ofdea

sleep much, and those who have much sotwaguna sleep about mid

night, and those who have much rajoguna sleep occasionally and

without any reasonable cause . When the tamohguna and phlegm

in the heart, a kind of sleep ( syn copy) occurs, from

dividual cannot be awaken : In this it resembles

served. It

predominate

which the in

Sleep during the day should always be avoided, except during

excessive heat, as it is con sidered a sin , and is unfavourable to

heal th by derangingthe humours and producing disease such as

asthma, catarrh, heavin ess ofthe body, pain ofthe body,Wan t of sleep at n ight, produces the diseases

But children and Old people, and those who

have indulged in anexc ess of ven ery, who have consumption ,

drink much, or are much fatigued by travelli ng, or other exercises,

or those who arevery hun

gry, or labour under indigestion , may

sleep an hour (48 minutes) in the day time . If the person does

not sleep during the n ight, he may take half the quantity ofsleep

during the day. Sleeping during the day deranges air, bile, and

phl egm,and many diseases are

produced by it as coughing, difficult

breathing, 85 0 . Night watching deranges air, and bile, and pro

duces various diseases ; henc e sleep should be taken at n ight . By

sleeping at the propertime it will preven t disease, and will retain the

coughing,dyspepsy, f

ever .

person , with a good constitution , may live a hundred years.

When phlegm is dimin ished, and air and bile increased, by

passions, and any humour of the body l essen ed by their causes, the

sleep is disturbed.

41

If a person regulates sleep by hi s will, it will not be favour

able . A certain period Ofsleep daily, is n ecessary to health . Too

much air, bile, or grief, destroys Sleep, dimin ishes the dhatu, andinjures the heal th of the body. In such cases Oil with turmeric

and other like things applied to the head, and the body will promote

sleep . Bathing has a like effect, as also champooing , eating goodrice, flower, peas, cakes, sweet—meats, Oleaginous food, milk, with

the juic e of flesh,espec ially an imals that burrow in the ground, or

the flesh ofbirds, rasin s, and sugar eaten at n ight . The bed,

being soft and agreeable, will also promote sleep .

When sleep is protracted it is to be obvi ated by vomits ( song

sodhana) and a purge, by spare food, blood letting, and causes pro

ducing men tal depression . When cough, or fat, or poison have pro

duced it, exercise i s to be taken at n ight . When there is thi rst,

colic , or hi ccough, wan t of digestion , or diarrhoea, sleeping in the

day is proper .

Dreaming . It is the soul which dreams. Whatever was seen

or heard when awake, is represen ted by the mind, during sleep

and is the impression ofgood or bad action s, when there is much

rajahgun a in the heart .

D rowsiness, is indicated by the senses not remain ing in their state

ofactivi ty ; the body is heavy, the person yawns, he is tired, is

drowsy, and desires to sleep . It is produced by an excess ofair,phlegm , and tomahguna.

Yawn ing . During a long inspiration the mouth is extended, fol

lowed by a short expiration , and a flow of tears from the eyes, is

called yawn ing.

Langour is when the person is fatigued without a cause, and the

respiration is weak, and imperfec t .

L az iness when the person has the capac ity, without the inclination

to act and wishes enjoymen t without exertion .

Nausea is accompan ied with an increased flow ofsaliva and tears,th pain in the breast, and an effort to rej ect the food, but it does

n ot reach the mouth.

Fa in ting . When bile (pitta) and tamaguna are in excess, it

produces this effect .Swoon ing is produced by an excess of rajaguna, with bile and

a ir.

D ig estion . Six varieties ofthe digested part offood or chyle are

distingui shable . When the food is astringen t, sour, moist, the

chylewill become ofthe same nature . When digestion is accomplished,the resp ective elemen ts un ite with those which had en tered in to theformation of the body the earth un iteswith the earth

, the water wi thF

42

the water, 8 m, and they, acting on the inherent qualities ofeach of

the five elemen ts, mix and increase those in the body sm ell ,the property of earth, with that of the body taste with water, touch

with air, and noise wi th ether (akasa) . The juice thus separated fromits impurities is called chyle ( rasa), which nour ishes

,strengthens,

and gives colour to the body.

Some Pandits suppose that it requires a day and n ight to form

and distribute the digested mass, to the last deposited part the

semen andmenses ; others suppose six days are required, and some

one mon th before digestion is completed. The first class ofPandit s

suppose the fluids are formed and c irculated as a wheel turn ing

round, and supplying the various essen tial parts ofthe body (dhatu. )If an article of food ormedic in e increases much the semen, and

fluids, they may require only a day and n ight to accompli sh this,and such an increase cures some diseases ofthe body. As the beard

does not grow,nor the flower yield its smell at an early stage of

their growth so in the child, the semen , and the men ses remain

for a c ertain time undeveloped which is also the case in old age,

like over ripe fruit .The strength, or vital pr1n 0 1ple ofthe body ( Oja or tej) is situ

ated in the chest along its cen tre, and is produced by a mixture ofthe pure fluid in the same mann er as a bee sucks the juice from dif

ferent flowers, and produces hon ey. Oja exists as long as the person lives, and it is this which retains the body in its healthy state.

CHAPTER IV.

Structure of the Corp oreal p art oftlie Bod'

g (Anatomy )

The Body consists ofHumours, (D ossoh) and essen tial parts, (ciliata )with their appendages

SECTION I .

The air Bile (pitta T) , and Phlegm (kofa i), are the

three pillars or supports of the system . If deranged they are

Véyu from Va, to go, was first formed.

TPetu, from Tap ak, ho t from which the heat ofthe Body is derived.

1‘

Kofa, si lwo ; from siliso, to embrace .

43

the cause ofdisease, and death ; and, with the blood, they retain,

and even tually destroy the body. Without these three Humoursand the blood the indi vidual could not exist . With the essen tial partsof the body, and the appendages, and impurities, they form the

fabric of the body.

As the moon sheds moisture, and abstracts the Sun’s rays, whichdry up and bestow en ergy upon the earth, and the air moves fromplac e to place, so does phl egm bestow moisture, bile wi thdraws it byi ts heat, and air wafts it about in the microcosm, or an imal body

i f.

l st. Vayu, spirit, or air

,flows through all parts of the body,

and performs all its actions. It is ofthe ac tive quali ty (rajaguna) 5is invisible

, is ofa cooling qual ity, is extremely light, and is alwaysflowing more or less qui ckly it conveys the essen tial parts overthe body performs respiration , and all the actions at the outlets

of the body, the c irculation of the fluids, and activity of the

senses, and ofthe un derstanding. It dries up the fluids, is soft, but is

affec ted by heat, and cold and like the Sun’s rays, it prepare s and

separates the fluids, and dej ections. It produc es happin ess when

heal thy, and with heat increases the hot state of the system . It is

principal ly found in the small in testin es (puckassia) , thighs, ears,eyes, sen ses, and all the canals, the testic les, and the anus. It pro.

duces the active properties ofthe body and its organs, and retain s the

body in its proper state . There are five kinds ofa ir according to the

situations they occupy.

a . Vital air (Pra’

na végu) which passes through the mouth and

n ose, and by it diglutition is performed. It is situated in the chest,

and is the supporter of p réna , or life . While this remain s in

health, so does the individual it gives movemen t to the blood,and by it the food and drink are conveyed to the stomach, and

strength to the body when diseased it produces hic cough, an d ditficulty ofbreathi ng, 8 m.

Ap éna vég n is con tain ed in the rectum, ur ethra,8 m. ; and

is situated under the p uckasia, It separates the dej ection s, urine,semen, men ses, and expels the fe tus. It is also s ituated in the

buttocks. When deranged it produc es diseases ofthe bladder, andthe anus, diseases ofthe semen , and con stipation .

c . Samana raga is situated in the stomach, and small in testines

This ingen ious theory which has been so frequently renewed, andwas for so many ages un iversally b e lieved, seems to have been derivedfrom the Hindus ; from whom i t was adopted by the Egyptian andGrecian Prie sthood. It is defective , however, in excluding the bloodwhich, notwithstanding , has been stated a s one of the fundamental .partsofthe Body .

4

( ama sala , and puekas-i ia ) performs the digestion of the food,

separates the impurities, produces blood, and fat, and separates theurine, alvine evacua tions, Soc . When diseased it

‘ produces loss of

appet ite, goolmoh, diarrhoea, 860 .

d. Urlana bay/n is situa ted in the hollow ofthe neck,above the

ster num. In health it produces speech and singing and other

functions of the voice, above the colar bones. When derang ed itproduces various diseases of the upper part ofthe neck.

«8 . Deana bagn is found acting in conveying the fluids over thebody, and in performing its func tions, and those ofthe juices. It

produc es the flow ofthe blood ; and performs walkin g,jumping

, open

ing ofthe eyes, raising or depressing things, 8m. Ifdiseased all the

body becomes affected.

Vital air is thus suppo sed to flow over the body, to produce, and

to retain the various vital functions ofthe body as joy, respiration ,

and its various ac tions it also mixes with the humours, and regu

lates the movements ofthe body.

W hen the air is dimin ished weakness is produced, the personspeaks little, he is melancholy, and it dimin ishes the understanding

,

lice . Vital air, is derang ed by carrying heavy weights, by severe

exerc ise, by excess in venery, much study, falls, or walking veryfas t

by always pressing the body, by injuries, fasting, jumping, or swimming ; by not sleeping at n ight, by riding upon horse -back

,ele

phants, or in carriages ; by much walking, or using much sour,

pungent, bitter, or dry substances, or light c ooling vegetables,

flesh or c ertain kinds of pulse, fire . Air may be deranged by the

quantity and quality of the food which is eaten , by certain ao

tions of the body, and by exposure to the cold,and moist air

,

early in the morning . If all the varieties of Var/ a are diseased theperson dies.

2nd. Bile (p itta ) is a hot,bitter, oily fluid

, having a peculiar

smell, like that of raw flesh. It is ofa blue colour and sour, when

unconcoc ted and is hot and pungent like fire or pepper, and of a

yellow colour when properly prepared. It produces an imal heat,

and it possesses the quality of .S'

a twagun a . It is situa ted princ ipallyin the stomach (Amassia ) , and small intestin es (p a ckasia ) but it is

also found in the liver, sple en,heart

,eye, and skin where it is mixed

with the blood, and other fluids. Its princ ipal situa tion, however,is between the stomach and small intestines, from which it passes to

the different parts of the body in which it is found. There are the

following five kinds of Bile .a . Pas/relia , or tha t which assists digestion , and is situated be

tween the stomach and small intestines. It digests the six kinds of

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

‘

46

The irnpure fluid part passes by means ofvessels into the bladder ;

and the solid impurities by mean s of the ap dn vayu, passes in to the

molésia, or large in testin es. The pure part ofthe digested food is of

a milky colour, and is conveyed to the heart by means ofthe domon

n ic vessels, Where it is mixed with the blood. Gharaka calls thesevessels the chyle carrying vessels

Should the fire be too strong it burns the food, and it becomessour, and gen erates bile . When the fire dries the food, it produces ahard mass, which is bitter. After digestion the preparedfood some

times becomes sour, by its mixture with substanc es of this quality.

When digestion is n ot properly performed, the in ternal fire andstrength are dimin ished the person becomes weaken ed, and di seasesare produced, particularly the disease which is called dma .

When morbidly increased in the body, bil e produc es a yellown essofthe skin , much heat, a desire for cooling articles offood

, and a

loss of sleep and strength . The person cannot see perfectly, and hiseyes, fec es, and urin e become yellower than usual .The hair ofa person with such a temperamen t

,becomes qui ckly

grey, he perspires easily, his body is pale, his eyes are easily inflamed, ahd he is impatien t, perverse, opin iative

,vain

, and consequen

tial ; is amorous, his conversation unguarded, is addicted to falsehood, is fond of abstruse studies, 8 m. Bile is deranged by anger

,

grief,fear, covetousn ess, malice, great fatigue, fasting, by eating

roasted articles offood, by excessive v en ery, by sour, salt, and hot or

heavy food, by mustard oil, or cakes by certain kinds ofpulse,as

mustard seed ; by vegetables, fish, flesh, curdledmilk, butter-milk,spirits, and heat ofall kinds.

3rd. The Phlegm (Kofa) , is the impurity of the chyle, and

it is conveyed by the p rama vayu along the domon ic vessels, and

mixes with the rest of the phlegm in the body. It is cooling,

moist, sweet, and when imperfec tly prepared it is salt, and mixessubstances together, 8 m. It is white, heavy, Oleaginous, and glis

é

ten ing, and possesses the quality of tamohguna in excess. It isprinc ipally found in the stomach, in the breast, in the heart

, at

the root ofthe n eck, in the head, in the eyes, in the throat, andtongue and is found in the join ts, in vessels, and all moist parts.

There are five kinds described

a . In the stomach (amasia ) it softens the food, and lubricatesthem together, and is called K ledoka .

b . Aba lambana , is situated in the shoulder-join t, and n eck,and

it strengthens these parts, and also the breast.c . In the tongue and throat, it produc es the vari ous tastes,

and is called, R asana .

47

d. In the head, it keeps the brain, the eyes, and other sensesmoist. It retains their respective qualities, and is call ed Strelzena .

3 . It keeps the join ts moist and ready to perform their actions,and is call ed slesona .

Ifnot deranged it retain s the body in its proper state, producesits glistening appearanc e, and moist state . It streng then s the join ts,produces the heaviness and strength of the body, and en ters in tothe formation of semen . The temperamen t it produc es is indicated by a green ish colour, and the person is fortunate

,is of a fine

colour, and is fond of sweet thi ngs. He is grateful,patien t

, and

is without covetousn ess. He is strong with a whi te eye, hi s hairis black, and he dreams ofwater .

When morbidly dimin ished it produces impurities the bodydries, the in ternal heat is increased, digestion is dimin ished, thejoin ts move wi th difficulty, the person is incommoded with thirst

,

weakn ess, and watching. In this state it leaves its natural situations, and passes to other parts of the body. It is derangedby sleeping during the day, taking no exerc ise

, using much

sweet, salt, sour, or cooling substances ; as also Oleaginous and

heavy articles of food, as milk, and the like barley, variouskinds of rice, the flesh of the buffalo, and those an imals whichlive in water. It is also deranged by eating always the same

food, or eating too often , or cooling things of all kinds. Thishumour is also deranged by the season s in November and De

cember it is increased, in March and April it is liable to be deranged, and in May and Jun e it is dimini shed. When much increased it produce indigestion , loss of appetite, langour, lassi

tude,and vomiting.

It is supposed that the phlegm is con tain ed in the parts above the

navel, bile in the trunk above the pelvis, and air in and below the

pelvis. In the morn ing phlegm predominates when the body feels

cool in the middl e ofthe day, bile predominates, when people feel

hot and in the even ing air is the strongest at n ight the same order

is observed.When these divisions meet, phl egm and air are the

strongest . In like mann er the age of man is di vided in to three

periods to the 1 5th year phlegm is strongest ; to the 5oth, or man

hood, bile is the strongest and aft er that, or in old age, air pre

dominates. In like mann er where these periods meet, phlegm and

air are strongest.The same changes are observ ed in the seasons, and in the period

ofdigestion offood, and physic ian s should be careful of them in the

employmen t ofremedies. On this accoun t hot things should be

given in the morn ing or to the young cooling things in the middle

48

ofthe day, or to adults and ton ic and pungen t food in the evening,or in old age .

The seven dkétu and the impurities remain at rest and incapable

of action un til acted on by air (vayu) , and are wafted by it over

all parts ofthe body, as clouds are wafted about by the wind,and

through its influence they perform their respective actions. The

air (vayu) presides over the ten sen ses, and is therefore the

natural lord of all the actions of the body it acts quickly and

strongly often deranges bil e and phlegm, and produces many

diseases. It is always presen t in the body, gives strength, and

retains it in a state ofhealth. It is diffused everywhere over the

body, as well as i n the world, of which it is the rul er, performi ng

all the action s in it .

Sometimes the difi‘

erent humours are in creased in quan tity, either

separately, or in combination oftwo or more together but bile—

and

phlegm cannot pass from their own receptacles by themselves, with

out the assistanc e of air, which is the on ly active humour, as a high

W ind striking upon water, throws it about, so vital air acting upon

the other humours increase them in quantity, and they are thrown

about out of their proper receptacles. Thus, when air, bile, phlegm,

and blood are increased, they pass from their own receptacles and

mix with the other humours. Sometimes they are diffused over the

whole body at other times to on ly a part which is irritated,and

then form disease, like the cloud which accumulates over a part,throws down rain there.

Ifair is much deranged, it leaves its own receptacle, and passes to

another situation , produc ing n oise in an unusual situation . Bile in

like mann er produces heat, a burn ing sen sation, and dryn ess when

phlegm is increased, and is changed in its position at the time ofits passage, it destroys appetite and digestion , and produces langour

and vomiting. In cases where air, bile, phl egm,and blood are de

ranged, and accumulated in the abdomen they dim in ish appetiteand strength, produc e gulmolz and bradrodri, or large abcesses in theabdomen also costiven ess, cholera, dysen tery,Ifderanged, air passes to the receptacle of bile, the medic in es for

thi s disease are to be employed for its cure and bile, if deranged,

passes to phlegm . This is to be cured by removing diseased bile .Ifphlegm passes to the locality of air, thi s is to be cured in theusual way.

Brum ha, the creator of the world, is full ofthe rajaguna, and

resembles air while bile resembles Vishnu, and is like him ful l ofsatwaguna . In like mann er phlegm resembles Siva, with his inactivequalities, and i s the destroyer of the body.

49

“Then these humours accumulate in the bladder they producediabetes

,ston e, disuria, and other di seases of the urin e . When

they accumulate in the pen is they produc e stric tures, swell ings, 850 .

In the anus they produc e fistula-ih -ano,piles

, and the like . In

the scrotum and testicles, they produc e differen t forms ofHydroc ele.If towards the head they produce the various diseases ofthe head,eyes, Ste. When collected in the blood and flesh

,the humours pro «

duce leprosy, differen t kinds ofcutan eous diseases, and inflammation .

Ifto the fat they produc e differen t kinds oftumours and swellings,particularly ofglandular parts. In the bon e they produce inflamma

tion , and other like diseases. In the feet elephan tiasis, rheumatism,

and the like . When diffused over the whole body, fever and other

diseases ofthe body, as small pox, &c .,are the consequence .

If such derangemen ts ofthe humours remain for some time their

effects may appear afterwards, and slowly produce the peculiar

symptoms ofdisease .

SECT ION II .

Essen tia l Pa rts

The Essen tial Parts, or the supporters ofthe body, consist ofthehard and soft parts, and fluids of the body.

These are the chyle ( rasa) , blood ( rakta) , flesh (man sa) , fat

( meda) , bon e (osthi) , marrow (majja) , and semen ( sakra) . These

even essential parts of the body form the fetus, nourish, and

sustain life, and retain the system in a healthy state ; they give the

soft feel, the colour, and the strength ofthe body, and the actionofthe sen ses. Wh en diseased or dimin ished, the body waste s, andthe person dies. Thus will the period of life vary with the kind of

food which is used. Good chyle produc es good health,and with

it bravery, strength,and a fine colour ofthe body, and reten tive

m emory.

a . Chyle ( rasa) that moves in the body is obtain ed, and is sepa~

rated from the four kinds of food which is digested,

and is

said to be the essence ( Sara) of the food. It has a glutinous,

c ooling, and liquid appearanc e ; is sweet, and is of a white co

lour . It is prin cipally situated in the heart, liver, and spleen ;a nd by means ofthe vessels called daman ee, it is conveyed to the

d ifferent parts of the body by the saména and nourish esthe dhatu, and is changed by the bile (ranjaka) in to blood ( rakta) inthe liver . This kind ofbile is supposed to redden the fluids

,when

G

it is called blood. The chyle thus changedmixes with the blood, by

means of the saména véyu . Ifthe Bile be either too strong, or n ot

strong enough ; or the food is not properly digested, it becomes

pungen t, leaves a sour taste in the mouth, and like poisen produces

disease . The chyle then passes along to the heart, to nouri sh and

in crease the dhatu and parts ofthe body, as fields are irrigated bycan als ofwater, which moisten , and afford them its qualities. Whenchyle is much in creased it produces nausea, and an in creased secretion of saliva . Th ere are two varieties of chyle 5mm ( chym e) ,slightly impure, and p akwe or chyle in its pure state whichnourishes the body.

There is a differenc e of opin ion as to the uses ofthe chyle, some

supposing that it nourishes the parts directly, others suppose that

by means of vital air (Przin -vayu) , it is conveyed to the daman ee

vessels by which it is sen t to the blood, and mixes with it inthe spleen and liver, where it becomes red

,is purified by the bile,

and remain s there for five days and a half. It then passes to

the flesh, and remain s there some tim e, and is purified by the bile

(pitta) , or a kind of in ternal fire, and is conveyed to the differentparts of the body, which it retain s at its proper temperature, and

nourishes the flesh . In the sam e way it passes to and remain s in the

fat, bon e, which it n ourishes, and purifies with one part while

another impure part (mala) is rej ected. Perspiration is the impurity ofthe blood in the fat as the tartar is the impur ity ofthe teeth

and other secretion s have impurities which are in like mann erthrown off. The last dhatu to which the chyle passes is to the sem en ,

which has no dregs so that the chyle, like sugar,requires differen t

proc esses to purify it, and at each stage it throws down impurities.

The chyle retains the person in good spirits,in creases the blood,

&c .,and ifnot properly prepared, it becomes sour ; and deranges the

the dhatu . Ifdimin ished there is pain in the breast, the personshakes, has swimm ing in the head and moistn ess in. the eyes, withthirst . In on e mon th the chyle changes to blood, flesh

, fat, bon e,and marrow,

from which semen, and the men ses are produced.

6 . Blood (rakta) . The blood is derived from the digested partsofthe chyle, and by being con cocted by the bile becomes red

, whenit is called blood ; which combin es

,and n ourishes the other essen tial

parts of the body (dhatu) .The blocxl is thin and limpid

,like water

,has a peculiar smell

,is

ofa red colour, and light . These qualities are derived from the five

elemen ts ; as the smell from the earth, the fluidity from the water

,

redn ess from the fire, mobility from the air, and lightn ess from the

ether (akasa) . When blood predominates it produces the redn ess

5 1

ofthe eyes and body, and fulln ess ofthe vessels. In a healthy state it

keeps the body ofa good colour, in creases strength,and the flesh

or bulk of the body, n ourishes the organ s, and moves, liv es, and

retain s their being . It preserves vitality (jiva) which it distributes

over all the body ; but in differen t quan tities, being derived from

the heart as its fou nta in .

The blood is kn own to be in a healthy state, when the nails

,

eyelids, palate, tongue, lips, palms of the hands,and soles ofthe

feet are ofa reddish colour, and ofa shin ing appearan ce . It retain s

the fullness and hardn ess of the abdomen,gives the yellow tinge

to the ski n, reduces the heat of the body, and renders it heavy,and li stless.

The blood is changed and produces the men ses, which differ from

the pur e fluid, being formed by the in ternal fire of the body, andflowing con tinually three whole days during every mon th ; from the

1 2 th to the 50th year ofage .

When the blood is dimin ished in quan tity in the body, the skinbecomes dry and rough, the vessels feel lax and feeble it in creases

the in ternal heat ofthe body, and produces fevers, and other diseases ;in which sour and cooling food and drink are desired.

Blood is n ever deranged by itself, as whatever acts unfavourablyon it produces first its effect upon the air

,phlegm, and bile

,and

then it acts on the blood. On this accoun t the diseases of the blood

are cured, by first curing the derangemen ts ofthe humours.

c . Flesh (mansa, muscles) . Is produced by air (vayu) thickening the blood, whi ch is digested by heat . This increases the firmn ess ofthe body. The air passes through the body, and being ac

c ompan ied with the proper degree ofheat, forms the large canals,and divides the flesh in to differen t muscles in which the vessels

are lodged that con tain blood. By means of these, it proc eeds

as the lily rises from the ground, and is n ourished by water, &c .

,in

its progress upwards. When the blood is digested in the flesh,

with the in ternal fire,its essen tial parts nourish the flesh, and its

dregs produce the wax ofthe ears, 8 m.

When dim in ished and dried up in the abdomen , cheeks, and lips,pelvis

,thighs, breasts, armpits, nates, and n eck it produc es pain ,

and

the prin c ipal vessels are dimin ished in size . When it predominates

it in creases the size of the buttocks, cheeks, lips, thighs, arms,and

c alves ofthe legs, and gives a gen eral heav in ess to the body.

d. Fa t (meda) is gen erated from the b lood in the flesh, and is

in large quan tities round the eyes, throat, and breast, whenv

pro

perly digested by the action of its in ternal fire . It produces

perspiration, keeps the body shin ing, and hard is o ily, and heavy ;G 2

52

and is the cause ofthe growth ofthe body, its obsity, and strength,

It is diffused over the body, but its chief seat is in the

When the fat is dimin ished the spleen may be easily felt, the

join ts seem dried, and moving them g ives pain . In such cases

an imal food is always desired. When fat predominates, the bodyappears smooth and glisten ing, the abdom en and sides are ih

creased ih size ; cough and asthma are produced, and the bodyhas a disagreeable sm ell. It is supposed that the essen tial part of

the blood and fat produc e bon e .

e . Bon es (osthi) , and cartilag es ( toruma) as n ew bon e , are usuallyconsidered under the sam e head. These give form to the body,and to them all the soft parts are attached. When the bon es are

all un ited together, they form the skeleton (kankala) . Bon e, wi thblood are the parts from which the marrow oflong bon es, including

the brain and spinal marrow, are formed. When digested the ex

creticus (mala) of bon e form the n ails and hair . When the ele

men ts of bon e are dimin ished in the system they become painful,the teeth and nails crack, become loose, and the body becomes dry.

Where bon e predominates, another portion grows over the old

bon e ; and a more than usual number of teeth are formed.

Some authors say there are 300 ( Susruta) , others 306 (Cha

raka) , bon es in the body. Thi s difference is owing to their countingthe cart ileges wi th the bon es. The bon es are conn ected together:

by capsular ligamen ts. The Bon es are

l st. Extremzties.

TrueNumber.Number—SanscritAuthors

Up . L7";

Fingers and toesMetacarpus and meta 30 30

Heel bone

Carpus and tarsu

Fore arm and legPatellaArm and thigh

30 30

60 60 60 60

Number ofbone s of the Bones of the extremi

ties

Sesamoid bones are no t counted.

Bones in the fingers and

toe sLong bo nes ofeach hand

and foo t

Wrist and ankleHee l .

Fore arm and legKn ee

Arm and thigh

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

54

3. Cartilages ( toruua) nose, ears, n eck, and eyelids.

4 . R oundBon es (boliu) are those of the hands, feet, back, sides,abdomen , and sacrum .

5 . Long bon es (nd laka ) as those ofthe arms, legs,metacarpal, and

metatarsal bon es, and the other like bon es ofthe body.

Bon es are insen sible, immoveable, and as the c en tre ofa tree

is the hardest, so the bon es are the most durable part ofthe body ;and remain after all the other parts have decayed.

j: Brain and Marrow (mafia) The Brain and marrow are

situated wi thin the bon es and n ourish them, and their impurities

are the secretion s from the eyes. The Majja gives strength,and

the shin ing appearan ce to the body. When the marrow is increasedthere is a heavin ess ofthe eye, and ofthe whole body ; andwhen

diseased it dimin ishes semen , and produc es pain in the long bon es.

The essen tial parts ofmarrow and brain mix with the blood, and

produce semen .

g . Semen (sukm ) . Is the last essen tial part formed, and no

thing is produced from it in the body. It retains the body in its

proper state of health and strength, is the gen erative prin ciple,and dur ing its excretion it produc es pleasure when dimin ished, it

causes pain in the pen is, and testicles, and the person becomesimpotent. When it predominates there is an increased flow, and it

produces ston e . The female has desire for the sex during the flow

ofthe menses, whi ch acts in them as the semen does in the male .

These seven essen tial parts of the body (dhatu) are con tain ed

in seven organs call ed kollai, or their rec eptacles.

The Blood retains all these parts in their proper state ofhealth.

Some Pandi ts believe that life is the blood, and others say that life

is the sotwa, raja and tama gunas, with the five sen ses and the

soul .

Oza/z is the essential part to the seven d/uitu above enum erated

which gives them strength . It is cooling, o ily, ofa reddi sh, or slightlyyellow colour is diffusible and tran sparen t, and is the prin c ipal supporter of life . It is spread over all the body. Ifdestroyed, thebody will soon di e . It is deranged by severe wounds, by the diminution ofany the seven essen tial parts 5 by the passions, anxiety, muchlabour, and hunger . If it is in a healthy state the body becomesfirm

,the proper functions ofthe organ s are performed, a good colour

is given to the body, the external and in ternal fun ction s, and theorgan s of sen se are retain ed in a healthly state . When deranged theperson feels languid, with a loss ofstrength . The body feels heavy,swollen , and drousy, and its colour changes. Ifdimin ished, theperson becomes thin , with fainting, delirium, and death.

55

SECTION III .

Excretion s (Mala)Are the impurities of the seven essen tial parts

, the dregs ofthechyle is phl egm ; ofthe blood, bile ofthe flesh

, the secretion s of

the ear, n ose, of the fat, perspiration ; of the bon e, the nails,

and hair ofthe brain andmarrow, the secretions from the eyes, Saw.

The semen has no dregs or impur ities, but others say

that (Ozah) ,an o ily transparen t fluid, whi ch is formed all over the body, is theessen tial part of life, and is its impurity. Thi s is the strength ofthe body, and is prin cipally situated in the thorax .

Alv in e eva cua tions are the superfluous part ofthe nutritious food,whi ch form the feces when dimin ished by dysen tery, purgatives,or the like, pain is felt in the breast, and sides ofthe abdomen .

Whenmuch in creased it produces pain in the belly, with a gurgling noise .When in the proper quan tity it keeps the body in a proper state ;and it supports the air

, and in ternal fire in a healthy condition .

Um’

n e is con tain ed in the bladder, and keeps the parts moist .When dimin ished, pain is felt in the pelvis

,and little urin e is dis

charged. When much increased there is a frequen t flow wi th painin the pelvis, and swelling in the part .

Persp ira tion retains the skin in a soft and moist state . Ifdimin ished, the pores ofthe skin are closed, the skin becomes dry, tough,and deranged in its action . For the removal of this state

, oil is

to be rubbed over the body with warmth and moisture . \Vhen theperspiration is increased there is a bad smell ofthe body with itching .

Milk increases the size of the mammae and is the food ofthe

infan t . When dimin ished, the mammae become lessen ed, and little

milk is secreted, and in these cases medicin es which in crease phlegmare to be used. When much increased the mamm ee are enlarged

,

with a flow ofthe milk, and pain .

These impuritieswill be dimin ished by much purging or vomiting

and also eating those substances in con siderable quan tities whichdimin ish air, bil e, &c .

, will have this effect . One mola when con s

tipated, dimin ishes the others. In like mann er disagreeable food or

melancholy violen t exerc ise, fasting, excess in ven ery, 8 m,have the

sam e effect . There is however n o certain quan tities as they vary indifleren t individuals, according to their size, 8 m. The increase ordiminution oftheir flui ds is therefore stated by comparison . Whenhealthy, all the secretion s and essen tial parts are supposed to be ina proper state and it is the duty ofthe physician to restore themto their just quan ti ty ifincreased, they must be dimin ished and

ifdimin ished increased.

56

O thers state that oily exudations, seminal fluids, blood, dandrif,urin e, fascis, earwax, nail-parings, phlegm, tears, concretions in theeyes and sweat, are the twelve impurities of the human frame .”

(Menu. p . 1 64 . Ch. V.

SECTION IV.

Join ts ( Sandlzi. )The join ts are of two kinds the moveable ( clzaZa ) and

moveable (sthira ) .

Ofthe first kind are the join ts of the extremities, jaw, and ver

tebrae . All the others belong to the second, or immoveableThe moveable j oin ts are

The 4 toes, 3 in each 1 2

Large toe 2

The foot, kn ee and hip, one each 3

In each leg

Hand in like mann er

Joints ofthe extremities

The Loins

Spinal Column

ThoraxBreast

Join ts ofthe trunkNeck

ThroatConn ection of vessels with the

heart and organ of thirst

(kloma)The roots of the teethPomum Adami

Nose

Eyeli ds

JawsEarsTemplesCheeksAbove each eye

-brows

Carried forward

Brought upAbove each temples

HeadC rown ofthe headJoin ts above the n eck

Total

There are e ight forms ofjoin tsa . Kara , hinge join t a s those of the fingers

,toes

, wrist , ankles,kn ees, elbows.

b. Uduk/za la , as the ball and socket joint, shoulder, hip, t eeth.

c . Samua’

ga . Like the instrumen t for cutting beetlenut as the

shoulder-blade, coxis, pubes, and innominata.

d. F rota ra , as the n eck,back .

6 . Tunnosebanee ( sown as with thread) , sutures of the skull,

j oin ings of the illium,ischium, and pubes.

j: B iosa tunda, the join ts of the lower jaw, which resemble a

c rows beak ( coron oid process) .

9 . Manda la ( round) as ofthe orbits, throat ( larynx) and thorax ;in which the eyes, wind-pipe, bron chae, and heart are situated.

it . Sunk/ta burta in the ears, as the os hyoides.

SECTION V.

L igamen ts, é c . ( Suag/u)Ligamen ts bind together and strengt hen the frame work ofthe

bones, like the strips ofratan which are employed to bind the pieces

of a boat together, so as to preven t the en trance ofwater, and to

support heavy weights.

These Ligam en ts are divided in to those of the extremities, trunk,and head.

In each toe there are 6 ligamen ts 30

Soles, sides, and j oin ts of the feet 30

Leg 30

Kn ee 1 0

Thigh 40

Hip-join t 10

1 50 Opposite side 1 50 or 300

The proximid extremities 1 50 Do . 1 50 or 300

L igamen ts of the extremities 600

This includes nerves which are no t considered separately.

H

Brought forward

L igamen ts

In the Loi ns

BackChestSides, 30 in each side

Back ofthe Neck

Head

q mber ofL igamen ts ofthe body 900

There are four varieties ofLigaments.

a . Protanobutee, long ligamen ts, as ofthe legs, feet, and join ts.

6 . Britta, round ligamen ts and tendon s, as ofthe pen is, &c .

c . Prithu, thi ck ligamen ts and tendons as along the sides,

breast,back, and head.

d. Susira, those with holes in them, as in amasia, pokasia, and

bladder (bustee) .The physic ian , by knowing exactly the situation ofthe external

and in ternal ligamen ts, will be able to remove extran eous bodi eswhi ch have pen etrated far in to their substance.

Wounds of these Ligamen ts (and n erves) are most painful anddangerous.

SECTION VI.

Muscles (Paskee)

Muscles cover, strengthen, and retain in their places, vessels

tendons, bon es, and join ts.

The size of the muscles differ according to their situation and

uses. They are

Baha la, or broad and large .

Peleba, small.

Unu, narrow

Stfiulah, thi ck .

Birta, round.

Krassa, short .

Stlzera, hard.

Mirdu, soft .

Sluckno, smooth and shin ing and,

Korkasha, rough.

59

They are as followsIn the two hands and feet

TrunkAbove the nape ofthe n eck

1 st . In the extremities

Each fin ger and toe 3 or

In fron t ofthe foot ( tarsus)Above the foot (metatarsus)Under the anklesIn the legKn eeThigh

Hip1 00 two feet 200

Two hands the same 200

2nd. In the Trunk

Anus

Peni sFrenun ofdo .

Testicles

Hips, 5 on each side

Above the bladder

AbdomenUmb iliacus

Vertebral column

Side

BreastUpper breastPlace Oflife

,and amasia

Liver, spleen , and rectum,2

3rd. Muscles above the nape of the n eckNape ofn eck 4

Jaws 8

Throat and upper part ofthe chest 2

Pallet 2

Tongue 1

Lips 2

Nose 2

Carried over

Brought up

Five in each mammae

Vagina, 2 external and 2 in ternal

Uterus

For conveyi ng the semen and blood

in ternally20

In these positions the muscles vary according to their actions. The

muscles Ofthe peni s and testicles Of the male are retain ed in ter

nally in the body of the female . Besides which there are spiral

muscles like those ofa shell the first c ircle being the vagina, the

second the n eck Ofthe uterus, and the third its cavity. In the uterus

is con tain ed the fetus with the mouth ofthat organ turn ed down

wards and shaped like that ofa ruefisfi.

SECTION VII.

Vessels

The vessels are distinguished from each other by the names semi ,damanee and srota. The appearance of these vessels is n early thesame but they differ from each other

, by their action s.The navel is the origi n ofall the vessels

,and the principal seat of

the life (pran ) , as it is situated there in larger quan tities than else

where . The navel may be said to resemble the root ofa waterlily,from which the differen t vessels proc eed to all parts ofthe body.

The navel is thus the root ofthe vesse ls ofall livi ng an imals It isurrounded by vessels like the cen tral part ofa wheel whi ch receivesspokes from the c ircumference . Among these

,forty prin c ipal vessel

are enumerated.

Semi are the vessels which convey blood, air, bile, and phlegm .

This idea is derived from the appearance of the vessels in theirfetal state .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

When they con tain more air, bile, phl egm, or blood, they are called

air vessels, phl egm vessels, or blood vessels.

‘The colour ofair vessels is red, and air appears in them those

ofbile are blue and hot, and those of phlegm are cool, ofa whitish

colour, thick, and their con ten ts seem to remain at rest .

Ifa ir c irculates properly in its own vessels, the person will actproperly, and the fun ction s of the body will be performed in such

a mann er that the indi vidual will enjoy health ; his understanding

will be good, and he will possess all the other good qualities Ofair.

Ifderanged, various kinds of the di sease ofair, will be produced.

IfBile is in a proper condi tion , the person will have a heal thyappearance, his appetite good, the in ternal fire will be strong and

healthy, and he will possess other good qualities. But ifderanged,the diseases of bile wi ll be produced.

IfPhlegm acts properly the skin will be smooth, the joints healthy,and the strength will be good, and he wi ll have the other good qua

lities of phlegm . If deranged, it produces the pecul iar class of

diseases ofphl egm.

Blood. This fluid produces and nourishes all the other essen tial

parts ofthe body. Ifthe blood is in a healthy state, the person s colourremain s good, the surface is sen sible, and it produces the other goodquali ties of blood, and when deranged it -developes the variousdiseases ofblood.

When the air vessels are alon e deranged, di sease is not produced,but when deranged, with an in creased quantity of bile, and phlegm,

disease is the con sequen c e . By the state Of the eight princ ipal vesselsthe physic ian knows if the patien t will die or live . There aretwo vessels in the hands, two in the feet, two in the throat, two in

the temples,and two in the nose, whi ch are thus to be examin ed. In

the foot the vessel is behind the maleolus in ternus,and is in length

two fingers breadth ; in the hand it is three breadths of the fingers,

in the n eck two breadths Of the finger, and in the nose two, at

whi ch the pul se is felt . The two vessels ofthe hand are howeverthe prin cipal and iftheir con ten ts flow naturally the person will li ve

and do well . In these situation s are the vessels con tain ing the indication s of life, and a sen sible physic ian will examin e them all

,and if

air flows naturally it will be favourable . Ifin any ofthese the semenis deranged in the vessel, and air flows naturally, the person will

live, this air'

produces the pulse? When -the pulse is to be judged

of, three fingers are to be put upon the vessel at the wr ist ; the

Physicians feel the pulse at the wrist, ankles, temples ; and sometimes at the nose , or ne ck.

63

first,n ext the hand, represen ts or indicates air or Brumha, the

second bile, or Vishnu ; and the thi rd Phlegm, (Mahesur or Siva) .

Should air be deranged in the vessels, sometim es it will be cured

by pressing, champoOing , or open ing the vessel or by perspirationor fi ction . These remedi es must always be employed.

When air, bile, and phl egm are deranged, and increased in quantity, they do not remain in the same vessels, but pass in to diffe r en t

chann els, as in to those of one ofthe other fluid.

The vessels carrying prin cipally blood, are very red but are

n either very hot n or cold. Some of these vessels may be open ed,others cannot be open ed with impun ity. Should they be woun ded,the person wi ll die, or the part will be rendered imperfect in itsactions.

There are four vessels which should not be open ed in each extre

mity1 Ijaladara2 Urbee

}deep seated1 Lohetaka

4

There are in the trunk 1 36 vessels, ofwhi ch 32 should not be

open ed 4 are in the buttocks 3 in each side of the spinal

c olumn in the belly 4 and in the breast 1 4 . Above the clavicles50 are not to be open ed. In the n eck 1 6 in thejaw two on eachside ; 4 below the tongue, 4 n ear the nose, 1 in the soft palate

,

one on each side ofthe eyes, and on e in each ear, one in each sideofthe forehead, two in the temples, two above it

, one between the

eyebrows and six in the upper part of the head.a

It is stated in some books that there are innum erable vesselscon sisting of those ofa large and very small size

,whi ch are like

decayed leaves in which the in terstic es of the leaves have beenremoved. They are said to form 35 cotees* of vessels, or 300

lacks ofall sizes and figures. These all arise from the navel.

Damanee vesselsT.

These include vessels andh

nerves by which the different functions ofthe body are performed.

One cotee is equal to on e hundred lacks .

1’ A tubular vessel of the body, as a vein , nerve , &c . Other shastres

say that they proceed from the turtle situated in the n avel with fourlegs ; ten vessels from the proximid extremity, ten from the lower, twofrom the mouth, and two from the anus (Tantra) .

64

There are 24 of these vessels, which for the most part proceedfrom the navel . There are 1 0 that proceed upwards

, ten down

wards, and twb laterally. The upper ten perform the functions ofhearing, touching, seeing, tasting, and smelli ng . They also performbreathing, gaping, sn eezing, coughing, laughing, speaking, and cry

ing when these vessels approach the heart, the ten are di vided intothree each, form ing thir ty branches. Two of these are divided intotwelve, ofwhich two convey air

, two bile,two phl egm

,two blood,

and two chyle . Eight others perform hearing, seeing,tasting

,

smelling, two being allowed for each fun c tion . By two speech isperformed, two make a noise, two produc e sleep

,two waking, two

convey tears, two the milk of the female, and two in the male

convey semen . These con stitute the upper vessels.

The action s of the ten lower vessels, situated under the navel,are to carry the air ofthe abdomen , for acting on the urin e, dej eotions

,semen , menses, and the like . They separate all these parts

from each other ; and by them the chyle is separated, and the bodynourished, and retain ed in health .

These ten vessels become thi rty in the stomach (amasia) and

in testin es (pukasia) two of whi ch con vey air,two bile, two

phlegm, two ,blood, two chyle, two the soli d, and two the fluid food

,

two for the urinary organ s, and two for producing the semen,

“

and

two for conveying it externally, two for the menses, and by two

the dej ection s are discharged.

From these, num erous other bran ches proceed ; the whole bodybeing enveloped by the branches proceeding from the four lateraltrunks. These are innumerable an d terminate in open orific es on thesurfac e, and convey perspiration , retain the body in a healthy state,and by their communi cation s convey external applications in to thesystem . By these vessels feeling is produc ed, and by them the Oil orwater is drawn in to the system, and they cool, refresh, and clean it .

Srota’

(or cana ls) .

These vessels convey prana or vital air ; the food ( onna) water

( uda) chyle ( rusa) blood ( rokta) ; fat ofthe flesh (man sha) urin e

(mutra) feces (purica) ; semen ( sukra) and men ses (artobo) .From each of these numerous other vessels arise .Should the two vessels conveying life (prana) be wounded at the

root ; whi ch is in the heart, the person screams, bends forward, be

comes delirious, shakes, reels, swoon s, and Often di es. Should the

two vessels conveying food, the root of whi ch arises from the

stomach be wounded, the symptoms will be flatulency, pain in the

abdomen, loss of appetite,vom iting, thi rst, blindness, and death.

65

There are two vessels, which convey b le, the roots ofwhich

are in the breast . If Wounded the body dries up, and the sameefl

’

ects are produc ed as when the vessels conveying life are woundedthe person gen erally di es.

There are two vessels for conveying blood, the roots ofwhichare in the liver and spleen, and if they, or the roots ofthe other

blood vessels are wounded, the person becomes ofa pallid or graycolour, wi th fever much blood is lost

, and the eyes become red.

There are two vessels for conveying fi es/i, the roots ofwhich are

the veins ( sira), and skin ( twak) , and the root ofthe vessels whichconvey blood which if wounded produc e swelli ng

, drying of the

flesh, and enlargemen t ofthe vessels (sira) conveying blood (an eurism) , and the person dies.

Forfa t there are two vessels, the roots ofwhi ch are in the sidesand loins, and when wounded produce perspiration

, cooln ess ofthe body, the palate dries, the body swells

, and there is thirst .There are two vessels for conveying urine

, the roots ofwhichare in the bladder, and pen is and if wounded the bladder is distended by the collection ofurin e

, and the peni s swells.

There are two organs for con tain ing dejections, one of which

arises from Pakwasaya, and the other forms the anus. Ifwoundedcostiven ess (anaba) , and a bad smell are produced, and the in testin esswell, or become knotted.

The semen has two canals the roots ofwhich are in the breasti nd two from the testicles. Ifwounded they produce impotency,and the semen is discharged very slowly, and is mixed with blood.

The menses have two canals, the roots ofwhich are the uterus,and the damanee vessels, whi ch convey the menses. When wounded

, they produce barrenn ess, and the menses cease .

SECTION VIII .

Cellular tissue, andfascia of tire Body (bald) .

The cellular tissue conn ects, and surrounds, the different parts

ofthe body, and separates the seven essen tial parts from each other.The tissues which thus retain the differen t parts ofthe body together are ofseven kindsIst. Mdngsadlzara is situated between the muscles, and in which

the vessels ( rugs) pass, and divide in to branches, to nourish

the n eighbouring parts, as the lily rises from the ground, and re

ceives its nourishm en t from the water and earth.

Frommangsa, flesh, and dhara surrounds.

6

2nd. R aktadhara in which the blood is contained, in the spleen

and the liver. They retain the blood, as the juice of tr ees is retain

ed, and is dischargedwhen out in to .

3rd. .Medodbara Tis the organ in whi ch all the fat is retain ed,the chi efplace of which is in the abdomen ( the omen tum) . When

the fat is con tain ed in the bon es it is called maja.

4th. Sles/zmadli ara j: whi ch forms the bags con tain ing the

phl egm With which the joints are lubricated, and rendered supple

as oil is applied for the movemen t ofwheels.

5 th. Purislzad/i ara, in whi ch the dej ection s are retain ed in the

abdomen , it is attached to the pakavasa, and is situated between the

liver and the in testin es.

6 th. Pittadbara, or organ which receives from the stomach the

four kinds offood, taken by sucking, dividing with the teeth, drinking, and licking. These kinds offood are digested by the heat of

the bile (pittateja) .

7th. Sukrad/tara retain s the semen , which i s dispersed over all

the body with other fluids, in the same mann er as m ilk con tain s

butter, or the jui ce of sugar can e, sugar-candy. The prin c ipal seatof the semen

,is two fingers breadth on each sides the n eck ofthe

bladder and the semen passes along the urinary passages, and is

discharged in a state ofpleasure .

SECTION IX.

Organs or R ecep tacles

There are seven ofthese receptacles, wi th an addi tional three inthe female. They retain the Humours of the body in their respective situations such as air, bile, and phl egm,

blood, chyle, chyme,

urin e, and feces.The receptacle of the blood is the heart un der which the organ

of phlegm is situated. Still lower down (distid) is situated the

stomach (amasaya) between the breast and navel . Under which is thereceptacle of bile ; below which is the rec eptacle ofair

(pavanasaya) , or plac e for the excretion s and below that isthe receptacle of urine (vasti or bladder) . The female has threemore receptacles the uterus, and two receptacles for milk, or themammae.

R akta blood, and dhara retains.

1' Meda fIt, and dhara retains. Maja brain , saroia marrow.

1 Sle shma phlegm, and dhara retain .

Gharaka divides these into large and small intestines, and gives eacha name .

6 7

SECTION X .

Orifices of tbc Body . (Bakisrota .)

There are nin e orifices in the body of the male the mouth, two

nostrils, two ears, two eyes, the anus, and the urethra.

Females have the orifices of the two mammae, and the vagina,

more than those of the male.

SECTION XI.

S kin . ( Twak) .

The skin is said to be in a state ofhealth when it is soft, and has

much hair. The skin con sists ofseven layers, or membran es as milk

when boiled, forms a coating like that ofthe skin . The skin givesthe seven differen t kinds of colour to the body.

l st. Avabkéskin i (cuticle ) this is the external layer, and is trans

paren t . Its thickn ess is about the eighteen th part ofa grain ofrice.2nd. Lokitd is the sixteen th part of a grain of ric e in thickn ess.

3rd. Sweta is a membran e of a white colour, and is the thick

ness ofthe twelth part ofa grain ofric e .

4th. Tamra is of a copper colour, the thi ckn ess of an eighth

part ofa grain ofric e .

5 th. Vedin i is the sensible part, and is the thickn ess ofthe fifth

part ofa grain ofrice.6 th. Bobini is the thickness ofa grain ofrice .

These membran es are not found in the head or fingers, but are

distingui shable when there is much flesh in the part examin ed, as

the belly, extremities, 8 m.

7 th. Méngsadkara . These parts of the body are innumerable,and retain the muscles in their places.

SECTION XII.

Supp limen tary Parts.

Principal tendons (kandara) are sixteen in NumberTo each foot two

Do hands

Neck, and front ofthe bodyBack p

h

i-li

ve

d;

Carried up

68

From the tendons ofthe extremities the nails proceed. Those of

the n eck bind it to the trunk,"

and it is a tendon which extends to

form the pen is.

The back and buttocks are bound together by mere tendons

whi ch pass down and form the testicles.

There are also 1 6 Jala ( like a net) and are form ed of vessels,&c .

, whi ch strengthen, and bind the join ts ; and six kureka whi ch

form bundles ofparts.

Seban i ( sowing or sutors) , there are five sutors in the head,one in the frenum ofthe tongue, and one in the frenum ofthe Pen is.

SECTION XIII.

Dissection of tba Human Body .

All the R ishis are said to have recommended the dissection

of the human body, as proper and n ecessary. Menu, the greatlegi slator, and the one most respected by the Hindu sages

, says

(85 )“one who has touched a corpse, is made pure by bathing

”;

and again (77) should a Brahman touch a fresh human bonehe is purified by bathing and if it be dry by stroking a cow, or

by looking at the sun,having sprinkled his mouth duly with water.

”

Gharaka, one of the mun is, and Physic ians say, that a

practition er should know all the parts of the body, both external and in ternal, and their relative position s with regard to eachOther. Without sucha knowledge he cannot be a proper practition er.

Susruta, a R ishi of the highest rank, says that a jogi (a holyman ) should dissect, in order that he may know the differen t

parts ofthe human body ; and a surgeon and physic ian should not

on ly know the external appearances, but internal structure ofthebody ; in order to possess an in timate knowledge ofthe diseases to

which it is liable, and; to perform surgical operation s so as to avoid

the vi tal parts. It is by combin ing a knowledge ofbooks with prao

t ical di ssection , that the practition er will alon e attain an in timateknowledge ofthe subj ect Of’

hi s_ profession .

The body which is to be examin ed by dissection should be that

ofa person who had n either been destroyed by poison , nor had died

ofa long di sease, as the structure of the body will be altered bythe deleterious substanc e taken , or destroyed by the ravages of

disease . In like mann er the person should not have been very Old,

and all the members should be in a perfect state .

When a proper body for the purpose has been selected, the

dej ections are to be removed, the body washed, and placed in a

frame work of wood, properly secured, by means of“grass,

‘

hemp,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

Brought forward

The following are the varieties ofvital

Flesh has

VesselsTendons, n erves, and ligamen ts

Bon eJoin ts

Varieties ofvital parts ofthe body.

These parts are also divided as follows

In each leg there are 1 1 , in both

In each arm 1 1 , do .

In the abdomen (udara) there are 3, and in the

thorax 9

In the back there are

Above the trunk

Vita l p arts ofthe distid extremities.

l . K ip ra . The space between the great toes, and the one n ext

it, ifwounded or bruised, the person will die with tetanus. Hence

a bite ofa serpen t is very dangerous in this part .

2 . Talakridaya . Under and behind the 4th and 5th toe. If

wounded death will be produced with great suffering.

3 . Kurcha, above the K ip ra , and on each side ofit. Ifwound

ed there will be an un steadin ess ofthe foot .

4 . Kurckasira, under the ankles, it will produce paln and swell

mg .

5 . Gu lp ka, the ankle joint, whi ch produces pain, and the jointbecomes stiff, and the person lame .6 . Indrabasti, along the an terior and posterior part ofthe leg .

Ifblood flows largely, the person will die.

7 . Janu, or vi tal part in the kn ee . When hurt, it will producelamen ess.

8 . A’

n i Marma . Three fingers in size above the kn ee . Whenwounded it will be followed by much swelling and stiffn ess ofthejoint .9 . Urbi, middl e of the thigh. Ifwounded much hemorrhage

will follow, with death.

1 0 . Lokitaka, a little above the last, and below the groin .

When wounded, from the great hemorrhage, paralysis ofthat sidewill occur.

7 1

l l . Vitap a . If the part between the testicles and groin be

Wounded, the person will become powerless with a loss of

semen .

Both upper extremi ties have the same vital parts as the lower,differing on ly slightly from each other.

Vita l p arts of tbc Trunk.

1 . Guda . If that in the anus be hurt,it wi ll soon kill the person .

2 . Basti, or urinary bladder, if wounded the person will soondie, exc epting after the extraction of the ston e . If one side bewounded, a fistula will form, but the person will not die . Shouldthe vital parts in both sides be woun ded

, the person will die .

3 . Ndbki , between amasia and Pakasia, when wounded where

the vessels origi nate,the person wil l die .

4 . Hridaya or heart, which is between the two breasts withinthe thorax. Ifwounded the person will soon die .

5 Stanamula is in two parts,

situated below the breast ; andis two fingers breadth in size . Ifwounded death will be producedby the severe cough

,and asthma thus produced.

6 . Stanarokita,above the breast two fingers breadth

, ifwound

ed severe cough and asthma will take place, by the visera beingfilled up with blood.

7 . Ap a lap a , in the axilla. When wounded under the axilla, agreat discharge ofblood and pus will precede death.

Vi ta l p arts of tbc Back.

Should the loin s on each side of the back (Koteekotorna ) bewounded above the sacrum, from the blood lost, the person willbecome ofa yellow or bad colour, and die .

I. Ap astamba . The two vessels which convey bayu in the chest .Ifwounded cough and asthma will produce death .

2 . Kakundara . The side ofthe spin e n ear the buttocks whenwounded is followed by a loss of feeling, and the person cannotmove the inferior parts ofthe body, which become parali zed.

3 . Nitamba . When the sensible parts of the two buttocks

have been wounded, the lower limb shrinks up, and becomes weakene

ed,and the person dies.

4 . Parswasanduis situated on each side ofthe trunk and lowerpart of the abdomen ( iliac region ) ; when wounded the person

will die, from the flow Ofblood from the organ s.

5 . Vrika ti , on each side of the spin e, n ear the breast the

man ifwounded there, will die from the great hemorrhage .

72

6 . Angsafa la’

ka, at the upper part ofthe; spinal column, when

wounded, the arm becomes insensible, immoveable,, and dries up.

7 . Angsa . Ifthe shoulder join t be wounded it disables the arm.

Vital p arts above the trunk.

There are 37 vital parts above the trunk ofwhi ch two are on

each side of the trachea. There are four vessels call ed n eela (blue)and two (manya) which ifwounded or bruised the person cannot

speak, or the voic e becomes changed, and he loses his taste.

2 . Sira Ma trika, on each side of the n eck, there are two

vessels ; ifwounded the person will soon die .

3 . Kr ika tika, or the join t between the head and n eck, if

wounded, the head is always in motion .

4 . Bidara, under the lobe of the ear, if wounded the personbecomes deaf.

5 . Fana, should the inside ofthe two nostrils be wounded, he

cannot smell .

6 . Ap anga, below the extremities or above the eyebrows, ifdiseased or wounded the person will become blind.

7 . Abarta, above the eyebrows, ifwounded, they produce blindn ess, and diseases ofthe eye .

8 . Sangkka, the temples, if wounded the person will soon die .

9 . Utkkap a, above the temples, ifwounded, the individual will

live as long as the instrumen t 1s m the wound, but if removed he

will die . Should it be allowed to remain, and medic in e be given

to discharge the instrumen t it may"

‘

drop out ofthe wound, and the

person may live.

1 0 . Stkap an i . Between the eyebrows, the same effects will be

produced as in the last case.

1 1 . Siman ta , the five join ts ofthe head, ifwounded, will produc e fear, in sen sibility, madn ess

,and death.

1 2 . Sringa taka , should the vessels at the un ion of the eyes,nose, ears, and tongue be wounded, the person will soon die.

1 3 . Adkip a ti, inside of the upper part of the head, at the

passage ofthe vessel along the bon e ( lateral sinus) wounds willsoon destroy the person .

In operations, sen sible parts are to be avoided and a surgeonand Physic ian should know all these parts.

When a member is cut off, the parts con tract, and less bloodwilloften flow ; but ifwounded in a vital part

,

it will gen erally causedeath, by the number ofvessels that are divided, while the derangedair produces much pain . The person dies in such cases, as a tree

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

4

p erson dies. If only four are wounded, he will live a few days.

When three are wounded, and the instruments removed, the person

will die soon after its extraction . Iftwo are injured, an imperfect

action ofthe part will be the consequence ; and if only one be ih

jured, there will only be pain .

These four varieties ofvessels are gen erally contain ed in sen sible

parts and retain the body i n a healthy state but if the sensible

parts are wounded, the air is increased it passes through the four

species of v essels, produc es much pain , and causes fainting, and

death. Should an external substan ce be required to be withdrawn

from a wound, the surgeon must first carefully observ e the sensible parts, and then remove the instrumen t . If the vi tal parts are

wounded towards their c entre it will produce death in a few

days and it will produce an imperfect action ofthe part, when

wounded on one side . Thos e vital parts which produc e deathon the in strumen t being discharged, when wounded near the

edge, will give much pain . The other parts give much pain whenwounded directly ; but will produce little pain if wounded on

one side .

The same symptoms and con sequences will take place should

the parts be lacerated, crushed, or burnt, as when wounded with a

cutting instrument,

CHAPTER VI.

Sp iritua l p art qfthe body .

Life (Préna ) consists in the combination of the soul (bkzltétmapurusha, j ivatma) the mind (manah) the five sen ses (Indriya) and

the three qualities ofgoodn ess, passion, and in ertn ess, (Satwa, Raja,and Tama)The soul (purusha) IS a shadow or emanation from God (Parameit

ma, Ishwar) , the eternal, who is without beginn ing or end, is invisible, immortal, and is on ly known by reflection . Whe n it bedews thefive elemen ts it produces the living body,and becomes by its action sevident . It is liable to decrease

, and is influenced by medi c in e.There is no difference between the human soul and the soul of the

world 5 this being only the exterior and condesc ending manifestav

75

tion ofGod, whil e the human soul is itsreflection into itself, and

i ts elevation above itself is the D ivin e soul . The presence ofthe“

soul is n ecessary to animate the body ; is full ofkn owledge and hap ~

p in ess, and is possessed ofjudgment . It produces waking and sleep

ing and combin ed with m ind is like a coachman who directs thesenses

,and regulates the body, suffering from its wickedness, or

e njoying its beatitude . The soul is always in a state ofpurity, whenseparated from the body ; but

"

n either ac ts useful ly, nor otherwise,useless when un ited with mind, and the female en ergy (prakriti) .When the soul en ters the embryo it forms the knowledge (vidya) ,

and ign oran ce (avidya) , wi ckedn ess, of that individual . In some

m edical works the soul is represen ted to exist in beasts, an imals,

and demigods according to its conduc t in former states of existence.When the soul (Jivatma) has bedewed the body wi th its twen tyfour quali ties, it performs all the corporeal fun c tion s

, and sensible

a ction s ; as vision, hearing, touch, and by it we speak and act .

If it acts on good works, the person will be good,and hi s soul

will go to heaven after death.

When the soul is un ited with the mind (manah) it producesdesire, activity, enmity, happin ess, griefi misery, intelligence,xertion , judgmen t, memory, dexterity, and useful knowledge .It produces expiration and inspiration , c losing and open ing the

yelids, understandi ng, reflection, consideration, memory, the

xercise ofthe arts, and performs the action ofthe senses.

The mind (manah) is a qual ity or power of the soul by whichthe person thinks and reasons. It is incomprehens ible

, and is knownby its ac tions through those ofthe senses. . As it is single only, one

'

sense can act at the same tim e, as it requires the presenc e ofthe

mind for the comprehension of any thing, and the understanding

with ideas ofits own operation s.

The mind is chiefly situated in the head, between the eyebrows ;o thers suppose that it is in the heart, and resembles the light ofalamp, by whi ch the person knows, sees, hears, tastes, andmoves.

It proc eeds from itself, as the silk worm weaves its thread from it

self, and forms its own house, which it regulates and in whi ch the

d ifferen t qual ities (gun s) are produced. When disposed to separate

from the body it is drawn back by these qualities, as a loadstoneretains a piec e of iron , by their mutual influences in which situat i on it remains immoveable. ( Tan tra) .

Some Pundits say that the soul (J iva'

tma and the mind (manah) ,are the same essence as there can be no soul without , mind, nor

n ind without the soul .

The five elements form the five organs of sense, ( Indriya) as the

J 2

.V

l

nose, ears; the five objects:of sense v

as sound

smell, 8 m. ;,and the five perceptivejudgments. Above these is placedthe mind, wh ich is incomprehen sible by them, and

- is alon e rendered

evidentythrough t he action ofthe sen ses. These are deranged by too

great or too little exercise, while moderate exerc ise retains them in

From these remarks it appears that the soul, the emanation from

the ‘ deity, un ited with - the mind; and senses, perform all the vitakr

actions of. the body. The body, m ind,‘

and souLare considered,

the refore, as. the three pillars wh ich support the living system.

CHAPTER . VII.

.Na ture q)" Temp eramenfs.

The opinion of the Hindus as to the formation an d condition

of-the world afforded .a natural means of explai ni ng the tempera

men ts, or p eculiar qualities, of the body. The predominance of

onc o r more ofthe humours and the qualities ofgoodn ess, passion ,

and in ertness, explain ed the pe culiarities of habit, and charac ter

and, as more shades were observed, in these the simple excess of

one ormore ofthese agen ts, were explain edby their peculiar mixtures

which produced the dispositions ofthe Gods , sages, demon s, and the

lower an imals. The latter being on ly supposed to be inferior states

ofthe an ima l body, which in a higher condition form -man . Th ese

exp lain the theory of the temperamen ts found in Hindu Medic al

works.

At the time ofthe mixture of semen and female blood whateverhumour, whether ,

air, bile, and phelgm, is in excess produces that

particular t emperament. Henc e . there are seven temperamen ts,one being produced by. an excess o fair, an other of bile , and a third

of,ph,legm a fourth, fifth, and sixth, from an excess of'two ofthese

humours and-

a seventhl

temperament is produced by an excess of.

threew

humours, air, bile and phlegm.

1 . When air is in excess the p erson is not inclin ed to sleep,'

er

to,

becomewarm. His dispos’

ition ie bad; a nd he becomes a thief is ,

proud, and has no honor is always singing and dancing ; his hands

and feet split, his hair .and ,nai_ls are dry, and he .isalways angry and

bo isterous. He speaks‘

untruths, h e is always grinding his teeth and

biting his nails, he is always impatient, is not a firm . friend, is

changeable; andforgets.good:,actions. Hisb ody is. slender . and dry,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

78

ofindividuals are either Satwa, raja, or tama ; that is good,

passionate, or in ert .0

When the qualities of the Gods predominate i n the embryo, the

following will b e the indications. When the qualities of the God

Bramba predominates in the body, the person will remain clean ,

religious, and learn ed in the Vedas is charitable, hospitable, per

forms c eremon ies, and prays to his Guru .

Ifthe quality of Indra be in excess in the body at conception

the individual will be great, magestic , and powerful, and employ

many dependan ts.

If the qualities of n eptun e Va rana ) be in exc ess he is always

desirous ofcool things, is patien t under suffering, is of a yellowish

colour, and hi s hair is like that ofa lion . He speaks pleasan tly or

kindly.

The qualities of the God of riches (Kuvera ) predominating,

the person w ill be a peace maker, have much wealth, have

many children , will be careful, rich, and fond of collecting

wealth .

With the disposition ofthe God ofmusic ( Gandd/Larva ) predomi

nates, the person will have a desire for good smelli ng thi ngs, and

flowers, and will be always wishing to dan ce, sing, and play.

The disposition of the angel of death ( Yama ) , or judge after

death, are as follows The person acts agreeable to orders, and actsproperly, has no fear, has memory, is always clear, is not angry, is

not ignoran t, has no hatred.

The person with a disposition of the sages (R ishis) is alwaypronoun cing the names of the Gods ; follows the orders of the ,

shastres, and always remains pure and prays frequen tly. He has

much kn owledge, especially of the arts. When the Satwa gun

predominates in the embryo, the individual wil l possess these quali ties.

The badin disposition are those in whom the quali ties ofthe demons

(Asuras) predominate . These person s will be very rich, and in spireterror they are great warriors, fierce, and always inclin ed to oppresspeople . The eat once a day, and require good things and n ever

perform the usual c eremon ies, on such occasions.

With the quali ties of Serp en ts, such person s are always hot,are jugglers, fearful, fierce, forget persons, and do not act fairly.

B irds. A person wi th this disposition is not inclin ed to changehis work indulges in lust, is always eating, angry, and restless.

Bakhyasa or Gian ts. Such a person is constant to one work,‘

he

produces fear, and calumniates, acts unfairly to others, and has

much pride.

79

Pi/zsé ch or devil . The person alwayswan ts to eat the fragmentsof others meals, is of a hot disposition rejoices in wickedness, iscourageous, and has no shame .

Preta (demon ) . His disposition is difli cul t to discover . The per

son is always lazy, and always wishing to act improperly, is covetous,and is not gen erous. The above six disposition have much passion .

Persons with much ofthe qualities ofBeasts (Pas/ta g ana ) , have

a bad memory and act badly they are always dreaming that they arewith women do not work themselves, and en tice others from work .

One with the disposition ofF ish is always changing, has no sense,

is always fearful , always wan ts water, and will injure Others.

Men having the disposition of Trees, always wish to remain in

one place, are always eating, will n ot work.

A physician is to notice such dispositions,and in his practice to

act so as to remove an excess, or in crease a deficiency.

CHAPTER VIII.

Ag es.

There are three ages, chi ldhood (Balya) , manhood (madhya) , anddecrepitude childhood extends to the 1 5 th year,and is distingui shed by three stages

a . Period of suckling to 1 year.

6 . The period in which m ilk and rice are the food which extendsto the second year.

c . When the food is rice which extends from the 3rd to the 1 5th

year, during which time Phlegm is in execs

2nd. Manhood (madhya) extends from the 1 6 th to the 70th year ;and is divided in to four periods.

a . Vridd/zi or growth, which extends from the l 6 th to the 20th

6. Jauvana . From the 20th to the 30th year.

c . Sampzlrna tc’

z,from the 3oth to the doth year when all

the hum ours, senses, strength, (bala) are in their full developemen t .d. Ha

’

m’

, from the 40 th to the 7oth year ; when all the powersofthe organs are gradually dimin ishing. Bile is at this period inexcess.

3rd. Decrepitude Varddkakya ) extends from the 7oth year tillthe person ’

s death during which the humours,sen ses, strength, and

an imation dimi n ish daily. The musc les become soft,and flaccid,

the hair turns gray, and falls off, the body becomes bent, and the

80

person is afflicted with coughing, asthma, and other such ‘

diseases.

He cannot perform any’

work and other sign s ofdecrepitude appear ;like an old house in the rainy season with many props. In this

period oflife, air is in excess, and n ervous diseases prevail.It is supposed the male at 25

, and the female at 1 6 years ofage,

arrive at their perfection in figure and strength.

In youth and in old age, the application of fire, caustics (actual

andpoten tial cauteries) , blisters, and the use ofstrong purgativesare to be avoided ; or when

“

requir ed they are to be admin istered in

a weaker form than usual, and adm in istered by degrees. There arelikewise fat, thin , and middle sized individuals. In the first the

humours are to be dimin ished in the second in creased and in the

third the humours are to be preserved in the same state . Some of

these thin persons are strong, and fat indiv iduals weak . Among

all the principles ofour treatmen t the strength ofthe person should

first be observed as without it, the adm in istration ofmany media

cines, and the performance ofOperations is improper .

CHAPTER IX.

On dea th (flfrityu)

Death is the separation of the soul from the body ofwhich there

are one hundredand one ways in whi ch a personmaydie one ofwhich

a t the time appo in ted, is natural death, whi ch takes plac e about the

hundredth year ofage the others are acciden tal, which occur

from numerous causes, as bad living, in temperance, poison s, fire,lightn ing, drown ing, sin , &c . these are to be guarded against

-by care, medic ines, and prayers. Man is like a coachman driving

his own carriage ; if thi s be well made, and if he con tinue to drive~ cautiously, it wi ll go a long time ; but, if he drives it upon bad

roads, the wheels will get injured, and the carriage will be soon

worn out .

Should he indulge too much in the gratification of the sen ses, he

will die like a deer, which is supposed to be deluded to its destruction

by the sweet sounds of the lute which the hun ters use should he

indulge in lust, like the Elephan t in sight, like the butterfly in ap

proaching the lamp ; in smell, like the bee which is inclosed and

crushed in the flower, whi ch has attracted it by its smell in taste,like the fish by the fisherman

’

s hook : So beware of indulging too

much in any of the pleasures “

of sense, else it will lead, in like

mann er, to your destruction

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

82

is dead that this one is themurderer, and that body the murdered

but these are foolish exclamations I The body is alone destroyed,

not the soul as it only changes its position, like a person who

casts of his worn-out garments. Cutting instruments may wound

him, water may purify him, and air may dry him up, but the soul

remains always the same. Those who are born must die, and who

ever dies must be born again and as the elements were invisible

and separated, before the formation of the body, in like manner

they are again separated and dispersed upon its dissolution .

At the moment ofdeath the material elemen ts of the body separate, and the vital soul, which has an invisible body ( ling er sharia

-a ) ,

r esembles the form ofthe body it had inhabited, and retains theorgans ofsense and ofaction . On separating from on e

, it joins itselfto another, and according to the actions the person had performedin his former state ofexistence, so will be his future condition .

As a seed of an inferior or superior order,so wi ll the plant be

thus may the soul an imate a man who will grow old in a de

formed and diseased body with a mind wicked and miserable.This un ion of the liberated soul, and its juncture with the seedofanother body, takes place immediately as a leech on leaving onepiece of grass, must immediately attach itself to another. Thusthat immutable Power, by acting and reposing alternately, revivifiesand destroys, in eternal succession, this whole assemblage ofimmoveable and locomotive creatures.

Beatitude is to be obtain ed by the coercion ofthe members, by

abstain ing from hurting and afflicting, or giving pain to sen tientcreatures when the individual becomes fit for immortality.

”Menu,

60 . When the vital soul has been purified by the good deeds whichhave occurred in the body, it is absorbed into that supreme essence,the divine soul ofall beings, whichwithdraws his energy, andplac idlyslumbers. Menu adds Let him not wish for death let him not

wish for life let him expec t his appoin ted time, as a hired servantexpects his wages.

”

(Chap . VI. 45, page

THERAPEUTICS .

TheHindu sages suppose that diseases are either produced by sins e

committed in a former state of existence by derangemen ts ofthe

humours or by the combination ofthese two causes. The former

class can only be removed by c ertain sacrifices, prayers, penances,and gifts the second class only, are those whi ch may be removed bythe employmen t ofremedies. By thi s means, the physic ian knowsthat when a di sease does not yield to the employmen t ofproper remedies, it must belong to the first class ofdiseases, and will be onlycured by the me ans prescribed in such cases. The third class ofdi

seases are produced by a combination ofsins and derangement ofhumours ; these require for their cure the employment of prayers,and ofa proper course of medicin e ,The means employed by the physician for curing diseases, will be

considered under the fo llowing heads.

l stly—Hygeology or reg imm .

2ndly—Ma teria Medica and Pharmacy, or preparation ofMedi

cal agen ts and,

3dly—Surg ery, or all manual applications for the cure of inju

ries and diseases.

CHAPTER I.

Hygeologgj.

The Hindu Legislators appear to have been convinced, at a veryearly period, ofthe importanc e ofa knowledge ofthe means ofpreserving health, as we find various laws were enacted for this purpose and in order to enforc e these precepts among a rude people,incapable of appreciating their importance, anddisinclined to obey

K 2

84

them,religion was employed to afford its powerful assistance . This ex

plain s the numerous precepts ofHygeine which we find in the sacred

works ofthe most anc ien t people andwhich n ecessarily vary in their

nature with the climate, and the charac ter and habits ofthe people .

In the sacred works of the Hindus, these laws are so numerous

that it is impossible that’

any single individual should follow them.

On this account they are probably more gen erally n eglected than

they would have been had the catalogue been less num erous. A fact

much to be regretted, since the climate requires so much more at

t en tion to Hygeine than a more temperate one . The most importan t

Hygeian prec eptswill be considered under the heads of relative and

p ersonal precepts.

SECTION 1 .

R elative duties.

Clima te ofIndia—The extensive coun try known among the eu

cients by the title of India wi thin the Ganges, has been famous,

from the earliest ages, for the wisdom of, its sages,the richn ess of

its produc tions, and the fertility of its soil . It is now nam ed Hin

dustan and is bounded by the R iver Indus on the west, and north

by the Himalaya moun tains on the south by the Indian oc ean , and

on the east by the hills and forests ofAssam. From the magnifi

c en t range ofMoun tains in the north, Hindustan consists mostly of

exten sive plain s, which possess a rich and black loam, con sisting

ofclay with a considerable proportion ofsilic ious sand, fertili zed byvarious salts, and by decayed an imal and vegetable matterwhere it is

watered by the Ganges. In o ther parts ofthe Panjab, in Bengal, and

the adjacen t provin c es, there is a con siderable exten t of clayey soil.

In Sind and Guj erat the soil is sandy, and in Malwa a rich deep black

mould prevails. The soil is gen erally unproductive in Gundwana,

andOrissa and n ear the coasts, oftheMalabar andCoromandel sides,

the soil is sandy and gen erally very poor, whil e the Table land of

the Pen in sula ofIndia is generally fertile . The eastern part ofHin‘

dustan is in tersected bynumerous branches of large rivers, which

The word(

H ind, from whence H indu and Hindustan are derived, is

of Pers1a_n or1g1 n, from Hindu, black, or dark and st

’

han , a place s 0 1‘

country o fblacks . O thers suppo se it may have been derived from;thepup posed son ofHam

,the son ofNoah.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

86

is to be followed, when the chang e will not produce any bad

If the disease is recen t, and the individual strong , it will be cured

easily ; but this will be retarded or promoted, by the predisposition

ofthe climate and season to affect such diseases. A complicated

disease will always be cured with great difficulty. When one

remedy does not produce the expected good effect, another should

be substituted for it . But ifa remedy does some good, it should

be continued, in preference to a hundred otherswhich have not been

tried. Ifno other treatment can be devised in such severe diseases,the one adopted should be continued. The remedies must be varied

accordi ng to the climate, season, age, and constitution of the

affected person . Ifthis is not observed, bad effects will follow, and

other disorders will be produced.

Time (kala) like a God is produced perfect in root, st em, and

branches. It has n either beginn ing nor end or is like a wheel whichis always turning. It produces life and death, and the good and

bad qualities ofevery thing, exceptin g that indistinguishable something, called the ultimate elements ofthe world (Paramanu), fromwhence another world will be ul timately formed.

2nd. Of Time and ofthe seasons. Time is divided as follows1 5 winks ofthe eye are equal to a kashthai ; 30 kashtha l Kala 20

kalas 1 Muhfirta ; and 30 Muhfirtas to a day and a n ight 1 5 days

1 Pakhsa or fortn ight one of which is the dark (Krishna) and theother light ( Shukla) 2 Paksha 1 month (masa) ; 2 mon ths are equalto one R itu or season ; 3 R itu 1 Ayana ; 2 Ayana 1 year and five

yearsmake one Yug . The sun forms the di stinguishing qualities ofthe seasons. It dries the Earth, which is softened by the moon ; and

with the assistance of wind it promotes the growth, and life of

organ ized matter.S easons ( ritu) are divided into uttarayana, when the sun is sup

posed to be north of the equator ; and Dakhsimiyana, the six

months when it is supposed to be south ofthe equator.The seasons are six in number, each consisting of two siderial

months each. The succession of them is always the same ; but thev icissitudes of climate in them will depend on the position oftheEquinoctial colure . Sometimes the year is reckon ed by Ayana,from September (Shreivan ), and January (magha) .

a . ColdMouths, Shishira, (Magha and Pha'

lguna or January and

February) , during whichwarm clothing is to be used. Air is in excessduring this season when the broths of animals, fish, amphibiousanimals, and substances mixed wi th ghee, are to be taken . The win ecalled S idhu is to be used, and hon ey mixed with water ; milk and

different sweetmeats fat, and newrice andwarmwater is always to

87

be used. The body shouldbe well rubbedwith oil, which should also

be appli ed to the head. The person should sleep in a room n ear the

c en tre ofthe house, so as to be warm, and removed from the wind;

Warm clothing should always be used during this season . The

food should be in small quan tities, and hot and dry substances

should be avoided.

6 . Sp ring Mon ths, Vasan ta (March and April) . All orga.

nized bodies are gen erated during thi s, or the spring season . The

air is then clear, flowers are numerous, and the coun try looks beautiful , with the new leaves on the trees ; andman is cheered by the

song ofbirds and the hum of bees. The south wind now begins toblow. In this season the phlegm predominates, and its diseases ap

p ear . The in ternal fire is dimin ished. Emetics and purgatives shouldbe employed, and heavy, oily, and sweet substan ces are to be avoid

ed, and sleeping in the day time should also be guarded against.Bodily exercise should be used. Tepid water should be used forevery purpose, and the body should be rubbed with sandal and other

fragran t woods. Use barley and wheat, the flesh ofdeer, hares, and

wild fowls. Drink sidhu and Mada (win e) and reside in a. gar

den with women.

0 . Hot Mon ths, Ghrislima, (May and Jun e) , The hot season, inwhich the rays ofthe sun are powerful, with warm wind from the

south, which makes this season oppressive and unpleasan t,increases

air, produces debility, and affects even the understanding. The earthb ecomes hot and dry, the rivers dimin ish, the water is warm and light

,

and the earth appears to smoak . Birds and deer proceed in search.ofwater and the juice ofplan ts is raised, and their qualities aredimin ished creepers, grass, and the leaves oftrees are dimin ishedand fall off, dried and decayed.

During thi s season the diseases of air prevail. In it use cool

liquids and food prepared with ghee. Drink differen t sherbets,and use broth ofwild animals and birds eat rice with milk and

g hee by which means a person will not lose his strength. Littlewin e is to be used, and always mixed with much water. Salt, ac id,and hot things are to be av oided. Do not take much exercise.

R eside in a cool garden wi th a large tank and flowers avoid ex

c esses in ven ery. Sleep during the day in a cool room, and at

n ight repose in the upper rooms,and use the hand p anklia (fan )

sprinkled with sandal wood and water.d. The R ainy season, Va rsiia (July andAugust) . During this sea

son the sky is loadedwith clouds the wind easterly,withmuch lightn ing and thunder new grass and leaves appear the rainbow is beau

tiful numerous graceful creepers ofthe class ofconvolvulus appear,

“

88

ofvariouscolours, white, blue, and pink .

’

The banksof the rivers;and the trees upon them are broken away by the force ofthe torren tsthe tanks and lakes are adorn ed by varied coloured lilies much

clear water con tinues upon the surfac e ofthe earth, and vegetationproceeds rapidly. There are many clouds whi ch obscure the sun

and plan ets, and much rain falls. Towards the end of the seasonthere is li ttle thunder. The clouds dimin ish the light and heat

,

and wi th the water ofthe moon (dew) , reduce the juices of living

an imals, and their strength. Water is impure,dur ing thi s season

the body is soft, the cold damp air affects the strength of the in ter

nal fire, and the food is burn t in the body, by the in creased

quan tity ofbile .In Varslia the appetite is dimi n ished by the derangemen t of

the humours, caused by the heat and moisture ; and n ew water

has an ac id quality. The food should be sparingly given , and

should n either be too hot nor very cold sleeping in the day time

and exposure to the climate are to be avoided, as also the use of

river water. Too much exerc ise, exposure to the sun, and ven ery

are to be avoided. Water mix ed with hon ey is to be used, and in

a cloudy day take food mixed with salt,acids

,and ghee barley,

wheat, and old rice are to be used, with the broths ofwild an imalsand fowls. The win e of grapes, and fresh water whi ch has beenboil ed, are to be drunk . An oin t the body with fragran t oil, and bathe

daily use light and white clothes, and live in a high and dry house.

5 The ill oist Season , Shara t, ( September and October) . Duringthis season the sky is overcast with whi te clouds, and the tanks are

full ofwater lilies. The earth is covered with salt, and many trees

are rooted up and di e . The surface ofthe earth appears irregular.

During thi s season the sky is clean , with white broken clouds

the air is‘

sultry, the moisture on the ground dries, the sun’

s rays

increase in strength ; and by the changes in temperatur e bile and

cough produce diseases. In thi s season the water is pure, and may

be used freely for bathing, and for drinking. Vegetation is

vigorous, the country beautiful and food produced during this

season is not good, but is improved by keeping, if it admits of this.

The lakes are covered with lilies, reeds, and white flowers: Ducks,8tc . , abound.

Diseases ofthe Bile prevail in this season . The food and drinkto be used should be light, cool and sweet with ton ic and bitterarticles. Such food as wild fowls, hares, and an imals ofthe same

kind mutton is also good, with ric e, barley, wheat, and the like .

Use purgative medic in esandblood-letting whi le exposure to the sun

and heat and n ight air are to be avoided, more particularly. the east

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

90

sire ofk

the“

writer to explain all diffi culties by superstitious fanc

' ies thus when ever a child is attacked with sickn ess,it is supposed

to be produced by the attack ofc ertain devils such as graha,asura,

rakhyas, bhi’

i ta, 8 m. to relieve which differen t prayers (man tras)and c eremon ies are performed, with gen erally the addition ofcertain

remedies.

When a disease continues long, the situations of plan ets and

stars are calculated 3 by whi ch the long con tinuanc e of the disease

is explain ed, and for the reliefofwhich certain ceremon ies and gifts

are performed.

The heat ofthe fire cures diseases of air and phlegm . It also re

moves passing pain s. It promotes the dej ections,and removes

shivering and discharges from the nose, mouth, and eyes, It in

creases the diseases of blood and bile, and during sleep retain sthe humours in a good state it improv es the colour of the body,strengthens it, removes dozing, and promotes happin ess and in g

ternal warmth .

The heat ofthe sun when very strong, is drying and promotesperspiration , fain tn ess, giddin ess, thirst, and the heat of the

b ody.It in creases the bad smell of the body, deepens the dark

colour of the skin ; and increases the diseases of the bile, and

blood.

Shadows remove the bad effects ofheat, as they have a sedative,cooling, and pleasan t quality.

The smoke of fire increases bile and air.

Dew and mist in crease phlegm and air .

Moonlight cures diseases of blood and bile .Rain increases strength, is cooling, increases semen

, sleep, langnor, phlegm, and air.

Easterly wind increases phlegm,is cold

,has a saltish quality, and

is heavy. It dimin ishes appetite,increases lazin ess, the heat of

the body, and strength . It produc es diseases of the blood and

bile, is bad for those with sores, or who are affected with poison,

and diseases ofphlegm . It removes the derangem en ts ofair. It isgood for persons fatigued, and it dimin ishes the form ofconsumptionproduced by phl egm. It also give strength, and softens the body.

A Southerly wind is pleasan t, does n ot produce heat, and has a light

and sedative quality. It is good for the eyes and strength, it

cures diseases of blood and bile, and the air is not deranged by it.

Westerly wind increases in ternal heat, dries the body, and di

min ishes the bulk ofthe body and strength it produces a roughn essofthe skin , dimin ishes the strength, and health. It dries up phlegmand fat . Northerly wind is soft, cooling, light, agreeable, and slightly

9 1

sedative . It promotes the dejections, and increases diseases ofair,bile

, and phlegm . In healthy individual s it increases the phlegm, and

the strength. It is good for severe cough with bloody sputa, for

diseases from poisons, and does n ot derange the humours.

The air from Pankhas, removes fain tn ess, thirst, perspiration,fatigue, and heat . The Tail Pankha ( common hand pankha) and

.chowry and cloth pankahs, cure deranged air, bile, andphlegm are

cooling, and in crease happin ess.

There are three prevaili ng season s in Bengal,the cold, hot, and

rainy seasons. From the end ofFebruary, and during March and a

part ofApril, may be con sidered as spring mon ths,and are the most

agreeable ofanyofthe year . Towards the end ofMarch,and during

the mon ths ofApril, May, and a part of Jun e the weather is veryhot and in the northern and more in land provinces a violent hotwind blows from the west, loaded with almost imperc eptible par

ticles ofsand. In this season the weather is so oppressive as to

confin e the inhabitan ts to their houses, during the great heat of

the day. Vegetation is destroyed, and these provinces are reduc ed

to a burn ing tract of sand while the air of the n eighbouring

moun tains remains cool and pleasan t, during these hot mon ths.

In the upper provinces the rain s begin in April and May but

in the plains they do not commence till the begin n ing ofJun e, and

con tinue to full till the end of July. The rain disperses the

accumulated heat, which would otherwise be insupportable . During

the months of August and September the rain falls less frequen tlyand copiously, and the long day and high altitude ofthe sun

, with

an atmostphere loaded with moisture, render the weather excessivelyOppressive and sultry particularly when the air is calm

, which is of

frequen t occurren ce, as the Monsoon changes at this time . The coldseason commences in the mon th ofOctober, when dews are heavythe cold in creases, and dur ing the mon ths of November

,Dec ember,

and January, it is often in tense in Bengal and Behar. In these provinces the cold has gen erally a damp disagreeable feel, whereas, in

the northern and western provinces, snow and ice are common on

the Moun tains, and the air is dry and bracing.

From such an extensive coun try, and variety of soil and climate,

the vegetable and an imal productions are ofthe most varied des

c ription in the differen t latitudes, heights, and exposures and man

himselfaffords great varieties in his physical and men tal powers i n

the differen t situation s and c limates in which he resides. In the

Northern Provinces of Hindustan , the men are tall, strong, and

ac tive, and are distinguished by their courage and men tal quali ties ;as we advance to the more sultry and moist climate ofBengal, the

L 2

92

inhabitan ts become of lower stature, possess greater agility, and are

c apable of enduring great fatigue, have li ttle courage or mental

aptitude, but great cunn ing and reten tiven ess. They are gen erally

ofa fair olive colour, handsome in their youth, and in after life in

proportion to their rank, and healthy and guarded occupation but

become ofa dark olive colour and plain exterior, in proportion as

they inhabit low and damp houses, live on unhealthy food, and are

much exposed to labour, and to the in clemency of the weather.

In gen eral the head and fac e ofthe Hindu are small and oval, the

nose and lips promin en t and well formed, the eyes black, and the

eyebrows regular, and full

if. The females are distinguished for the

grac efuln ess of their forms

,the softn ess of their skin s, their long

and black hair, dark eyes, and delicate persons. These peculiarities

are marked in youth, but rapidly fade . The fairn ess of the skin

also differs—dependi ng on that of the paren ts, and on the occu

pation and exposure ofthe individual to the sun, 8m.

SECTION II.

Personal Duties.

The practition er should give instructions to persons not only as to

themanner ofcuring, but also ofpreven ting the occurrenc e ofdiseaseT,The following remarks will be con sidered under the heads of

duties—a rising from bed in the morn ing 6 cle an ing the mouth

0 anoin ting the body d exerc ise,shampooing, and rubbing the

body e bathing,f clothing, 9 food, and It sleeping it.

The i ntelligence ofthe Bengalis is much more marked in the higherclasses than amo ng the lower. In the former, the brisk and intelligen tboy, that re c e ives in struc tion readily, is fic kle and re stless ; and from theshort period he attends school, from the enervating n ature of the

c limate , and the vitiating influence ofHinduSociety, is too often transformed into t he stupid and sen sual man .

TBodies are cleansed by water, the mind is purified by birth, thevital spirit by theology and devotion

,and the understanding, by know

ledge (Mann . p . 1 6 1 . ch. v. § 1 09 .

1 So careful were the Hindu authors ofthe regimen ofthe sick, thatthey even noted the hour at which the disease commenc ed, the length of

t ime to b e devoted to sleep in difl'

eren t disease s ; how often the pa

t ient is to clean his tee th, and wash his mouth ; and the kind of house

in which he should reside . Such particulars captivate the ignorant patient and his friends, who fancy the prac tition er possesses a great extent ofknowledge from the care with which these trifles are attended to, whilethey often neglect important indications.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

94“

made much use'

of’

oil and it was considered by them as amark

of esteem,and honor to offer oil to those that wen t to see them

, so

that they might anoint their heads The modern method ofano in t

ing the head at the coronation ofkings is derived from this custom.

The hot climate and slight clothing, and exposure to a burn ing

sun, increases the action of the cutan eous vessels, and renders the

skin hard and dry and ifperfec t cleanlin ess is n ot observed, it be

comes in crusted with its own discharges, and with foreign matter

which irritates the part, and preven ts the proper ac tion ofthis impor

tan t organ . To preven t such a con sequenc e, o il is ordered to be rubbed over the surfac e before it has been washed, by whi ch it is ren

dered soft, and plian t it also promotes an equable perspiration, and

an exc essive degree is avoided which would weaken the body.

When ever the Hindu feels indisposed, the body is anoin ted with oil,

on the same princ iple that Solomon, in his Proverbs, speaks ofadm i

n istering oin tmen t, which rejoices the heart, which may be a healing medi c in e to the navel, 8 m

”. In this case the oil wasmixed with

o ther vegetable oils to render its effects more perman en t . The

metalli c oxyds were sometimes added so as to form o in tm en ts,lin imen ts

,and plasters. The latter medicin es giving them a due

consistenc e by their drying effects on the oils.

Several oilsare preparedwith those medicinal plan tswhich are used

internally, and are applied externally in differen t cases ofdisease

e spec ially in old fevers, spasmodic, paralytic, rheumatic diseases,in affec tions of the mind, as madn ess, 8m. and these oils are sup

posed by the Hindus to be thus used more advan tageously than

when given in ternally. Medicines keeping the feet and the outlets

of the body clean , promote health, and are good for the eyes and

skin . After the person has adjusted his dress, prayers are to be

oflered up to the gods.

d. Exercise increases strength, prevents and cures diseases, by

equalizing the humours ; it preven ts fatn ess and lazin ess, and strength

ens the firmn ess of the body. It removes grief, increase s the

in ternal fire, and the body becomes lighter, more vigorous, and.

ready to work. Ifdaily used, it preven ts the bad effects of indi

gestible and unusual articles of food, and fat food so desired.

Walking is always to be used, particularly by those persons

who live on rich food such exerc ise is to be used even ing and

morn ing,especially in the cold and spring mon ths, whi le fatigue

is avoided.

Person swi thdiseasesofthe blood andbile, with fever, difficulty of

breathing, dizzin ess, asthma, fatigue, and all kinds ofcough, and

See Luke vu. v. 46 .

95

dryness of the body, should avoid exercise . When the mouth isalways dry, with difficulty of breathing ; in di seases of the air andbile, in boyhood and old age, after eating, and before the food isthoroughly digested, or when there are sores upon the body, exercise is to be avoided. When reduced in flesh by lust, such exercisetires and increases fever, phlegm and thirst and increases diseasesof the blood and bile . Should much exercise be taken ,

it producescough, fever, and vomiting after exercise quietude is proper

, as itin creases strength, cures a superabundance of fat, and removes thefeeling of fatigue .

e . Sbampooing cures diseased phlegm, air, and fat ; the membersare retained healthy, as well as the skin, and it increases in ternalheat . Rubbing the body is pleasant, cures amasia, improves the

skin , and the body feels light it also cures itching, small pimples,diseased air, and impurities in the abdomen . Ifthe body he rubbed with a brush, the fire of the skin will be increased, and perspi

ration then cures i tching, and small tubercles . The nails, beard,mustachoes, and hair are to be out every fifth day . The hair is tobe combed and cleaned, which improves health .

f. Bathing . There are several kind of baths (sweda) . The fol

lowing are the most common - l st . Coldbathing removes the inor

dinate heat ofthe body, fatigue, perspiration , itchiness, thirst, andpromotes happiness and pleasure . It removes the impurities of

the body, clears the senses, removes drowsiness and sin, increasessemen, retains the blood pure, and increases the internal heat . If

warm water is poured on the head, it is not good for the eyes ; but

the use of cold water strengthens vision . Bathing in very cold

water in the win ter deranges phlegm and air, and during the hotseason warm bathing increases bile and blood. Bathing is not

proper in diarrhoea (atisar) , in the beginn ing of fever, in diseases

of the ear, or in those ofthe air, in swellings of the abdomen, in

indigestion , and after eating . Bathing the feet is to be used forremoving impurities, local diseases, and fatigue . It retains the

eyes clean ,increases semen, and preven ts the approach of devils .

Independent persons, such as rich merchan ts, bankers, talukdars

and others, generally bathe at 10 or 1 1 o’

clock, and after performing these ceremon ies they breakfast . Shop ~ keepers, day-labourers,&c . eat, at 1 0 o

’

clock, a handful of rice which has been moistenedfor halfan hour in water, or a handful of gram moisten ed, and donot generally bathe till after 1 2, 2 , or even 3 o

’

clock . There aresome who bathe twice or thrice a day, but they are few in number .This description applies to the male inhabitants of towns. The

higher class of females seldom bathe in rivers, but do so in

6

tanks, in their respective gardens ; or in warm water, between 1 0

and 1 1 o’

clock . Widows ofthe lower class are not strict, and donot observe the rules of the

I

Shastras regarding bathing .

*

The cold bath is used in some inflammatory fevers, and in mad

n ess (unmada) and locally in some external inflammatory swellings

(vrana) .

2nd. Avagafia swetla, or warm water bath . It is prepared with

several medicinal plants, and is used either locally or generally for

relieving pain, in differen t kinds offevers, spasmodic affections, &c .

3rd. Vapour Baths (Us-fund sweda) are much employed by the

Bengalis, more particularly for removing pain . They are made byheating a quantity of water in an earthen pot, over which a lid had

been placed. The patien t is first well rubbed with oil, and then

sits on a chair over the pot of hot water, with a covering of

clothes thrown over both . When any particular part of the bodyis pain ed, this only is exposed to the steam bath, and in other cases

medicinal plan ts are added to increase the good effects ofthe remedy,as milk, ni

’

m leaves, and other such drugs.

4th . Up ana’

fia sweda or hot cataplasms ofmedicinal plants .

These are made into a paste, heated, and applied locally to relievepain . In other cases these medicines are applied locally, with hotvapour . A tube is used to convey the vapour to the diseased part .5 th . p a sweda is the frequen t application of a hot hand, a

heated cloth, or a bag filled with hot sand or saltHr It is usedfor relieving local pain , and for promoting the warmth of the body,when it becomes cold, in any disease .After bathing apply Sarina, or an timony, to the edges of the

eyelids which improves the sight, clears the itchiness, or any

unhealthy humors of the eyes, and prevents the bad effects ofthe

The Hindu men and women may be seen proceeding towards thesacred Ganges in the cool of the day, the on e with his small copperIota, the other with her antique earthen pot perched upon her head,amidst the rustling of the beautiful palm trees, which almost hide the

graceful cupolas of the n eighbouring temples. After washing theirheads with some of the mud and water of the Gang es, they proceedto clean their teeth with the branch of a tree which they have broughtwith them . They then wash their bodies, using mud for soap, fill theirvessels with water, and return home .

1‘ In some cases the earth is heated, and a plantain leafis extended

over it, upon which the person lies.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

98

usually kept clean , and is covered above, in days offestivity, when

the prescribed ceremon ies are performed to their tutelar Gods,plac ed in a separate house on the north side ofthe square . In some

parts ofthe coun try their houses are made of sun -burn t or fire

burn t bricks, and the houses are often two, or more stories high.

In many parts of the coun try the houses or vi llages are fortified

to prot ect them from wild beast s, and from their en emies.

i . D iet. The Hindu medical wr iters usually commenc e the cure

ofa disease by arranging the diet that is to be followed by the sick

person . So much do the Hindu Physicians rely upon diet that theydec lare that most diseases may be cured by following carefully,dietetic rul es 9“

and if a patient does not attend to hi s diet, a

hundred good medicin es wi ll not remove the disease . The gen eral

ity ofdi seases being supposed to be produced by derangemen t ofthehumours, if one or more are morbidly in creased in quan tity, theirindications ofcure are commenced by promoting the just balanceof the elemen ts and humours, by a judic ious choice of alimen ts, andby such means as assist the vital pri nciple on the completion of

the assimilation . On this accoun t they have not on ly been carefulin describ ing the regimen, but also the food and drink for thedifferen t seasons, and even the vessels in which they should be

kept .

Food gives strength, and colour to the body, and the essen tial partDf life ( ojas) . It also supports the heat of the body, increases anddimin ishes the humours, retains these in their equilibrium keeps the

person happy, the senses active, and the memory netentive, whil eit supports life, and promotes longevity.

The differen t articles of food which are employed to nourishthe body will be con sidered under the head of gen eral remarks on

food derived from the vegetable, and an imal kingdoms with a few

remarks on condimen ts under which will be con sidered articlesderived from the min eral kingdom,

including water and medic inal

liquids. The form in which food is taken in to the body will vary itseffects upon the system but some articles offood are always wholesome, even from birth to old age ; as water

,milk

,ric e, ghee, 8 m.

A second kind is always dangerous to health as fire,escharotics, and

poisons ; the one burn ing the part, the second destroying it, andthe third killing the individual.

O r as Baglivi expresses the same Opinion, as the heading ofoue

of h is chapters de c iborum de le c tu, sive de me thodo curandl morbo s

quamplure s per o pportunum c iborum genus, sine ope remedi orum .

Op . omula, T . 1 1 p . 5 30 .

99

Some substances are injurious to the system when mixed and

prepared in a part icular mann er, when they become like poisonThus pumpkins, mushrooms

, bamboo-shoots, plumbs, dried vegetables, un leaven ed bread, goats or she eps flesh, pigs flesh

, salt, spirits,when eaten , or drank with milk, resemble po ison . Some timesartic les offood act on the htun ours favourably or unfavourably, ao

c ordi ng to the state ofthe body. On e artic le will be good for deran

ged air, and another bad for deranged bile, Ste . Again the state ofthe

article will modify its effects. R ed ric e, which grows in the cold sea

son ,wheat, barley, and other grain ofthe same kind are good, and pre

serve hea lth whereas rice which has sprouted, mas/i ka la’

y (Phaseolusradiatus) , fat, hon ey, milk, jagree, when eaten with the flesh of do

mestic or amphibious an imals, or with fish, are so bad as to resemble

poison . Milk with hon ey, and vegetables in gen eral should not be

used together . Pepper and a kind of vegetable called kakamachiare notto be used as also honey, and ho t water. When an imal

food is to be used, the bile is to be carefully evacuated, or it willderange the person ’

s health.

Butter-milk, w ith hon ey, ghee, a variety offishes, and the flesh

ofdeer, are;not to be eaten together fish and m ilk, or its prepara

tions, or fish and sugar,and its preparation s hogs-flesh prepared

with hon ey, are to be avoided plan tains with butter milk, curdled

m ilk,or milk with sour fruits, befor e or after eating

,are improper .

Pigeons fried with mustard oil hon ey mixed with rain water, and

kept in brass pots for ten days, should be avoided. These remarks

are particularly applicable to boys and strong persons, and those

who take violen t exercise .

2nd. Foodmay act unfavourably by the quantity which is taken .

Thus hon ey and ghee, oil and marrow, or hon ey and water, oil and

ghee,or fat, are bad when eaten in large and equal proportions.

3rd. The following mixtures ofarticles possessing certain tastes

are improper, as sweet and sour articles, sweet and salt, sweet and

pungen t, sweet and bitter substances, or bitter and salt articles.

Such mixtures should therefore he carefully avoided as they form

bad chyle, and thus the appetite 850 . is deranged. Such mixtures,

however, will not injure the heal th of the young and strong, those

who live in a pure air and take much exerc ise ; and those ao

customed to their use, by whom theymay be eaten in small quan tities

with impun ity. But in ordinary c ircumstances, when their bad

effec ts are felt, recourse must he had to the use of emetics and

purgatives, and such medicin es as have a tendency to equal ize the

humours. The artic les offood which are wholesome from mixture,and preparation are those which derang e air, and diminish bile . The

M 2

O

opposite articles offood which moderate air,and derange bile

, are

unwholesome . By improper mixtures wholesome articles of food

may become as poison s. But the kind of food to be used must bevaried according to the age, habits, and season s as well as to theindividual’s idiosyncrasy.

There are four forms in which food may be taken—one

kind - is taken without being chewed as drinks (pita) ; another is

lapped ( lirha) another sucked (chushya) and another kind offood

is chewed (katita) .According to Gharaka there are six varieties offood.

1 . Soft food (bhojya) as rl ce, Sac .

2 . Soft sweetmeats (bhakhya) .3 . Hard food (charbya) , that requires chewing to prepare it

for digestion .

4 . Drinks (Peya) .5 . Liquids that are lapped (lehya) .6 . Food that is sucked (Chfishya) , such as mangoes, sugar

can e, &c .

Food and medicin es are also divided in to six differen t classes,according to their effects on the senses. These are in to sweet, ac id,salt, bitter, pungen t, and astringen t . These tastes are however,modified by disease .

a . Sweet articles of food increase the semen , the milk, and thefat while they improve the eyesight, asthma

, worms, and affections

ofthe throat . They also in crease phlegm,the strength of the tissues,

and humours retain the body in health, and promote longevity.

These substances are good for the soul, and cooling for the body.

They cure derangemen ts in air and bile, promote appet ite, and

are useful in correcting the effec ts ofpoison .

b. Ac id articles offood promote appetite, are cooling before, and

heating after eating. They are agreeable to the taste, promote digestion , and in crease bile and phlegm . They in crease the blood, and

restore irregulariti es and derangemen ts in the air, b ile, and phlegm .

When they have been often taken they produc e weakn ess, and

emac iation of the body, and sometimes they produce blindn ess

( nyctalopia) . Ac ids act quickly, andproduce itching, irruptiens overthe body, a paler of the skin , and a swelling of the body, withthirst

,fever

,and boils.

0 . Salt articles of food relax the bowels, promote digestion ,and increase appetite . They also promote perspiration, remove

derangemen ts of the air,bile, phlegm,

and blood ; produce a glossiness of the surfac e of the body, dimin ish or cure aphrodisia, arecooling, and heal sores. They are, however, had for the eyes and

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 02

E ng lish Sanscrit.

Pomegranate,Myrobalan ,Custard apple,Plumbs,Apples

,

Quin ce,Wood apple,Lemon ,

Mango,Hog plumb,A Species of Breadfruit tree

,

Karinda

Guava,Tamarinds,Rose apple,

Jack fruit,

Pine apple,

Cocoanut, (Cocos Nucifera Na’

rikela.

‘Date tree, Phoen ix dactylifera, Karjura.

Fan Palm,

{30

3118 11 8 flabeleifor Tala.

Pamplemus, Plan tain, 8 m.

The following varieties oforanges, lemon s, c itrons, are indi

genous to Hindustan , and were well kn own to the Greeks and

Romans. They increase bile, improve the appetite, and cure dys

pepsia .

There are several Varieties oforanges (Kamala) , but they are not

distinguished by differen t names.

There are differen t sorts ofLemons, (Nimbu,) such as Limpa’

ka,

Kagap , Narang i, Batabi, Kamala,8 m.

D rap es—These fruits are of the genus Amygdalus, 8 m.

Pri mes.—Apricot, Prunus Armenaica Cherry, P. Cerasus

Cucarbitaceousfruits or Gourds.

Water Melon, Cucumis Melo . Kharbuj.

Sweet Melon , C . Momordica, Phuti .Common Cucumber, C . Sativus, SashaB. or Khira. H.

Bottle Gourd, C . Lagenaria, Kadu.

Pumpkin, C . Pepo

, Kumra. B.

Pun ica Granatum, Darima.

Phyllan thus emblica, A'

malaka.

Ann ona squamosa, Sleshmataka

, or as.

Prunus, Badari .Pyrus, Simb l

’

tika .

Pyrus Cydon ia, Tahar .Feron ia Elephantum, Kapittha.

C itrus acida, Matulunga.

M Mangifera, Amra.

Terminalia Chebula, Haritaki.

Artocarpus Lacucha, (Rox,) Lakucha.

Carissa Carandas, Karamarda.

Psidium pyriferum, Parabata.

Tamarindus Indica, Amliké .

Eugen ia, Jamborosa Jambfil.

Artocarpus In tegri Kan thaphal or

folia, Kein tal .

Bromelia Ananas, Shatan etra .

103

Squash Gourd, C . Melopepo, Saphari Kumrzi .

Fig tree , C . C itrullus, Tarbaj.

These fruits have from the earliest times con stituted an impor

tan t part in the diet ofthe Hindus.

Veg etables. In general vegetables are not easily digested, as theyin crease air, bile, and phlegm, produc e worms

, and con stipate thebowels. They are rendered more wholesome when boiled and

season ed. If employed alon e for food they derange the system,

affec ting particularly the colour of the skin and eyes, and dimin ishing semen , blood, and memory.

The leaves of the chilu,bastaki

, sun islzarmaka, tandulig a

’

z, and

manddkap a rn i , are considered the most wholesome kind ofvegetables. They are usually prepared by being boiled in water

, friedin ghee, and then season ed with salt . 'In some cases they are

dressed with butter, and ton ic compounds called Tieta barga ;such as Prapunnara (a kind ofCassia) , Somareiji ( Serratula An thelmentica) , Patola (Tricosan thes dioecia) , Vairttaki, ( Solarium melongela or the egg plan t

,850 .

The Esculen t roots are very numerous. The following are the

chiefvarieties. The Arum Colocasia A. Marcrorhizon, and A. Pel

tatum the roots ofthe differen t varieties oflotus (Nymphoea Lotus),

( Shalt’

lk) Nelumbo (Padma) ; Yams (Dioscorea) ; Span ishpotatoes (Convolvulus Batatas) , beet root on ion ; garlick ; leeks ;white and red Carrots ; raddishes,

The generality ofEuropean pot and salad herbs are found indigenous in Hindustan . The following are a few of theseCauliflower (Brassica) , broccoli, parsley (apium petroselium) ,

spinage ( spinacea oleracea) , common lettuc e (Lactuca sativa) ,Garden cress (Lepidum sativum) , endive ( c ichorium endivia) ,mustard ( Sinapis n igra et alba) , wi th many others. The propertiesof each of these are given in the Hindu medical works, with theireffects on the differen t humours, and on diseases.

The Gramin ivorous seeds form a numerous class which affordthe chief article of diet to a large proportion of the inhabitan tsofAsia . The princ ipal varieties of corn and pulse were derivedfrom Asia, and they are peculiarly fruitful in Hindustan , and

from their hard con sisten ce they may be kept in a good statefor long periods. R ic e (oryza sativa) in the form of paddy,

when covered with its husk,in a dry situation will keep for

years perfec tly fresh and good, and may be transported from one

part of the coun try to another with great facility. A large population almost en tirely live on this grain , ofwhich there are numerous varieties. The shdli rice, when ofa red colour, cures diseased

104

air, bile, and phlegm clears the eyes, increases the strength,

semen , and urin e, and removes thirst . Atapa, or Sun -dried ric e

,in

.

creases the diseases of air, bile, and phlegm is heating

,in creases

the perspiration , alvin e evacuations and urin e . It is considered indi

gestible, and weaken s the body. When the plan t has been transplan ted, the rice is rendered lighter, and more easily digested.

New rice is _ heavy, increases phlegm, gives an Oleaginous ap

pearance to the body, and promotes the secretion ofsemen .

Old ric e is pleasan t to the taste, is drying, improves the

appetite and internal heat . It is light, and in creases air. The rice

of sixty days growth, which is produced in the rain s, or in the

mon ths ofAugust and September, is considered as forming the most

wholesome food and is called Shasli tikc’

z. A small red ric e, called

R aktaslzc’

zli, is con sidered wholesome and the kind calledKangulea ,

is con sidered good. There are twen ty 6ther varieties, which are

distinguished by the size, and colour ofthe grain .

Farc/i ed rice is much used, and is considered nourishing, increasing appetite, and curing the di seases ofphlegm . When the parchedrice has been preserved unhusked (khai ) it is consideredmore whole

some, increasing appetite, removing thirst, vomiting, dysen tery, andgreat fatn ess. It also removes the diseases ofbile and phlegm .

R ice-water, and ric e and m ilk, are also considered very whole

som e . The particular qualities of each preparation are given at.

length in the Hindu Medical writings.

Wheat (godli iima ) has been used, and has been an article offoodfrom time immemorial in Hindostan . Several varieties are cultivatedwith success. It is considered nourishi ng in creases the appetite

,

flesh,and strength, and the seven humours, improves the gen eral

health, and increases the semen . It cures the diseases of air and

bile,and increases phlegm.

Barley (Yava) is considered nourishing.

Sesamum seed (Til) is now princ ipally used as a condimen t.L eguminous Seeds, or Pulse. The list of these seeds is very

long ; the following are some of themO Pea

,mattar (Pisum Sativum,) Bean (vic ia the differen t

varieties ofDoli chos, the black seeded (D . Lablab,) the D . Labea,the D . biflorus, or horn -grain

, and the D . Catjang. The Phaseolus

commun is ( common bean ) , and the P. maximus P. nanus P.

min ima P. mungo, & c . The chick pea ( c icer arietinum) the

Cytisus ( cajan ) the Frigonella (Taenum Graecum) are enum eratedwith many other excellen t varieties ofpulse . They should be eaten

after being well boiled, or in the form ofporridge, or soup .

-An ima l Food—It is probable that for many ages the use of

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

”

106

Wan t of taste, and prevents relapses in fever . The flesh of calvescures the di seases of air

, and increases phlegm . Besides the fleshofcows and buffalows, deers, hares, hogs, goats, and sheep wereused by the anc ien t Hindus as food. The flesh of an imals are

digestible in the following order, the first being the least so the

pig, tiger, cow and deer .

Flesh boiled with oil is heavy, increases bile, and is heating.

Dried flesh removes fatigue, is ofuse in dimin ishing bile, in curing

the di sease s ofphlegm, and sores in the body.

The flesh of domestic an imals was not given to the sick as it

was con sidered heating . On this accoun t the flesh ofwild an imals

was substituted, as they were supposed to be more whole

some, such as deer, of wild fowls, 850 the fat in these cases

being carefully removed. An imal fat and marrow were sup

posed to cure diseases ofair, and increase the diseases of blood,bile

,and cough. Brotks were made of the flesh of these an i

mals, and given to invalids they cured old fevers and in

creased strength, improved the voice and eyesight, increased the

strength and semen, and cured boils. They strengthen the join ts,and promote their cure when wounded. Ifgiven with rice, broths

cure old fevers, strengthen the individual, while they lighten the

heart, and cure the diseases of bile . The Hindus are directed;at the same time, to abstain from hard and indigestible food, such

as curds, milk, oil, jagree, with various kinds of pulse and

leguminous plan ts.

An ima l Secretions.—Milk is heavy, cooling, and sweet, gives

a shin ing appearance to the skin , strengthens, fattens, and increases

semen it cures the diseases ofair, bile, and phlegm . Goa t’

s Milk is

sweet and cooling it is binding, promotes the in ternal heat cures

ractap itta (Hoemorrage) and diseases ofair, bile, phlegm,and blood

as Goats eat many medicinal plan ts, drink little water, and are veryactive . Sheep

’

sMilk is sweet and heavy, and increases phlegm and

bile . Bufi a lo’

s milk is drying and heating, but cures swelling oftheabdomen, and diseases of air and phlegm . Mare

’s milk is saltish

,

Sweet, and light . Woman’

s milk strengthens the soul, increases flesh,

and the consistenc e of the c irculating fluids it should only be

drunk fresh . Cow’

s Milk is pleasan t,and very wholesome . It is

cooling, sweet, promotes semen , cures diseases ofair, blood, and bile,and promotes memory, strength, and longevity. Early in the morning this milk is heavy, and constipating. It is not good when the

cow 1 s n ear calving, or when there is no calf ; the bestmilk being

when the calf andmother are ofthe same colour, particularly whenofa White or ofa black colour, with erect horns and when the cow

1 07

has eaten the leaves ofthe sugar -cane . Milk that has been kept aday is heavy, and con stipates and fresh milk in creases the secretionof phl egm from the nose . When bo iled and drunk warm

,it cures

di seases ofphl egm and air ;'

when allowed to cool, it cures the

diseases ofbile . The milks ofgoats and asses are not so wholesome

as that ofthe cow . They should not be drunk fresh and salt maybe added or the mi lk may be boiled.

2 . Curdled M lk is formed by adding a little sour milk, or da

'

i, to

mi lk which has been boiled and cooled. It should be allowedto stand for a n ight before being used. It is cooling

,increases

the in ternal heat, and is useful in the cure ofagues, diarrhaea,

dyspepsia, and strangury it increases the phlegm, and the secretion

ofsemen .

3 . Butter-Milk (Ghol) is made by stirring about curdled milk,

un til butter is obtain ed or this i s produced in the ordinary way.

It is good for persons who have take poison, who are labouring

under diarrhaea, dyspepsia, vomiting, strangury, jaundice, pil es,spleen , or ague . It dim in ishes fat

,phlegm and air. F resh Butter

is sweet and nourishing it is cool,agreeable

, dimin ishes bile andair, and promotes the secretion of semen . It cures consumption

,

chron ic cough, asthma, ulcers, piles, and tetanus. It increasesstrength, and is good for children . e e is made by boiling butterfor a few minutes to dissipate the watery part, when itmaybe kept foralong time . It is sweet, and softens parts. It is useful in madn ess

,

epilepsy, and ague . It dim in ishes air and bile, and improves

the appetite, memory, and the beauty of the body. It also pro

motes longevity, and preserves the eyesight . Ghee which has

been kept ten years and upwards is called old ghee, which

is said to cure sudden blindn ess ( timira) , morbid discharges from

the n ose, eyes and mouth difficulty in breathing, fain ting,

leprosy, and epilepsy diseases ofthe vagina, pain s in the ears, eyes,and head old fevers, carbuncle, and diseases of air

, bile, and

phl egm.

Flesh of Birds . Their gen eral properties are, that they cure the

di seases ofair, bile, and phl egm improve the colour ofthe skin ; are

slightly heavy, and sweet ; increase the semen , memory, and appetiteand give consistency to the alvin e evacuations. The prin cipalof these are partridge jungle-cock comm on cock peacock pigeons water-wagtail taylor-bird duck paddy-bird 8 m.

The flesh of an imals and birds is not good the second day,

when they are tain ted. Such as have been drown ed, or kill ed with

an arrow,as this may have been poison ed

, are digested withdifficulty, and produce diseases, particularly ofair, bile, and phlegm.

N 2

108

The upper (atlan ted) part ofthe male, and the lower (sacral) part

of the female are the heaviest . The flesh of femal e quadrupeds,and male birds, is the lightest . The flesh of large an imals which

work much, and eat little, is heavy, in the following order head,

shoulders, spleen , skin , liver, fore-feet, and hind-feet, tail, testicles,abdomen , and urinary organs. The humours are heavy in the

following order z—blood, flesh, fat, bon es, marrow,and semen .

Such Birds as live on flowers are thin , and increase the bulk of

the body such as live on fish, increase bile and such as eat rice,remove the di seases ofair.

Flesh should be eaten the same day it has b een killed ric e shouldbe prepared l apidly, and a man should live with a young wife, use

milk, ghee, and boiledwater which has been allowed to cool, as theypromote health and strength . The opposite articles have a con

traryeffect on the health as putrid flesh, exposure to the morn ing

sun , new curdled milk, sleeping in the morn ing, 8 m.

F isk produces a shining appearance ofthe body, is slightlyheating,and sweet and increases the air

,urin e, and alvin e secretions. When

white, fish increases the strength, phlegm,and bile ; it is ofadvan

tage to health when the person labours under diseases of air,

when used by wrestlers, by those accustomed to violen t exercise, andthose who are tired. Black and small fish are light, and constipate .They increase the appetite and strength, cure air

, and are of

use during convalescen ce . White fish in creases air,bile

, and

phlegm,gives a shin ing appearance to the skin, is digested with

difficulty, and produces a laxative effect upon the bowels. Fishroes are pleasan t and increase air, phlegm, and semen

,dimin ish

the appetite, and produce a bitter state of the stomach.

Fish when boiled is heavy, and cures the diseases of air it in

creases the strength, removes fatigue, en larges the muscles, andproves vision . Dried fish constipates, and weakens the body, and is

digested with difficulty when roasted, fish is heavy, increases thesemen , flesh, and strength . In such cases fish should be preparedwith oil. These properties of fish are in creased and modified,by mixing them with other articles of food, as with the leaves

of certain trees, pumpkins 8 m. Ru’

i is the best of all fish,

and others in the following order bekti, chital , shol,gara

'

i

jhenya ilish, baiil, gagara, garké, balsgunf, chenga, kai, pati,tetj, chuna, chanda calsa, damkona, chingri . Turtles were used,and were stated to cure diseases ofair, to increase strength

,semen ,

and memory, and to improve the eyesight .The following are supposed to be the proportionate nutritive ,

qualities of certain articles of food

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 10

beds ofrivers, as themost wholesome, as they promote digestidn and

strengt h the river and foun tain water at the bottom of high

hills, was considered less wholesome and the most unhealthy was

considered to be the water from brooks, and the stagnan t water

of tanks, and reservoirs this water was supposed to produceindigestion, obstructions, and lethargy, with a predisposition to

fever .R ain Wa ter

, when preserved in a clean vessel, was supposed to

cure the diseases ofair, bile, and phlegm

, and improve the health.

It keeps the mouth clean , and improves the state ofthe tongue, teeth,and memory. It was considered to be heavier during the rains thanin the cold, and hot weather . Hail-water was con sidered peculiarlywholesome .

Water was supposed to be improved by boiling, and its effectswere varied according to the quan tity dissipated by evaporation .

Water which has been boiled and drunk cold cures air, bile, andphlegm,

also cough, fever, and constipation . It removes greatfatn ess, and increases the in ternal fire .Water mixed with the other elemen ts produces six tastes, or

sweet, sour, salt, pungen t, bitter, and astringen t . When the foodcontains a large proportion ofwater and earth, they produce asweetstate of the stomach. The sweet, sour, and salt articles, dimi n ish

air the sweet, bitter, and astringen t, dimini sh bile and the pun

gen t, bitter, and astringen t,dimin ish phlegm .

Medic inal D rinks.-The usual drink for the sick, is water in

which a little ofthe infusion ofc innamon and cassia has been mixed.

By others the drink is varied with the nature ofthe disease . When

a ir is deranged, water in which the infusion ofsuch medic in es as curethi s class ofdiseases, as long or black pepper, sugar, the . is to be ad

ded. When bile is deranged, pure water is either given, or its cooling

qualities are increased by the addition of the infusion.

of ushira,or kaskas ; gandhatrina, a fragran t grass Sugar-can e, Ikhyu kusha,akind of sacred grass 8 m. When p klegm is deranged, the infusion

ofcinnamon,black or long pepper, cloves 850 . is to be added.

In fever,produc ed by derangemen t of air, bile, and phlegm, the

fresh juice ofthe kau, a kind of grass, is recommended in stead of

water.In hemoptysis (Rakta Pitta) , the fresh juice ofthe Kashanda

(pmnpkin )i

and pomegranate are the best additions to the drinks.

In cases ofswelling,or D rop sy, an infusion ofdry raddish (mulaka) ,

ginger, soot, &c .

, are to be used. In L ep rosy the infusion ofcatechu

(khadira) is to be used, with the infusion ofblack pepper, and sugarcandy.

1 1 1

Condimen ts . In weak digestion , water mixedwith camphor, or idea

fused in native min t (Padina) is to be used. Beetlenut, camphor,

cloves, long pepper, pepper, dry ginger, and other spic es are mixedwith slacked lime, surrounded with the leaves ofpan , and chewed asa condiment . It clean s the throat and voice, promotes digestion ,

keeps the breath sweet, improves the sen ses, and gives an agreeable appearance to the person . It in creases semen , and should be

used after vomi ting, bathing, and sleeping . The Hindus also use

as condim en ts, nutmeg, cloves, cardamum seeds, c innamon, tur

merich, mustard, sandal-wood, debda'

ru wood, ginger, black,and long pepper, capsicum,

coriander seed, an iseed, assafoe

tida Sac .

Wines. Withi n the first year after the debarkation ofNoah fromthe Ark

,he made win e from the grapes ofMoun t Ararat (Gen . ix) .

The vin e also thr ives well in the northern parts ofHindustan, but

not in Bengal . It is on ly in the northern parts ofHindustan that thegrape is sometimes converted into win e, from the fermen tationbeing too qui ck, and from the heat and moisture of the lower pro :

vinces. The grape is con sidered cooling and aperien t, by the

native practition ers. All win es are moderately strong, and are

divided into sweet, and sour . They all increase bile, and dimi

n ish phlegm,

and air. They are also ton ic , stimulating, in

creasing the acuteness of the senses and appetite, and promoting

digestion and health, when properly used. There were differen tkinds of win es used by the anc ien t Hindus, which received different names according to the frui ts, flowers, and other substancesfrom which they were derived. The win e which was made fromthe grape was called Siddha from raisin s (kismis)mérdkwika fromthe flowers of the Bassia latifolia

, madhwaka ; from jagery or gur,

goura or sura.

In the Veda shastras the use ofwin es and spirits are forbidden but

in the Tan tra they are allowed, and the worshippers ofShiva indulgein their use .

When digestion has been completed,the state of the stomach will

depend on the qualities ofthe food or medic in e which has beentaken . When bitter and astringen t articles offood or medic in e have

been eaten , they produc e a bitter state ofthe stomach sour food

produces a sweetn ess after digestion and sweet and salt food produce sweet eructation s from the stomach .

During the rains, light and stomachic food with bitters should bepreferred, while liquids and oils are not to b e used too freely ; the

drinking water should be boiled, and drunk with a little hon ey. In

cloudy days exercise is not to be taken in.

the openair the bedroom

1 12

should be warmed with fires, and all persons should sleep upon a

cha'

rpay, during the n ight . InAutumn ( sharat) bitter and sweet arti

c les of food are to be preferred, and light and clean water is to be

used freely for drink . Exercise is to be taken in the even ing and

deranged bile is to be cured by bleeding or purging . Sherbets and

spirituous liquids, especially such as reli eve the increased secretion

ofbile, are be used.

In winter ( Shishira) salin e, bitter, pungen t, and warm art icles,prepared with ghee and oil, are to be taken for food. Meat is to be

used, and the drink warmed, and accompani ed with spirituous

liquors. The warm bath and frictions with oil are to be used, and

exerc ise taken in the morn ing .

In spring (Vasanta) sour, sweet, oily, and salin e articles are to

be used. The drinking water is to be boiled, and spirituousliquors are to be mixed with it, to dimin ish the increased phl egm.

The warm bath, and foot exerc ise are also to be used.

During the hot season (Grishma) , sour, pungen t, and strong warm

substances are to be avoided, and rice, barley, and curries oflight

vegetables are to be used. Food possessing warm qualities is to be

avoided, and the breakfast should con sist of cooling fruits and

sherbets. The Cold bath is to be used, and thin light dresses are tobe worn . The surface of the body is to be smeared with cooling

aromatic applications, cool water should be used for drink,

and

sleep is to be allowed during the day.

The highest classes of Brahmins, as officiating priests, attend

rigidly to the performance ofreligious ceremon ies, and gen erallybathe in the morn ing at sunrise . After perform ing the c eremon ies

of their guardian Deity, they take for breakfast small sweet cakes,or a handful ofmoisten ed ric e, at 1 0 or 1 1 o

’

clock as they mustalways purify their body by washi ng, before eating. They dineon boiled rice, peas, and vegetables, and some of them havefish curry at l or 2 R M.

From eight to eleven o’

clock, supper is prepared, and consists ofthe same food as at dinn er. The middling and higher classes mixasmall quan tity ofmilk and ghee wi th what they eat at dinn er andsupper.

In some houses instead of boiled rice at n ight, unlevened flour

cakes are eaten , with a little ghee spread over it . They are ofteneaten with vegetable curries or boiled peas, or with the flesh ofkids,

The months of October, April, and January are c onsidered holy,when not only the priests, but many o thers, who are desirous ofan easyentrance into heaven , repair to the river side to bathe, immediately beforesun rise, and to perform the morning ceremonie s.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 4

they change their n ight-clothes, and go to their business. The

smoking oftobacco is used morning and n ight, at bed time, and afterdinner and tiffm. It should be smoked slowly by means ofa longtube .

CHAPTER II .

Materia Medica .

The following remarks on Materia Medica will be arranged underthe heads : l st, gen eral remarks on simple Medicin es ; and 2ud,regarding the most common preparations and uses of Medic ine.

SECTION I.

Genera l remarks on S imp le Medicines.

The Hindu medi cal writers have recorded many observations onthe properties and choic e ofmedic in es, the situations in which theyare to be found, the time at which they possess their peculiar pro

perties in the highest degree, and the mann er ofpreparing and pre

serving them .

‘These medicin es are very numerous ; but from the

few and indistinct remarks which are recorded of some of them,

they cannot always be iden tified.

The following remarks will be arranged under the heads ofthe

vegetable, an imal, and mineral kingdoms. A list of the principalmedic in es will be given in the n ext Chapter

, arranged accordingto their effects.

A. Simp le Medicines from the Veg etable K ingdom. The beliefof there being a rem edy for each disease, led the Brahmins to

make a very careful examination ofthe vegetable kingdom ; and a

large number of Medic in es were discovered, some ofwhich werevery powerful . The success which followed the employmen t of

these remedies in the cure ofdiseases was invariably supposed torest on individual sanc tity, and the divin e pleasure which impartsit .

’

Hence the great difficulty ofobtai n ing information as it is believed that ifsuch secrets are revealed to others, the medicin e losesi ts effects, not only in the hands ofthe person to whom its qualitieshave been revealed, but also of the person who had known them be

1 5

here. It is from such selfish motives that‘

the properties ofmanyvaluable medicines have been lost . There are n ine such secretswhich should no t be revealed to any one —these are the age ofa

person his wealth family occurrences his bad actions or thosewhich reflect shame, or dishonour upon him his in tercourse withhis wife his prayers to his tutelar gods his charities and the

v irtues ofnostrums the i ngredien ts ofwhich are known to him.

The simple vegetable“

medic in es are procured from the bark,

roots, leaves, flowers, fruit, seeds, juices, gums, and wood of plants.

These medicin es are arranged in the following order

1 . Bansp éti, or those trees which con tain fruits without flowers.

2 . Vriks/iga , those which con tain both flowers and fruit.

3 . Vira t, creepers with flowers in clusters.

4 . Oskadki,those plan ts which die after the ripening oftheir fruit,

as rice,The effect ofmedicin es from the vegetable kingdom wi ll varywith

the period at which the medicine is gathered, according as the air is

agitatedwith wind or not, as it is in the sun or shade, as taken duringthe day or night, during the cold or hot weather, during dry or rai nyweather, and also according to the interval between the time whenthe medic in e is gathered and that when it is used.

Medicines from this kingdom should not be procured either fromthe jungly, or from a coun try covered with water n either froma dry and sandy ground, nor from one that is un equal or has

many holes, ston es, or broken vessels upon it . Situatious iu a ny

way destroyed by insects, or in which white an ts have their nests, a sthese are supposed to remove the strength ofthe earth, orwhere waterdrops from a choppered roof, where bodies have been burnt nrburied, where persons have died, or sacred situations are n ot

proper places for raising medicinal plan ts. Soils in which thereis much salt are also unfavourable for the growth ofmedic in es and

plan ts that grow at unseasonable times, or when very old, and those

which water forms, or insects have injured are to be thrown away.

The soilmostfavourablefor thegrowth ofmedicin es isofa soft black,

yellow, or red colour is equal, or heavy is situated n ear water,andwhere trees grow luxuriantly, and the grain is moist and glistening : in such situation s the soil has its proper quality oftaste . Thoseofwater are foundwhere the place is sweet, and the plan ts glistening .

The quali ties of fire are greatest, when the soil has several colours,

and where the earth is.

light, the trees small and growmg at a dis

tance from each other, and where the young leaves ofgrass, as theyburst through the earth, are ofa light yellow colour. The qualities ofair predominate in dry places, ofa grayish colour, like the ashes of

o 2

1 16

wood. In such situations the earth is light, the trees are few,

small, dry, and have holes in them, with little juice. The qua.

lities ofether (akash) are in excess in such situations as are ofa green

ish colour, are soft in the centre and equal, with many holes. The

water in such situations is without taste, and the mountains and

trees are large .

The rays of the sun and moon produce the colour, &c .

, ofplants.

Thus the yellow colour oftrees is produced by the sun, and such me

dioin e should be gathered during the hot period ofthe day. Emeticsare to be gathered at such times, from soils possessing the qualities ofether and air. The moon produces the white and cold plants, whichshould be gathered during the cold season , when the qualities ofthese plants will be most energetic . They will then be sweet, moistlike o il, and cold like water. Purgatives are thus to be gathered in

a soil possessing the qualities oftaste and smell.

The physician should observe the lucky days and hours, and themost favourable period of the moon

’

s age, in order to ensure the

cure of the disease . The Stars which are predominan t on parti

cular days are to be observed, particularly those which occur on

odd days. Medicines which are to be exhibited internally, areto be taken for the first time on Mondays, Thursdays and Fridays.

They are also to observe the most favourable period of the moon’

s

age, and that fortunate stars are in the ascendan t

Before a medicinal plan t is gathered in the morn ing, a prayer

should be said by the person with his face to the north. The following is such a prayer, which is supposed to remove any devils whichmay be hiding n ear .

O God ! if any devil be lurking here—begon e !whether it beVetal, Pishacha, Rakshas, or Shri sarpa ( the devil of

As the shrub is being gathered, the person is to say O, shrub

as Brumha, Indra, and Vishnu plucked you, for the same reason

I now remove you.

’

B. Simp le Medic ines derivedfrom the An imal K ingdom.

These are skin, hair, nails, blood, flesh, bones, fat, marrow,bile,

milk and dej ections. These medicines should be obtained from heal

thy animals, which are n either very old nor very young . The urine

and other dej ections should be obtain ed from the female.

a . Skin , nails, and Iza ir, are used for fumigations in intermittent

fevers, Si c .

There are twenty-seven Stars, one ofwhich presides over each dayofthe week.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

8

the other metals are described, and were probably introduced intoHindustan two or three hundred years ago, probably formercenarypurposes as the Physician, before the recovery ofhis pat ient, onlyeceived his recompence for the medic ine he prescribed.

The metals now used in medic ine are as follows z—Quicksilver,gold, silver, copper, iron, lead and zinc .

1 . Mercury ( Sli tam,Rasa or Parada. )

Quicksilver is found in Thibet in the form ofCinnabar, and in its

native state in Nepal .

Shiv declared to Durg '

ei that, ifproperly prepared, quicksilver will

cure all diseases, even should they be ofa fatal nature . Quicksilver

is used either in its metallic state, or reduced so as to lose itspeculiar properties. In both forms it is useful for the cure ofdiseases.

Quicksilver is often in an impure state, as when it is mixed withblacklead, ston e, poison, tin , or other impurities ofthe same kindanother bad quality is when it resembles fire

, and when it dispersesin differen t direc tions. Good quicksilver is of a slight blueishcolour, like water in ternally and externally, and bright like the sunat mid-day. It is also good when it has a brownish

, or whitishcolour ; but if it has a mottled appearance it is not good.

To purify quicksilver from lead mix it with rice-water and exposethe mixture to fire, which will remove its bad ingredients. To purifyquicksilver from tin mix it with the powder of Vishal (Cucumiscolocynthis) andAnkollia (Alangium hexapetalum) , and then expose

the mixture to fire . To remove the other impurities, add the juice of

Cassia fistula. To purify quicksilver when it separates in to globul es

mix it with the juic e of datura and lime, and then expose it to

heat. To destroy the poisonous quali ties ofquicksilvermix the threekinds ofMyrobalan, and then expose it to heat . It is thus fit

for use .

Quicksilver is the semen ofShiv ; and being difficult to prepare,the practition er is first to pray to Vishnu, 8 m, on a lucky day ; andagreeable presen ts are to be made to virgins, and families of Brahmins before the proc ess is commenc ed. The following prayer is thento be offered up to Shiv.

O Ugra (wrathful one!) I salute you andOUgra, I paymy reverence Goraksha, Ishwara, Sarva, Shiva and Bhadra I salute yourdifferen t forms and ask your gracious assistance in rendering thismedic in e successful . ’ The quantity of mercury to be preparedshould not be less than one pala ; and some say when on ly a

small quan tity can be obtained, prepare two tolas.

T o purify mercury so as to render it fit for being used as medi

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

120

emblica or emblic myrobalan) boira, (belerie myrobalan ) and harftaki,chebulic myrobalan ) chitzi ( treacle) , congee, and the juice of the

ghritakumari, or Indian aloes, mix for one day, and then add half

the weight ofprepared sulphur.

Another form is made with rock salt, blue vitriol, sulphur, chalk,alum and quicksilver in equal quan tities mix the whole with the

jui ce of the lemon . Thi s is to be put in an earthen vessel over

which another is to be placed and the juncture luted ( SeefigThe mixture is then to be exposed for a day to the action of

fire, when the mercury will he white and prepared for use .

The use ofthe whi te form ofmercury is very importan t . It curesrheumatism,

and the eighty diseases ofair, as well as the diseases ofbile and phlegm . Should it affect the gums

, a gargle ofcurdledmilk

should be employed. This preparation ofmercury will also be founduseful in shil l, ( colic,) fistula in ano

, in diseases of the eye, in

diseases of the arms, and in gen eral debility as it increases

strength, appetite, and the general colour of the body.

The yellow preparation s of mercury are made in the followingmann er. Mix equal parts of sulphur, quicksilver, and the sundu

plan t and myrobalan . Dry the mixture and put it in a sand bath,

and apply heat for twen ty-four hours. When properly preparedit has a yellow colour. This preparation increases the appetite

, and

cures dropsy and dyspepsia.

R ed Factitious c innabar or red sulphuret of mercury, whenin powder vermilion (Hingula) is prepared as follows mix one

pala ofsulphur, and one pound of black lead with the juic e ofthe

ghritakumari place it in a clean vessel, put a lute or coating of

mud and cloth, or a mixture oflime and chalk over it . It is to beexposed in a sand bath for three days,when it will be found ofa red

colour.

It cures all diseases, even of the fatal kind. It removes weakn ess, improves the appetite and memory, dimin ishes fat, and curesleprosy. It requires to be given a proper men struum and mixedwith other medic in es. The dose is then on e ganja.

Another form ofmercury is prepared by mixing the black preparation in an iron spoon . Add a little ghee

, and then exposeit to heat . When melted—throw it in to a leaf of the plan tain .

It is then called Rasaparpati or cake mercury and is very useful indropsy, chron ic dysen tery, and as an alterative .2ud. Gold. This, as well as the other metals

,is first to be

reduced by heating to small thin plates. These are to be exposedto a red heat, and in this state cooled separately in oil, curdledmilk,cow

’s urine, congee, and a decoction ofkulattha (a kind ofpea) . This

1 2 1

proc ess is to be repeated seven t imes in each liquid. The

metal is then considered as prepared for use . Some on ly quenchthe hot metal in the above liquids three times. It is also recom

mended that metals should be cooled twelve times in a mixtureof the juice ofthe leaves of the tuk and akanda trees

, with brimston e . In other cases three parts of the metal are mixed withone ofquicksilver and exposed to heat . Other mixtures are recommended by difi

’

erent authors for oxidizing the metal .The preparations of gold are considered as most valuable

medi cin es, curing n early all diseases, even those in which othermedi cin es have been used without any good result . The gen eral

effect of these preparations is to increase memory, and restorethe vigour ofmanhood.

The usual mann er ofpreparing gold for use is to mix 1 6 timesthe quantity of the gold plates to one of lead, and add lemon juiceand g li rimcumciri, or Indian aloes. They are to be rubbed together,exposed to heat, andmade i nto boluses ofthe usual size . Or take ofthe mass ofgold plates, mix with qui cksilver and sulphur, add a lit

tle water,or the jui ce ofg laritacumc

’

iri,make it in to a largemass put

it in an earthern pot with a mouthwell secured, surround the vessel

with a mixture ofclay and cow-dung, and expose it to the sun to dry.

It is thus to be exposed to the fire twelve differen t times, un til it is

reduced to powder . Some practitioners mix lead, sulphur, and

quicksilver together with the gold, and the mixture is then preparedas above . The oxide of gold thus prepared is often mixed withother metals ; and is con sidered a valuable medic in e in chron ic diseases, in intermitten t fevers, in gonorrhoea, and in diseases of the

spleen . It is considered an excellen t ton ic, improving vision, reducingthe bulk ofthe body, and is good for con sumption, and pregnant women and children . It is useful in diseases ofair

,bile

,and phlegm.

Silver. This metal is prepared bymixing two parts of it reducedto small thin plates, with one ofbrimston e . These are to be wellmixed, lemon juice is to be added, and the whole surrounded by a mixture of cow-dung and clay, and exposed to a high heatin a furnace, in the same mann er as that in which gold was statedto be prepared. This preparation is sour, cooling, and astringen t

and it cures deranged air, promotes appetite, strength, digestion,and the colour of the skin . It also leng thens life, and is ofmuch use

in all chronic diseases, as it purifies the body and the dej ections.

Copp er. This metal is found in the north ofIndia. It is puri

fied by boiling for three days with a strong heat, the small thin

plates in cow’

surine . The metal is then to be mixedwith two parts

of brimstone and one part ofrock-salt, to which the juice of the

P

122

lemon has been added. The mixture is then to be surrounded with

a coating of cow’

s dung and clay, and exposed to the fire ofa fur

nace, when it is ready for use. To prevent its produc ing vomiting

and purging, put the mixture into a bulbous root called Sarana,

which has been hollowed out it is then to be covered with a mix

ture ofdung and clay, and exposed to heat .

The sulphuret of copper (Tfitaka) is prepared by l II’

lg two

parts of the thin plates with one of sulphur. It is then to be exposed to heat for two hours. The medi cin e will n either produce

gi ddin ess, vomiting nor purg ing.

These preparations of copper are found useful in fevers,partien

larly the intermitten t kinds, diarrhoea, spleen and diseases of theliver and blood. It is also, useful in leprosy, colic, piles and in

digestion".

Lead ( sisaka) . This metal is found in many parts ofHindus

tan and is preparedfor use bymixing it with the juice of the dkanda,tree . It should remain immersedfor three days then wash the metal

in water, and mix it with the juice of the leaves of the vasaka tree

(Justicia ganderussa) and sulphur. Put it in to an earthern vessel,and expose it to a high heat . It is then ready for use, and is re

commended in gonorrhoea, chron ic diarrhoea, in leprosy and in ulcers.

Tin (Trapu and Ra’

nga) . One part is to be mixed with the same

quantity ofsulphur, mix it with the milk ofthe arka tree (calotropisgigan tea), and the dry bark of the Ban ian tree . Rub them togetherin a hot mortar for many days.

It is then prepared for use, and is bitter and sour to the taste .It diminishes fat, the diseases of phlegm,

is an An thelmin tic,

and cures gonorrhoea and jaundice . It is to be avoided in dis

eases ofair.

Z inc, and other metals are prepared in the same way as copper,and their effects upon the system are the same .

Sulp huret of Antimony (Ra sanjana Sanvira) is gen erally oh

tained from Nepaul or Siam . It is prepared for use by placingit in lime water, and exposing it for several hours to the sun . It is

exhibited in diseases of the eye, in the form of a collyrium,mixed

with the juice ofthe ripe pomegranate . It is applied to the edges

of the eyelid to increase the brilliancy of the organ and it is

also used as an emetic in the first stage of the fever, and in combination with other medicines.

Iron (Lauha) . is found in many parts of Hindustan in the

This preparation is also used for strengthening the teeth, and forcleani ng and improving their colour,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 24

hours in each. This medicine is also purified by mixing it withfour parts ofn itre, and then subliming it. This is don e by placingit in an earthen pot with another over it, and applying heat for aday and a n ight .This is a very celebrated medicine in the black leprosy, and in

fever. It also improves the colour ofthe body.

R edArsen ic, or red Orp imen t (Manahshila) is brought from Japanand is prepared by macerating it in the juice of the Boke tree,or in the juice of the fresh ginger. It is tonic, and is used forremoving diseases ofphlegm,

for Asthma, &c .

PVhite oxide ofArsen ic (Daarmuch) is prepared by being macerated in the juice of the lemon, and then boiled in the juice of the

plantain tree . It is used in doses ofthe fourteenth part of a grain,

in conjunction with aromatics, to check obstinate intermittent fevers,in glandular and leprous affections, in the same way as the yellowArsen ic .

M nera ls

-Theminerals which are employed in medicine are mica, diamond,

precious ston es, brimston e, ammon ia, a particular shell, and the

fragrant earth obtained from Surat .1 . MICA (abhra) is first to be exposed to a high heat, and then

thrown in to the juice ofthe Justicia Gandarussa, rub them together, and expose the mixture to a high heat . This is to be repeatedten times ; when it is considered ready for use . It is reduced to

powder, and is then said to cure all diseases._

As it increases thethe secretion of semen it is used for curing impotency, lengthenslife, and strengthens judgment.2 . D iamond (hiraka, vaj ra) there are four varieties white, yel

low, red, and black . The first is said to resemble the brahmun class,the second the kshattriya and the other two the vaishya and the

shii dra. The large, soft, round, square, and bright, without inequa

lities or cracks, is considered masculine the small, hard, five an

gular, and cracked diamond is consideredfeminine, and the oblongand triangular kind is considered as neuter. The first is the bestkind

, it alon e should be used in medi cine.

It is prepared by being covered with clay and cowdung, and

exposed to heat for a day and a half. Soak it then in the urin e ofa horse, expose it to heat seven times, when it is considered prepared for use .

Use. It lengthens life, and improves the strength and colour ofthe body and cures many diseases.

Precious Stones (manikya) - these are pearls, and corals. They

125

are prepared by mixing them with lemon juice for a day. Then

boil them in a mixture ofthe juice of the three mirabuli . This isdon e by exposing them in a bag, covered with a coating ofclayand cow-dung -( See fig. 6 ) and reduce the medicin e for use .

Itis considered a good ton ic, and cures many diseases.

4 . Sulp hur (gandhaka) is prepared by mixing it with lime, water,oil and congee, and exposing it to heat, upon an iron vessel

, for threehours. It is then ready for use as a medicine

, and is adminiSo

tered in combination with other metals.

5 . Ammon ia (n ishaadul ) is prepared by mixing it with limewater in a bag (golaaguntro) for several hours. It is used in pre

paring mercury, and some other medicin es. It is not used by itself.

6 . A shell called ( shankanabhi) is sometimes used as a medi

c ine, in comb ination with others. It is prepared by being macerated

in lime-juice.

7 . The fragran t earth obtain ed from Surat called Saurashtramati is prepared by macerating it in the juice of the lemon forseveral hours, and then drying it. It is ofuse in cases of chron icdiarrhoea, and dysentry. It is gen erally given in combination with

other medicines.

CHAPTER III.

Pharmacy, or the p rep ara tion ofMedicines.

In this Chapter, the weights and measures, with the preparation,andforms

, and doses ofMedic in e wi ll be considered.

SECTION I.

Weights and Measures.

Weights and measures were reduced to a more exact form by the

c elebrated Maadopokoro, who is the author of the work namedParibhaisha which treats of this subj ect. Four of the particles

ofdust which are seen floating in the sun’

s rays as i t en ters a darkroom make one likshzi6 Likshas are equal to 1 Sorroko orMustard-seed.

6 Mustard-seeds make 1 Yava, or Barley-corn3 Barley-corns make 1 Gunja (or seeds ofAbrus precatorius.)3 Gunjas are equal to I Told.

10 -Gunja are equal to 1 Pranaka.

4 Masai are equal to l Saanoo .

2 Saanoos equal to I Told or Weight ofa Rupee.

2 Tolas 1 Karsha or Aksha.

2 Karsha 1 Shukti .

2 Shaktis 8 Tolas equal to l Pal.2 Tolas“ 1 Karsha or Aksha.

2 Palas l Prasrita (handful . )4 Palas l Kudava or a Ser.

8 Palas 2 Kudavas=l Mansko or Sharara ora Ser.

6 Palas l Prastha or 2 Sers.

4 Prasthas 1 Patra or 8 Sers equal to 1 Adhaka, and

4 Adhaka make 2 Dronas equal to 1 Shdrpa or 64 Sers 2 Shi’i rpasmake 1 Ghonee or 128 Sers and 1 6 Chon iesmake 1 Kharee and

100 Palas are equal to 1 Tolai‘i .

Some authors say that there are 5 Battis in 1 Masha (Sursutoh)others that there are 8 or 1 0 T0 158 in 1 Masha. In general Practice5 Ratis are equal to l Masha in making pills, extracts, and powders.

In decoctions and infusions 1 0 Battis are equal to 1 Masha, 8Masha are equal to l Tottah or 64 Jungahs, is equal to and 8 Tolasare equal to 1 Pala. These are the weights whi ch are used for drymedic in es. Several other varieties of weights are given in otherbooks.

Double the weight ofmoist medicin es should be taken beyondthe dose ofdry articles until the weight exceeds a Khoorubo, 32tolas, or half a seer in weight, when the dose in both should bethe same . Should the juice ofthe vegetables be very strong, halfthe dose ofthe dry medicin e should be given . Lists of medicin esare then given in

'

themedical works, with the dose ofeach variety.

The Fluid measure consists ofa pot made of bamboo, wood, oriron, four fingers breath in depth

,and one i n circumference. It is

called korobo or fluid measure .Before a medic ine is exh

i bited to a sick person, the physicianshould examine the state ofthe air, bile, and phlegm, the internal

heat, the individual’s strength, the age ofthe person, the cause pro

ducing the disease, and lastly the ingredients ofwhich the medicine

is composed. He is n ext to note whether or not the intestineshave been cleared out, and after the best consideration the medicineis then to be administered.

A T0 15 in the Sanscrit MSS. is equal W % Told—of the m odem

weights in Medical works.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

128‘

when~

they are a year old they are to be thrown away. Plants

obtained from the Himalaya Mountains are the best, and the juice

of plan ts is usually the strongest ; cowherds, hunters, may hé

employed to collect medicinal lants. ABrahmin, however, is pre

ferred, who is poor, and has pgrformed the necessary ablutions and

prayers.

Medicines from the an imal kingdom are to be taken for youngsubj ects—and secretions, such as milk, urin e

, &c ., are to be taken

after the digestion ofthe food ofthe an imal.

The effect ofthese remedies is either to increase, diminish or cure

deranged air, bile, and phlegm ofthese diseases, or those ofthe com

pound parts (dhatu) ofthe body. The simple forms ofmedic in es -are

sometimes appli ed externally, but they are very seldom administered

in ternally.When a medi c in e was discovered to possess some pro

perty its effects were not tried, but it was usually combin ed with

numerous other remedi es ofthe same kind, in the hope ofaugmen ting

the effic iency of the remedy by multiplying the ingredie nts. On

this accoun t the individual articles of the Materia Medi ca wererarely employed singly I

Medic in es should be prepared in a good house, and in a retiredsituation . Ifprepared in open situation s, in boats, in bazars, and bythe sides ofroads, their qualities are liable to be injured by unfavor

able influences. Should a bad woman, or one menstruating, touch a

medic in e it will lose its quali ties,

Medicin es given in too small doses will be like throwing a littlewater upon a large fire that rather increases than dimin ishes it.In like mann er too large doses of medicin e will increase the

diseases, and will be liable to produce other di seases.

There is no medicin e with one quality, so there is no di sease

in which there is only one humour affec ted medicin es, should there

fore b e mixed according to the state ofthe patien t, the term, and the

virul ence of the disease . If a medi cine con sisting of one or two

ingredien ts is not found useful, other ingredien ts should be mixed

with it and in other cases some of the ingredients should beremoved from the prescription .

SECTION III.

Forms qfMedicines.

The Hindu Physicians arrange Medi cine, in the following order

1 . J ivan iya , or that form which gives longevity.

2 . Vr ihan iya, those which give strength, and corpulency to

the body.

129

Kshinahar, those which make the body thin .

4 . R echa n ig/a , those whi ch produce a laxative effect.

5 . Sandan iya , sedatives.

6 . Dip anz’

ya , stimulants, increasing the internal fire, appetite,7 . Va liya , to ni cs, or those which in crease strength.

8 . Va rn iya, that improve the colour ofthe body.

9 . Kan ;hya , expectorants, or those which clear the throat.

1 0 . H r ia'

ya , that give a good relish.

1 1 . Trip tighna , those which dimin ish appetite.

12 . Arshaghna , those which cure piles.

1 3 . Kashghaghna, those which cure leprosy.

14 . Kandaghna , which cure itchin ess .

1 5 . K rimighna , an thelmin tics .

16 . Vishaghna, an tidotes for poison .

1 7 . Stanyajanana, which increase the secretion ofmilk.

1 8 . Stanyashodhana, which purify the milk .

19 . Shuhrajanana , which increase the secretion ofsemen.

20 . Shuhraxhodhana , that purify the semen .

2 1 . Snehopdg/a , that produc e smoothness and softness ofthe skin.

22 . Swedop aya , which produce sweating .

23 . Vamanop aya , emetics.

24. BerasjanOp cig/a, purgatives.

2 5 . Hasthap anap aya, enemas ofoil, ghee, Ste .

26 . Anuvésa nap aya , oily do .

27 Surabhirachana, errhines.

28 . Cha rda n ig rahana , those which stop vomiting.

29 . Trishnén ig rahana , those which quench thirst.30 . H ihhén ig ranaha , tho se which cure hiccough.

3 1 . Pa rishan ig raha na , those which stop loosen ess.

32 . J'Ii'

i trahrichran iya , diuretics.

33. Kashahara , those which cure cough.

34. Shwésaha ra , those which cure asthma.

35 . Sotahara , those which cure swelling or dropsy.

36 . Juarahara, febrifuge remedies.

37 . Shramahara , those which produc e tranquility of the

mours and remove fatigue .38 . Déhap rashamana , which dimin ish the burning of the body.

39 . Shiap rashamana , whi ch stop shivering.

40 . Udoodop rashamana, those which remove temporary swelling,as urticaria.

41 . Angamarshap ras/zamana, that remove pain asrheumatism, 8m.

42 . Shi'

i lap rashamana , which cure colicky pains.

43. Shonitésthép ana , that stop hemorrhage .

Q

130

44. Sangasthép ana, those which restore the senses.

45 . Bedanasthapana, those which remove pains produced byexternal causes

, as injuries, 8m.This is the division which is followed in Gharaka, and under each

class simple medic in es are arranged They are all given in the

form ofdecoction .

Sursutra again di vides medicin es into two classes, the Sangsho

dhana, or those which evacuate bad humours from the body ; and

Sangshamana those which dimin ish the exalted action of the

humours and restore them to the healthy state .

The Sangshodhana‘

are divided in to two classes, viz . , purgatives

and emetics.

l .—Powders Powders, or dry medicin es, are often

used instead ofgreen herbs on accoun t of their scarcity.

For preparing such medicin es, dry the vegetable in the sun or

over the fire,powder it in a pestle andmortar, and clean the powder

by passing it through a sieve .

The usual dose ofsuch powders is from one masha to halfa told,and it IS usually admin istered with water. They are usuallyemployed in diarrhoea and dysentery, and as a purgative, emetic,&c .

2 . The fresh juice of Plan ts. ( Swarasa. ) This is a frequentform ofexhibiting medicin es. The juic e, gen erally ofthe leaves, is

obtain ed by boiling and then strain ing .

3 .—Pastes. (Kalka) These are prepared by grinding the medi

cine between an stones.

The man ipulations are performed with that useful instr umentt he mortar, which is used either hot or cold. The qualities of the

differen t medic in es are modified by exhibiting them in the Phar

maceutical forms ofinfusions, extracts and mixtures, 8 m.

These preparations are divided in to medic in es used externally,“

and those which are used in ternally. Of the former class are

o in tmen ts composed of oil, ghee Or the like, with the juice ofthe

leaves of trees, 8m.

The in ternal preparations are formed ofvarious ingredien ts, and‘

are admin istered without any reference to the c ircumstances oftheiradmin istration , their comparative efficacy and proportions, or the

stages and modifications ofdiseases in which they are t o be employ

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 32 .

medicine. The decoction is next, and those obtained by macerationand by infirsion arethe weakest.5 .—Extracts Make a decoction of medicine, mix it

with jagree, boil until it becomes thick, or until a small portionwhen thrown in to water does not mix for some time

,nor swim in

the water or when a piece of it sticks upon a board when thrownupon it . The extract is then prepared for use. Too much boilingshould be avo ided, as it by this mean s loses its peculiar qualities.

t’

wana is made by reduc ing the medicin e to powder and

mi xing it with a decoction ofthe same drug, and then exposing it

from time to time to the influence ofthe sun .

6 .—R oasting (Pétrap éha ) . These medicine sare prepared by

crushing them between two ston es with the addition ofwater. When

in a state of pulp, wrap them in the leaves ofthe black-berry or

Indian fig -tree, tie it tight with a string and cover it with a coatingof clay an inch thick . It i s then to be exposed to the fire ofcow

dung un til the clay is red. It is then ready for use, and may be

exhibited in the farm ofpowders or pills.

7—Sp irituous Mixtures or l/Vines (Arishta, fi sava, and

Sure) are often recommended by the other writers on medicine.

8 .- Pills ( Va tika. ) Pills are prepared in different ways ; some

are made by rubbing the medicin e between stones, others by macerating or grinding to powder. The powder is then to be mixedwith water or syrup, and then placed in a open place at n ight .O ther pills are formed by boiling and allowing the mixture to standin the air or in the sun , and then forming it into balls or pills

,

which are called Modaka and Gutika. Each should weigh fromone half to one quarter of a tola. They have differen t names

and measures for preparing them according to the nature of the

medic in e and the mann er in which it is to be used.

9 .—E lectua ries to be swa llowed (Kava liya ) . These preparations

are made by boiling down the decoc tion of the medic in e to one

quarter, mix sugar with it and again boil for some minutes, and

when it has arrived at the consistenc e of congealing quickly on

being removed from the fire, add the usual powders.

E lectuaries to be sucked These medic ines are made withsyrups, powders and certai n other medic in es. They are very usefulin curing dysen tery, cough, hoemoptysis, 8 m.

1 0 . Oils (ghi) . O ils are usually prepared by mix ing four

times the quantity ofmilk,whey, cow’

s urin e, 8 m. boil, andwhen thewatery part is evaporated, certain fragran tmedic in es are added, and itis then strain ed through cloth. These o ils are used as external applications. Several such preparations ofoils are used, as errhines.

133

rain continually fall upon it . Con sequently medicine should beadministered according to the strength and age, to the stage andnature of the sickness, and to the kind of medicine as specified inthe shastras. It is also very n ecessary in preparing medicine thatthe exact proportion Ofthe differen t ingredients be observed ; forifmore or less of any one of the ingredients be used than specified,it will have a tendency to increase rather than cure the disease .Should the sick person be strong, andnot too young, a whole dose

Ofthe medi cin e may be given . Thus, with such a person , whenoil decoctions and the like are to be given, on e p ala is the dose .To a moderately strong person three fourths of a dose are to begiven, or 3 ahshas or 6 tolds . Should the sick person be in a state

Ofweak health, or be old, or an infant, halfa dose should be givenor five ratis, or one mashet, whether it be made ofoil, ghee, a decoction , or any other medicine . Of electuaries and syrups one or two

harshds may be given, according to circumstan ces . The dose is

afterwards to be increased or diminished according to the circum

stances of the case, such as the frequency and consistence of the

dejcotions, 850 .

SECTI ON V.

Administration of Medicines.

The Hindus used either iron or stone mortars, warmed or cold.

The hot mortar was prepared by exposing it to a fire made withthe dry litter of goats and the husks Of rice . The Pestle wasmade of iron or earthenware . It requires to be quite clean and of

a sufficient size to hold by the hand. A prayer should always be

said over the mortar before the medicines are mixed in it .

The Hindus, like the other ancient nations, fell in to the error Of

endeavouring to accomplish too much without examining suffici

ently the properties of simple remedies, and their application in

different diseases . By thus supposing tha t they augmented the

efficacy by multiplying the ingredien ts, they have been led to

crowd their books with numerous unsuitable medicines.

The Menstruum in which medicine is to be given is water, honey,sugar, &c . ; or such substances as speedily act on all the body .

When d a (air) is deranged, cooling and heating things are to be

m ixed with the medicine ; for deranged phlegm, warm and dry

things—and for deranged bile, sweet and cooling substances .

In diseases of the chest, such as difficult breathing, cough,ulcers of the thorax, ofthe nose, affections of the voice, the above

134

menstruums are not proper ; as the medicines, such as expectorants, &c . , must be taken frequently so as to keep up their ac

tion .

The time for administeringmedicines is important, some requiring

to be given before, others during, and a third kind after eating .

The general opin ion is that medicine should be taken on an

empty stomach as it is then soon digested ; and like a drop of oil

let fall upon water is taken in to the system and diffused quicklyover it . The following precepts should be recollected in the ad

ministration ofmedicines

1 . In short and acute diseases the medicine is to be taken

without food.

2 . The medicin e may be taken in some cases with advantage

before eating .

3 . One halfof the medicin e should be taken before, and ano

ther after food.

4 . By the old and weak the medicine should be taken with the

food.

5 . By others after the food.

6 . Another kind should be taken with a covering .

7 . When the disease is in the middle ofthe body, the medicineis to be taken between the two periods of eating .

8 . Another kind is to be taken with each morsel offood.

9 . Another kind is to be taken after each morsel offood.

1 0 . For asthma, cough, thirst, a vomiting medicin e is to beadministered frequen tly .

In treating some diseases, rice is sometimes excluded ; and inother diseases, rice alon e is allowed after the medicine—in othercases more rice than usual is to be taken in another form the riceis mixed with the medicin e when the person is strong, with powerful internal heat . Medicine should not be given after drinkingwater, after long fasting, nor in great weakness.

When no liquid for drink is men tion ed, water is intended ;when no part of the vegetable is stated, the root is to used andwhen no time is stated, the medicine is intended to be taken in themorni ng .

Before administering medicine the following prayer is to beOffered up

Oh ! Bramhal Daksha 1 Ashwini Kumara2—Shiva, Indra,

1 Son ofBramba to whom he first gave the Ayurveda.

2 The Physician of the gods.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

136

g iven until the one previously taken has been properly digestedotherwise it will not cure the disease .

SECT ION VI.

Uses of Medicines .

Gharaka arranges simple medicines under the following heads.

They were all exhibited in the form of decoctionl . J ivam

’

ya, or that form which gives longevity .

2 . Vrihanz’

g/a, those which give strength, and corpulency to

the body.

3 . Kshi’

nahar, those which make the body thin .

4 . R echaniya, those which produce a laxative efl'

ect .

5 . Sanddnz’

ya, sedatives.

6 . s ani’

ya, stimulants, increasing the internal fire, appetite,

Valz’

ya, tonics, or those which increase strength .

Varm’

ya , that improve the colour of the body .

Kanthya, expectorants, or those which clear the throat.

B ridya, that give a good relish .

Trip tighna, those which diminish appetite .Arshaghna, those which cure piles.

Kushthaghna, those which cure leprosy .

Kandughna, which cure itchin ess.

Krimighna, anthelmintics.

Vishaghna, an tidotes for poison .

Stanyajanana, which increase the secretion ofmilk .

Stanyashodhana, which purify the milk .

Shuhrajanana, which increase the secretion of semen .

Shukrashodhana, that purify the semen .

Snehopdya, that produce smoothness and softness of the

Swedop dya, which produce sweating .

Vamanop dya, emetics .

Berasjanop ciya, purgatives.

Hasthdp anap dya, enemas of oil, ghee, &c .

Anuvdsanap dya, Oily enemas.

Surabhirachana, errhines.

Chardanigrahana, those which stop vomiting .

137

29 . Trishna’

nigrahana, those which quench thirst .30 . Hikhdnig ranaha, those which cure hiccough .

3 1 . Pun’

shanigrahana, those which stop looseness .

32 . llIutra/crichranzya, diuretics .

33 . d hahara, those which cure cough .

34 . Shwdsahara, those which cure asthma .

35 . Sotahara, those which cure swelling or dropsy .

36 . Jua rahara, febrifuge remedies.

37 . Shramahara, those which produce tranquillity of the hu

mors and remove fatigue .

38 . Da’

hap rashamana, which diminish the burning Ofthe body .

39 . Shiap rashamana, which st0p shivering .

40 . Udoodop rashamana, those which remove temporary swellingas urticaria.

4 1 . Angamarsha prashamana, that remove pain as rheumatism,

&c .

42 . Shulap rashamana, which cure colicky pains.

43 . Shonitdstha’

p ana, that stop hemorrhage .44 . Sang as thdp ana, those which restore the senses .

45 . Bedandstha’

p ana, those which remove pains produced by

external causes, as injuries, &c .

Sushruta again divides medicines into two classes, the Sangshodhana, or those which evacuate bad humors from the body, as

purgatives and emetics ; and Sang shamana those which diminishthe exalted action of the humors and restore them to the healthystate .

Medicines may be arranged according as they are supposed to

cure air, bile or phlegm,or according to their action on certain

organs. I shall now give a list Of the principal simple remedies

in each class, according to their supposed effects .

The following are the principal simple medicines which are

employed for the cure Of deranged air, phlegm, and bile

1 . List of Simp le Medicines usedfor the Cure of deranged va’

yu,

(air. )Sanskrit. Scientific Names, (Sm.

Z izyphus jujuba or scandens.

Pinus Devadaru .

Costus speciosus.

Turmerick.

Capparis trifoliata.

Phaseolus radiatus.

138

(Dolichos pilosus

Shringdra, Bho Betula Bhoorja .

jap atra,Bald, Sida cordifolio .

(White) Bald,Ddsi, Barleria coerulea .

Kachchhura, Dolichos carpopogon .

Shana/ca, Bignon ia Indica.

Virataru, Pentaptero Arjuna .

Shana, Crotolaria juncea.

Agnimantha, Premna spinosa .

Vatsddanz’

,Menispermum glabrum .

Eranda, R icinus communis.

Ashmabhed, Plectran thus scultellaroides.

Shatamuli, Asparagus racemosus .

Punarnava, Boerhavia diffusa v . alata.

Vasuha, Asclepias gigantea .

Vasira, Pothos Officinalis.

Kdnchanaha, Michelia champaca.

Vardhaha, Siphonanthus Indica.

Ka’

rp dsi,Gossypium hirsutum .

Brischz’

lcdli, Tragia involucrata .

Pati na, Pterocarpus santolinus.

Badard, Mimosa octandra.

Yava, Hordeum hexastichon .

Piper chuvya.

Dolichos biflorus.

Hedysarum gangeticum .

Bignonia suave-olens.

2 . Simp le Medicines usedfor the Cure ofderanged Phlegm.

1 . Kaliyaha, Curcuma xanthorrhiza.

2 . Aguru, Aquilaria agallocha .

3 . Tilap arm’

,Pterocarpus santolinus.

4 . Kushtha, Costus speciosus.

5 . Haridra, Turmerick.

6 . Shita, Marsilea quadrifolia.

7 . Shiva, Mimosa suma.

8 . Shatapushp a, Anethum sowa.

9 . Sarala, Pinus longifolia .

1 0 . Edana, Mimosa octandra .

1 1 . Praki’

rjya, Coesalpinia bonducella.

1 2 . Udahirjya, Galedupa arborea .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

OI

/

I . Diap horetics.—There are four kinds of them

1 .—p asweda, or the application of heat .—Ushdsweda, or the steam of hot water .

3 .—Up anahasweda, or the application of certain warm poultices

or plasters made of difi”erent medicines and,

4 .—Dravasweda , or fomentations with various decoctions .

Ofthe medicinesfor relaxing the body ghee, oil, charbi, marrow,

and such like are to be used ; of these ghee is the best, as it isproduced from milk, which is Obtained from the cow. This milkfirst yields curdled milk, then butter, and with the assistance of

fire ghee is produced. Nothing else can be Obtained from ghee, so

that it may he considered as pure . For diseases ofthe bile,ghee

only is to be given ; of air, ghee and salt mixed and for diseasesof phlegm, ghee, long-pepper, pepper, dry ginger and n itre mixedtogether . A weak person with a badmemory and digestion , should

use ghee to cure them . In certain cutaneous diseases, for open

boils, and for worms, oil is useful, particularly when the phlegm is

deranged. To fat people, particularly when the air is deranged,oil should first be given , particularly when the dej ections are not

natural . Lard (charbi) is most useful for diseases of the join ts,bones and sensible parts.

Perspiration shouldnot be promoted in the scrotum, throat, or eye .

When air and phlegm are deranged in a place, or when only air

or cough is deranged, perspiration alon e is to be invited to such

places. When air and phlegm are deranged, medicines that con

tain the qualities of coldness and heat, are to be used. When air

is deranged, cooling medicines alon e are to be used.

Perspiration is not to be encouraged in very fat, very thin , or

debilitated persons, when affected with diseases of the blood or air,

when the diseases are incurable, in dysentery, or when the person is afflicted with large sores over the body (Katha) . Nor willperspiration be proper after poisons, or drinking ; when given tothe blind, when the abdomen is swelled, or in Erysipelas (visarp a) ,or Leprosy, or in a bad state of the blood. In such cases milk,ghee, curdled m ilk, and hon ey should be given after purgatives .

It is improper to give diaphoretics when the body is burnt ; indiseases of the anus, in grief or fear-producing diseases ; in passions, in hunger, in thirst, in weakness, in jaundice, in gonorrhoea,in hemoptysis, pulmonary consumption, dysentery, during the flowof the menses, or after taking much win e ; in pregnancy, partienlarly n ear its termination , in diseases of air, or in fatal diseases.

When diaphoretics are used under such circumstances they will do

harm, or their peculiar effects will not be produced.

1 4 1

In gen eral, emetics are recommended when the stomach is sur

charged with phlegm,and purgatives when the in testin es and bile

are deranged.

Emetics. After the Oleaginous or relaxing remedies, and the

exhibition of diaphoretics, the five varieties of the other remedies

are to be used. The first of these are emetics.

When the practition er has decided on the n ecessity of giving

an emetic, the preliminary relaxing medic in es with hon ey and

Sa inp ha l (an impure kind of salt,) are to be exhibited. This is

usually don e the day before the exhibition of the emetic, more

particularly when the strength and in ternal heat Ofthe person are

great. A quan tity of whey, congee water or the like, should be

taken, and the warm hand he applied frequen tly to the abdomen for

an hour to soften it .

The usual emetic is then to be given with the proper prayer.

If it cannot be taken for the taste, in the usual way, it may be

sucked through the stalk ofa hollow reed, so that it may be thrown

down the throat . The emetic should be taken in the morn ing . The

person is to place himselfupon a stool, with his thigh parallel to

the floor, and his head back, and sides supported by friends. He

will first feel sick, then saliva will flow from his mouth, and tears

and mucus from his eyes and nose, followed by vomiting. The

vomiting will be promoted by thrusting a finger or the stalk Ofalily down the throat . The vomiting is to be encouraged until the

stomach is completely emptied this is known not to be the case

by the discharge of saliva, by the bad breath, and by the bodybeing itchy.

Emetics are to be used when the air is deranged.

Among emetics, madana fruit is the best—andmay be admin is

tered in the form Ofpowder or decoction with hon ey and rock-salt.Emetics may be given in diseases Ofphlegm, inflammation or ln

ternal abscesses, when the bile is deranged, 8 m.

If the emetics do not act freely, use warm water in ternallymixedwith long-pepper.

Thefollowing emetics are to be usedwhen the phlegm is deranged.

White mustard, rock-salt, and long-pepper repeat the dose

frequen tly until the desired effec t is produced. There are various

emetics which are exhibited in the form of powder or chocolateuse warm water after these . The dose of the emetic should bevaried with the strength ofthe individual.

When an emetic has acted properly it first produces an evacuation of phlegm and bile without pain the breast, n eck, and

'

headfeel clear, and the body light. The vomiting may be stopped by

1 42

‘

snuffing sweet smelling mixtures up the nostrils. One kind of emetic

acts as a purgative, another restores irregularities Of the humours

and retains the body soft .

Vomiting should not be exc ited in cases of sparks being seen,

or sudden blindn ess, or great fatigue, in spleen, or in jaundice,

when the abdomen is swelled, for very fat or thin persons, for in s.

fauts or for very old persons, particularly\when afflicted with piles,

sores or diarrhoea, in tetanus, for person s with hoarsen ess, with

hemoptysis or after great losses of blood, nor for pregnan t women .

~When emetics act as purgatives and not as emetics, in the same way

as purgatives, when they produc e emetic effects, they are unfa

vourable . The kind ofemetic must be varied according as the air,

b ile, orphlegm is deranged ; and various diseases are supposed

tobe pr

oducedwhen the emetic effect is not produc ed, such as a bad

mouth, foetid breath, 850 . In such cases the person is not to eat,

ingbe too severe, it will be repressed by anoin ting the body with

ghee, by cold bathi ng, and by taking internally a decoc tion Of

rasins (kismis) with sugar and water, and other agreeable drinks.

In the afternoon , a warm bath is to be given , and light and

nourishing food, such as ground pulse of differen t kinds with the

broth ofwild an imals. An aperien t is then to be given to act on

the bowels, and food is to be taken in small quan tities, to renovate

the in ternal fire and thus repress the vomiting .

Emetics are very useful in diseases of the phlegm,in cases in

which poison has been taken—in diseases accompan ied with much

thirst—in diseases ofthe internal heat—in diseases of the mammoe-in madness in epilepsy—in elephan tiasis—i

‘

n diseases of the

humours—in fevers—in wan t of appetite—in boils—in diseases of

the stomach (amashay)

—in dysentry—in diseases of the chest—inlarge secretions ofsaliva—in sickn ess—in difficulty ofbreathing

when the person has lost his sense of smell and taste—in di seases

of thelips and mouth—when pus is discharged—in diseases ofthe

throat—and in bloody discharges by stool .

Thefollowing is a L ist of the p rincip al Emetics

Madana, Vangueria spinosa.

Kutaja, Echites antidysenterica .

J imutaha , Andropogon serratus

lhshgahu, A bitter gourd.

Damurdava , Achyran thes aspera.

Ketavadana , A plan t with white flowers, Pandanus

Sarshap a, Sinapis dichotoma.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

144

which the air, phl egm and bile are in equal proportions, and ao

companied with a state of bowels n either relaxed nor_

costive . In

this case the medicin e should be given of a temperate heat and of

a middle quan tity and qual ity.

The dose of medicin e should vary with the age, &c . , of the

patien t . To infan ts give sugar with hon ey. When a purgative has

been admin istered in the above form its action should not be sud

denly stopped. The patient should stay in a closed room, and he

should not take cold water, nor use force in the evacuation .

When the purgative has not produced the desired effect, it will

produce derangemen t in the bile and phlegm. The body is hot, there

is no appetite—and there is a heavin ess in the belly, un easin ess

in the breast, itchiness of the arms, and there is not a free evacua

tion ofthe urin e.When purgatives act too powerful ly, they produce fainting, fre

quen t mucous stools, prolapsus an i, and pain in the belly.

When the purgatives act properly, the patien t feels easy and

air, phlegm and bile pass freely, and he feels happy and light ;air passes by the anus in the usual mann er. After the action

of purgatives, the patien t should take thin and light food- as

congee, and sometimes broths.

If purgatives are taken from time to time in a proper form,they

c lear the understanding and senses, improve the strength of the

organs, and ofthe body. They also improve the appetite and retainthe humours in a healthy state, and retard the approach ofage .

In infancy a mixture ofhon ey, sugar and trivrit ( teori-Conv‘

ol

vulus turpethum) is to be given, in the form ofa powder.When a purgative acts too strongly with a discharge ofblood

in such cases pour cold water upon the body, and give an emetic,wi th congee and honey 5 or give the oily or mucilaginous liquids.

The enema should be prepared with hon ey and ghee animal andvegetable broths should likewise be given .

Purgatives should not be given during the beginn ing of feverthat is while the patien t feels a slight appetite, and his bowels arenot very costive . For infan ts and old or very fat people, purgativesare to be avoided, especially when the body is very hot or muchfatigued—in bloody stools, and immedi ately after labour also whenthe appetite is bad, in derang ementsofthe blood, bile and air

, whenthere are sores on the body, or internally, when there is great thirst,after loss ofblood—and in diseases of the lungs . Should a quack

g ive purgatives at an improper time he will kill the person .

Purgatives should be used in fevers, in di seases from poisons, in

p iles, in swelling ofthe glands, in jaund ice, in epilepsy, in diseases of

145

the heart, in fistula in arm, in vomiting, in diseases ofthe vagina, incolicky pain s, as costiven ess, and in cholera (vishfichika

’

) in diseaseofthe belly (alasaka) , in leprosy, in eruptions, in gonorrhoea, in theenlargemen t of the spleen , in hvdrocele

, in ophthalmia, and in

gen eral in diseases ofthe eye, espec ially in purulen t Ophthalmia, indiseases of the head, ear and nose—in those ofthe anus and pen is,in worms, in diseases of the bile, and involuntary discharges of

semen, 8 m.

The discharges produced by purgatives are first, urin e, foscos,

bile,the medicin e, and lastly phlegm.

Of the purgatives the Tric rit, or as it is usually called Teori

(Convolvolus turpethum ) , and Haritaki (Chebul ic mirobalan ) are

considered the best . Of the oily purgatives, the castor oil is the

best . In diseases of air, give Teori in powder ( 6 annas weight for

a dose) with the juice ofthe sugar cane .

In di seases ofthe bile, the medic in e is admin istered with milk,and in di seases of phlegm,

the same medic in e is given with the

decoction oflong and black pepper and dry ginger .The covering of the Hari taki, is to be used like the teori

’

, in the

same form and dose—and to cure the sam e diseases.

Castor oil is prepared by gathering the seed at the proper

season , drying it for seven days, and taking the kern els and boiling

them in water—the oil is to be removed for use—in other casesthe oil is got by pressing the seeds between weights. This oil is tobe given to chi ldren from birth to the tenth year. It is also given toold and weak and delicate persons.

Purgatives may be prepared and exhibited with ghee, oil, milk

wine, cow’

s urine, broths and c ertain forms offood.

The action of purgative medicin es will be increased by using

warm water with some infusion , the warm or vapor bath, and frictionwith the warm hand. When the laxative effect is not sufficien t, itis not to be repeated till the n ext day but when a sufficient effecthas been produced the purgatives should not be repeated forten days.

The internal fire is dimin ished by purgatives, and as soon as

the action is produced,light food is to be given, and a little mango

bark mixed with congee water is to be used internally, and externally friction so as to increase the in ternal fire .The efforts of nature should not be resisted but when the per

son is weak, and the bowels loose, the medic in e is to be givenin small quan tities and frequen tly repeated. When the bowels areloose, and the patient either weak or strong, purgatives are to be

given, andwhen in that state ifthe bowels are not freely evacuated

146

the collec tion ofthe bad humours, if retained, will produce otherdiseases“.

A small dose ofthepurgative should be first given, andwhen the individual

’

s consti tution is better known , a stronger one may be given .

The following are examples of purgative mixtures take ofHaritaki (yellow myrobalan ) salt, and long pepper in equal propor

tions grind them into a paste with water dose three drams.Or take of Haritaki, (Yellow myrobalan ) , amlaki ( emblic my

robalan ) , vibhitaki (Belerie myrobalan , ) in equal parts. Threetolas of this mixture are to be boiled in 48 of water un til reduced

to 12 tola’

s. To six tolas of this infusion add three ofcastor oil.

Or take three toleis (9 drams) ofcastor oil, with six ofmilk .

When the purga tive is required to be taken“

for diseased bile ;the following mixture is recommended

Take ofGaratwak (cassia bark)Tejpata ( cassia leaf)PepperTeori ( convolvulus turpethum) ,

pound and mix with hot water.

When the phlegm is diseased. Take ofPippali ( longtolzi .

Shun thi (g inger) gYavakshara ( n itre)Shya

'

malatai (Echites ant idysen terica) gTeori (Convolvulus Turpethum) , 1

pound and form an electuary with honey.

Purgatives, or those medic in es which clear the body of diseased

humours below the stomach.

I . Trivrit, Convolvulus turpethum.

Pan icum frumen taceum.

3 . Dami , Croton polyandrum.

4 . Dravamti, An thericum tuberosum .

5 . Sap ta ld, Abrus precatorius.

~

6 . Shankhini, Cissampelos hexandra.

7 . Vishdn ikd, Asclepias geminata ?

8 . Vavdka, Clitoria ternata.

9 . Sbavalan tari , A kind ofConvolvulvus.

1 0 . Skatra/m.

This is known by symptoms of derangements ofphlegm and bile,by the loss of appetite, and heav ine ss and itchiness, heat of the body,and a diminution ofthe internal fire . The dejec tions are constipated insuch cases.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

148

The bladders of pigs, buffalos, goats, Sac” are used for these

injections. For thi s purpose the an imal should be healthy and of

full age. Should bladders not be found a leather bag may be

substituted.

The inj ecting pipe should be made of gold, silver, copper, iron;hardwood or ivory. It should be smooth, strong and tapering likethe tail of a cow, with a slightly tub erculated extremity, six fingers’

breadth in length to the cross piece, from the first to the eighth year

ofage eight or ten from the 9 th to 1 6 th year and afterwards some

what longer. During the first years, the tube should be the size

of the little finger, afterwards ofthe ring finger, then ofthe middlefinger and after the 2 5 th year, the size of the thumb . In adminis

t ering en emata care must be taken not to in troduc e it in an obliquedirection , nor too far or too short a distance, and not to press it on

one side . The cross piec e is likewise varied in length at the differen tperiods of life . The size of the inj ection should also be varied

according to the size ofthe patient’s hands.

For the very young two handsfull of the liquid is to be used for

a child of eight years four, and offrom 1 6 upwards eight hands

full.f There are two varieties ofglysters, one without (asnehaka) and

anothe r with oil ( snehaka) .

The following is offered as an example ofa glyster in costiveness,

piles, dyspepsia, in termi tten t fever, in diseases of the loins, back,and in testines. It should be prepared as follows

Take ofthe decoction of, Suttee .

Pushkara, A kind ofCostus.

Krishnapaka, Carissa carondas.

Madana, Datura metel.Dubdaru, Uvaria longifolia .

Kushtha, Costus speciosus.

Yashti madhu, Liquorice .Villa, Assafoetida

add ten parts ofmilk and four ofoil mix and admin ister warm.

Various other glysters are prepared in much the same way.

This form of admin istering medicin e is very useful when not toe

frequently used, in fever, diarrhaea, and dysentry ; in diseases ofthe

heada nd eyes, in tetanus in convulsions, and in many n ervous

and other diseases.

En emata are not proper in madn ess, in piles, jaundice, in fain ting,for the tim id or those labouring under grief, in indigestion, in vomiting, leprosy, dropsy, asthma, cough, diseases of the throat, diseases

ofair, such as swelling ofthe extremities, before the third or fourth

1 49

month of pregnancy, and in the very young and old, or when af

flicted with n ervous diseases.

Two thirds ofthe usual quan tity offood should be taken beforethe glyster is to be administered before or after eating they willproduc e vomiting .

Before the inj ection is admin istered the body is to be cleanedand anointed the patien t is to rest in the lap of a large man in a

clean situat ion where there are no curren ts ofair he is to reclineon his left side

,and in an hour the en ema will operate .

If the en ema does not operate properly, it will dimin ish the

in ternal heat,increase the urin e, and will not purify the body.

It

first discharges the dej ections, the bile, phlegm and air. In thismann er it purifies the body.

Injections by the urethra (uttaravasti) .—These should be used bya tube fourteen fingers’ breath in length, or the length of the pen is;with an Open ing of the size to allow a mustard seed to pass. For

the female the tube should be four fingers’ breath in length and the

open ing capable of allowing the passage of a small pea (mudga) .For young girls the tube should be two fingers’ breath in length.

The tube should be covered with oil and gen tly in troduced, and bypressing the bladder fixed at on e extremity crosses should be

fixed on the tube to preven t its being introduced too far. The

inj ection should be two tolas in size . These inj ections are usedfor diseases ofthe semen

, the bladder and the uterus.

When there is a burn ing in the bladder, an inj ection of honey,sugar, or a decoc tion of liquorice and cold water is given . In some

cases inj ections ofghee are used and in others astringen t inj ections,

such as decoctions of the bark of the vata tree (ficus indica) and

ban ian tree .After the in troduction of the inj ection the patien t should take

liquid food such as barley water, congee or an imal broths.

After the evacuation by purgatives, emetics, en emata, or blood

letting the patien t is left with the in ternal fire dimin ished, and on

that accoun t heavy food should be dimin ished still more—and

light and nourishing food should be taken .

4 .—Errhines.

This is a large class of local irritan ts and they are used withthe inten tion of producing sn eezing and exciting a di scharge fromthe nostrils

, by which the head is supposed to be cleared from the

presenc e ofbad humours.

There are five varieties offumes used as errhines

1 50

1 .s -Prayojiha, or those forms ofsmoke which are taken by the

nostrils at three efforts. For this purpose differen t spices are

made in to a powder, and a tube twelve fingers breadth in length,its size of the small finger, and to taper to the end which should

be the size of the thumb . The aperture should be the size of

.a (Kobo) or small pea ; for eight fingers the tube is to be sure

rounded with silk cloth, over which the medicin e is rubbed. The

candle thus prepared is to be set fire to, and the fumes are to be

drawn into the nostrils.

2 .-Sna ihiha, are prepared by oily substances. They are

made with wax—differen t gums,such as gaguli (gum resin ) with

ghee

.Thi s is to be lighted and the fumes are to be in troduced

in to the nostril.

3 . Varechan iha, those which clear the head. They are made

with medicin es which irritate the n ostrils, such as black pepper,long pepper, and Agurn a kind of fragran t wood. They are tnbe

made into a paste, with which the tube is to be covered and thenlighted. The fumes produce the efi

’

ectalesired.

4 . Vaman iya , which cause vomiting. They are found by

burning the skin and hair of an imals—dry fish and flesh, and

other substances which produce vomiting. The smoke shouldbe taken in first by the mouth and evacuated through the nostrils

,

and when taken by the nostrils it should be passed through the

month.

These are the usual forms in which expectorants are given forpromoting the secretion of the n ervous membrane of the glottis,trachea, and air cells of the lungs. These are rarely used. In

diseases of the throat and chest the smoke is to be taken by the

mouth, and by the nose for those of the head, nose and eyes.

Kashaghna, which cures cough . The usualmann er of exhibitingit is preparedwith medicin es whi ch cure the cough, such as,

Vrihati ( Solanum melongena) .Kantakarika (Solanum jacquin i) .

Long pepper.Black pepper.Dry ginger.

The root ofthe Kankataka Shringhi .

The proper errhines are fivel .—Nasya, is prepared with ghee, o il, and decoctions ofvege

‘table errhin es. It is usually used in diseases above the neck, fromderangemen ts ofthe air and bile .2 .—Shiroveshantya , is prepared with medic ines which clear the

head of pent up humours—accompanied wi th weight and pain of

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

52

Sanscrit. Scien tific and other names.

1 0 . Giriharn iha, Hedysarum alhaj i .

1 1 . Kin ihi, Achyran thes aspera.

1 2 . Vacha, Orris root .

1 3 . Ja lashnli, Halicacabum cardiospermum.

14 . Karanja , Galedupa arborea.

1 5 . L ashuna , Garlick.

1 6 . Ativisha, Atis or Betula.

1 7 . Shunthi , Ginger.

1 8 . Ta lisha, Flacourtia cataphracta.

29 . Xanthochymus pic torius.

20 . Sarasarjaha,2 1 . Inguai, Name ofa plant called Ingua.

22 . Masha,

A sort ofsmall cardamum .

23 . Betula Bho orja.

24 . Mata langa, Citrus medica.

2 5 . Murang i , Hyperanthera morunga ?

26 . Blossom of the Sacharum Sara.

27 . Phyllan thus emblica.

28 . Ophiocephalus

39 . Borassus fiabelliformis.

30 . Madhaha, Bassia latifolia.

3 1 . Lahsha, Shell Lac .

Assafoetida.

Sores are frequently recommended to be fumigated.

“

For this

purpose a tube is used eight fingers’ breadth in length and the fumes

of the medic in e are to be conveyed so as to be brought into con

tact with the surfac e ofthe sores.

Garg les. The quan tity should be such as can be moved in themouth. The patient should stand erect . He should attend to

what he is do ing, and when it is m ixed with the bad humours ofthe mouth nose or eyes, it is to be evacuated and another portlon i s

to be taken in to the mouth . Gargles usually con sist of astringentdecoctionswith hon ey or urin e of cows, or the juice of acid fruits,black pepper, long pepper, dry ginger, vacha, mustard, haritakiravi balm, mixed with oil, vin egar, win e, cow

’

s urin e, salt or

hon ey, according to the disease, They may be used either hotor cold, and when properly employed they cure diseases ofthe mouth,c lear it and produce easin ess ofthe part.6 .—Emmenagogues. The remedies for restoring or bringing

on the menstrual discharge are vin egar and acids, cow’

s urine,curdled milk, khito (a kind of pea) , cow

’

s urin e and wine .

1 53

These medic in es are not often used, and as the irregularities are

often produced by weakness, toni cs are frequen tly given .

7—D iuretics. This class ofmedic in es are used in strangury, in

pain of the bladder, in scan ty urin e and in gravel and ston e . The

Princ ipal ofthese medicines are

Vira tar n, Barleria longifolia.

Sahachara, Yellow Barleria.

D arbha, Poa Cynosuroides.

Lavang , Nutmeg.

K nsha, Plant called maukatha

K asha, Saccharum spontaneum .

Ashwavedhaha,

Plectranthus sculellaroides.

Agn iman tha, Premna spinosa.

Vasuha, Sesbana grandifiore.

Vasira , Pothos officinalis.Iksha . Sugar-cane.These medicin es are either used in decoction or in powder. For

this purpose the following decoctions are usedwith hon ey and sugar .Take equal quan tities of

Mahasaha,

Kshudrasdhci,

Madhaha,

Sadanstra .

Two tolas ofthe mixture are to be infused in a pin t of water,which is to be put on the fire un til reduced to one quarter, whenit is prepared.

Parturifacien ts.—Medicines for promoting the expulsion of the

foetus from the womb were not known b y the Hindu practition ers.

In cases of lingering labor, man ipulation (man tha) was employed topromote delivery.

Sia logogues. Medicin es for in creasing the secretion from the

mon th when too dry, are often had recourse to for expelling morbidhumours from its n eighbourhood. They should n ever be usedbefore the 5 th year . The medic in es which are con sidered as

belonging to this class are calomel, (rasavasa) and corrosivesublimate, (rasakarpura) . The other medic in es of this class are

black and long pepper,dry ginger, rock salt, acid fruits, Vacha and

other hot spices.

External agen ts stimulating the vital powers. These act eitherexternally or in ternally.The external agen ts are those that produce a determination of

blood to the part ; 2nd, a secretion ofsemen and 3rd the formationofpustules. The following are generally used

T

1 54

Chitraha ,Plumbago .

A'

hhanda, Asclepias.

Sarshap a, Mustard.

Patihita, A kind ofblistering fly.

Shobhanjana, Hyperan thera Morunga.

f l'

rclraha, Fresh ginger.These substances aremade into a past e and applied over the part.Loca l and in tern a l stimulan ts. Carminatives, or those agen ts

wvhich stimulate the stomach and in testinal tract,and lead to the

e xpulsion of flatulence. This numerous c lass of medic in es have.already been enumerated, under the head ofAliments. Themedicines

(p ipaladi) are

Pip pa lz’

, Long pepper.Chao i, A variety ofpepper.Chitraha, Plumbago .

Shri ngarcra, F resh ginger.

Amlac ctasa, Rumex vesicarius.

Maricha . Black pepper.A'

shwamodaha,

C ommon canary seeds.

V aldtaha,

.Seed ofMarking-nu plant.Assafoetida.

J iraha, Cardamum seed.

These medicines are used i np owde r or decoction with or without«o ther articles.

The astringen ts are used for curing diarrhoea and dysentery, andanother kind of astringen t ton ics are of use for the cure of ulcers

and for stopping hoemorrhage ; the princ ipal arePriyanga, Pan icum italicum.

Lyc opodium imbricatum.

G rislea tomentosa

Pannaga, R ottlera t inctoria.

R ahtachandana,

;R ed sandlewood.

Ma trarasa, A kind ofkino gum .

R asanjana, S ulphuret of an timony.

A kind offrag ran t wood.

R ejanacn li, Men ispermum glabrum.

For ulcers and stopping hoemorrhage the following medicinesare usedNyag rodha, Ficus indica.

Udnmbara , Fi cus glomerata.

Ashwa ttha, Ficus religiosa.

Plahsha , Ficus infectoria.

Ili ad/talent, Liquorice root.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 56

and animal food. Of this class is considered good foodx

and drink,good n ews, anointing the body, especially towards the full moon ,

the presence of young women , love songs, clear n ights, betel-nut,win e, flowers, such as garlands round the n eck, sweet smells, beautiful gardens, and a fine prospect . The powder of Vida’ra withghee and honey, and also the powder ofA

'

malaka with sugar, hon eyand ghee, the flower of barley, &c ., with milk and the seeds of

A’

tmagupta increase the person’

s happin ess, and his desires. These

desires will be dimin ished—when they are against the heart, whenthe inclination is wan ting, when much bitter, hot, salt, or sour ar v

ticles of food are eaten , which dimin ish the (dhatu) and desire .In like mann er desire wi ll be removed by its abuse, certain diseases

of the external organ s, and the division of the vessels. Some curetheir desires through the influence of the mind, as holy fakirs

did ; and another class of person s are born without such carnal

desires.

14 . Oleag inous app lications, (Sneha,) such as oil, ghee, fat, &c . ,

may be given by the mouth as a laxative, as an errhine, as an

enema, or for anoin ting the body, or as inj ections for the ear and

urethra, and with food. There are two kinds, vegetable and an i

mal oils . Of the latter cow’

s ghee is the best—and tel (sesamumseed oil) is the best kind of medicin e of the vegetable variety .

Some of thi s class ofmedicines are digested with difficulty, otherswith less difficulty, and a third kind easily.

Ghee is good for weak p ersons who have a bad memory, who are

affected with poison , and in diseases of air and bile . Oil is to beused externally, but it may be given internally in cases of worms,

and in costiveness. Warm water should be taken after the Oleagi

nous substances.

15 . Ag en ts acting by depressing the vital powers are Refrig erants, such as cold infusions both in ternally and externally. Fireis also used. Narcotics .

—Very few narcotics were stated in

the ancient works, Sidi, (ganja, bhang) obtained from the hemp,was used, as also Datura .

1 6 . Chemical Ag ents—These medi cines are l st, Escharotics

and caustics . 2d, Lithon trip tics or solvents of urinary stones or

gravel . The escharotics and caustics will be considered under then ext chapter on Surgery .

Lithontriptics are sometimes employed. For this purpose theusual diuretics are exhibited, particularly Arjuna, (PentapteraArjuna, ) and Ashwavealaha, (Plectranthus scutellaroides, Roxb .)When admin istered by an ignorant person medicine is com

pared to poison , is like the knife, fire, or lightning ; but when ad

1 57

ministered with the necessary knowledge, medicin e is like Amrita

or the water of immortality. There are said to be two kinds of

medicin e, one of which gives strength to the body when no disease

is presen t, and another class cures diseases when they are present .

In like mann er poison may be administered in the proper manner

with great advantage in the cure of disease .

CHAPTER IV.

Sarg ery, (S/zala .

The frequent accidents which must have occurred among a raceof people devoted to hunting and agriculture, and the feuds thatwere so frequen t among them, induced the Hindu sages to pay at

tention to wounds, fractures, and dislocations. In this manner, weexplain the importance which the ancient writers of the Hindusystem ofmedicin e give to this branch of the healing art, and the

atten tion which they bestowed upon it . These remarks prove that ata very remote period oftheir History, the Hindu practitioners were

accustomed to perform lithotomy, the extraction of the dead foetus,paracentesis, thoracis and abdominis, &c . This proves the exten t

of their practical knowledge, and the en ergy and boldnesss in exeeuting hazardous Operations which distinguished their ancient

surgeons, and forms such a remarkable contrast to the present igno

ran t and timorous Surgeons of Bengal . This is the more remark

able as these treatises were supposed to be written by mania or di

vine sages, who would not compromise their character by record

ing precepts utterly con trary to the ritual oftheir law , or at variance

with the principles and prejudices of their coun trymen . Indeed,these precepts are often completely irreconcileable with their pre ~

sent notions, which must be considered as slowly growing out ofthe altered state of society, and are unsupported by their venerableancien t, and most remarkable civil and moral as well as medicalinstitutions.

According to the Hindu Shastras diseases are cured by the influence of prayers and medicines ; and when these are ineffectualit is n ecessary to have recourse to the kn ife or other such means.

According to the shastras, surgery, therefore, may be defined to bethat branch ofMedicine which principally efl

’ects the cure of dis

To remove rapidly ; or the art ofremoving foreign substances fromthe body, particularly the arrow.

158

cases by the application ofthe handalone, the employment ofinstruments, or the the use of topical applications.

At the great battle ofthe Asuras and Devatas, Jagya was severelywounded in the n eck, and the Aswin i Kumara, or the practitionersof heaven, soon cured the wound. This pleased the devatas so

much that they were received among them with much respect, anda share of their honors is still bestowed upon them . Bramba alsodeclared that the art of cutting, healing ulcers, setting bon es, and

the use Of escharotics, was the first branch of the healing art im

parted by the deity to mankind and as the Operations of Surgeryare rapidly performed, and afford immediate relief, they impart

holiness, riches, and a good name to the performer, and will

ensure his passage to heaven after death .

In the Ayur Veda, Surgery is considered as the first of the eightdepartments of the Medical Science and Dhanwan tari was bornto teach this as well as the other departments. He declaresj in

deed, that surgery cannot be practised with success unless the

practitioner is familiar with the practice ofmedicine Of which it is

only a branch .

The following remarks on Surgery will be considered, under theheads ofl st . The structure of the body, and their natural and relative

positions, so as to enable the Surgeon successfully to performoperations.

2nd. The nature of surgical diseases ; including inflammation,ulceration , and fistula .

3rd. Description of Surgical instruments and bandages.

4th . The means Of removing blood from the body, includingcupping, leeches, and scarifications .

5 th . Styptics.

6th . Caustics, actual and potential .7th . Burns and scalds.

8th. Directions for performing operations, for removing foreign‘

substances from the body, and for treating wounds .

9th . The means of improving , and offorming new ears and nose .l 0th . Of fractures and of their treatment .1 1 th . Of dislocations and their treatment .

SECTI ON I .

The importance of having a knowledge ofAnatomy in thosewho exercise this branch of the healing art, is so evident ; and has

been already noted so fully, that it will be suflicient to refer to page42 for the Hindus’ knowledge on this interesting subject.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

160

different colours and is accompan ied with various degrees and kinds

ofpain, according as the one or other of the hum ours predomin ate,and the discharges are ofdifferen t colours, but gen erally resemblebile and blood, being red, black and yellow,

and ofvarious con sist

encies. This variety is cured with difficulty it is large ; sometimes forms quickly, in other cases slowly. Sometimes it becomesprominen t as it ripens, at other times it remain s flat .

e . When blood is deranged, produc ing inflammation , the swelling

resembles that produced by deranged bile, but is Of a darker red

c olour. When large it has a dark yellow colour and is very hot

and painful with much fever .

fl Acciden tal inflammation, produced by wounds, bruises, &c .,

resembles the other varieties in the symptoms,and on ly varies in

the treatmen t, by cold applications being proper in this class, but

not in the other. When the blood is deranged in this variety, itresembles bile, but is Ofa darker red colour. When air

,bile and

phl egm are much deranged, the swelling will be incurable but willsuppurate, as also when the physic ian does not apply proper

medicines. When such a patient does not eat or act in the propermann er the wound will not heal. By the wound of a part the air

is deranged produc ing pain, and the blood of the part becomesmixed with the bile of the part and becomes deranged. In thismann er, pain, fever, thirst and heat Ofthe body occurs, followed bythe other symptoms ofderanged bile .

Inflammation is likewise divided into three stages, the invasion,

the acute, and the suppurating stage . In the first there is not muchheat nor discoloration , or hardn ess ofthe part. The pain and swell

ing of the part is likewise slight. In this stage the inflammationis said to be, A

’

ma (unripe) . In the second stage the pain is lancinating, or like the bites of ants, or as if they were runn ing about.In other cases, the person feels as ifthe part was burn t, torn, pressedor bound ; the person becomes restless and uneasy, and the swellingis much increased and discoloured, accompan i ed with much heat,thirst, loss ofappetite, and other symptoms Offever. This stage iscalled p ackaména ( ripen ing stage) . The third stage is distin

guished by the part becoming pale, the swelling dimin ishing

, be

coming soft and wrinkled, and the skin becoming rough, scaly and

elastic . The pain becomes throbbing, with a feeling Of itchin ess

the abscess open s, the fever diminishes and the appetite returnsThis stage is calledp akwa or ripe.This pus is produced by the air, bile, and phlegm, the bile pre

paring the pus from the blood. In inflammation the air producesthe pain, and the bile ripens the swelling .

1 6 1

The inflammation varies with the tissue which is involved in thedisease, Ofwhich there are eight varieties, according as it affectsthe skin

,flesh, vesse ls, tendons, bon es , join ts, abdomen , and sensible

parts of the body. When confin ed to the skin,inflammation is

cured quickly ; but when it affects the other tissues, it is curedwith more difficulty and passes through the differen t stages.

The air, bile and phl egm when deranged produce inflammation,which will vary in its effec ts accordin g to the part which is affec ted.

When it affects the abdomen, it produces gulma, &c ., with a puf

finess ofthe abdomen , which resembles the white an t’s n est. Suchinflammation and swelling may also occur at the anus, pelvis,or penis ; at the navel or sides, in the groin, mammae, or

spleen, in the liver, pancreas , or the organ of thirst. This

in ternal inflammation varies in the same mann er as the external

does. When the former oc curs in the anus it retains the air in the

pelvis, and urine is secreted in small quantities and with pain .

When it occurs at the navel there is a hiccough, and a gurgling

noise . When the sides are so affec ted, it is from diseased air ; and

when the groin is so affected, the lo ins and back feel very painful.When the breast is so diseased, the person remains doubled up ,

and respiration is performed with difficulty and pain . When thespleen is di seased, and when the breasts are affected, the whol ebody is un easy, and fee ls painful ; and in the latter disease there

is a copious sec retion Of phlegm. When the liver is affec ted withinflammation, it produces noise in the breathing, w ith hiccough

and when the pancreas is so diseased, the person is continuallywan ting to drink.

When the inflammation occurs in sensible parts, whether the

disease be rec en t or ripe, whether it be large or small, it givesgreat pain . When the internal inflammation is above the navel,the pus will be discharged by the mouth ; and when under this,by the lower outlets. In this case the person will live, but in theformer he will die .

When the breast, navel, or pelvis is diseased the person willdie when it suppurates internally ; but he may recover when theabscess bursts externally. The first five varieties of inflammationmay be cured ; but when produc ed by air, bile, and phlegm the

disease is incurable . In all cases Of inflammation when it isaccompan ied with the symptoms of S/i otha, such as swelling Ofthe

abdomen , discharge Of pus or blood, vomiting, hiccough, thirst,painful and sonorous respiration, the fatal result may be expected.

It is ofmuch importanc e that the Surgeon should be able todetect the stage of the inflammation as if the opening be made

U

162

before the swelling is ripe, or if it is not opened when ripe, bad

consequences will follow in either case . In such cases the Surgeon

will be known from the quack . This fellow by Open ing the

unripe inflammation , cuts into blood vessels, tendons, &c . ,aecom

panied with a great discharge of blood, or followed by a great

accession Of pain : again, if the inflamed swelling is not open ed

when ripe, the pus buries itself in the neighbouring parts, forminglarge cavities, or fistulous Open ings, which are cured with difficulty.

In such cases, the pus, like fire, burns the surrounding parts, which

like fuel are consumed.

In the gen erality Of cases of inflammation , (Brana, Shotha) the

cure will be soon accomplished but if injudiciously treated i t

will be t edious. The inflammation is ofan unfavourable kind whenlarge, when not promin en t but shrivelled, when hard or when verysoft, when very promin ent or when very dark, when very cold or

very hot, when ofa black, yellow,red, or white colour, when it

has an unhealthy disagreeable appearance . It is also unfavourablewhen the pus is in large quantities, when the muscles

,vessels and

tendon s are numerous in the part ; when the discharge has a foetidsmell and has fibrous substances mixed up with it, when the swell

ing is large, or there are numerous small swellings, when bad bloodis evacuated andwhen the patient is very Old.

The general indications to be followed in the cure ofcommoninflammation are, the use of sedatives, local bleeding, poultices,Opening the abscess, clean ing it, healing the breach of con tinuity,and lastly restoring the natural colour to the part. Sushruta des

cribes sixty differen t indications to be employed in the cure of

inflammation and ulcers, such as, rubbing and anointing the partwith certain medicines that dry it up

*, pouring water upon the

part, fomentations, frictions with ghee, poultices with maturatingsubstances, with the observance of spare diet, emetics and purgatives, 8m. There are eight kinds of incisions which are to be used forthe evacuation of the pus and blood ; also means to promote adhe

sion , as pressure, stopping the bleeding, dimin ishing the heat, theapplication ofthick poultices and astringents, the application oflints

covered with medic inal pastes, the use OfOil, the juice Of c ertainplan ts, the application of certain powders to the ulcers, fumigation, means to depress elevation, and to increase or dimin ish the

hardn ess ofparticular parts, and the application ofcaustic and cauteries. The last consideration is to restore the natural colour to the

Medicine supposecf to pass internally by the roots of the hair andthe perspiring pores.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 64

to a well aired, though sheltered room, and placed in a large bed,with his head turned to the east, the residence of the gods, and is to

be surrounded by cheerful friends. Directions are n ext to be given

as to his di et and reg imen . Great care is to be taken to keep thepatient clean . The wound is to be dressed on the third day, and

care is to be taken not to allow the wound to heal too soon . After

it has been healed, the patient is to take care not to use indigesti

ble food, he is also to avoid violent exercise, such as runn ing, un til

the c icatrization is complete . In dangerous cases the absc ess willOften require to be dressed twice a day, as i t in such cases resembles a house on fire that requires prompt assistance .A person with this disease should avoid new rice, heavy pulse,

hot, heavy, bitter salt and sour articles offood, with dried flesh, andvegetables. In all cases the patien t should be recommended toavoid spirituous liquids, to eat little and regularly, and sleep at nightthe usual time .

Ulcers (Bruno)

Ulcers are either produced from exterior or internal causes.

There are fifteen varieties, some say sixteen . Each ofthe humours

or a couple of the humours, then the three humours deranged at

the same time, or when combin edwith deranged blood, produc e suchulcers. There is another kind called a healthy ulcer (Sudo Bruno)which is characterized by having a smooth and equal surface, beingsoft, accompan iedwith little pain and without any discharge.

When the ulcer is produced by deranged air (biu) it is characterized by its black or red appearan ce, it is superficial, and dis

charges a cold, muc ilaginous and scanty discharge. The pain isalso peculiar, being of a crackling stiffkind. This pain is severeand does not affect the flesh.

When deranged Bile produces an ulcer, it is ofa yellowish bluecolour, and is surrounded by a red colour and yellow eruptions,spreads quickly, and discharges a hot and red matter with a burn

ing pain .

The Phlegm when it produces an ulcer, there is much itchin ess,and it is deep seated. The vessels and n erves of the part areaffected, and it is hard and white without much pain, and the dis

charge is white, cold, mucilaginous and thick. The part feels heavy.

When produced by Blood the ulcer becomes red and is sur

rounded by black vessels. The smell is like that of a horse stablewith much pain, great heat, and it discharges blood and is aecom

panied with symptoms ofbile.

65

The ulcers which are produced by the combination of the de

creased humours partake of the combination of the peculiar symptoms Ofeach.

The ulc ers are likewise divided in to large extent ofulcer,large

deep seated, very hard and soft, much elevated or depressed,very

cold or hot, very black, red, yellow orwhite, or disagreeable looking

ulcers, or covered with a slough, with a foetid discharge, very pain

ful or bloody discharge, or very Old all these are unfavorable

cases of ulcer. When the discharge is yellow, thin and has the

smell ofraw flesh it is superficial . When the ulcer is situated in theflesh

,the discharge is thick, only white and muc ilaginous. From

vessels, the discharge is with much blood and it is also watery withmuch purulen t matter. When bon es are affec ted ; the discharge ismixed with Oily matter and blood, when in the joints they cannot

be moved, and the discharge is muc ilaginous, frothy and bloody.

When any Ofthe viscera are affected the discharge may be aecom

panied with urin e or feces, or a watery discharge .Trea tmen t Of ulcers. The cure of ulcers is easy when treated

by a skilful practition er, and when the patien t follows the properregimen . When treated by an ignoran t person, or if the patien tdoes not follow the proper regimen , the cure will be much moredifficult. The person should live in a large airy and clean house,upon a large bed with his head towards the east ; he should be

encouraged by the presenc e and attention offriends he should-

not

sleep during the day, as it will produce much swelling, and a

OOpious discharge with itchiness. He should avoid much walking

and the presence Of women . He should avoid new win e, different

kinds Of peas, and fruits, too much salt, pungen t articles, jagree,

cakes, dry vegetables, and the flesh of fish and amphibious animals,

cold water is likewise to be avoided, with curdledmilk and indi

gestable food. He should avoid exposure to wind and dust, smoke,

too much eating, and disagreeable sounds or smells. He should avoidwatching at n ight, and eating at unusual hours. He should keep hishair, beard and nails short, wear clean clothes, and perform the usualc eremon ies ofreligion, and his food should be light and n ourishing.

The ulcers are to be dressed with a cloth covered with new oin tmen t, and secured by a bandage Of silk or cotton . The ulcersare to be cleaned with a watery decoction Of cassia fistula and

other astringen t vegetable medicin es. Ghee should be preparedwith the sulphate of iron (kaceera) , black Hellebore (kotorohunee) ,turmerick, and the root Of the jatee . In other cases theyadd astringen t barks or astringents as n imbo, rajbeerka, yellow

(Hurrital) and red arsen ic (monosillaa), powders prepared with

1 66

~

rOck salt, the sulphate of iron, and the lees of urine, with boch

and turmerick, 8m.

Fumiga tions by means ofdifferent rosins, the smoke ofwhich are

applied to the ulcers.

Pastes are also applied to the ulcerated surface . They may bemade Of

Somongaa

Soma

Sorolaa

Somobolko

Chondono

Kaap ola, (90

When the ulcer is much elevated apply the powders Ofthe following substances, sulphate of iron, (kasus,) rock salt

, red arsen ic,mixed with eggshells and the buds of (jaatee) . These may be combined, or one or two of them may be mixed and applied to the

ulcerated surface .

Purgatives, emetics, and fasting are to be occasionally used in

ulcers, and the other indications which have been already stated

under‘the head Oftreatmen t of inflammation .

Should there be much bleeding from the ulcer it is to be stopped

by means ofstyptics ; when accompanied with fever andmuch burn

ing on the part, apply cold appl ications ; when there is little dis

charge, the ulc er superficial, and the surface irregular, apply poulticesmade Of seeds con tain ing Oil, as linseed, with fomen tation . When

the appearance is very dark and the smell disagreeable apply as

fringen t decoctions. When sloughing and drylooking, applymedic in es

to clean the part. When the edges ofthe ulc er are very hard, localbleeding by scarification or by leeches is to be used with fomentations. When the edges are soft and flabby apply astringen ts.

When the edges are elevated and of long standing apply caustics.

When the c icatrix is white it will be made black or ofthe natural

colour by the preparations of the marking nut. For restoring hair

to a part apply the ashes of ivory with crude an timony. Ifwormsare gen erated in ulcers, apply the decoctions ofophiorrhiza mungos

(surubaa ) and Symplocos Alston ia.

When the worms are p roduced by cows urine and the like,caustic solutions are to be applied. These are Obtained from the

a shes ofc ertain t rees. A piece of recen t flesh may also be appliedover the ulcer so as to attract the worms to it . When the ulc er is

v ery old and the person emac iated and weak, give him nourishingfood, and medic in e of a ton ic n ature . When produced by poison

they are to be treated as poisonous wounds.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 68

Descrip tions of Surg ical Instruments and Bandages.

The description Of these instrumen ts is neither minute nor

precise and not being illustrated by drawings, or now employed,

a few only of each class will be delin eated. In gen eral the name

of the instrument was derived from the resemblance to c ertai n

Objects such as certain leaves, &c .

The hand is considered the first, the best, and the most impor

tan t Ofall Surgical Instruments, as it is with its assistance that all

Operations are performed.

There are classes ofinstruments, one ofwhich are blunt (jon tros)

the second have sharp cutting edges (sotros) and the third are

named unosustro or substitutes for cutting instruments, such as

caustics, fire,horns of animals open at both extremities by which

suction is made, and gourds which are used as cupping glasses and

are applied before as well as after the scarifications, I shall now

add a few remarks on each of those classes.

l st. Jon tros, or blunt in struments, consist of Swasteeka, San

dansa, Ta lajon tros, lVarujon tros, Solaakaa and Up ajon tros.

a . Swasteska -jan tra are curved or hooked instruments which

are used to extract splinters of bon es, or foreign bodies, and in

c luding pinchers, n ippers and the forceps. They are formed of iron,

usually eighteen inches long, having heads or points shaped like

the heads ofan imals, the beaks ofbirds,b. Sandansa -jantra, or tongs, which are Oftwo kinds, one with,

and another without a handle, and are used to remove extran eoussubstances from the soft parts, as the flesh, skin, veins, 8m. Theyare usually sixteen inches in length.

0 . Ta la -jun tra resemble, though smaller than the last namedinstruments and were employed for removing foreign substanceslodged in the outer canals as the ear, nose, 8 m.

d. Nara -jan tra consist of twen ty varieties of tabular instruments, ofdifferen t sizes and shapes, according to their intended use,i ncluding canulae, catheters, syringes, 8 m. They are used for remov

ing extraneous substances from deep seated canals, as the intestines,urethra, 8m. for examin ing deep seated parts, for the applicationofother instrumen ts, for drawing offfluids by suction , 850 .

e. Solaakaa or Probes are rods and sounds. There are twentyeight kinds, varying in size and shape, for extracting foreign matters

lodged in parts ofdiffi cult access, for c learing in ternal canals, more

particularly the urethra ; some have points like a half pea, others

like an earth worm or the point ofan arrow. Some ofthem have

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

O

1 6 . Ard or Aul, a long sharp n eedle in a

1 7 . Bedusop otraka , long sharp cutting instrument for tapping .

like the leaf of the ratan

1 8 . Booreeso, or book.

1 9 . D on tosunleu, pincers for extracting teeth .

20 . Asa nce or p robes, eight fingers breadth in length.

Those instruments, the length of which is not marked are six

fingers breadth in length.

Unosustra , are instrumen ts which may be used when cutting ih

strumen ts are n ot at hand, or when the patient is too fearful to

admit the use of cutting instrumen ts. These are the sharp bark

of the bamboos, different kinds Of hard stones, or glass, leeches,fire

,caustics, nails, rough leaves, such as those of gogec, seefaleeka

trees, 850 .

Practica l Instructions.

After the student has been taught science by books, he is next tobe instructed in the prac tice of the use Of the instruments, 8 m.

W ithout practical skill, theoretical knowledge is of no use . The

differen t surgical operations are to be shown to the studen t, upon

wax spread out upon a board,gourds, cucumbers and other soft

fruits. Tapping and puncturing should be prac tic ed on a leather

bag of water or soft mud. Scarification s and bleeding may be

prac ticed upon the fresh hides ofan imals from which the hair hasbeen removed, or upon the dead bodies, and the punc turing or lancing the hollow stalks ofwater lilies or the vessels of dead an imals.

The mann er of holding and the use of the probe is to be practisedupon a piece ofhollow bamboo or the like . The removal of sub

stances from cavities, by removing the large seeds ofthe jack or bel

fruit, and the extraction of teeth is to be practic ed upon deadbodies and an imals. For sowing he should practice on leatherand cloth . The application of bandages and ligatures shouldbe practiced upon flexible models of the human body and the

mean s of making noses, ears, &c . ,be practised upon dead animals

the application of caustics, and cauteries to be done on an imals.

The use Of inj ections is to be practised with a water pot havinga canal .

There are eight kinds ofsurgical operations. They are cbedaana

or inc ision , as in fistula-in -ano .

2 . Bli edno, Open ing parts as oflarge abscesses3 . L ire/l i mo, or drawing lines

, by which the parts are n ipped,sacrified or innoculated.

1 7 1

4 . Bhedlmo, or puncturing, as open ing veins in hydrocele and

dropsy.

5 . Eshyno, to probe or sound parts, as in fistula, to asc ertain

the presenc e offoreign substances.

6 . Aham o,or the operation of extrac tion, as of the stone ; of

the teeth, and ofthe fetus.

7 . Wslzra cano, to remove fluids as pus, blood, 8 m, or of bad

humours as in Leprous blotches in Elephan tiasis, 8 m.

8 . Seebceno, to sow parts together, as in wounds, espec ially n earjoints. The substances to be used for sowing are thread, twin e,or small ligatures made ofthe skin ofan imals or fibres ofvegetablesubstan ces, roots, hair, 8m. he stitches are. to be longer or shorteraccording to the nature of the wound. Before sowing a wound itshould be carefully clean ed, and all extran eous substanc es shouldbe removed. The needle should be from two fingers breadth inlength, to three or more . They are to be long

,three edged for

deep fleshy wounds, and a third or curved kind should be used invital parts and in wounds of the scrotum and abdomen . For fixing

a torn offear I the parts are to be brought together and sown . For

practising these operations pieces of leather and cloth are to besewn together. After a wound has been sewn

, a mixture of equalparts ofthe seed of the preunga a ng ano, ( sulphate ofantimony,)jastaabo (liquorice) and lodro (an astringen t bark) is to be thicklysprinkled round the wound, which is then to be covered witha piece oflint or silk cloth, and the whole secured with a bandage .

The physician is then to give proper direction s as to diet,8 m.

Besides the above instrumen ts, the surgeon should provide thread,

leaves, pledgets, heatedmetallic plates for erubescen ts, and a varietyof astringent and emollient applications before commencing an

operation .

Bandages.

There are fourteen kinds ofBandagesl st . Koosa, or a hollow cylinder or sheath for the fingers,

penis, 8 m.

2 nd. Dama , a large bandage to support parts.

3rd. Sasteeko,a circular bandage to apply to joints, forehead,

chest and under the ears.

4th. Uneebuluta , a rollerorbandage to encircle the extremities, 850 .

5 th. Protobe, a broad bandage for the n eck, and the external

organs ofgeneration .

2

6 th. Mandala, a circular bandage for the head.

7 th . S togheeka, a bandage enclosing a Splin t to keep the parts

firm,as the join ts ofthe fingers, the penis, 8 m.

8th . Gomoka , a double bandage which is applied to ulcers.

9 th . Kata, a four tailed bandage for the cheeks, temples, lower

jaw, 8m.

loth . s eena, abandage for the angles ofthe eyes.

1 1 th. Bebonda, a bandage for the back, abdomen, and chest.

It is a firm c ircular bandage .

1 2 th. Beetana, a large bandage for the head.

1 3th. Gop ana, a concave bandage for the chin, eyes, lips,

shoulders, scrotum and pelvis.

1 4th. Ponckanghu, a bandage for the clavicle with four tails.

The surgeon is to dec ide on the kind of bandage in each parti

cular case . Its application varies with the disease . Sometimes the

bandage is to be applied above, below,or upon the wound or ulcer

according to the effect required. In general the bandage is to be

applied after the application of the n ecessary o intment spread upon

linen . There are three degrees oftightn ess with which the bandage

is to be applied, the first being tight, the second loose, and the third

moderately tight . When bile and blood are deranged, or when blows

and poisons produc e the disease, the bandage should be looselyapplied and when phlegm and air are deranged the tightn ess may

be increased. In other cases bandages may be applied more tightly.

To the chest, buttock, belly, lo ins, axilla, groins, and head, a tightbandage is to be applied. To the extremities

,face, ears, throat,

penis, sc rotum, back, and to the sides ofthe belly and chest the

pressure of the bandage should be moderate . In diseases of the

eye and join ts loose bandages are to be used. Should the bandagebe applied tight, the medic in e will not produce the desired effec t,and all the symptoms of the disease will be aggravated. This will

also be the case when no bandage is applied, by the formation of

insects, and by exposure to the influence of heat and cold, which

will aggravate the ulc er, and preven t the cure . When accompa

n ied with acute inflammation, and when the part is hot, painful,and sen sible, no bandage is to be applied to the part, for the cure ofthe disease, but to retain the application s to the part . Nor are

bandages to be applied when the sore has been produc ed by fire, or

excoriating, when it contains pus when sloughing, or ifit is n ear the

anus ;‘

when produced by extravasation of urin e from Leprosy,Ifbon es are fractured, or joints dislocated, or if the bone is thrustthrough the flesh, the bandages will be ofmuch use . This is also

the case when the tendons and vessels are divided. In the treat

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 74

blood is n ot discharged by the first bleeding, another is to beperformed on the second or third day after the first . Do not

endeavour to remove all the had blood by the first bleeding, as

a little bad blood may be purified by the use of remedies ; andthus the danger ofbleeding too freely will be avoided. When a

swelling requires to be opened and from the nature of the part,as when near the windpipe ; a commun icating vein proceeding from

the diseased part may be open ed.

Bleeding should not be performed when the person is below 1 6

and above 70 years ofage, when the female is pregnan t or soon after

delivery, nor when the body is dry when in a state ofdrunkenness

or when there are sores upon the body when the humours (data) arediminished when there is copious perspirations or when there are

diseases ofair present. Patients should not be bled in very cold, hot,or stormy cloudy days when there is no disease present, when theperson is weak, after watching, or when digestion has not takenplace . When afflicted with general dropsy, in jaundice, during freeperspiration, piles, in madness, after vomiting or purg ing, in severefevers, in tetanus, in palsy, 8 m. When venesec tion is to be performed, the air should be clear and warm. If possible it shouldbe avoided during the rains ; but always the abstraction is to takeplace by degrees, at the intervals ofone or more days accordingto the c ircumstances of the case . In the cold weather venesectionshould be performed in the middle ofthe day. The flow of the

blood from the wound in the vessel may be retarded when the

person is very fearful, fain t, and much fatigued when he is verythirsty, when the bandage is not properly applied and when he hasmuch had blood.

When the person is bled for a disease ofthe spleen, the vein isto be opened at the bend of the left arm

, or the vein between the

left ring and little finger in asthma and severe cough ; in disease

of the penis open the vessels near the middle of the penis. In

hepatic diseases cpen the temporal artery. In madness and epilepsy,and in diseases ofthe tongue or teeth, open the veins under thetongue . In tertian aguc open the veins at the j unc ture ofthe

sacrum with the spine . In epilepsy the veins of the neck may

also be opened.

There are twenty ways ofimproperly performing venesection

1 st . Durdeeda , when the instrumen t is too small, and the blood

does not flow freely, followed by a painful swelling .

2 nd. Otecbeda,when an ignorant person opens a large vessel,

or makes the wound in the ve in large by which the blood passes

among the cellular substanc es ofthe part .

1 75

3rd. Cbane/weld. resembles the last .

4th. F ife/weld, when the knife is blun t and tures the parts,

which swell .

sth. Kutecka . when several attempts have been made to open

the vein .

6 th. Op rorsreetri , when the person is fearful, the weather verycold, and the blood is not discharg ed.

7 th. Ole/deem, when the kn ife is large, sharp, and a large

wound is made .

8 th. Obeedti, when little blood flows.

9 th. Poreesuskd, when little blood flows from deranged air

which dries the wound.

loth. Kun teelii, when the wound is too small, and little blood

flows.

l l th. Ba teetd , when the arm had been improperly bandagedand when the hands shake, and no blood flows.

1 2 th. On utectobeend, like the last .

13th. Shostrolmté , when there is a great flow ofblood from the

large wound in the vessel, which cannot be stopped by the usual

applications.

14th. Tirjokbeedd, when the wound is not direct, and is not

sufficiently large .1 5 th. Op obeedd, when the. kn ife is not a proper one, and several

attempts are required to open the vein .

l 6 th. Obiodeed, when blood letting is not proper.1 7 th. Bidurdd, when the patien t

'

s body is in an unfi t state and

diseases are consequently produc ed.

1sth. D emdtd, when the part requires to be rubbed much beforethe vein can be opened and when the blood on ly flows at in tervals, like the milk ofcows.

l 9 th. I’mwp unorbc-edti , when the. knife is too small. and several

small wounds are made in the vein .

20 th. See-rsoodee, when nerves, tendons, and vital parts haveb een wounded, it produces severe pain, restlessness aml death.

When the operation is thus improperly pertbrmed, the wound is tobe treated by the application of tbmen tatio ns, and o ther remedies.which will be stated in the sec tion treat ing ofwounds.

An able Surgeon is therefore required to bleed, as veins are

always changing , and if not properly performed, it produces varioustroublesome diseases of veins ; which are not cured by the usualremedies. It is not enough to know the situation of veins ; but hemust likewise know the time, and the extent to which the bleedingis to be carr ied. In some diseases, bleeding is halfthe treatment

6

in the same manner as enemas are in many medical diseases. As

cutting, fire,

give pain rajahs, rich people, children or old

people, and fearful and weak people, when they require to lose

blood, may have leeches in preference to venesection more espec i

ally in the cases of had blood produced by diseased air, bile and

cough . When bad blood has been removed from a vein , the person feels happy, the part light, the pain ceases, and the morbidsymptoms dimin ish.

After bleeding avoid anger, violent exerc ise, too much sitting,walk

ing , exposure to great heat or cold, or improper food, for a mon th ;espec ially very heating and cooling articles. The patient should liveon good and light articles of n ourishing food, un til his strengthrestored. If this is not attended to, bad blood will be generated.

Bad blood in the body, produces itchin ess, swelling and pain likethat of fire with a red appearanc e of the part which suppurates.

When deranged air has produced had blood it does not flow from

the wound in the vein like water it is covered with foam,is dark ,

thin, and draws slowly. When deranged by bile, the blood has a

yellow blue colour, has a bad smell, and it dries slowly. When the

blood is deranged by phlegm the blood is Oleaginous,and smooth

it is cold, ofa pale yellowish colour,is in large quan tities and flows

slowly. When bile and blood are deranged in a part it has a darkc olour . When two or three ofthe humours are deranged in a partthe blood has the peculiarities ofthe individual, and deranged bloodcombined. Should severe pain occur in open ing a vein, as iffirehad been applied

, the part is to be rubbed with warm ghee and

g estemodo (a plan t . )The blood is in a healthy state when it is of a bright red colour

like that ofred j elly, or ofthe rainbow ; when the sen ses are perfect

with a desire to exerc ise them ; and the person is strong and in

high spirits.

2 nd. Scam'

fi ca tions. By means ofa thin and sharp kn ife ; longi

tudinal or transverse lin es at equal distance are to be made neither

very deep nor superfic ial . They should be applied quickly, avoid

ing vital parts, joints and large vessels.

3rd. Cup p ing . The,

local accumulation ofhad blood may be

removed by means of cupping, which is performed by a horn

cut smooth, and even, at the large extremity with,a small

open ing at the narrow end. The large extremity is applied over

the scarified part, the air in the horn is sucked out, and the

finger is then dexterously plac ed over the open upper end. All

accumulation ofblood in the part included in the horn is discharged

from the scarification . The horn is repeatedly applied, and the air

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

78

4 . Mushikci , are ofa mouse colour and have a bad smell .

5 . Pundurikd-mukhi , are of a brown hue, and have a mouth

like that ofa lily.

6 . Sfiabarikd, are of a green colour like the leaves of a waterlotus, and are ten fingers breadth long . This kind is only proper

for removing blood from animals.

These leeches are found in Persia ( Yavana ) , ancien t Delhi

(Panda ) , at Mutra (Pautana ) , Sac . They are found in small

numbers in clear and deep pools ofwater, which con tain water lilies,and are surrounded with sweet smelling plants. The middle sizedleeches are the best.These leeches are to be caught in a piece of leather or cloth,

and placed in a n ew water-pot, in which some clay and pure waterhas been put, some grass or leaves of aquatic plan ts are to be

placed on the pot for them to lie upon, and the roots ofwaterlilies and dry flesh are to be given them for food. The water

is to be changed every third day and the water pot every seventh

day.

When the leeches grow very large and are very vigorous

when they are weak, or emac iated, when they do not bite, or

take little blood, or are of the venemous kind they are not to be

used.

When the part is not very sensible it is to be rubbed dry, and it

is then to be covered with cow-dung and earth to dry the part .

The leech is then to be taken from the water-pot and i ts body is to

be anointed with mustard seed paste . It is then to be put in to abason with fr esh water for a short time and then removed and sur

rounded with a piece ofcloth, and the mouth is then to be applied

to the part affected. Ifit does not fix quickly, apply a drop or two

of milk or blood to the part, or make one or two very slight scarifi

cation s, which will induce them to fix themselves more readily.

When the leeches are sucking, sprinkle a few drops of cold water

upon their bodies. When the leeches have removed the n ecessaryquan tity of blood sprinkle a small quan tity of salt upon their.

heads, to make them drop off. Put the gorged leech upon some

dry bran, put a little oil and salt upon its mouth and then stripthem . Put them n ext in fresh water, and if they are livelythey will live, and may be used agai n ; but if they are languid,they will soon die and they should therefore be at onc e thrownaway.

The part upon which the leeches have been is to be smearedwith hon ey, cold water, and astringent substances. In other casespoultices may be applied.

1 79

SECTION V.

Ifall the had blood is not removed by the bleeding it will leave

a swelling, redn ess, heat, itchin ess, and pain in the part . But if

too much blood has been removed it produces headache, blindn ess

(gutta seren a ) , inflammation of the eye, convulsions,hemiplegia,

great thirst, burn ing sensation of the body, hiccough, difficul ty inbreathing, jaundice, and death. Avoid abstracting too much blood,particul arly when healthy, as it is the root which sustains the bodyfor the blood is the life ofthe body.

”

There are four ways ofarresting hoemorrhages

a . By the use ofastringen ts.

6 . By the use of ice ( lama )0 . By caustics and

d. By the actual cautery ; should the othermeans not prove sufhc ien t .

a . Astring en t app lica tions. Differen t flowers are mixed together,and then powder is to be sprinkled by degrees over the part, and

should the blood n ot stop the finger is to be placed over the bleeding vessel . The following is one of these mixtures -take ofthe

flowers of

Lodlzra

Madbuka

Ga irtlea

Sary'

ara ssa

in equal quan tities. O r take of the flowers of

Masha

Jaba,barley.

God/lama , wheat .These are to be mixed and sprinkled on the part, and if i t does

n ot stop the finger is to be applied to the part for the same purpose .

The barks of differen t trees, as the Ban ian tree, Catechu, gum

resin, are mixed, reduced to powder, and used as styptics.

The ashes ofburn t silk, will also be found useful over which a

tight bandage is to be placed. The patien t is to be kept in a coolroom,

and a cool and an tiphlogistic diet and regimen is to be en

j o in ed. Afterwards broths, made from the flesh of deer and other

wild an imals, are to be used, with light and nourishing food.

Cold and ice, by drying the blood, has a strong tendency to

stop hoemorrhage, and is often used for this purpose .

w 2

1 80

0 . When the above means have not been sufficient to stop the

hoemorrhage, escharotics should n ext be used. These will be con

sidered in the n ext section .

SECTION VI.

The cauteries used by the Hindu Surgeons, were the actual

and poten tial.

The actua l Cautery .

Fire can sometimes be employed when n either the kn ife nor

escharotics can be used, as it is the strongest ofall the escharotics. Itis applied in differen t ways, sometimes by means oflong pepper, goatsdung

’

, the tooth of a cow,an arrow poin t, long c ircular or hook

shaped iron probes for superficial purposes and straight probesformuscles or deep seated parts. There are three varieties of theseirons one being small, another large, and a third ofa moderate size .After amputation s

,boiling fluids were used to stop hoemorrhage,

as boiling jagree, oil, hon ey, 8 m.

The actual cautery is applied in four differen t ways, according

to the nature of the case ; sometimes the application is made in

spots in other cases in circles, or in parallel and concentric lin es.

When the application is properly performed, there is a peculiar

noise heard and smell felt, at the momen t of the applic ation , and

the skin is immediately con tracted. When the cautery is applied

to the muscles, it changes them to a gray colour the swelling ofthe part dimin ishes, and it stops the discharge ofblood, pus, &c .

Fire is useful in some diseases of the -skin , flesh, vessels, liga

men ts, join ts, and bon es ; and when there is severe pain or hardswellings ofthe flesh and in sen sible parts which sometimes occur

in carbuncle, piles, boils n ear the anus, in elephan tiasis, and in

small swellings ; and in bites of serpen ts live charcoal is recom

mended to be applied to preven t the dangerous effects of theirbites. It is also useful in pen etrating wounds and in all caseswhere it is accompan iedwith con siderable hoemorrhage .

The small sized actual cautery is employed with advan tage to theeyebrows, forehead, and temples for headaches and diseases of the

head. When applied to the eyelids n ear the border the eye is to

be defended with wet clothes. This is the treatmen t recommended for intergium. Fire is also applied to remove indurated parts to

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 82

The Potassa thus prepared, may be used internally or externally.

In the first form it is used in solution and is good for removing

worms,for curing Leprosy, and as an an tidote for certain poisons

when long taken it produc es impotency. As an external appli

cation,it is used in three degrees of strength, the concen trated,

the mild, and the weak .

The concentrated Potassa is used for open ing abscesses and for

produc ing superficial ulcers, in which cases emollien ts are to be

put upon the part after the application , so as to reduc e the pain . The

solution acts strongly in healing ulc ers and in stopping bleeding,and when conc entrated it disorganizes the parts. It is appliedexternally to differen t cutan eous diseases, to bad ulcers, to fistula

in -ano and other fistula,to piles, to c ertain diseases ofthe mouth

,

as to diseased tubercles, 8 m. The weak solution may be taken

in ternally in dyspepsia, colic, and indigestion and for urinarycalculi, gravel, worms

, and gumo .

The use of Potassa is not proper in the sanguineous tempera

men t, in in ternal hoemorrhage, in fever, for children or old people,for weak persons, or for persons with diseases of the eyes, 850 .

When caustic is to be applied to a part, the patien t is to be taken

to a room shut up, a portion of the Caustic is then to be appliedto the part by mean s ofa Probe . The Surgeon is then to wait fora spac e oftime that will admit of his counting a hundred. If wellapplied the part becomes black, and the juic es ofacid fruits are tobe applied. Caustics are not to be applied to vital parts, where thereare many nerves, blood ligatures, join ts, ligaments, tap/m, to the eye,throat, 8 m. When used by an ignoran t person caustics are likefire, poison , or thunder to the patient whom it quickly kills.

When properly applied by a skilful Surgeon it cures manydiseases.

SECTION VII.

Sca lcls and Burns.

There are four degrees ofburnsa . Plusta

,in which there is severe pain, and change of colour

on the part.b . D a rdogd/za, when accompan ied with blisters, with much red

n ess and pain .

0 . Samadogdbamhen it is black,and does not produc e much pain .

d. Atidogdlea , when the part is separated with the destruc tion of

the vessels, 8m,withfever, thirst,faintness, and thewoundheals slowly.

1 83

In Plasta hot articles are to be applied ; and in durdogda

apply cold substances, and sometimes hot, with ghee and fomen

tations. In Samadogd/za apply a paste made of Chandan a ,

sandlewood ; Ga z’

rtka , yellow earth, and the bark of the wildbanian tree . These are to be mixed with ghee ; or apply to

the part, an imal flesh, chopped. The flesh ofdomestic an imalsmay be used for this purpose .In Atidogha , separate the loose parts, and apply cold.

Thenapply the decoction ofthe cold bark of the Tinduka tree with ghee .In other cases apply wax, liquorice root, ghee, rasin make into an

ointmen t, and apply to the part. Cold applications are likewiseuseful .

When a person is struck with lightening, and is not killed

,

anoin t the body with o il, with fric tions.

When choaked with smoke, the patien t has difficulty in breathing,which is sonorous, attended with coughs burning of the eyes, andredness. This is succ eeded by thirst, fever, difficulty in hearingand smelling the juice of the sugar-can e, and grapes should begiven for drink, with water and sugar . The juic es of sweet andac id fruits may also be used with an emetic to clean the stomach.

SECTION VIII.

D irectionsfor p erforming op era tions.

When an operation is decided on a fortunate momen t is to beselected, and the Brahmins and the Surgeons are to be propitiatedwith gifts. A clean and well lighted room is to be chosen in whichthe operation is to be performed and cloth, the leaves of trees,thread, hon ey, ghee, the juices ofdifferen t kinds oftrees milk, oil,

cold and hot water,and strong and steady persons are to be in

readiness to hold him, while care is taken not to frighten the

patien t . Should the patien t be very fearful of the kn ife, or very

young, escharotics, the nail or a sharp piece ofthe bark of the

bamboo may be substituted and for the mouth or eyelids a kind of

grass (g ojt) or other rough leaves may be substituted by rubbingthem over the part. The patien t is to be plac ed with his face to

the east, and the surgeon before him with his fac e to the west.The kn ife should be wet with water before being used.

The season for operating is when the sky is clear during the rains,and in the hot weather in the even ings and morn ings. Ifpossi

ble the operation should be performed n ear the new moon , as this is

the most proper time . Should the person be weak, much diseased,

1 84:

insensible, or when the disease has come on suddenly, the operations

should be performed during the even ing or morn ing when the weather

is steady and seasonable ; a propitious day and hour is to be foundout . Curdledmilk, corn , &c .

, are to be offered up to the gods for the

succ ess ofthe operation and Brahmins are to be propitiated.

When a boil is to be open ed, or the flesh divided, the part is

to have c ertain escharotics rubbed over it to dimin ish the pain .

When a vessel, join t, or sensible part is to be divided, oil is

first to be rubbed over it .

The Surgeon should hold the kn ife firm in the hand ifthrust

into a boil and no pus follows it is to be quickly withdrawn . If

there be much pus in the part, it may be open ed several times ifn ecessary boils are not to be considered dangerous ifelevated upona flat surface . Should this not be the case, and the boil does no t

rise, but extends, the diagnosis is less favourable . The surgeon isa proper person if he be strong and operates quickly ; his kn ife

should be good, and he should n either perspire, shake, nor make

exclamations. In performing such operations, the sensible parts

of the body are to be avoided ; as the palms of the hands and solesof the feet, vessels, tendon s, join ts and bones. When n ear v italorgans the kn ife should be held so as to cut outwards, and shouldany such organ be wounded i t produces severe pain

, and is curedwith difficulty.

When the fetus is dead in the uterus, in asceticsfpiles, certainexcrescences and swellings n ear the anus, which have existed up

wards ofa month ; the patien t is to take his dinn er before the operation, and the operation is to be completed while withdrawing thekn ife . Cold water is then to be applied to the part, the person

’

s

spirits are to be kept up, the pus is to be squeezed out, and the

part clean ed with tepid water . Lin t smeared with hon ey or ghee

is then to be put in to the wound to preven t it closing . The

wound is to be rubbed with hon ey or ghee and a bandage is then to

be placed round the part .During the operation , care must be taken to keep a fire in the

ro om n ear the patien t, in which sweet scen ted substances are tobe burnt

,in order to preven t the en tranc e ofdevils by the wound.

After the operation some holy water is to be sprinkled over hisbody, and proper prayers repeated ; such as the following z—OhBramba Do thou, as well as other Gods, order the serpen ts

,P

'

skacka , Gand/i arba , Pitri ( spirits), Jakii a , Rakfig/asa , who are desirous ofac ting wickedly to desist from their inten tion, either on earth,in the sky, or in any direction and that prophets may cure thiswound,Do thou,Oh Bramba direct the Planets, and rajah prophets,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 86

ed the instrumen t is to be removed by pincers. If i t has disappeared under the swelling it is to be pressed, so as to force out the

iron or if there be barbs enlarge the wound and so remove thearrow. If it has pen etrated the bon e, it is to be removed with forc e,and if required a string may be tied to the tooth ofan elephan t or,n eck ofa horse and thus forcibly removed, or with a bent branch of

a tree. If in the throat, the extraneous matter may be discharged

by thrusting down a hot iron to dissolve it or soften it and so re

move it . In such cases, the hot iron is passed through a metallic tube .

A Probang, for removing fish bones, is usual by drinking fluids

and emetics i t is also dislodged this may also be don e by beatingthe person upon the back ofthe n eck .

There are 1 5 modes of removing extran eous substances1 . Swabltaba .

—When removed by the natural discharges, as

by the tears.

2 . Pacbana .—Medicin es to promote suppuration, which will be

discharged with the pus and blood.

3 . Badfiana .—By a slight incision .

4 . D arana .-By longer incisions.

5 . Pirana .—By pressure .

6 . Pramarjana—By washing, by warmth, or by a hair clothor hand.

7 . Bidmap ana .-By blowing, as a substance introduced in to

the larynx, which produces great irritation and strong efforts of

coughing, 8 m.

8 . Bamana .—By emetics.

9 . Birac/i an a .—If the extran eous substances have passed to

Pokosio, purgatives are to be given .

1 0 . Praklzalona .—Ifpus or blood be retained in a place, they

are removed by warming .

1 1 . Prama rsa .-If in the n ostrils

,errhin es are to be

used.

1 2 . Prabafiana .-If air

, urine, and dej ec tions are not dischar

ged or the fetus is retain ed and are not removed by the effortsof the person, they are to be discharged by manual means.

is to be removed by sucking or cupping, as the poison of serpents

are extrac ted.

Yasltan ta .-A loadston e may be used when the substance

1 s straight, and is not tightly embedded in the flesh.

1 5 . Harsa .-VVhen grief is the cause

, joy will remove it.When the foreign substances produce fever

, uneasiness, swelling,suppuration and death.

5 /

fl’ounals, Acute Ulcers, (Soda Bruno .)Wounds are produced by acciden ts and are of various shapes and

forms .There is one kind which is simple, and another is compli

cated with the presence of a foreign body . Wounds vary with thepart wounded, and the in struments by which they are inflicted.

When the skin is wounded, it changes its colour, swells, and is

hard. Ifin theflesh the swelling is greater, the wound gapes, dis

charges thick matter like ghee, and does not scab .

When a vessel is wounded it is accompan ied with much pain ,

blood flows from the wound which swells, and when it suppurates

pus is discharged. When tendons are wounded they swell and thedischarge is like ghee or phlegm from the nose mixed with blood.

W'

hen bone is fractured various degrees of pain are produced ;the marrow disappears, and the colour of the bon e changes to that

of a cookie shell . Pus and marrow are discharged from such

wounds .

The six varieties of wounds are as follows

l st . Cfilzinna, or incised wounds, with a large open surface .

2ud. Bfiinna, or penetrating wounds, as by poin ted instruments,as the horn of a cow, &c . this wound discharges little externally,when it penetrates a cavity it fills it with blood, and the con tentsof the organ ; this is followed by fever, thirst, loss of appetite,difficult breathing, and the stoppage of the secretions, as urin e

and sweating . When the stomach is wounded it is accompanied

with a vomiting of blood, and a swelling of the abdomen withsevere pain . When the small in testines are wounded there ismuch pain , heaviness of the part, cold extremities, &c .

4

3rd. Build/ta, or punctured wound, when the sharp pointed and

narrow instrumen t is removed, or is retained in the wound.

4th . Khata, this is composed of the two last, being accompa

n ied with destruction of the superficial parts. Or it is a contused

wound.

5 th . Picliz’

ta, when by pressure, or the weight of a heavy sub

stance fracturing the bones, and injuring the soft parts, the wound

is filled with marrow and blood.

6 th . Gfirista, or bruised by coming in con tact with a hardbody .

Treatment .

In the four first kinds of wounds, there is a large discharge ofblood. Ifthere is severe pain apply poultices made ofanimal fleshand the like, with fomentations, followed by cold applications ; an

oily glyster is to be administered in ternally ; and ghee preparedwith medicines which correct, or diminish the diseased air.

In the two last kinds of wounds, there is a slight discharge of

x

1 88

blood ; and in such cases if there is not a loss of blood from the

part, much inflammation and suppuration will be the consequence .In such cases, cold applications are to be used. This is the gene

ral treatment of all wounds.

The following is the treatment to be pursued in particular casesWhen the wound is n ear the head with a flap of skin , it is to be

sowed, and a bandage applied to support the part . If the ear is

separated it is to be restored to its natural position, and by suturesand a bandage it is to be kept there .When the windpipe is wounded, and the air passes through it,

sow the wound closely, put some ghee of the goat, and over it a

circular bandage . The person should be kept on his back, and

should take only fluid food. Ifthe extremities are severely wound

ed wi th fracture of the bon e, retain the parts in their natural po

sitiou, apply oil,and a roller over them . In wounds of the back

part of the body, the person is to be supported lying on his back,taking care that no pressure is made upon the wound. Ifon the

breast, he is to be placed upon his breast in the same way . This

direction is given in order to avoid the matter collecting within thewound.

When an extremity is separated, immediately pour boiling oil onthe surface . Then apply a cap

-formed bandage, and remedies toheal the wound. The following oil is recommended for healing

wounds z—Take of a decoction of

Chandana, (Sirium myrtifolium . )Podmoka, (Men tha sativa,)R ag adfira, (Amaranthus atropurpureus. )Utp ala, (Salvinia v erticillata .)Prt

’

ungu, (Panicum Italicum .)Hurdira, (Curcuma longa.)Mudlzulca, (Bassia latifolia. )Porscea, (Galega purpurea .)

mix, boil, and strain for use .

The unfavourable symptoms of wounds, are great fever and heat

of the body, a collection of blood in the part, cold extremities, redness of the eyes, stoppage of the evacuations, delirium, giddiness,convulsions, difficulty of breathing, severe pain, with a serous dis

charge from the wound. The senses become obtuse .

Severe wounds are sometimes accompan ied with erysipelas, teta

nus, madness, hectic fever, cough, vomitmg, diarrhoea, hiccough,shivering, &c .

If the eye is divided the sight is lost , but if displaced withoutinjuring the n erves, it is to be carefully returned with the assistance of a water-lily, and apply ghee as an errhine .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

90

1 . Utp ista when the dislocated join t is crushed and swelled,both above and below, with much pain , which increases at n ight .

2 . Bislistia or separated. In this variety there is less swelling,

the pain is continued, and the movements of the joint are totallylost .

3 . Bibartita, when the joint is twisted.

4 . Tirjolrhep ta, when one part of the joint is turned outward

with severe pain .

5 . 0 thhep ta, when on e of the bon es of a joint are dislocated

while the other remain s in its usual place .6 . Abahhep ta, when a bone is forced downwardwith much pain .

There are twelve varieties ofFractures

1 . Korkotaka, when the fracture is in the middle of the bone

with swelling .

2 . Aswakurna, in which the bone protrudes like the ear of a

horse .

3 . Churn ta, when accompanied with bruises and the bone is

crushed.

4 . Pichchita, when depressedby a heavyweight without swelling .

5 . Astheechulleta, when a small part ofthe bone is elevated.

6 . Kandabhagna, when a larger bone is fractured and disabl ed.

7 . Majcimug oda, when the broken part of the bon e enters the

same bon e .8 . Atip atta, when the fractured bon e is separated.

9 . Bokora, partial fracture .1 0 . Cheena, when only a small part remains undivided.

1 1 . Pdtta, when comminuted wi thout pain .

1 2 . Sphutita, when the bon e is swelled with small open ings.

A fracture is distinguished from a simple swelling of the part,by the crepitating noise when moved, by the looseness and painin the part, and by the great uneasiness.

Treatment - Fractures do not unite quickly in those personswho eat little, and who are intemperate, orwhen accompan ied withsevere diseases. Such patients should not use salt, astringent andacid“

food, also conn exion with women, exposure to the weather,

fatigue . They should not take dry food, but use rice, an imal

broths, milk, ghee, and such like nourishing food. For these fractures use a decoction made of the bark of the Moduhd, Urumhora,

Ossolca, Polassa, and then apply splints of bamboo . A bandage isto be renewed every seventh day in the cold weather, in temperateweather every fifth day, and in hot weather every third day, or

according to the individual circumstances of the case . The band

age should neither be too loose, nor too tight . In the first case

1 9 1

the apposite of the broken bones IS not sufficient, andm the latter

case it will produce much pain, swelling and inflammation . Cold

astringent decoctions of the barks of differen t trees are to be ap

plied ; such as

Nagrodha, Citrus aurantium .

Be tti, Millingtonia pinnata .

Aswatha, Ficus religiosa, &c .

The part should be kept perfectly at rest, and every care should

be taken to prevent suppuration .

After a few days warm oil should be applied to the part prepared

with different drugs, according as the air, bile, and phlegm are

affected.

Comp ound Fractures—Apply ghee and honey to the wound,

wi th astringen t decoctions ; and then follow the same plan of treat ~

ment as recommended for simple fractures.

Fractures are easily un ited in youth, and they require usuallyone month for the cure ; in middle age two mon ths ; and in old

age three months . In order to reduce a fracture, the bon e that

overlaps another is to be drawn down .

The following fractures are always dangerous

When one or more bones of the head are fractured, when the

fracture is comminuted ; when the thigh bone or pelvis are frac

tured ; when the fracture extends to joints, when the fracture is

produced from a fall from a great height . Fractures are also dan

gerons when the person is very weak, or very old, has old ulcers,leprosy, and when had symptoms of deranged bayu are present .

In the Treatment of Dislocations.

First apply fomentations and warm Oleaginous applications withfrictions so as to soften and relax the parts . The surgeon will

then reduce the dislocation by forcing the bone out of its new position , and by pressing and binding the joint in the Opposite directionfrom that in which it has been displaced, so as to allow the bone toslip into its natural position .

When the hip or knee-joint are dislocated, the extension mustbe made with a kind of pully called aha/era . The patien t shouldthen be placed in a bed and the part kept at rest . When of longstanding, fomentations and Oily frictions are to be diligently applied before the reduction is to be made .A dislocated rib is to be reduced by pressing with the thumb

and second finger, after the soft parts have been well relaxed bybeing rubbed with ghee . A proper splint and bandage, is then tobe applied.

The dislocated humerus is to be reduced by pulling the bone

1 92

strongly downwards, or along the side after a pillow or ball hasbeen put in the axilla ; when the bone will slip into its place . The

joint is then to be surrounded with a bandage which passes roundthe axilla and the neck in the form of 8 . This bandage is calledSwastz

’

hd.

The dislocated elbowg’

oint is to be reduced by the extension and

flection of the fore-arms, while pressure is made by the thumb and

fingers upon the displaced head of the bone .The same mean s are to be employed in order to reduce the dislocations of the wrist and an cle join ts.

When the bon es Of the n eck are dislocated, it is to be reducedby a person placing his thumbs under the angles of the jaw-bone,and fingers upon the side of the n eck and drawing the head slowlyupwards, while another person retains the body at rest . Whenthe dislocation is reduced, the person is to be kept in an erect posi

tion for a week.

The dislocation of the lower jaw is to be reduced by drawing it

downwards, when the bone will slip into its place the part is then

to be rubbed with warm ghee, and a four tailled bandage is to be

applied over the chin , so that two of the bands are tied behind,and two on the top of the head.

When the bon es of the nose are depressed, they are to be raisedinto their natural position bymeans ofan instrument called Shdldkda hollow wooden tube is kept in the nostrils, so as to retain the

bones in their natural position . Ghee is then to be rubbed exter

nally over the part .

After a di slocated bon e has been reduced, a plaster is to be applied to the part consisting of munjista, liquorice, red sandal

wood, and rice, and are to be all pounded andmixed together . The

plaster is then to be formed by mixing the powder with ghee which

has been washed a hundred times in water . This plaster is to be

continually applied over the dislocated join t, for a con siderable timeafter it has been reduced. Should there be much pain in the part, a

cold infusion of magrodude, pucha, mulie in milk, and chakra oil

are to be applied.

Every morning during the treatment some prepared ghee mixed

with such medicines as will improve the health, and keep the

bowels relaxed, is to be taken .

In sprains and bruises nothing is to be done, except the application s of cold lotion s and plasters. In some cases circular bandages wetted with ghee by itself, or mixed with a decoction of casha

(a kind of grass) , is to be applied over the part .The treatmen t is said to be proper when no deformity is left in.

the part, and it has its natural action .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 94

As long as the humours remain in due proportion , the individualremains in health, as perfect harmony reign s in the un iverse while

the elemen ts retain their just proportions but, as soon as the b ar

mony is lost, by the assimilation being imperfectly performed,derangemen ts of the system are the con sequen ce, and the bodybecomes the prey to disease . Hence, these irregularities in the

quantity and quality Of the humours, are the proximate cause of

diseases . This is rendered more fre quen t by the body con tinuallyundergoing changes by the waste that is going on which is made

11 b the su 1 r ofalimen t .

P Y PP

Disease is therefore the pain (duhkha) of the soul, caused by the

derangemen t ofthe humours .

Classification ofDiseases .

The ancien t Hindu Medical writers arranged diseases accordingto their promin en t symptoms, and n ot according to the peculiarityofthe symptoms and theircomb ination s, which were influen ced bythe structure and uses of the part . Thus they gave the name of

shul,' to diseases accompan ied with much pain when accompan ied

th local swelling it is con sidered as gulma, while more gen eralswellings were con sidered under the head ofudara . They thus lostan importan t principle in the grouping, and inculcated dangerousprin ciples in the treatmen t of diseases : for som e diseases willassume the peculiarities of the three diseases . Others pass fromthe on e to the other, while the nature of each of the diseases, andthe tissue affected, are qui te differen t and requi re to be treated bymethods quite opposite to each other .In the Ay ur Veda medicin e is divided in to eight chapters, which

requi re, it is added, to be carefully studied before a person can besuccessful

’-

as a practition er . But so extensive is the range of the

requires to confin e hi s attention to one departmen t . The classifica

t ion in Ayur Veda is as followsl st . Injuries, and phlegmoid tumours.

2nd. Diseases ofthe senses, and head.

3rd. Diseases ofthe whole body, as fever, leprosy, &c .

4th . Derangemen t ofthe faculties,'

from demon iacal possessions .

5th . Diseases of infan ts, and ofnurses .

6th . An tidotes.

1 th . ? Alchemistry ; and

8th . The means of increasing the human race . A modificationofthis divISIOn 1s usually followed in the Hindu medical works .

1 95

Diseases are likewise divided in to three kinds, one of which is

curable, another is cured with difficulty, being of a chronic nature,and the third class is in curable . Each of these diseases is again

divided in to primitive, and con secutive extern al, or in ternal local,or gen eral . These again are divided in to three varieties —The firstis,when one disease has occurred and another follows,which is increased by the first, the medicin e for which must cure both di seases, butparticularly the chi ef. A second variety is when a di sease has beenpresen t without any other ; and a third is when the precursorysymptoms are on ly presen t . In such casesmedi cin es are to be given ,

so as to remove the di seased cause .Another classification is founded on the origin of di seases, into

heredi tary, and acquired . These, however, are n ot divided intosporadi c, epidemic, and endemic classes although this is so naturala division . The con tagious, and non -con tagious nature of di seases,and their being commun icated from on e person to another by mediate, and immedi ate contact, was well known to the Hindu physic1an s .

In Gharaka, and other works ofgreat authority, di seases are cousidered under four classes —The first is called Ag antuha, or accidentaldiseases, and are produced by external causes, such as acciden ts andpoison s. There are two varieties of these di seases, the first being

corporeal, and the second mental . Medi cine will cure the one, and

manag emen t the other .

2d. Nija bodily diseases, form the three other classes .

They are caused by eating and drinking improper articles offoodwhich derange air, bile, and phlegm or blood locally, or generally .

Both A'

g antu/ca and Nija, may affect the m ind as well as the body .

3d. Mdnasa (men tal di seases) , produced by derangemen ts ofthem ind caused by passion , grief, joy, anger, malice, envy, pride, lust,covetousn ess, delusion , low spirits, &c .

4th . c ibhcibiha (natural di seases) , which act on both mind and

body in the same mann er as appetite, thirst, decrepitude, Sleep,death, &c .

These four classes Of di seases thus act even tually on the soul, as

well as the body ; and may be cured by evacuating superfluous

humours, and in creasing those that are deficien t, by diet, andmanage

men t (Sushruta) .

Diseases have likewise been divided in to two classes

I . Shastraszidhga, or those cured by manual treatmen t .

II. Snehttdi Kriydsddhya, or those cured bymedicin e (Sushruta) .

The most usual classification of disease is into the following seven

classes

1 96

l st . Adihala p rabritta or hereditary diseases . This is explained

by the mother’s blood, and seminal secretions of the father being

affected with certain diseases,w hich are conveyed to their children

these diseases are hemorrhoides, phthisis, dyspepsia, epilepsy, lepro

sy, andelephan tiases . (Menu, p . 60 . chap . 3 . s .

By care and atten tion these hereditary tain ts may be retarded in

their appearance, and even preven ted from developing themselves .

In other eases such tain ts produce other diseases .

2d. Janmahahrrabri tt'

a (disease of the embryo) . When the

mother does not take care of her food, exercise, &c . , this class of

di sease is produced. From these causes the infan t may be bornblind, deaf, dumb, dwarfish in size, &c .

3d. Doshabalp rahritta (di seases of the humours) caused by in

temperance . Some are produced from the stomach, some from the

in testines, some affect the whole body, others only the mind.

4th . Sanghdtaba lp rabritta, or accidental, as when caused bywounds, poison , &c .

5 th . Ka laba lp rabritta, diseases caused by cold, heat, rain ,

storms, &c .

6th . Daibabalp rabritta . When improper action s are

ed, a class ofdisease ofthe most loathsome appearan ce, and in curablenature are supposed to be produced ; such as by the abuse of theDeities, orBrahman s, the con tempt ofspiritual preceptors, and other

h einous offen ces . Such can on ly be cured by a course of severe andlong con tinued penan ce, by mysterious performan ces, and liberalityto the sacred Brahman s . In the presen t day these causes sometimes

are so aggravated that the sacrifice ofthe person ’

s life is not sufficien tfor its purification , as is leprosy . Among the ignoran t the onlymeans of preven ting this is supposed to be by sacrificing them

selves in the sacred Gauges, and it n ot unfrequen tly happen s that,instigated by friends, these m iserable and deluded person s drown

themselves in the sacred stream, as an expiation for their supposed

sins.

Another division of this class ofdisease is produced by con tact, bybreathing the same air, eating together, sitting upon the same seat,wearing the same clothes, or ornaments, ofa person labouring underthe disease . In this mann er Leprosy may be propagated.

7th . Swabhababalap rahritta, or natural diseases, give pain tothe soul ; such as thirst, appetite, age, Sleep, and death . This classis again divided in to the timely and un timely .

When the principal humours (dhdtu) are deranged, the disease is

called by the n ame of the humour affected ; such as rasoja (chylediseases) , among which are dyspepsia, pain of the body, &c .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 98

shasters .These diseases are called harmaja, and are to be cured

by good action s, by prayers, by certain forms ofpenan ce, &c . If

the disease is incurable, let the patien t advance in a straight path,

towards the invisible north-eastern poin t, feeding on water and air,

till his mortal frame totally decay, and his soul become united with

the Supreme Being.

”

(Menu . p . 1 75, ch . vi . 5 .

The exciting causes Of the diseases of air, are fighting with

strong men , too much exercise, ven ery, much study, especially at

n ight, severe cold and rainy season s, &c . The exciting causes ofthe diseases of bile, are anger, grief, fear, fasting, indigestible food,acid, and pungen t food, &c . The exciting causes ofphlegm di seasesare Sleeping in the day time, wan t of exercise, sweet and salt food,drinking too much fluids, eating too much, &c . The causes of the

di sease ofthe blood are the same as those producing bilious diseases,also sleeping during the day, exposure to heat, too much exercise,indigestible food, improper mixtures Offood, &c .

Another cause of disease is when they proceed from other di seases. In this case the original disease disappears leaving the n ew

one to follow its usual course . The original disease in other casesremains, and may produce a second disease . Thus from enlargedspleen , fever and dropsy are produced ; from piles, dyspepsia, and

gulma .

Descrip tion of diseases .

The descriptions of disease in the Hindu writers are gen erallydistinct and satisfactory, though often at variance with some of our

theoretical n otion s sometimes, however, from the imperfect list ofsymptoms given , it is difficult to distinguish the disease intended tobe described, especially as it sometimes appears that the Physiciansmistook an accidental combination of a few symptoms, for a dis

tinct di sease ; and i n other cases, placed under varieties, distinctdiseases.

r The description of a disease is usually commenced with an enu

meration ofthe supposed causes, situation , and humours deranged,as indicated by the symptoms

, and the varieties produced by the

humours affected.

Before Considering the description ofparticular di seases, it will be

n ecessary to con sider the indi cations of the morbid changes ofthehumours, which enter in to all the diseases . By these indications,the physician is able to know the increase or diminution of any of

the humours, which will regulate the particular treatmen t whichhe is to follow .

The seven essential parts of the body (dhétu) produce various

1 99

diseases by a preternatural increase, or diminution of their quantityl st . When chyle ( rasa) is increased, it produces wan t ofappe

tite, heavin ess ofthe body, as iftoo much had been eaten , weaknessOf digestion , large secretion Of saliva and phlegm,

languor and

lassitude, stretching, giddin ess, nan sia, vomiting, and fever . Wh enchyle is dimin ished the person is subj ect to di seases of the breast,his skin is pale, his body becomes light, weak, the eyes b ecomedi seased, &c . In such cases the chyle is thin ; the person has a

depraved taste, is restless, and grey hairs appear early in life .2d. When the blood is in creased the body feels heavy ; the

body and the eyes have a red colour, with a burning sensation ,

eruption s appear over the body and the person feels giddy, has noappetite, and his urin e is red. He IS subj ect to piles, bloody discharges, and baldness . Females in such cases are subj ect to

menorrhagia . Such a state predi sposes the p erson to attacks of

inflammation of differen t viscera, and, the formation of large

abscesses ; to leprosy, rheumatism, erysipelas ( hisarp a) , &c . Whenthe blood is dimin ished pretem aturally, the skin appears dry the

person feels a desire for sour things, and the vessels appear empty .

3d. When the flesh ismorbidly in creased, the body feels heavy,the muscular parts increase in Size, the abdomen enlarges, and the

person is subject to coughs, asthma, &c . When dimin ished ; theloin s, cheeks, lips, penis, thighs, breast, axillas, hips, abdomen and

n eck, become thin, the whole body dries up, with pains ; and the

large vessels dimin ish in size .

4th . When the fat is increased, the surface of the body has ashining appearan ce, it produces languor and fatigue after slightexertion ,

thirst, perspiration of a disagreeable smell, bronchocele,diseases ofthe lips, gonorrhoea, cough and asthma, and an increase

in the size ofthe belly, buttocks, n eck, and breast .

When dimin ished the part becomes flabby, and the join ts lax,the body dries up, and soft food is desired.

As a di sease fatn ess is produced by smearing the body with oil,

by eating frequen tly, bywan t ofexercise, by Sleeping during the dayby sweet, or oily urin e ; and by in creased phlegm . Such a state

produces difficulty of breathing, thirst, appetite, a desire to sleep,perspiration , and a bad smell ofthe body, wh ich becomes unwieldy .

The person cann ot Speak di stin ctly, n or work there is a dimin ished

desire for women , as the vessels are filled, and the circulation is

imperfectly performed. The other essen tial parts which are pro

duced from the fat are imperfectly formed, and the strength isdimin ished.

200

Such a person is liable to attacks of diabetes and gonorrhoea,eruptions, terminating in large abscesses, fistula-in-ano, &c . In such

a person , disease is always more dangerous according as the accu

mulated fat fills the vessels .

The causes Ofthinness, are what increases the air ofthe body,such as much work, frequent conn exion with women , study, fear,grief, sorrow, wan t ofsleep, thi rst, and not eating and drinkingenough to satisfy the appetite . This state of the body is likewiseproduced by whatever diminishes the essential parts ofthe body,and dries up the chyle .This state ofthe body produces appetite and thirst, and the per

son is easily affected with cold, heat, wind, and rain . Such a personis weak, breathes with difficulty, is subj ect to di seases of air, to

attacks ofspleen , and dyspepsia, from the diminution of in ternal

heat . In thi s state of the body, every disease is aggravated, and

the causes increasing thisstate should be avoided. Various vege

table infii sion s, wi th nourishing and sweet food, are used to increase

the size of the body. In like mann er milk, curdled milk, ghee,flesh, sleeping during the day, a happy disposition, and certainlaxatives have the same efl

'

ect .0

Both great fatn ess and leann ess should be avoided and the

middle state should be con sidered the most favourable state ofthebody.

5th . When Bone is in creased in the system, it produces additionson old bon es, and the teeth become large. When it dimin ishes thebody dries up, the patient complains of pain in the bon es, and the

teeth and nails become irregular .6th . When the marrow is

"

increased, the body and eyes feelheavy, the person has an increase of semen , and by drying itcauses a difficulty in passing the urin e

, whi ch is in creased with painand swelling of the bladder . When the marrow is dimin ished thesemen dimin ishes, and there is pain in the bon es, which feel empty .

7th . When the semen is increased, there is an in creased discharge, and calculi form , Its diminution is accompan ied with painin the penis and testicles, and the person has no in clination forWomen .

The state of the excretions produce morbid symptoms, and dis~

easesl st . When thefceces are increased there is a noise in the belly

with pain ; and when dimin ished there is pain In the breast and

side, and the air makes a noise in the upper part ofthe abdomen .

2nd. When urine is increased it produces pain in the bladder,there is a frequent desire to perform mictirition, and the evacuation

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

O2

connexion With women; &‘

c . In such cases the body“

is to be rubbedwith ghee, oil, and turmerick, with bathing, &c . The food should.

con sist ofvery light articles .

From the above remarks it appears that a state of health 1 s that

in which the air, bile, and phlegm is in just proportion , in which

the abdominal fire is sufficien t, the seven essential parts, and the

dej ections are natural, the semen and mind correct, and the life

(soul) happy. It is this equilibrium of all these parts that con stitutes health but it is impossible to distingui sh the proper proportionof each of these parts, as they vary in differen t individuals. It istherefore by the effects ofsuch derangemen ts that we judge of theirpresence . When the sen ses are not in a perfect state, we know that

the equilibrium of the parts is destroyed. They also act on eachother . Thus when the air, bile, and phlegm are dimini shed, theyderange the essential parts of the body, as heat dimin ishes the

water in a vessel put over it .These theoretical Opin ion s led the Hindu Physician s, in their

description ofdi seases, to follow the natural order, and to confound

the accidental, with the pathognomon ic symptoms. Hence theyarranged diseases in unnatural groups, from a fan cied conn ectionbetween them . Thus fever was considered as a type of a group of

diseases, in which dysen tery, diarrhoea, indigestion , &c . , were

arranged, as these diseases are accompan ied, in some cases, with

fever .

SECTION II .

Diagnosis.

The nail* of Vishnu, like a sun, enlightened R ishis, who prepar

ed the shasters. By a knowledge of these, the nature of disease is

distinguished by exam ination , assisted by analogy, thought, and a‘

knowledge ofthe shasters. By these mean s the physician first finds

out the n ature of the disease hi s patien t is labouring under, the

medicines ordered by the shasters, and the regimen to be followed.

The nature ofthe di sease is to be ascertain ed

l st . By the appearan ce, as the coun ten an ce, tongue, &c .

2nd. By the feeling, as the pulse, temperature of the body, &c

3rd. By question s, embracing the country, temperament, and

history ofthe di sease .

O ther authors state that the disease is known by means of the

five senses, and asking questions . Thus

That is, so great is Vishnu, that the most insignificant part of himsheds lustre upon themost learned ofmankind.

203

l st. By hearing he will distinguish the state ofthe’

lungs, hy' the

peculiar noise ofthe breathi ng .

2ud. By the touch he will mark the state ofthe body, as‘

to coldand heat and the state ofthe skin as to the hardness and softness,roughness and smoothn ess .

3rd. By the sight, the physician will know the largeness and

smallness ofthe body, with its colour, &c .

4th . By taste, as in distinguishing diabetic urine, &c .

5 th . By the smell, as of the differen t di scharges from the body .

Lastly . By questions, the physician will find out the coun try,and temperamen t of the sick person, hi s sex, mann er of life, and

the history ofthe di sease . The pain felt by the patien t, the degree

ofhis strength, and appetite, and the state ofhis evacuations.

These observations are all most n ecessary in order to arrive at a,true diagnosis and without knowing the disease, the physician willbe unable to employ the proper means for its cure .Pulse . Nothing is said in Charaka and Susruta regarding the

pulse its condition appeared to be con sidered oflittle importan ce,and the remarks on the subj ect are given under the head ofthe des

cription of each disease . It is to more modern books that I amobliged to have recourse for the following description , which is so

curious that I am induced to add it here . It is principally derived

from the NaflModern Hindu Practition ers rely very much on the state of the

pulse, in the treatmen t of disease . In the morn ing it is cool andslow, in the middle of the day it becomes hot and quick, in the

evening its motion becomes rapid and quick, and at n ight it againbecomes cool and slow.

When the person has the temperamen t of air it feels zigzag ; inbile it is frequen t ; and in the temperamen t ofp hlegm it is slow and

full . Hindu Physician s suppose that the pulse possesses a peculiar

character in every disease . This idea is strengthen ed by their sacred writings. The Theory ofthe pulse is so obscure andmysterious, that in heaven even physicians do not know it thoroughly .

When it is to be consulted the patient ought to abstain from food,

from occupation , from the bath, and the use ofoil ; to avoid cold and

heat, and to remain at ease and awake, for some time before the physician arrives. It is only then that the pulse can be prop erly con

sulted.

”

The pulse is considered from its incessant movements, as a proofthat there is a soul , or life, in the body . It may be felt at eight ;

different parts ofthe body ; at the two wrists, at the‘

two feet, at the

By an anonymous author stated to bewritten by Siba.

z 2

204

neck, above the collar bone, and on the two alli of the nose . The

seat of the pulse ‘of the foot is n ear the in side of the heel, where it

should be felt by two fing ers in the two hands at the wrist, where

it should be examin ed by three fingers. The pulse should be exa

min ed several times, by slightly raising the arm, and extending the

fingers, and the right hand ofthe physician should feel the pulse,

while the left should support the elbow join t ofthe patien t . In the

neck, above the collar bon e and the no se, the pulse should be ex

0 amined with two fingers. These are the seats of the prin cipal

pulse, and by them it is known whether there is life or not, in the

body . The Physician will also know, by feeling these pulses, that

the person is sick or healthy, and whether he will live or die .

When the physician and sick person have risen in the morning

and performed ablutions, and their other prescribed duties, and are

seated on a clean mat, and in an agreeable situation , the state ofthepulse is then to be examin ed. A person who is not acquainted with

the differen t pulseswill not be able to appreciate them, and such a

person ought not to be respected.

The pulse of the women should be felt at the left side oftheir

n ecks, left hand, and nose ; and ofmen on the right side of theseparts. These pulses are over the whole body, and should be considered as the healthy, or sick pulses. The wrist is the best placeto examin e them . The pulse ofthe following person s, like a river ina storm, cannot be properly examined un til they rest two hours . l st .

Soon after washing or bathing . 2md. At the usual time ofdinn er,or just after eating . 3rd. A hungry person . 4th . One who is

thirsty. 5th . When heated by walking in the rays of the sun .

6th . After severe exercise, as fighting . 7th . After riding . 8th .

After anointing the body with oil, orwhen sleepy. 9th . A pregnan twoman , or Soon after chi ld-birth . 1 0th . One who bears a heavyload and 1 1 th . After sleeping during the day.

In each disease there are peculiarities of the pulse. Infeverthe

pulse becomes very frequent and hot, but when air predominatesth e pulse vibrates. When Bile predominates the pulse is very rapid,and jumping like a frog, and when Phlegm predominates in fever itbecomes very full and slow. When two or three of the humours

predominate, the pulse has the peculiarities ofthe combination .

In Dysentery and Diarrhoea the pulse becomes cold. and weak, inchronic diarrhoea it becomes full, and sometimes rapid and slow.

In Piles the pulse becomes depressed in the middle, quick, and

zigzag .

In Disp ep sia it is full .In Cholera it is deep, and very weak.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

206

an experienced physician . In other cases the death (if the patienthaving fatal symptoms may be everted by the intercessions of holyBrahmans; or by the use ofmedi cines which produce longivity . An

accomplishedphysician should study prognostics, andmake allowan cefor the cure ofcertain cases. He may otherwise boast that he willcure complicated, or incurable cases by which hewill lose his credi t .

The prognostics of disease are either favourable, or fatal . T hese

depend on various circumstances in each particular case which are

obtain ed from the messenger sent, and collateral circumstances, andlastly from the symptoms of each disease . A few remarks on eachofthese will n ext be given .

1 st . The appearan ce of the messenger, his dress, and his man

ner of speaking will influence the prognosis. In like manner hisaction s, the time of the day he reaches the physician , and other circumstances should influence the physician

’

s prognosis. On callingthe physician s, the following signs, or omens, are considered nu

favourable . When there are many men or women collected, or

following each other, to call the physician . When the messengersees a man arrive riding on an ass, camel, or in a carriage (aha) or

ifhe has a stick, or string, or a sharp instrumen t, ripe fruit, &c . , in

hi s hand. When he is dressed in red, or black, or in wet clothes.

When the messenger is very sorry, and expresses hi s fear . Whenthe messenger is d efective in a member, is d eformed, or has a dis

gusting appearan ce . When the person sen t speaks in unfavourablelanguage ofthe sick person , when he is anoin ted with oil, &c . Whenthe person , who calls the physician , has a shoe or skin in his hand,or is scratching his feet or other parts ofhis body with his nails, oris crying : All these occurrences are unfavourably, as to the event ofthe di sease .It is also considered bad when the physician is called .at noon

day, at midnight, early in the morn ing and evening, when he has,

hi s face turned to the south, .or when he is eating or naked ; anoin t

ing himself, is asleep, or is in an un clean place . Also when doingany thing with fire

, i s fatigued, is performing the fun eral services ofhis relations, &c .

The kind ofdisease varies its p rognostic when the patient is af

fected with a bilious disease, or when he’

has arrived in a very hotstate, and finds the physician n ear the fire, it is unfavourable . Itwill be favourable when the person i s affected with phlegm,

‘

or

cold diseases.

'

When the messenger is dressed in whi te clothes,is a handsome and fair person , is .ofthe same caste as the patien t,comes in a carriage with a cow, and is not

‘

impatient, are favourit e

207

Wh en the messenger finds the physician sitting in a clean place,with his face towards the east, and the messenger has in hi s hands

a water-pot full Ofwater with an umbrella, they are favourable sign s.

Should the physician on passing to the patien t see a woman with

her son , or a cow with her calf; or a virgin well dressed and adorn

ed with j ewels, Or sees fish, or un ripe fruit, butter-milk or flowersor meets a Raja, sees a strong fire, or a horse runn ing, or a goosewalking, or sees andhears peacocks, these prognosticate a favourableresul t to the patien t’s di sease .If the physician sitting by the side of his patient, the patient

rubs on e hand against another, scratches hi s back, an swers question s wi th hi s face upwards, draws the bed-clothes, or shakes his

hand, or con stan tly moves his head or puts the physician’

s hand to

his breast or head. Th ese are unfavourable signs.

The prognostics will depend upon the complication and kind of

di sease whi ch affects the patient, and the peculiar violence of particular symptoms.

The severity and nature of the disease will depend on the natureof the essen tial parts of the body affected. Whi le the skin , flesh,and blood are affected, the phlegm and air are the humours di seased. When the three humours are n ot affected, and marrow alon evitiated, the di sease admits of relief, if not ofcure . When the fat,

marrow, or bon e is affected, and two or three Of the humours are

vitiated, one of them being the bile, the di sease is incurable . Thisforms the complicatedform ofdisease, which is alwaysmore difficult

to cure than when a single humour, or the presence of a single disease exists. The eight most severe forms of disease are, n ervous

disease, as tetanus, paralysis, &c . , gonorrhoea (p rameha) , leprosy

( Icushtha) , piles (arshah) , fistula-in -ano ( bhag anclara) , ston e (ashma

ri) , unnatural presen tation s of the foetus, and dropsical swellings

ofthe abdomen (udara) . These eight are the most severe diseases,and are cured with great difficulty .

In gen eral the prognosis is to be favourable when the patient’

s

voice remains un altered, when he awakes from sleep without agita

tion , when eating rather cools than heats the body, andwhen the sickperson does not forget his God, but prostrates himself daily in

prayer with humili ty and resignation . The unfavourable symptoms

are the Opposite of the above, with indigestion , irregular and Oh

structed excretion s, head-ache, redn ess of the eyes, loss of voice,gen eration ofworms in wounds and ulcers from which bloody, andfoetid discharges proceed.

If in any disease the patien t is very thin and weak, with difficul

ty ofbreathing, thirst, dryness of the body, vomiting and fever,

208

these are bad symptoms. Iffainting, diarrhoea, hiccough, occur inthe course ofthe disease they will not be cured. Ifswelling ofthebody occurs in the course ofn ervous di seasewithout feeling in theskin , with shaking, swelling ofthe abdomen , with wind accompan i

ed with pain, or other such symptoms, the di sease will destroy the

person .

Ifthe white part of the body suddenly becomes black, without

any previous cause, and the blood changes its colour . When the

other internal parts do not remain in .the usual condi tion, wheth erthat be rest or motion if any large organ diminishes in size, or be

comes large what is long becomes short, or short long ; if bodiesthat should be discharged remain, and ifthose that should remain

are discharged ; or if the members naturally hot become cold,shining become dull, moist become dry, they are dangerous signs.

When members cannot move, or have an unnatural smell, or cannotperform their Office, or are removed from their natural position, ifthey Open , or are discharged outwardly, or inwardly, are heavy, orlight, the person will soon die .

If in the morning perspiration occurs on the forehead or tearsalways fall without any disease of the eyes if the dandrifl

'

in the

hair is of the colour of the powder of the cow’

s litter ifa pigeon ,

&c . perches on the head of the person ; if, without eating, there isa great di scharge of dej ection s ; or when there are no dejections,and the person eats freely, it is deadly. If the chest or mamillae

swell ifthe trunk swells, and extremities become thin , or the con

trary or halfof the body swells or half become paralized ; if theperson cannot speak, or it is dimin ished, or changed, these are signs

of danger . The same is the case if the nails, teeth, mouth, or

body, has the smell of putridflowers ; if the Sputa, dej ections, or

semen sink in water if the person sees Obj ects multipli ed, or im

perfectly ; if the body and hair have a shin ing appearan ce, as ifcovered with oil ; if the person is very weak, without appetite, orwith Dysen tery with cough, with much appetite and thirst, or if

weak with vomiting, especially if the sputa be mixed with blood,and the patien t has n o appetite . Should ‘

the feet, hands, and lipsbeswelled, with weakn ess, and want Ofappetite, while the buttocks,hands, feet and shoulders are dimin ished in size, and the person isweak with fever and cough ; if they vomit their breakfast in the

even ing, are dej ected ; have gnawing pain , fever and cough, if theperson falls, producing a sound like that ofa goat, has no strengthor feeling in the testicles and ifthe head falls on the shoulder, thedanger is great . Ifthe chest dries first after bathing, and the person is always biting his under lip or the tongue is pulling his ears

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

2 1 0

Phthesis (gahhma) , with cough and bloody expectoration , the eyeswhite, no appetite, and difficulty ofdrawing in the breath, diarrhoea,and a OOpious flow ofurin e with pain , will be fatal .

When gulma, or colicky pain s, from a collection ofwind in the

abdomen , which feels like a moving ball, and is accompan ied with

difficulty in breathing, thirst, no appetite, and weakn ess, the disease

will be fatal .In ternal abscesses ofthe abdomen ( hidraolhi) ifaccompaniedwith

swelling, without any discharge, and ifthe person vomits, has hic

cough, thirst, pain , and difficulty in breathing, he will die .

Jaundice (p anda) . Ifthe teeth, nails, and eyes are yellow, and

every thing seems so, in such case the disease will be fatal .In hemorrhagea (rohtop eto) When the person vomits blood, has

his eyes red, and every thing appears so, the disease will be fatal .

Madn ess (unméda) . If such a patien t always either stoops or

keeps his head raised, is thin , weak, gets no sleep, has no fear, hewi ll die .

Epilepsy ( ap asmara, mrig i ) . If the fits occur frequen tly wi th

weakn ess, the eyelids always move about, and the eyes become un

natural, the disease will be fatal .

The sign s ofdeath are as follows

Sight . Wh en the person imagin es he sees red, black, or yellow

colours before his eyes, when he has lost all shame, strength, me

mory, and his natural appearance . It is also a fatal sign when the

eyes become small, sunk, and un equal ; and when they are ofa red

colour, and cannot move ; under such circumstances a flow oftearsis also a fatal sign .

Mouth . Wh en there is a falling of the under, and rising oftheupper lip when they are crooked, and are of a dark blue colour,the person will die . When the teeth become reddish or dark

coloured, or fall out, or are Of a grayish colour, the person willsoon di e .

Tongue . When the tongue is of a black colour, and extran eousmatter appears upon it, or it cann ot be moved, or is di rty and

swollen, or its papulae are very promin en t, with fetor ofthe breath,the patien t will soon di e .

VNose . When it becomes pale, dry, and shining, and is turn ed to

one side the nostrils extended, dry, and dirty, and the passage of

the airproduces a noise orwhen the poin t ofthe nose retracts, and is

flatten ed, with weakness and depression , the person will soon die .

When therefore the eyes, by which we see the ears, bywhich wehear ; the tongue, by whi ch we taste ; and the skin , by which the

sense ofheat, and cold is performed are defective, or differ from the

221 1

state of health, the patient should be considered in a dangerousstate .

Hair . If it falls naturally in a lin e on each side (as in women) ,and the eyebrows become con tracted and repressed, and the patien tpulls his eyelashes, the person will soon die . Ifsuch a person haven o di sease, he will die within six, and ifdiseased within three days .

Ifthe person cannot swallow, if he cannot move his head, and

remains at rest, and is insen sible, he will soon di e . Whether strongor weak, should he fain t on being raised up, the person will di e .

Ifa. person di seased sleepswith h is face turned upwards, and he

is con tinually stretching, and bending his legs, he will soon die .

When the feet and hands are cold, and the person breathes quickly and irregularly, or retains his mouth Open , like a crow in hot

weather such a person is not to be treated by the physician , as hewill di e . Ifa person always sleeps, or he is always watching and

cann ot speak, the physician is n ot to give medicin e .When the tongue is always moving along the upper lip, with con

tinual hiccough ; or ifa person Speaks incoheren tly to another person previously dead, he will not live . Ifblood flows from the poresofthe hair, and the natural open ings ofthe body, without poison , the

person will soon die . When the hysterical ball (astila) from air,

occurs in the breast, and prevents the swallowing offood, and the

pain extends, and there is no appetite, the person will die . If an

unusual swelling in the feet occur in the course ofa disease in a

man , or in the face ofa female, it will destroy the person .

If in consumption , dysen tery, asthma, fever, hiccough, vomiting , and swelling of the external urinary organs occur, the personwill die . Ifsuch a sick person has much burning over the body,or much perspiration , hiccough,

difficulty in breathing, even a

strong person will die . Ifwith the yellow or black tongue, the lefteye be sunk, with bad breath,

the person will di e . If the mouthbe filled with tears, the hands and feet perspire, and the eyes losetheir shin ing appearance, and become dull, it Zis a sign Of death .

If the person swells or becomes thin very quickly, he will di e . If

the smell ofthe body resembles clay, fish, fat, Oil, or other unnatural scen ts or when lice leave the hair, and come to the forehead,or an imals will not eat the food the patien t has left ; or when the

patien t is very restless he wi ll die . Wh en fever, dysen tery, and

swelling of feet, or hands, occur alternately, it is unfavourable

should the person lose his strength sudden ly, he will not live . When

the patien t has no appetite, has frequen t stools, with severe pain in

the head, and thirst, the person will di e, when combined with otherbad symptoms .

2 11 2

2 1 2

It is also a bad sign when the patien t is very weak, with thirst

and hunger, which is n ot appeased by the usual quan tity of food or

drink and should a practition er cure any patients wi th the aboveindi cations, he deserves to be Physician to a king .

As death approaches, various kinds ofdevils are supposed to col

lect n ear the patien t, and destroy the good qualities Ofthe medicin es

which are admini stered to him . In such cases the treatmen t, and the

care ofthe physician are alike unavailing .

Some of these remarks are just, and some of them are too much

n eglected by European Physician s . The Cabiraj Often remarkswith

justice the errors which they sometimes fall in to in con sequen ce of

their n eglecting the study ofthe prognosis ofdiseases .

SECTI ON IV.

General Trea tment ofD iseases .

As the gen erality ofdiseases are supposed to be produced by derangements in the humors . On e or more ofwhich are morbidly in

creased or changed in quan tity, the indication s oftreatmen t are to

promote the just balan ce of the elemen ts and humors, by a judicious

choice ofalimen t, and by such m ean s as assist the vital prin ciple in

the completion ofthe assimilation . The managemen t of diet

supposed to be the great mean s ofaccomplishing this end and was

regulated in poin t ofquality, quan tity, and tim e Ofadmin istering it,by the nature ofthe disease . Should the judicious selection offood

n ot succeed in curing the disease, or when severe, the person

was directed to observe an en tire abstin ence of food, for a certain

time, and ifthis failed, the corrupted humors were ejected from

the body . This was accomplished either by emetics, purgatives,or blood~ letting . In like mann er, when the disease was sub

dued, it was supposed to be n ecessary to expel all the vitiated hu

mors which , if allowed to remain , accumulate, and a relapse ofthe

disease will be thecon sequen ce . To preven t this, strong drastic pur

gatives, which producedfrom five to eight evacuation s, were repeated

daily, un til the physician was satisfied that the whole corrupted

humors were expelled. To preven t such a recurrence Ofdisease, the

same evacuating mean s were employed. But these humors are not

to be dislodged indiscriminately, but at certain season s, and diurn alperiods Of the disease . Health was thus supposed to be promotedby the exhibition Of an emetic on ce a fortn ight, a drastic purgativeon ce a mon th, and blood-letting twice a year, at the change of the

seasons . The vital principle was supposed to give warn ing when the

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

2 14

CHAPTER II .

Descrip tion and Treatmen t ofParticular Diseases .

CLAss I .

Diseases of the Humors .

The apparent actions and changes of the fluids, or humors of

the human body, attracted the atten tion of the brahman s at an ear

ly period, and upon these changes they founded their theoretical

speculation s regarding the nature, and production ofdi sease . These

opin ions seemed to be confirmed by the occurren ces of hemorrhage

from wounds, the appearan ce ofcertain eruption s, and the discharge

from abscesses and ulcers ; whi le the solids in these cases seemedpassive, with no indi cation s ofchange beyond what the fluids seemed to produce upon them . Hence the gen eral prin ciples ofPathology were based, by the brahman s, on alteration s of the fluids on ly,and they supposed that while their elements and qualities remain edin due proportion health was sustain ed while disease was produced

by an undue proportion of these humors.

The di seases of air, bile and phlegm may proceed from the se

men Ofthe father, from the men strual blood ofthe mother, from the

state ofthe mother’s body during utero-gestation, from certain foodacting in the same way, from the habits ofexercise, from the state

ofthe parts in which the fetus is retain ed in the abdomen, andfromthe state of the men ses at the time ofconception . These causesderange the humors and produce the individuals’ habit ofbody, andthe kind ofdisease to which they are subj ect .

The derangemen t of these humors are the root of all diseases,and require to be carefully examin ed by the physician . All diseasesare considered as being produced l st, by the derangements of

the humors of the part, and 2ndly, by the peculiar diseases Of

the part .The different seasons predispose to differen t di seases the air of

the body is liable to be deranged in the two rainy and two hotmon ths ; in the two mon ths before the cold weather bile is liableto be deranged ; and during the cold mon ths, the bile remams m

health, while the diseases of phlegm are common , and in crease inspring .

The diseases ofthe humors may be arranged according as theyaffect the air, bile, and phlegm, and their combinations . There areeighty diseases produced by derangemen ts ofthe air (hagu) fortyofbile (p i tta) twen ty ofphlegm (kap ha) and sixteen by the combination ofthe derangemen ts ofthese humors.

2 15

In the embry o state, the humors are in such a state that theydo not interfere with the action of each other, as the serpen tspoison does not injure the an imal itself. But in the course oflifevarious causes interrupt this harmony and various changes regulate and determin e, at all times and season s, the health, and morbid

condi tion ofthe human body .

Air (bayu) . The causes whi ch derange air are fighting, abstin ence

in eating and drinking the use ofdry food, falls, watching when the

body is wounded, great di scharges, as Ofblood, semen , &c . The

same effects are produced by con stipation ofair, urin e, and dejec

t ion s or when they are n ot evacuated at the proper time . Bathing,great grief, fear, and exposure to cold, produce this class Ofdiseases .

The air is also in creased when the food is digested, and in the evening .

The indications ofderangemen t of the air, are a swelling of theabdomen , wi th stiffness of the body ; the surface of whi ch is dry,

rough, and cracked. The person feels pain in differen t parts ofthebody, more especially ofthe arms, testicles, fat, &c . is low-spirited,languid, and fatigued, has shivering fits and spasms the hair dropsOff, and the person ’

s head is always bowing backwards and for

wards, with other irregular movemen ts ofthe body . The voice becomes altered, and the person speaksmuch, and dreams in his sleep .

When awake he speaks Often without thought, he feels a singingin has ears, loses the power ofvi sion , has no memory, with paralysis ofone or more ofthe members . There is a dryn ess Ofthe mouth

with thi rst the body becomes ofa red or green colour, and he com

plain s ofan astringen t taste in the mouth .

Sometimes the person has severe cutting pain s in the stomach

( sul) and over the body . Parts Ofthe body feel hard, with noise inthe ears, dimn ess ofsight, obtusen ess ofthe sen ses, thi rst, dozing,irregular movements of the body, watching, and uncomfortabledreams, wi th a feeling ofdoing impossibilities

, yawn ing, and rough~

n ess of the skin .

Diseases of Air will vary according to its situation and use .

The vi tal air for the mouth (p rana) , which assists in swallowing,produces when di sordered, hiccough, vomiting, &c . The air we

breathe (udana) produces asthma, con sumption , &c . when di seased.

The (samana) or vital air in the stomach produces vomiting,anxiety, fain ting, thirst, and pain in the chest and side . In the ih

testines it produces noise along their course, pain in the navel, with

costiven ess, scanty urin e, and flatulen ce, &c . ; in the ear it produ

ces deafness ; in the in tegumen ts, a discoloration , roughn ess, and

sometimes there is a diminished sensation, and eruption over the

2 1 6

skin .When deranged in the blood, it produces differen t painful

eruption s, and tumors .When derangedwithfa t it produces tumors,

without pain . In vessels, it produces a con traction of their size, with

pain and fulln ess. In tendons, it produces paralysis, with shakingpain and spasm . Injoin ts, it produces stiffness, pain , swelling, and

emaciation ; in the bones it produces pain and emaciation in the mar-a

row it causes acute pain in the semen it produces amorbid di scharge,or a diminution ofthe secretion andwhen deranged over the body itproduces a blun tn ess ofsen se, paralysis, spasm, swelling, and pain in

many parts of the body . Besides these it produces various other

classes of symptoms, according to the parts Of the body which are

principally affected .

The prin cipal diseases produced by deranged air are fain ting, batoruhta, p itta ruhta, and kap ha ruhta, and leprosy . This last di seasecommences in the limbs, wi th dark blotches, and insen sibility ofthepart . It produces rigidi ty Ofparts (ap otanoha) by which the body isdrawn to a side, or backwards and forwards and there is an otherform of the di sease called dhumus stumb (Tetanus, Trismus . ) Itaffects particularly the lower jaw, and face, by drawing the n eighbour

ing parts to one side or another . Choria (kalaia khunj) is according to the Nedan and Susruta produced by derangemen ts of

air. This di sease is characterized by the person first feeling a

trembling or shivering over the body, wi th dimn ess of sight, and

pain in the n eck, jaw, and teeth, or any other part about to beaffected. These symptoms are followed by convulsive twi tchings of

the head, n eck, and face and ofon e side Ofthe body, particularly of

one leg . These parts are pulled to the side affected, and shake involun tary . These movemen ts extend to all the volun tary muscles of

progression, producing a dancing motion . The muscles of the

upper or lower extremities may thus be affected, of one or both

sides, and when it has extended over the body and con tinued long,it is con sidered in curable . It is supposed to be produced by irre

gularity of the bowels, from having eaten indigestable food ; which

produces costiven ess and indigestion . Much talking and laughi ng,

carrying heavy loads, and other causes deranging air, are supposed

to produce this disease . *

When the air is superabundan t it Will be dimin ished by cold,

and articles of food having this property ; by strengthen ing food,which, on being digested remains long in the vessels, such as ghee,the flesh ofgoats, &c ., masculi, salt, or sweet or sour food, shampoo

Some Sanscrit books apply the termArdita to Choria, others, applyit to Tetanus or Trismuswhich they describe, and not the true Chorla

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

2 18

skin . When the uda’

na bayu is derangedwith bile, fain ting, a

burn ing heat ofthe body, wan t ofmemory, cough, wan t ofperspiraa

tion , anxiety, indigestion , and shivering are produced. Derangedap ana bdgu with bile produces perspiration , heat, and inflammationwith cough, mucous stools, urin e of a pale colour

, with shivering .

Samari a bayu deranged with bile produces inflammation and heat ofthe body, and in the female a reten tion of the menses, cough, and

heavin ess of the lower part ofthe abdomen . Biana bagu derangedwith bile produces a burn ing heat and restlessness of the body,with cough, heaviness of the body, and pain , so that the personcannot move as he wishes .

Phlegm ( kapha) , is deranged by indigestible articles offood, andsweet, or very cool things such as milk, sugar—can e, liquid food, curdled milk, sleeping during the day ; or by the cakes made ofrice,coconuts, ghee, &c . These derangemen ts are more liable to occurin the dewy, cold, and spring mon ths during the first third Of the

day, and after eating .

The derangemen ts of phlegm produce a fuln ess of the abdomen ,

and the food the person eats is not properly digested ; he has no

appetite, and his body is pale, heavy, cold, and hard. He has fre

quen t dejection s ; his skin is smooth, oily, and itchy . There is adi scharge ofmucus from the nose, eyes, and mouth . Such a person is very languid, is always dozing, and sleeps much ; the partwhere the phlegm is deranged swells, and his mouth has a pungen tand sweet taste .

The cure ofthese derangements is accompan ied by the use ofdryfood, alkalies (salts) , astringen ts, exercise, and the use ofbitter

,

and pungent articles offood by the exhibition of emetics, by con

n exion with women , long pedestrian journ ies, gymnastic exercises,watching at n ight, smoking, and the use Ofcathartics, and diapho

reties.

Should two or three of these humors be deranged at the sametime, the particular symptoms of each will be presen t and the

degree of derangemen t of the on e compared with that of the other

Will be observed, by the prominen ce of the particular class Ofsymptoms .

Their treatmen t must likewise be varied according to the

violen ce ofthe symptoms presen t .When the body is weak the most peculiar symptoms ofthe de

ranged humor do not appear, and the person seems in health .

The di seases of air, bile and phlegm, are also produced by sin,

wh ich leads the person to perform wicked action s from ignoran ce .

Such diseases ofthe humors produce not only diseases Ofthe body,but also those ofthemind, and heart as melan choly, pride, foolish

2 1 9

n ess, &c . These were the di seases in which in ternal evacuan t medi acin es were used, after which the treatmen twas to be regulated by thepart affected : thus when the skin was affected, external applicationswere used, as oin tmen ts, plasters, &c . While the diseases of the

body are cured bymedi cin es, which dimin ish the humors that are tooabundan t those ofthe m ind are cured by perusing the Shasters, byabstin ence, by leading a religious life, and by various mortification s

Ofthe body .

The blood is supposed td be more gen erally affected wi th the

deranged humors, than with any other ofthe essen tialparts Ofthebody . When so di seased its local, or gen eral abstraction is recommended, and numerous medi cin es are administered, to purify it .It is con sequen tly the duty of the practition er to find out the

nature Ofthe di sease ; to decide on the best remedies; to dimin ish theair, bile, or phlegm, the seven essen tial parts ofthe body, and .the de

jections (mala) which may be preternaturally in creased, and ifany Of

them are dimin ished he should endeavour to in crease them so as to

restore, and retain the parts, in that state of equan imity, whichcon stitutes health . These efi

'

ects may be produced by the frequen texhibition ofpurgatives, emetics, and food which has these peenliar effects .

When a disease is produced by the sins committed in a former

state ofexistence ; by the derangemen ts of air, bile, and phlegm at

birth, or by any cause producing very dangerous diseases, especiallyin very Old people ; it will be cured by medi cin es and penances .

Diseases Ofthe poor will gen erally be incurable, as they are not able

to pay for their medicines .

SECTION II .

CLASS II .—Diseases af ecting the General System.

ORDE R I .

F evers, (Jwara )

Fevers are first considered because it is said that man is born and

dies with fever ; because it affects the whole body, the organs of

senses, and the mind and is so severe that on ly man and gods

can survive it, and by which various other diseases are produced.

The following mythological description of the origin of fever isgiven in some oftheir more recen t medical works z—Dahshga the

father—in -law OfShiva did n ot invite him to a feast given to the gods,and spoke disrespectfully ofhim . His wife Durgawas presen t, and

2 B 2

20

was so enraged, at the disrespect, that she considered it better to ;

die than live under such a disgrace ; and while sitting, her spiritleft her body . Nundi the servan t ofDurga seeing her die, wen t

and informed Shiva ofthe even t . He in grief for his loss, tore ofl"

one of his locks, and it “

fell in to the fire, and a great devil namedBirabhadra was produced from it . Others say that in his anger he

heaved a deep sigh, and from his mouth the devil was produced.

Birabhadra asked Shiva to be allowed to destroy his father-ih—lawThis was permitted, and after polluting the sacred fire ofDahshga

destroying many of his guests, and tearing his hair, he wren ched

his head from his body . It was during the paroxysm Of griefandrage of Shiva for the death Of Durga that the breath which pro

ceeded from his nostrils, hot, and destructive, gave origin to

fevers, which attack all persons, of all ages, and in all con ~

ditions .

The cause Ofall the principal varieties offever, with the exceptionoffive from acciden ts (ag an tuha) , is using improper mixtures of

food ; as eating fish and milk ; the wan t Of season ing in food ;

sleeping at improper hours figh ting with a strong man exposureto the morning sun while fasting ; eating voraciously of food of a

very hot nature, when the body has been previously weaken ed by extreme hunger ; and by fatigue, fear, grief, andwatching . Fevers arealso produced by poison s, drinking stagnan twater, in which witheredleaves have fallen ; taking a full m eal without any appetite, or afterdelivery, especially if improperly treated. In other cases the

first secretion Of milk in the breast, produces fever, exposure toun seasonable weather, or to sudden vicissitudes of temperature ;checked perspiration , long continued con stipation ; and hvmg In

wooded, ill ventilated valleys . O ther causes of fever are the in

fluence Ofbad stars, n eglected adoration of sain ts or gods visitinga n ew climate the malign influence ofevil spirits, and severe local

diseases, or injuries . By such causes the air, bile, and phlegm are

deranged, pass in to the stomach and thus expel the

internal heat . The humors stop also the chyle vessels, and derange

the heat, wh ich digests the food in other words, whatever exposes

our moral qualities, or bodily frame, to deviation s from their natural

and accustomed movemen ts, produces fevers ; and it requi res remedies to drive back the heat, to its natural position , when the personis restored to health .

General symp toms ofFever.

The attack of fever commences with the person complain ing ofIassitude and fatigue ; he is continually yawning, and stretching ;

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

222

means the morbid matter is allowed to ripen , and is then to be discharged by evacuan t medicin es. It will increase the disease, andrender it probably fatal, ifthese evacuan t remedi es are used beforethe morbid matter is matured.

Shouldin any case the fasting produce weakn ess, it is to be stopped

as improper and mean s to strengthen the body substituted. Fast

ing is not to be employed in fevers which attacks infan ts or old

people, in pregnancy, when the body is light, or in cases in which

air, urine, and dejections have been discharged, in large quantities,by medicin e .In recen t fever the patien t is to be allowed a decoction of bitter

herbs, &c . so as to restore the derangemen t Ofthe humors. He

may now be allowed a little more food than during the first stage .

Milk, which durin g the first stage is like poison , may now be taken

with advan tage .Should the disease con tinue and pass on to the third period, when

the fever is said to be old, it is to be treated by emetics, purgatives,and differen t febrifuge decoctions. The di et should be in largerquantities and of a more nourishing quality, than during the two

first periods of the disease ; such as broths, prepared with an imalflesh, milk, and the like .

In all such cases of fever it is n ecessary to recollect that thetreatmen t will vary according as the air, bile, and phlegm are moreor less affected.

The fever is said to have disappeared when the appetite return s

the body feels light, and the person is n ot easily fatigued. When

the acuten ess Ofhis sen ses, memory, and understandi ng is restored,the unnatural heat of the body di sappears, and he has n o pain ;when he moans, is forgetful, when small pimples form round the

mouth, andwhen the warmth, sm ell, and perspiration , sn eezing, and

the alvin e evacuation s are n atural .Should there occur, after the seven th day, sonorous breathing,

listlessn ess and torpor, with thirst, constipation , hiccough, cough ing,and vomiting with n o appetite, the patien t is in eminen t danger . Insuch cases the person usually becomes very weak, and dies .

The most unfavourable progno stic symptoms offever, when thepatien t should not be taken charge ofby the physician, are when thesen ses are n ot in their natural state, or n o longer act ; when theperson is weak, with sudden and severe attacks offever when thepatien t is decrepid, his extremities swell, and the fever remainsduring a greater part Ofthe n ight when affected with strabismus,and when his mouth remains Open , and he is delirious . Whenhe cannot be roused from his sleep, with the feeling of cold on

223

the outside ofthe body, while he is hot inside, the patient is in greatdanger . In such cases the person gen erally dies.

Varieties of F evers .

These are divided in to con tinued, mixed, acciden tal, and in termitten t fevers ; which will be considered under the following n in egen era

Co

at

jplued

Fever“

produced by deranged Air .

Fever produced by deranged Bile .

Fever produced by deranged Phlegm.

Fever produced by deranged Air and Phlegm.

Fever produced by deranged Air and Bile .

Fever produced by deranged Bile and Phlegm.

Mixed re-Wmitten tor syn o >7 Fever produced by deranged Air, Phlegm and Bile .

chus fe

ver . JAcpépl

pptal

Fever produced by derangemen t Ofthe humors .

In termitten t fever . Fever produced by derangemen t ofhumors .

All these fevers are produced by derangements of air, bile, or

phlegm, and fasting is on e ofthe chiefmean s ofrestoring the balance,while the fever is advan cing, or when unripe . This is known by a

peculiar pain in the chest, by drowsin ess, and listlessness, by the

yellow colour ofthe saliva, by the wan t ofappetite, by the constipated state ofthe bowels, and by secretion Of urin e by the bodyfeeling heavy, by the absen ce ofperspiration , by the bad taste in the

mouth, and by a con stan t and severe fever . Dhanwan tari says that

medicin e should n ot be given in this stage Offever, and not un til the

seven th day others say, n ot un til the ten th day after its commence

men t . However, should the bowels have been con stipated before the

fever, and the humors are ripe, they should be removed either byemetics, purgatives, or errhin es, or a severe di sease wi ll be the con

sequen ce by the pen t up impurities . Should fever be produced byderangemen ts ofair, ghee should be freely used ifphlegm is parti

cularly deranged, give first an emetic ifbile, purgatives, which willbe varied with the peculiar symptom s . When the phlegm is ripe,errhin es are recommended. A suppository is also recommended

for these cases of con stipation . It should be composed of longpepper, jubdan, clive

’

, medream.

224

If the fever does not completely disappear by these means itproves that some ofthe diseased humors still remain , which should

be removed by the exhibition ofhot ghee . The cure is accomplish

ed by increasing the strength, promoting the appetite,which is

known by a lightn ess and elasticity ofthe body. The n ext indica

tion is to discharge the deranged air, bile, or phlegm, by mean s of

errhin es and purgatives and during the con tinuan ce of the fever

the usual food and drink are to be avoided, un til the n atural exore ~

tion s are restored, the sen ses act naturally, and the patien t feels

hungry, and thirsty, at the same time .

l st Variety ofFever . Bciti/c-jwara is that variety which is pro

duced by a derangemen t ofthe air ( h iya )This fever commences with shivering, there is sometimes much

at other times little heat ; the throat, mouth, and lips are dry .

The patien t has no sleep, does not sn eeze, his skin is dry, wi th

head-ache, and pain in the chest, as well as over the body . Whatever is taken into the stomach feels heavy, and creates un easinessthe stools are very hard ; pain in the abdomen ; flatulen ce as if

much food had been eaten , and he is frequen tly yawn ing .

The treatmen t of this form of fever will depend on the stage atwhich it is examin ed. In the shivering fit, hot remedies are to beexhibited. According to Susfiruta it is treated by enemas, the em

ploymen t oferrhin es, composed ofdifferen t medicin es for removing

the head-ache, and humors from the head, and by exhibiting thefollowing infusion

Cassia fistula (A’basfiwasfij

Ruellea strepen s

Cyperus juncifoliao (Musta )Black hellibore (Til da )Myrobalan (Haritalci .

Take 40 M isti/ta of each, boil in one pin t ofwater till a quarterremains, and strain . This quan tity is for one dose, and is usuallyg iven in the morn ing and repeated for two days various infusionsofherbs, and barks oftrees, are used in the same way . Prepared

ghee wi th febrifuge medicin es are used, when the above remedies don ot cure the di sease . In all cases the particular treatment will varywith the symptoms present .

The food to be taken in thi sfever is, first kidn ey beans (Phaseolusmango) boiled, bruised, and eat with spice ; conj ee with the juiceoflemon , and warm water for drink . Long-pepper, hemidismus

(Sarura) , raisins (kismis) , dill (sataspispa) , (ranuka) , ofeach 40ra ti, to a pin t ofwater ; boiled down to a fourth, and taken twicea day .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

226

in by loss ofappetite, and the symptoms of the hot stage is less

marked than in the last form of fever . The person feels languid, andlistless, with a sweet taste in his mouth . In this fever the body feelscold, as ifwrapped in a wet cloth, and the stools and urine arewhite . Such a person remains quiet and silen t, does n ot eat but

feels as ifhe had eaten too much, his body is very heavy, eyes white,with nausea attended with cough . He is very sleepy, and there is adischarge ofmucus from the eyes, mouth, and n ose .Treatment . For seven days the person should not eat his usual

food in this fever ; but should live on prepared peas, and the like .The stomach in the first stage of this fever should be cleared by an

emetic, which will often cut the fever short, but this remed is not to

be used when the patien t is very weak after the emetic t e‘juice ofthe leaves ofVitex n egundo (Incha or Sinclabara) is to be administered, with the powder of long-pepper . Heating medicines of all

kinds are also used in th is fever, as the diet should be light as Well

as heating .

4M. E tti e -

p aittilca Jwara . This fever commen ces with giddin ess,fainting and thirst the bodyfeels cold to another person , although

he complain s ofhis body being hot and burn ing ; loss ofmemory,no sleep, pain in all the join ts, head-ache, cough, throat and mouthdry, vomiting, goose

—skin , n o perspiration , low spirits, andyawning .

To remove this form offever take ofSfiunthz

’

, dry ginger,Gulancii a, (Min ispermum glabrum,)Mutha, (Cyperus rotundus,)Ckircita, (Chiraita, )Skalp a

’

ri i, (Hedysarum gangeticum,)Cfidlca lya, (Hemion ites cordifolia,)Byd/car, (Solanum Jaquini, ) a variety ofprickly n ightshade,Kantikari, (Solanum melongena,) prickly n ightshade,Gan iri, (Premna spinosa,)

1 8 ratis each, mix in water, boil to i , and take twice a day .

D iet . The decoction of mudg a, a sort of pea, and the juice of

aimlaka is often used. When there is much heat in the body wem ay give a decoction ofgram, with the juice ofthe fruit ofpomegra

‘

h ate for diet .

5 th . Bata-sli laiskmilc Jwara . This form offever is not very severe

in its accession . The body feels cold, with slight shivering and pain in

the bon es ; the person sleeps much, has pain in the head, withmuch saliva in the mouth, and runn ing at the nose, with cough, adry skin , and body hot .The treatmen t consists in exhibiting the root of long-pepper,

227

: chabya, (Piper chavya or Orris root, and root ofchitraka,

(Plumbago zeylanica,) and dried ginger : 32 ratis of each are put

in to a pint ofwater, and boiled down to one-fourth . Take this twice

a day . Heating m edicin es may also be used in this fever, as

chiraita, dry ginger, gulancha, (Minispermum glabrum, ) basaka,

(Justicia ganderussa,) long-pepper, lasfiun, (garlick,) and sindabara,

(Vitex negunda, ) 20 ratis each . Boil in a pin t ofwater, till reduced

to on e-fourth, and take this twice daily. When the pain in the

join ts is severe, the vapour bath may be used and should there begreat dryness of the mouth, in order to in crease this secretion takesalt, the powder ofblack-pepper, and the juice of lemons.

D iet . Boil in water the following medicines —the bark ofBilwa, (n le marmelos,)Shana/ca, (Bignon ia indica, )Gambkarz

’

, (Gmelina arborea,)Patald, (Bignon ia suave-olens,) andGanilra

’

rikci (Premna spinosaofeach 32 ratis, mix in two seers ofwater, and reduce it to one seero

This is again boiled with some rice, and when cool strained.

Gtfi . Bile analPhlegm, (Pi tta -shla islzmilrJwara .) The mouth is

clammy and sour, with much saliva, in this form offever . The per

son is always dozing, complain s of fain tn ess, and coughs ; has no

appetite, thirst, and is at one time hot, and at another time cold.

Cure . Abstinence in eating and drinking is to be enjoin ed ; themedi cines that cure the diseases of bile and phlegm are to be given,such as

Ga lancita, (Min ispermum glabrum , )Nimba, n eem bark,Dlzanya/ra, coriander,Cfiandana, red sandal-wood,Caturolzz

'

n i, helebore,

ratis 32 each, boil in a pint ofwater, till reduced to one-fourth ;take this dose twice a day.

Perspiration is also to be encouraged, as phlegm shuts up the

perspirable pores, and restores the in ternal heat to its proper placeand water promotes the movemen ts ofthe body, and cures the fever .Hot sand in a bag may be applied to the body, and by changingcon tinually its position, it soon produces perspiration . Long

pepper with its stem, dry-ginger, each 23 ratis, mixed and boiled

together may be given twice daily .

7 tfi. Mixed R emittent or Syri ac/ms Fever, (Sannipdt Jwara

Bikara .) In this form offever the air, bile, and phlegm, are

deranged and it is always dangerous . At one time the patient is hot,2 c 2

at other times cold, with pains in the bones, and joints the eyes are

watery, ofa dirty yellow colour, and hollow ; the patien t complain sofringing, and pain in the ears, with pain in the head, n eck, and

thorax is always dozing, but cannot sleep at n ight has n o m emory,and is often delirious . Bodies seem to turn round, and sometimeshe is laughing, crying, performs unnatural action s, is always coughing, has quick breathing, no appetite, the tongue is black like char

coal, and irregular like that ofa cow, with pain . Blood, phlegm,air

and bile flow from the mouth, the patien t moves his head about

continually, wi th thirst, watching, and pain in the breast . The urin e

is secreted in small quan tities, with costiven ess and n o perspiration

great thirst, noises in the throat, so that there is a difficulty incomprehending what the sick person says with round elevat ions,and central depression s of a blue and red colour, over the sur

face ofthe body. The person vomits blood, mixed with phlegm,

and his abdomen dimin ishes in size . His body does not becomethin , but his belly is heavy and en larged. This kind of fever re

mains long, and much care and proper medicines are required forits cure . After the first stage, should the fever con tinue severe,it will be gen erally fatal ; and at the last stage of the fever the

lower part of the ear ( the parotid gland) swells . This is supposed

to be a fatal sign .

The 7th, 1 0th, 1 2th days, are always the days on which the fever

i s severe, or from these periods the symptoms diminish in severity .

In other books“ it is stated that the critical days are the 7th, 9th,

1 1 th, 1 4th, 1 8th, 22nd from which period the disease is ‘

dimin ish

ed or in creased. Those who live till the 22nd day generally recover .

Tfiere are thirteen kinds of mixed fever . In three kinds on e of

humours, that is the air, bile, or phlegm, are morbidly increased, or

dimin ished beyond the others . In a second form two are in creasedor dimin ished. The thirteen th variety is that in which the threehumours are morb idly in creased.

1 . Bisfaralca Batv lbana . When the air is in creased, the usual

Symptoms of this form of fever will be accompan ied with a bad

taste in the mouth ,difficulty of breathing, shivering, cough, yawn

Ing,giddin ess, syncope, delirium , and pain in the sides of the

belly .

2 . Pittulbana or Asul mri . The peculiar symptoms of this form

are loosen ess, giddiness, fain ting, aphthae in the mouth, red spots,

and a burn ing sensation , over the body .

3 . Korup ono or Kap /mlbana, is distinguished by a feeling of

languor, a difficulty in speaking, sleeping much,eyes cloudy, and a

sweet taste in the mouth .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

230

13 . Abfiinyaisa Jmara . Is characterized by dryness ofthemouth,by the patien t being always sleepy, and his body feels as if it belonged to another person he Speaks very little, andwith great pain ,

is stupid, and breathes with difficulty . His in ternal heat is dimin ished, he feels an in tern al burn ing sen sation accompan ied withweakn ess, and a dead—like feeling ofthe skin .

Trea tmen t of Mixed fever . In this fever the patien t mustabstain from food ; he must be put into a sand-bath, and errhines,emetics, and expectorates admin istered to him . Should the personbe drowsy several colyria are recommended. During this fever he‘Should drink boiled water, which has been cooled.

8th Acciden talfever, The causes of this order offevers are injuries ; such as wounds, &c . They may also be produced by the evil design s of an enemy, or a devil ; by the passion s ;by the curses of a guru, a brahman , or a prophet by poison , or bythe effects of air mixed with deleterious matter, as that proceeding

from a kind of poisonous trees which are supposed to come from

the east .These causes derange the air, bile, and phlegm, and thus

produce fever .

Adultery, grief for paren ts, friends, &c . derange also the air,

anger deranges bile, and devils derange both air, bile, and phlegm .

When a man wan ts to kill an other, or to remove an obnoxiousindividual to another coun try or to have command ofhim, certainmantras, and direc tions are given in the Tan tra Shristra for aecom

plishing these . But should he err in any ofthe injun ction s enjoin ed,the person himelfwill be attacked with the fever, and he will not

have power to injure the other . In some such cases the two fron tteeth are extracted to preven t the person blundering in pronouncing

man tras .

When the fever is produced by poison s the tongue is white, or

black in the middle, the person has frequen t stools, and fain tingfits, and has no appetite, or memory, and complain s of thirst, and

pain over the body . By improper medicines this fever is sometimesproduced with swoon ing, head-ache, and vomiting .

Making offerings of fire, &c . , to brahman s will cure this species offever . When produced by a bad conjun ction ofplan ets, gifts will cureit . By giving “

shelter to the traveller, setting him in a cleanplace, washing his feet, giving him food, will preven t the consequence . Another form of cure is going to the principal sacredtemples, and making offerings through the brahman s .

When it is produced by the passion of love there is no memory,the person dozes, is lazy, anddelirious. In this variety every thingcooling is to be given ifcough is deranged, bitter things are to be.

23 1

given if air, cooling things ; ifbile, sweet things . This fever iscured

, when produced by poison , by the usual an tidotes. When produced by grief, remedies for curing bile are to be used when fromlust, the person is to be comforted, and his purpose promised. If

from fear, causes producing joy wi ll perform a cure .

Wh en produced by the curses of a good man , or by the sorceryofanother, wan t of memory and thirst are the peculiar symptoms

presen t and when an evil Spirit produces it, the person alternatelyis sorrowful and laughing and at other times he cries and laughs .

These are to be cured by proper prayers, stated in the sfiastras, bybinding the person , and beating him, by which the fever willbe cured, as by these mean s the devil suffers, and is expelled.

9 th . Intermi tten tfevers (Bishama Jwara) . This is another formoffever, which occurs before and after attacks of other kinds of

fever ; by the derangements of the humours of the body . The

essen tial parts of the body such as chyle, blood, muscles, fat, bon e,semen , andmarrow,

in the order n owmen tion edmay be affected. One

or more are sometimes deranged, and form so many types offever .These are Santata, Sa ta ta, Anyejyaka, Tritiyalca, Chatnrtfiaka .

The gen eral symptoms of interm itten t fever are as follows : whenthe paroxysm occurs at uncertain periods the patien t feels first cold,then hot, and afterwards perspires .

The following five varieties are described

San ta la con tinues for several days without an intermission .

2 . Sa ta ta has two paroxysms daily .

3 . Anyejya/ra occurs daily, at the same hour .

4 . Tri tz’

ya/ra occurs on altern ate days .

5 . Chaitartfia/ra occurs every fourth day .

At the time of the accession of the fever the paroxysm may be

preven ted by frightening the patien t, by brandishing a naked swordbefore h im,

by advancing poisonous sn akes n ear him, with the

poison ed fangs removed, by the approach ofdangerous elephants,and by the alarm of thieves . For a like purpose on the day of the

return of the fever, emetics, purgatives, diaphoretics, or strongliquors are to be exhibited. These are to be given before theparoxysm is expected.

The following varieties of this class of fevers are described byHindu Medical writers .

I . Santa ta-jwara affects the chyle and blood ; and it con tinues

for 7 , 1 0, or 1 2 days ; followed by an in terval and again occurs,and remains for several days .

2 . Sa tata has two paroxysms daily, one at n ight and anotherduring the day .

When the person is weak and the fever is old, he is to live on

light food, such as broths prepared with certain kinds ofpulse, the

flesh ofbirds and an imals, which have been fed with gram . Otherssay there are two kinds of this fever

, one ofwhich commences with a

c old fit, and an other with a hot fit . The first gives much uneasin ess,and is cured with difficulty .

3 . Ifthe paroxysm of fever recurs at the same hour daily, it iscalled Ang ejgalca . In this form use the following medicineTake ofbark of the n imba tree

,

Patolap a tra,

A'

mlalca,

Bibb ita/ca,

Harita/ci,

The flowers ofthe ma id,Enrolai bark,

two mashas ofeach, add a pin t ofwater, and reduce the mixture to

a halfby boiling . Several medicin es are also recommended to bemixed, and the steam from the mixture is allowed to come in con

tact with the body, which has been covered, so as to be exposed tothe vapours.

4 . When the fever return s at an in terval of one day it is calledTritiyaka . These are the following three varieties ofthis fever

a . When p hlegm and bile are deranged in this fever, before theaccession , pain is felt at the n ape ofthe n eck .

6 . When sp irit and p hlegm are deranged, the patien t first feelspain in the loin s.

c . When air and bile are deranged, the fever is in troducedwith head-ache . For the cure of such fevers, various man tras areemployed.

5 . In Chatnrtbaka , the paroxysms of this fever occur everyfourth day . When the paroxysm con tinues for two days, there is no

paroxysm on the first and fourth day, the fever is that calledChaturtbaka Bip arjg aya .

This fever presents the following symptoms . It commences with

shivering, dryn ess, and swelling . The patien t has no strength, so

as not to be able to walk . He evacuates much bile, air, and

phlegm which are particularly affected.

Errhines are used for the cure of this fever . Certain roots are

used for the same purpose, gathered on the n ights of lucky days,and are sometimes tied to the hair ofthe head, and other parts of

the body . When the body is heavy, with perspiration , and littlefever and stools, it is called Proap iko .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

234

ence ofa bad plan et . These causes derange air, bile, and phlegm,

&c ., which with the bad blood produces an eruption like the masara .

Before small-pox appears, fever occurs, with pain over the body,but particularly in the back ; and itching, lassitude, stretching

,

restlessn ess, redness ofthe face and eyes, with cough . The skin

swells slightly, and is ofan unusually red colour .

When air is much deranged in this disease the pustules are ofa

dark-green , and red colour ; or dull, hard, and rough, and are

accompan ied with severe pain . This variety ripen s slowly .

When bile is deranged, in this disease, severe pain is felt in the

large and small join ts, wi th cough, shaking, listlessn ess and languor

the palate, lips and tongue are dry with thirst, and n o appetite .

The pustules are red, yellow, and white, and they are accompan iedwith burn ing pain . This form soon ripen s .

When produced by diseasedphlegm the pustules are large, white,

and shin ing, wi th much itching, and less pain than the former kind.

They ripen slowly . In this form, some of the gen eral symptoms

of small-pox are aggravated. There is catarrh wi th chilliness,head-ache, fever, heavin ess ofthe body, nausea, loss ofthe appetite,languor, drowsin ess, and the patien t sleeps much .

When'

bloodis deranged diarrhoea, lassitude, and stretching occur

with thirst, lazin ess, wan t ofappetite, burning over the surface, and

the mouth becomes ulcerated. The eyes are red, strong fever ispresen t, with the symptoms already enumeratedunder deranged bile .When air, bile and phlegm are deranged, in this disease the body

has a blue colour, and the skin seems studded with rice . The

pustules become black and flat, are depressed in the cen tre, with

much pain . They ripen slowly, and the discharge is copious, and

very foetid.

When air, bile and phlegm are thus deranged the patien t is always dozing, he has n o appetite, breathes with difficulty, and is

drowsy, restless and delirious . This form is cured with much difficulty, and it is called Cbarmo or fatal form .

The following are other varieties ofSmall-poxl Measles (R oman tika,Ham, B . ) is produced by vitiatedphlegm

and bile, and the symptoms are fever followed by an eruption of

small red papellae, like the roots ofhairs ; these appear over thebody, accompan ied with loss ofappetite and cough .

2 . Wa ter-p oa (Tog otob, Masari/ra, Pan i Basan ta, B . ) The

pustules are large, and full ofwater . In this form the skm 1s aloneaffected.

When the blood is particularly affected in small-pox, the pustules

are ofa redder colour, have a thinner cuticle than usual, and quickly

235

ripen .They may gen erally be cured, but on being

opened, should

blood be di scharged, the disease is in curable .When the pustules proceed fromflesh they are hard and shin ing,

they ripen slowly, and the skin covering the part is thi ck . The

pain over the body is severe, with listlessn ess, itchin ess ofthe skin,

thirst, an d fever .Wh en the disease is produced by di seased fat, the pustules are

large, soft, round, and slightly elevated, with severe fever and pain ;

Th is form is very dangerous, and is accompan ied wi th loss of sen se,lazin ess and stupor . Some strong person smaybe cured ofthis disease .

When the marrow is particularly diseased, the pustul es are verysmall, flat, and slightly elevated and dry . The person is in sen sible ,with severe pain of a gn awing k ind in the vi tal parts. This form

quickly destroys the person .

When the bones are particularly affected in this disease ; theyfeel pain ed, as if bored by an in sect . The pustules appear as if

ripe, small, shining and very tender . The person feels chilly, rest

less, and delirium occurs, with a burn ing feeling .

Wh en semen is affected in this disease, the symptoms are the

same as when the bon es are affected and this form is so fatal that

as soon as a person is affected wi th it he dies, so that there is n o

time for the pustules appearing .

These differen t forms will be known by an experien ced physician .

When small-pox is caused by derangemen ts in the skin , blood, bile,or phlegm or phlegm and bile, it will be qui ckly cured. When air

or bile ; or phlegm and air ; and when the air, bile, and phlegmare deranged the disease is in curable . Of the latter kind the cruptions are sometimes like coral, or like rose-apple (Jam) , oval, likethe iron weight of a fish ing n et, or like a grain of lin seed. The

colour of thi s dangerous form ofsmall-pox varies according to the

strength ofthe individual . The other bad symptom s are cough,

hiccough, coma, fever of a severe kind, delirium,listlessn ess, and

thirst . The body remain s very hot, blood flows from the mouth,

eyes and n ose, and there is a gurgling (ghargharz’

) n oise in the

throat, with difficult and sonorous respiration . Such cases of small

pox are incurable as also those in which great thirst is accompan iedwi th difficulty in breathing, which is performed through the mouth .

Should the elbow, wrists, or axilla swell after the small-p ox, the

person will be cured with diffi culty .

In Bhabap rahasha, a modern compilation , anoth er form ofsmall~

pox is related. It is called Shi tala.

’l<

The name ofthe goddess of small-pox, from shita, cold, and la ;

which indicates the cold treatmen t, which is most favourable for the

2 D 2

236

It commen ces with fever, and th e eruptions appear before the

7th day, and they maturate before the 14th day. In another week

t hey begin to dry. In this compilation , an tiphlogistic remedies

are recommended to be used from the beginn ing and the ashes of

cowdung is to be rubbed over the body. When the pustules havebeen broken, the person is to drink cold water, and he shouldremain in a cool room . Such a cool regimen , with an airy and

clean place to reside in , is all that is required. Febrifuge decoction s are also used to dim in ish the fever, and various religiousceremon ies, wi th prayers and offerings, are used.

In the otherManuscripts the man ner oftreating small-pox variesaccording to its nature . In gen eral, the treatmen t commen ces withrubbing ghee made hot, or warm water over the body, before theeruption appears an emetic should also be given .

When the eruption makes its appearan ce the pustules are rubbedover with turmerick, mixed with ghee . Cooling food is recom

mended, particularly the powder offried rice and gram,boiled with

sugar and water . Broths made ofthe birds, which pick with theirbills, such as pigeon s, &c . , are to be used towards the terminationofthe disease . Nothing is said about a hot room, so that we may

infer that the patien t is to reside in an Open airy place . Few people

are allowed to visit the sick person ; dirty people are particularlyexcluded, and n o one is allowed to touch the person . It is said to becontagious, but as it is gen erally con sidered as produced by sin , and

the Hindus being predestin arian s, this property of the disease ison ly casually stated in a few MSS. The treatmen t of small-pox isvaried according to the humour particularly deranged.

The air pox (Baga Masariha) is to be treated by exhibiting thedecoction ofthe powder helamochee with red sandal-wood. In other

cases a decoction of

Gulancha,

Coriander seed,Panchami

’

i li,

R a’

snci,

Ratri,

Ushira, and

Darcilabha is recommended.

Two tola of each medicin e is boiled in a pint of water tothis is given for a dose . The body is rubbed with ghee, mixed

with a paste made ofthe bark of

cure of the disease . When attacked with the disease, the patien t oftenvows to m ake an offering at the shrin e ofShitala

’

, and as an earnest ofthat puts some pice into a vessel ofwater, as she loves every thing cold.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

38

n istering the powder oftamarind seeds with the”

powder ofturmerickdaily in cold water, by which mean s the person will n ot be attackedwith the disease . The juice ofplantain tree with white sandal-woodand water ; or the juice ofPasso with licquorice will have the sameeffect . These are to be given likewise when the fever comes to

check, or dimin ish the violence ofthe disease .

It appears that the Chin ese as well as the Hindus were familiar

with small-pox many cen turies before the Arabian physician s de ~

Scribed it . It was probably conveyed westward by the Persian con

querors ofHindustan whi ch seems to be a further confirmation of

the coun try from which it originally came,and the mann er in whichit gradually approached and even tually reached Europe . The di s»

tance and the hot deserts through which the only in tercourse for so

long a period was held, prevented for a time its progress westwardbut, as navigation extended, ships from India would frequen tlytouch at the Arabian ports of the Persian Gulph, and Red Sea,

where it seems first to have appeared, A. D . 900 .

The description of the small-pox by Rhazes,* the distinguished

Arabian physician ,first drew the atten tion ofthe European phy

sician s to the disease .

Some say it was introduced in to Arabia in 5 72, the year that gavebirth to Mohammad ; other testimon ies seem to accord with the

statement that it was at the siege ofMecca (A. D . by Abraham

that the Arabian s were first affectedwith the disease .

The conquests of the followers ofMohammad conveyed the dis

ease to Persia, Syria, and Egypt ; and the successful stand made bythe inhabitan ts of Constan tinople, for some time preven ted the

spread of the disease beyond the Hellespon t . So completely does

th is appear to have been the case, that Honus, a residen t physicianin that city in the ten th cen tury, states that n either the small-pox

nor measles were known in his time in Con stan tin ople .The whole of the southern coast of the Mediterran ean sea had

been subdued by the Arabians ; but, it was not till the commencemen t ofthe eighth cen tury that the di sease was introduced in toSpain by the Moors. The victorious Saracens overran Spain , cross

disease ; and its danger afterwards led them to erect a goddess whichthey n ow propitiate to prevent, as well as to mitigate, the attack of the

disease .

The tran slation was printed in England by Dr. Meade, in 1 747 3 see

hisWorks, page 297 .

239

ed the Pyrenese moun tains, and inundated the southern provinces

of Fran ce . They were driven back by Charles Martel ; but theyleft the small-pox and measles with the conquerors. From thissource the diseases quickly spread over Europe .

The Span iards in their invasion of Hispan iola and Mexico con-v

veyed the same diseases to these coun tries, where it committed themost exten sive ravages . It would thus appear that the small-poxas well as the measles commenced in Asia, and extended to Africa,Europe, and the n ew World.

The ignoran ce, however, ofthe European nation s, of the middleages, was such, that they di d not record any description of the first

appearan ce ofthis peculiar and fatal di sease in their differen t countries . It was under the vague name of plague” or of con sumingfire

,

”which was applied to eruptive pestilences in gen eral, that it

may have been described we may easily suppose that the great

mortality which took place on the first introduction of the disease

must have led the inhabitants to beli eve that the n ew disease pro

ceeded from the anger ofan offended deity, inscrutible in his nature,and on ly to be prevented or cured by humiliation and prayers .

ORDER III .

Acute Rheuma tism

This disease is produced in dispeptic patients who lead a seden tarylife, taking improper food, or are in temperate . All indigestable

food has this effect ; such as oleaginous articles, particularly whenthe person , at the same time, takesmuch exercise . By such causesthe chyle is not properly prepared, and indigested food (A

'

m) is

formed in the stomach . This A771. is carried in to the great abdominal vessels . The deranged chyle produced in this mann er, by themorbid condition of air, bile, or phlegm is like mucilage, and

deranges all the abdomen . This (A'

mras) morbid chvle is the

cause of all the varieties of this disease . The deranged phlegmand air are accumulated in the loins producing pain and rigidity of

the body, and hence it is calledA'

mba’

t, (air mixed with morbidchyle . ) From the loins it. extends over all the body.

The gen eral symptoms are pain over the body, loss ofappetite,thirst, wan t ofappetite, languor, heavin ess, fever, and there is adeaden ed sensation of the parts . When this disease is in such an

aggravated form, it is most difficult to cure .

When the deranged phlegm and air with the morbid chyle passes

to the wrist, ankle, n eck, hip, knee, loin s, it produces a burn ingsensation , much pain, like the bite ofthe centipede, with swelling .

240

The person feels great lassitude with a COpious flow of urin e hecannot sleep, and complain s of pain in the abdomen ; and is dis

tressed with thirst, vomiting, giddiness, fain ting, pain in the chest,costiven ess, &c .

When bile is much deranged in this disease there is a burningsensation and redness of the part — and when air is prin cipallyderanged, the pain is very severe . When phlegm is much deranged,the itching and rigidity of the part is con siderable, and it feels asif it was covered with a wet cloth . When one humour is alone

affected, it is curable, when two it is difficult to cure, and whenthree, and the whole body is affected the cure is very difficult, tedi

ous, and the disease is even fatal in some cases .

Treatment . This should be commen ced with fasting, diaphoretics, and bitters, ton ics, and stomachics . Heating medi cin es wi thpurgatives and en emas are also ofmuch use in this disease . The

sand-bath is also used, and on the leaves of the castor-oil plan t hotsand is to be placed, and this is to be applied to the pain ed parts .

The following vapour-bath is also recommended. Steep old rice inwater un til it ferments, the water is then poured off, and the fol

lowing medicin es are put in to itThe seeds ofDolichos biflorus, (hala ttha,)Teel seed, ( til, )The root ofthe castor-oil shrub,Barley,Lin seed,Boerhavia diffusa elater, Qaunarnaba. )

To four seers of water, take a tolah of each of these medicin es ;boil, and in this state place the vessel with the mouth partly closedunder the chair in which the patien t sits, his whole person being

covered with a thick cloth . Several pots are to be prepared in the

above mann er . He will thus remain for twen ty m inutes to halfan

hour .Several kinds of plasters are likewise used. The following is a

Specimen ofth is class ofmedicin es . Take ofthe roots of the

Abrus precatorius, (H ing shira, )Kebaka,

The Morunga . Guilandina sigrua,

to be mixed with cow’

s urin e, and the earth ofant-hills so as to

form a paste, which is to be applied hot to the affected part .For purgatives take halfa tola of

Convolvulus turpethum, (Teari,)Sixteen ratis ofrock salt,And a little ginger,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

242

three when two humours are deranged one when three are deranged

at the same time one when caused by an injury, and on e by poison .

Sushruta does n ot allow that three varieties are produced by the

combination of two diseased humours and con sequen tly considers

this disease as having on ly five varieties produced by gen eral, and

one by a local, or accidental cause .

1 . When air is deranged the swelling passes from on e part to

another, the skin is thin , the surface dry and soft, ofa red or blackcolour, with dulln ess of feeling . The parts when pressed pit, butthey recover the level on the pressure being removed. The symptoms increase in the day t ime .

2 . When the swelling is produced by deranged bile the swell

ing is moist, and has a bad smell, is ofa yellow, red, and black

colour, produces various kinds of pain , and ripen s soon . In such

cases the body is soon fatigued, the patien t is feverish, perspiresmuch, complains of thirst, and dullness, the pulse is very frequent,his eyes ofa red colour, and the pain is severe .3 . Phlegm. Drop sy is characterized by always remaining in

one place, is ofa yellowish pale, and shining colour, is cold and

hard, and painfully itchy. The patien t has no appetite, and coughis discharged from the mouth and nose, the person is always sleepy,the swelling and the in ternal heat are dimin ished, and when the

di sease occurs it causes much un easin ess to the person , and is

cured slowly . Pressure does not dimini sh this variety, the symptoms ofwhich increase at n ight .

4, 5, 6, 7 . When two of the above humours are deranged, the

symptoms of both forms of the two humours, stated above, are

presen t ; andwhen three are deranged, all the symptoms are presen t

in the separate varieties.

8 . Acciden tal Swellings (Abhigha’

taja shotha) , when the bodyis wounded by a cutting in strumen t, by injuries or when bruised byan acciden t, breathing cold air, and the air of the ocean is of muche . The vapour or jui ce ofthe marking-nut (bhalldta/ca) applied

to the body, or rubbing the part wi th cowach (hap ihachehhii) will be.ofuse . These produce swelling, heat, and redn ess, accompan iedwiththe other symptoms of diseased bile . Bad water

,either drank,

or wi th which the body is washed, produces such swellings of

parts.

9 . Bishaja-shotha . When the poison ofany an imal is taken bythe mouth, is in troduced in to the system by a wound

, or by con tactwhen urin e is applied to a wound

,or the person wears a cloth that is

dirty, is covered with excremen t, or he breathes air coming from a

p oisonous tree it produces this form of swelling . The application

243

ofthe powder of differen t poisonous articles, or of certain an imalswalking over the body, produce the same effect : Thus if frogs,&c . discharge their urin e upon a part, it swells . The poison iseither di scharged from the trunk, teeth, or n ails of the animal intothe wound. By such causes the part swells, becomes pendulous,and is accompani ed with pain . These swellings are soft, rise quickly, and are not fixed in one place, but move about . Sometimes theyare qui ckly produced, and in crease downwards (distid) and are

very hot, and painful . When air, bile, and phlegm are deranged inthe stomach the swelling occurs in the head and upperextremities, when deranged in the small in testin es (p anhashaga) ,the swelling wi ll occur in the trunk, and when in the rectum ( ahdaha) , the swelling will occur in the lower extremities . When air,

bile, and phlegm are deranged over the body, it will swell the

whole body, and pass from one part to another .to another .When the swelling occurs in the trunk of the body it will be

cured with difficulty, and also when the swelling is over the body .

When the upper or lower halfof the body is affected the di seaseis dangerous, or when the swelling proceeds proximated from the

part first affected.

The swelling will not be cured when the person breathes withnoise and difficul ty, when accompanied with thirst, vomiting,weakness, hiccough and fever, and when he has no appetite, and is

affected with diarrhoea and severe pain ( std) . Such a diseasedperson will die . When the swelling commences in the feet of the

male, or in the face ofthe female, both are very dangerous . It isalso very dangerous in both sexes, when the swelling is about the anus.

When the swelling is recen t, with n o had symptom s, it will be

cured. When the throat and vital parts are swelled with much

pain ; or when it attack infan ts, or old person s, or very weak

person s, the disease will be fatal .

Trea tmen t . In this disease sour and salt food are to be avoided ;curdled milk, jagary, fat, m ilk, win e, oil, ghee, un leavened bread,and all indigestable kinds offood are to be avoided the per

son should also avoid sleeping during the day, as also broths made

ofthe flesh ofdomestic an imals, and venery . When the deranged air

produces this disease, medi cin es for curing air are to be exhibited

such as castor oil, or the powder of the bark of the root of Team

(Convolvulus turpethum ) . These purgatives are to be repeated at.

intervals for a fortnight, or a mon th .

When bile is deranged, ghee prepared with a decoction of as

tringent medicines, such as the bark of ng agrodha (Ficus Indica) ,2 E 2

and other such medicines are to be used. When phlegm is muchderanged take prepared ghee in a decoction of the Cassia fistula,andmedicin es with the like qualities.

Besides the above remedies the following general indications of

treatment are followed z—Differen t preparation s ofIron are used.

In like mann er equal quan tities ofmarabuline and jagary are exhibi

ted daily ; or dry-ginger, black and long pepper

, with saltpetre,

and the oxide of iron , in equal parts, are to be m ixed with cow’

s

urin e, and are to be exhibited daily .

D iet . The diet is to con sist ofbarley, with the decoction ofmadg a

(a kind ofpea) , and flour ; n o salt n or ghee is to be used.

The warm bath,‘

with a decoction ofnim leaves, (Melia azadirachta,)arha (Calotropis gigan tea) , the leaves ofhog

-weed ( barshcibha) , is to

be applied to the swelled parts.

Various kinds of external medicin es are applied to dry up the

swelling . Such as mustard powder, rock salt, (Lea hirta) sdngas

ta . For the same reason strong purgatives and emetics are occa

sionally used. General bleeding is useful when the disease occurs

without the presence ofany other di sease .

The juices of several roots mixed with recen t cow-dung are

recommended to be rubbed over the swelled part . In the samemann er irritating substances are applied to t he swelled part to

disperse it .In other cases milk is heated, and the mouth ofthe pot with the

hot milk is applied over the swelled part .

It is always proper to give oliaginous substances internally, to

promote perspiration , and to rub the above mixtures externallyover the part .

ORDER V.

Great Fatness,‘

(Medah .)

Caase . When persons remain without exercise, sleep during theday, take too much ghee, milk, and preparation s ofsweetmeats, rice,and differen t kinds of indigestable cakes, the chyle becomes oily,and sweeter than natural, and as it circulates it produces fatn ess . Itis accompan ied by the following symptoms —The person feels a

difficulty ofbreathing, thirst, is n ot sensitive, is always sleepy and

un easy, and cannot excite the body or work ; such a person h as

always a good appetite, his perspiration has a disagreeable smell,he has less inclination forwomen . He speaks indistinctly ; and theother essen tial parts of the body are not nourished. The fat is

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

246

which becomes of a red colour like copper . The eyes ofsuch a

person are red, and his breath is like hot iron .

There are seven forms of this disease, on e being produced bybile

, another by blood, the thi rd by external injury of the trunk,the fourth by not quen ching thirst, the fifth by the injury ofvitalparts, the sixth by excess m drinking, and the seven th by the lossofthe essen tial parts of the body, as chyle, blood, &c .

1 and 2 . When produced by bile it is accompan ied with fever .When blood is affected the body, eyes, &c . become red, and he com

plain s ofa burn ing sen sation over the body .

3 . When any viscus is injured, and is filled up“

with blood,and affects a ddka which is difficult to cure .

4 . When produced by excessive drinking the internal heat

comes out externally, and is increased by the derangement ofbile

and blood. It then produces great burn ing ofthe body .

5 . Ifa foolish person does not drink water, when he is verythirsty, the watery part ofthe body is dimin ished and the internalheat is in creased, producing a burn ing ofthe external and in ternalparts of the body -his throat, palate, tongue and lips, becomedry, and the tongue protrudes, with shaking ofthe body .

6 . When the essen tial fluids of the body are dimin ished byany cause, as an excess in ven ery, too much exercise, copious evacuation of any ofthe fluids, the body,

feels very hot, and the patientfaints, has much thirst, his voice becomes low and altered, hecannot move his body, and soon dies.

7 . When any vital part is injured, as the bladder, heart, or

brain, it produces a burning sensation over the body which is incurable .

When the body feels cold to another while the patien t is suffering

from an in ternal burning, it is always a very unfavourable symptomin this kind ofdisease .

Trea tment . Take clarified old ghee and the flowers ofbarley, mixthem well together, and rub it over the body .

“

In old cases, water

th vin egar should be applied to the body . Cloths wet in old

and fermen ting rice-water . In other cases sandal-wood reduced to a

paste between two ston es, with which the root of the Andropogonmuricatum, a fragran t grass, is to be mixed and applied over thebody .

The free use of the p anied is likewise recommended, and the

patien t should sleep or lie upon the leaves of the water-lily or

plan tain , and use the coldbath . He should take internally the juiceofthe sugar-can e, and differen t kinds of sharbats, the decoction of

the stalk ofthe water-lily, a sort offennel (Anethum panmorium) ,

247

coriander seed, Emblice, myrabolan , and the fragran t wood of

the p admaka’

sbtba, of each 32 ratis : boil in a pin t of water so as

to reduce it to half a pint, which is to be taken two or three timesa day . Other an tiphlogistic mean s are likewise recommended.

Burning of tbe feet (pada-daba) is a variety of this order ;and is a peculiar, severe and very un tractable disease of India . In

the treatmen t it is recommended that leeches should be applied tothe feet, wi th the con tinued application of the mixture* of mast

’

iwa

(Ervum hirsutum) . This is rubbed between two ston es with water

and applied to the feet . Butter is likewise recommended to berubbed on the feet, which are then to be brought n ear the fire .With these mean s the usual treatment of bcita-ralcta (slightleprosy) is to be followed.

ORDER VIII .

Janndice, (Pdnda )

This disease is produced by excesses in ven ery, eating earth,sour or salt food, or drinking much win e . It is likewise produced

by sleeping during the day, and eating very hot things, which

derange the air, bile, and phlegm .

There are five kinds of this di sease produced by deranged air,

bile, or phlegm ; when these three are deranged together, and whenproduced by eating earth, especially chalk . Wh en the air, bile, orphlegm are di seased, they derange the blood ; and produce the paleor yellowish white colour ofthe skin . Before the disease appearsthe skin feels as if pinched, the sputa is red, the person cannot do

any work, and has a desire to eat earth ; his eyelids swell, the dejections and urin e are yellow, and whatever is eaten is not digested.

1 . When air is deranged producing this disease, the skin , urin e,and eyes, or other parts, are rough, dark-coloured, and brown

ish with shaking, pain over the body, and the dej ections and urin eare con stipated, with giddin ess.

2 . When the bile is deranged, the urine, dej ections, and eyes

are ofa yellow colour, the body is hot, with thirst, and fever, thereare frequent dej ection s, and the surface ofthe body is very yellow .

3 . Phlegm. In this form the phlegm proceeds from the mouthand nose, the person often dozes and complain s of lassitude and

heaviness ofthe body ; the skin , eyes, and face are ofa whitishcolour the urin e is also pale .

Rather plaster, as it is thick, is spread over the part and allowedto remain .

248

4 . When the air, bile and phlegm are at the same time derang=

ed, there is fever, no appetite, retching and vomiting, the person

complains of thirst, and the body feels painful and tired. When

such a person is very weak and insensible the person will die .

5 .When produced by eating earth there are three kinds ; on e

deranging,

the air, an other the bile, and a third the p blegm.

Astringen t earth (kasztga mri tilai) also derange s air ; salt-earth

(asara) , deranges bile ; and sweet-earth (maolbara) , deranges the

p hlegm. When earth deranges the elemen ts of the body, and

whatever is eaten remain s undigested, the blood wh ich is formed

stops the mouths ofthe vessels of the in testin es that carry the

chyle, blood, &c ., and they derange the sen ses. The strength of

the body is impaired, and the surface becomes pale and yellow,

and it produces dispepsia . In this form of Jannclice the personfeels drowsin ess, languor, cough, has difficulty in breathing, painin the belly, and feels no appetite his cheeks and eyelids swell,also the legs, umbilicus, and pen is ; diarrboea occurs, and the de

jections are as if they consisted ofa mixture of blood and phlegm,

with worms .

Prognosis . When there 1 smuch fever with dispeps1a, nausia, vomit

ing, thirst, and languor occur ; when the person is very weak and

i nsen sible, or when caused by the derangemen t of the three hu

mours, or when very chron ic, with rough skin and swelling over

the body the prognosis will be unfavourable . Should the patien t

see every thing yellow he will not soon get well . When con stipa

ted, when the dej ections are yellow and mixed with bile, when

accompan ied with diarrhoea and much fever, restless and thirst, andwhen the eyes, teeth and nails become yellow, the prognosis mustbe unfavourable . In like mann er, when the extremities are swollen ,and the trunk is thin , or when the trunk is swollen and the extre~

mities are small ; or when there is much swelling about the anus,

penis and scrotum,the prognosis must be guarded. When the

patien t suffers much , when sen seless, or when attacked at the sametime with dysen tery and fever, such patien ts the physician shouldnot treat .4 A variety of Jaundice is named lcdmalci, which is produced byeating much sour, salt, and other indigestable articles of food afteran attack ofJaundice . In this case the bile is much affected, and

produces yellown ess, particularly ofthe face, accompan ied with drowsin ess, loss ofstrength, and the other symptoms above stated.

Ifin kamalci there is swelling and pain in the joints, then it iscalled knmbbav lccimala (from kumbha, a water-pot, and lccimalci, Jaundice) . In this case the dejections and urin e are of a dark or

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

50

OR DER IX .

Nervous Diseases, (Betta Bgad/zi .)

These diseases are produced by the con tinued use ofdry, cold,or light articles offood, taken in unusually small quan tities exces

sive ven ery, and watching improper and violen t exercise fastingand copious discharges of blood, or other evacuations. They are

also produced by much jumping, swimming, or fighting, wearing wet cloths, or wan ting to do impossibilities, as raisingweights, &c . Any cause producing the absorption of parts bywhich the individual is weaken ed, and swoon s too much th inking,sorrow, grief, fear, and other diseases producing emaciation s sleep

ing uncomfortably during the day , or in an unusual position anger,

or not attending to the calls ofnature the accumulation ofindigestable food, or certain injuries ofvital parts, produce these diseases.

They are also caused by the person falling from a height, by ridingvery fast on an elephan t, horse, or camel, or whatever goes veryfast . These causes derange air, filling the empty vessels in one

part, or over all the body, and thus produce the symptoms ofthe

disease .When air is so deranged it produces the following symptoms

the muscles of the small join ts are con tracted with rigidity, and

cannot be moved. These symptoms are accompan ied with so much

pain , that they seem as ifbroken by force . The skin becomes rough,the person speaks non sense, and complains ofpain in the join ts ofthe hand, back, and head ; he cannot sleep, nor walk with vigour,and is deformed, and the members become thin: When women

are so affected, they have miscarriages, and it dimin ishes the semen ,

and stops men struation . The parts affected shake, there is no

feeling in the part, the person has severe pain in the head, andn o smell ; the eyes become dry and dull, and a painful weight

is felt in the pit of the stomach, and stiffn ess ofthe nape of then eck . These symptoms are accompan ied with spasm of differen tparts, with loss of sen se and great fatigue .These differen t causes, and the differen t parts ofthe body affected,

produce various forms ofthe disease . When the air is deranged in theabdomen , the dejection s and urin e are con stipated, pain is felt in theabdomen and its sides, and diseases ofthe heart, hysteria (gulma) ,and. piles (arsha) , are produced. When air is deranged gen erallythere is much pain over the body, which shakes with pain in the

join ts. They feel as ifbroken . When situated in the pelvis it stops

the usual evacuations, with great pain, and flatulency, and produces

25 1

gravel, and the ston e . In women it produces deformities in the

foetus, and the plurality of children . When air is deranged in the

anus, the legs, thighs, os coccggus, hands, and breast are painful, andthe body is thin . When deranged air is situated in the stomach, thesides, back, scrobiculus cordi s, and navel are painful , with thirst,belching, and cholera ; the person complain s of cough, and

‘

the

throat and mouth are dry, with asthma . When air is derangedin the small in testines (p anhcishag ) , they make a noise, with scan tydej ection s, and little urin e . Such a person has un easy cholikypain s in the abdomen , with pain in the lower part of the back .

When air is deranged in the org ans of sense it destroys theirfunction s. When deranged in the shin it becomes dry, rough, andhas no feeling has a black colour, and is painful . In some cases

it is stretched over the body without wrinkles, and is of a red

colour, accompanied with pain s in the joints, and slight chops inthe skin over the body .

When air is deranged in the blood, great pain is felt in the bodywhich is hot, and the colour of the skin is unnatural . The bodyis thin , the person has no appetite, and the skin has red eruptions

over it, and after eating the body is unwieldy, and the person cannot

work . When air is deranged in thefl esh orfa t the body is heavy,with pain, as if beaten with a stick, and the person is much fa

tigued.

When air is deranged in the bones and marrow the long bon es and

joints are very painful ; his strength and flesh become dimin ished ;the person has n o sleep, and pain is very severe and con tinued.

When air is derangedin the somm it is quickly discharged, or is

constipated, and in women it retains the foetus long in the uterus, or

abortion s are produced. The semen in such cases has an unusual

colour, and produces twin s .

When air is deranged in the vessels it produces pamful con traction ,

or fulness of the vessel .When air is deranged in the nerves ( tendon s ? ) the whole body

may be diseased, or it may be confined to on e situation . It produ

ces episthoton os, with lameness, spasm, and cramps ofthe leg, with

hem iplegia .

When in thejoin ts it produces swellings, and pain in the join ts.

When the vital air (p ran bayu) , which is situated in the thorax, is

deranged with bile, it produces vomiting with a burni ng sensation of

the parts. When this air is mixed with phlegm it produces weakness,debility, langour, anddrowsin ess and the taste for food is deranged.

Vital air in the throat (udan brig/a) , when mixed with bile pro

duces great heat in the body, swoon ing, fainting, and languor .

252

When mixed with p hlegm there is no perspiration , horripilation is

felt over the body the person becomes melan choly, has little in ter~

nal heat in the stomach, and the body feels cold.

Vital air in the umbilical region (samana bayu) , when m ixed

with bile, produces much perspiration , a burn ing sensation ofthe

body, fainting, and swoon ing . When mixed with phlegm con stipation of the dejections and urin e, and a state ofgoose-skin over thesurface may be remarked.

Vital air in the anus (ap dna ba’

gu) . When mixed with bile thebody is very hot, or is only sligh tly warm, and the urin e is bloody .

When mixed with phlegm the person has a sen se ofheavin ess inthe lower part ofthe trunk, and the body feels cold.

Vital air over the body (bgan boigu) , when mixed with bile thebody is very hot, and there are convul si on s ofthe extremities, with .

great fatigue . When mixed with phlegm the person remain s stupid,and rigid, and he feels pain , and swelling ofthe body.

Differen t varieties ofn ervous diseases are thus supposed to be produced by the derangements ofthe air (bdgu) . In t ibap rahdsha

eighty varieties are described. The following may be con sidered themost importan t

1 . When air is much deranged, and passes in to the differen tvessels of the body it produces con traction s of the body . Thisform 1 5 called ahhyep aha, or spasmodic convulsions .

2 . When air is deranged, and rises from its situation , it produces pain in the chest, head, and temples. The body and mem

bers are bent like a bow and it produces convulsions. The personhas difficulty in breathing, the eyes are fixed and shut . The personmoan s, and has little sense . This form is called ap atan traha or rigid

spasms . In this disease the body is drawn up either backwards

or forwards, or to either side .

3 . When the eye remain s fixed, with loss of sense, the person

makes a peculiar noise, the air is dislodged from the chest with relief,and is followed by weakn ess of the senses : it is called ddruna or

ap an tdnaha .

4 . When air is mixed wi th phlegm, and is situated in the‘

vessels, the person is rigid like a stick, hen ce its name is dandci

p atoinaha .

5 . When the body is ben t like a bow it is called dhanustambha .

6 . When the air is deranged in the fingers, ankles, be lly, chest,

or n eck, the air con tracts the n erves of these parts, and forces thebody forward, accompan ied with Tetanus, and vomiting ofphlegm ;

the eyes are fixed, and severe pain is felt in the sides : this form is

called ofmbotreama .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

254

1 3 . When the air affects the nerve of the tongue, it becomes

rigid and immoveable, and the person cannot speak, eat, or drink .

This disease is namedjihwastambha .

0

14 . When air enters the blood-vessels ofthe head, the vesselsbecomes dry, black, and painful, producing head-ache or the diseasecalled shirog raha .

1 5 . When air attacks the buttocks, back, loins, hip, thigh,knees, legs, and feet, it produces pain in these parts ; passes fromone to the other, often without the pain being properly defin ed. In

other cases the affected parts shake ; sometimes when air is mixedwith phlegm it produces heavin ess ofthe part, dispepsia and drowsiness. This variety is called g ridhrasi .1 6 . Bishwdchi

’

. When air affects the tendons ofthe back ofthe

hand and arm, it produces this disease, in which there is no motionin the han d or arm .

1 7 When air and blood are changed in apart, it swells Withsevere pain . In this manner the kn ee-joint may be affected, andbecome large, like a jackal

’

s head. This disease 1s called hustaha

shirsha .

1 8 . When air is deranged in the sides of the thighs, it drawsthe tendon s of these parts, which contract, and the person walksfeebly . This disease is called hhanja .

1 9 . If both sides are affected the person cannot walk, thisdisease is calledp angu.

20 . When in walking the person limps, his body shakes, or as if'

the person was walking over haldi, a kind of pea, and is feeble, itis called halashhanja (chorea sanctir In this disease the partsseem as if loosened from their natural binding . The disease ischaracterized by the person feeling in the commencement a trembling or shivering sensation through his body, accompan ied witha dimn ess of sight, and a pain in the n eck, jaw, or teeth, or of

the part affected. These symptoms are followed by involun tarytwitching of the head, n eck, and jaw, often of on e side, especiallyofon e leg . The patien t speaks indistin ctly, and then the involun tarymotion s extend to the whole volun tary muscles of progression ,

producing a dan cing motion . When the di sease extends over the

body, and has con tinued long, it is considered incurable . Its existingcause is considered to be irregularity in the bowels from eatingindigestable food, too much walking or laughing, carrying greatloads, &c .

In some San skrit works the term Ardita is g iven to this disease,and others apply the term Ardita to Tetanus and Trismus.

255

2 1 . When the ankle joint is strained in walking it producespain in the ankle with stiffn ess, it is called bdtahantaha . The

pain resembling that ofa thorn piercing the flesh .

2 2 . Air, bile, and blood accumulated in the feet produce a

burn ing sensation ofthe part, particularly when the person is walk

ing, it is called p ddadciha . This is one of the most distressingand intractable diseases peculiar to this coun try . It is called

Fever in the feet .”

23 . When p hlegm and air are deranged in the two feet theybecome cold, wi th in sensibility, as when sitting very long in a par

ticular position , when the leg feels deadwith a disagreeable numbfeeling . It is calledp ddaharsha (foot numbness) and is a frequen tcomplain t among the natives, from their sitting on the groun d, in

often con strained positions.

24 . When air is deranged in the shoulder-joint, it dries the ligamen ts and tendon s of the part. They are con tracted, and the arm

becomes fixed. It is called ap abcihuha, or stiffarm .

25 . When the air is mixed with phlegm, and en ters in to the

air-vessels (dhamam’

) the person cannot speak, or Speaks slowly,and indistin ctly . Thi s disease is called muha (dumbn ess) , and

minmina and g adgada ( indistin ct speech) .

2 6 . When pain commen ces from the bowels and bladder, and

passes to the anus and urinary passages, producing great pain inthese parts, which feel as iftorn asunder, the disease is called tunic .

27 When it commences from the anus and urinary passages, andpasses up to the intestines wi th great vi olen ce, it is calledp ratunie .

28 . Swelling and pain , with a rumbling n oise of the abdomen ,

produced by the air being confined in the abdomen, is calleda’

dhg cina, or drumb-belly .

2 9 . When the swelling is confin ed to the stomach with painand noise, it is called pratgddhgcina and is produced by the air

beingmixed with phlegm .

30 . When a hard oblong swelling is felt under the navel, whichpasses from one part to another, or rests stationary, and becomespromin en t, and air, urin e, and dej ections are constipated, it iscalled ashthilci or bdtashthi lci .

3 1 . When the hard swelling 1 s longitudinal, and is accompan ied with much pain , and the urin e and dejection s are constipated,it is calledp ratashthila. These derangem en ts ofair produce diseasesin various situations ; when deranged in the bladder, it causes the

stoppage ofurin e, &c .

32 . When air is deranged in the head, it is always shaking .

The disease is called bop ati .

6

33 . When air is affected in the feet, legs, thighs, and wrist, itproduces spasm and is called huli . The other diseases of air are

n amed according to the part particularly affected. In all these

n ervous diseases it is of importance that the Physician observe

whether the symptoms ofbile and phlegm, &c . are presen t, as theywill affect his progn osis, and treatmen t . In hanug raha (lock-jaw) ,ardito (or paralysis of the face) , ahhep ohd (spasmodi c diseases) ,

p ahhydghata (hemiplegia) , ap atcinaha (epilepsy) , our prognosis

maybe rather favourable, when the person is strong, the dlsease is

recen t, and is n ot accompan ied with any bad symptoms. This is

particularly the case when the patien t is rich, as the treatmen t

will generally be tedious .

The unfavourable symptoms are when the disease is accompan ied

with erysepelas (bisarp a) , or with severe burn ing sen sation s, with

great heat and pain, as ifthe body was torn , and with con stipation ,fain ting, and loss of appetite, or when the digestion is very weak .

”

In such cases the patient will die . This di sease is also dangerouswhen the person is swollen , when the parts are without feeling, and

are accompan ied with flatulen cy and shaking ofthe body, with greatpain and weakn ess.

Should the air n ot be deranged, and be confined to its usualS1tuation , the person will live for a hundred years free from disease .

Treatment of Nervous diseases .

After distinguishing the disease, the n ext object is to find out

the proper remedies for it, and how to exhibit them . When thisis n ot attended to, the practitioner

’

s reputation , and his incomeWlll be dimin ished and if he does not use remedies on the discovery ofthe disease, it will be like a plan t, which at first was easilyremoved, but when allowed to en large, and take deep roo’t, it isremoved with great difficulty . In n ervous diseases oily en emas

are to be used several times a day, and the body is to be frequen tly anomted with a mixture of

Kumhuma, saffron ,

Agura, Acquilaria agallocha,

Kushtha, (Costus speciosus,)Tag ara, (Tabernaemon tan a coronaria,)

and other stimulan ts. Preparation s of milk are also much usedin this class of disease . The following “

mixture is often used.

Take equal parts ofp anchamula, or ( bilwa) , shonciha, gambha’

ri,

p dtalci, and g anihdrihd, form a decoction or take with a decoction

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

258.

the part frequentlywith prepared oils, bandages, and the appl icationofhot iron s over the affected part . *

When the whole or halfthe body is affected, heat is applied invarious ways to produce perspiration . The patien t embraces hot

ston es, and is put into a hot room . In other cases they dig a hole

which they heat, put leaves in it, and the person lies down in it,and when he is in a free perspiration he is removed to his bed.

Ven esection is recommended when the whole body is affected, and

cupp ing 1 s used in the variety which is local . When there is nofeeling in the part ; the application ofthe actual cautery, and ofa

mixture ofoil, salt,arid soot is recommendedto be rubbed in to the part .The treatmen t of dislocation ofthe lower jaw con sists in sur

rounding it with a cloth, and reducing the dislocation (bap ushas) .When the jaw i s fixed by tetanus, they apply prepared oil or gheeexternally, so as to keep it well moist during the treatmen t, and thenendeavour to Open the mouth by force . When open a mixture ofmedicines to produce a

“free discharge of saliva is recommended ;such a mixture 1 s formed by the powder oflong-pepper

”

and ginger .At the same time the mouth should be frequen tly gargled withwarm water . He should also eat garlic, with salt . Numerous otheroils andmedi cin es are likewise recommended in this dangerous classofdiseases.

ORDER X .

Lep rosy, (Kushtha or Kuth .)

This disease is the most aggravated of all that afflict the body,and when a person dies with it the Hindus believe that the person

will be afflicted with it in the n ext life, unless he performs the

p rcischitta, penan ce . This penan ce consists ofab stin ence for a day,shaving the whole hair offthe head, presen ts ofa certain number

of cowries and other articles to the brahman s, who perform certainprayers, and to whom the person confesses his sin s . This ceremony;

is now gen erally performed before en tering upon the treatmen t of

any supposed dangerous disease .

The Hindus distinguish three kinds ofLeprosy, the black, white,and red varieties, which are produced by various causes. Some

times the disease is caused by bad air, and drink eating substances

which do n ot assimilate, as milk and fish, food of a rancid, salt;and indigestable nature ; or thin oleaginous food : when the

Rhumatism is a frequent disease among cows, and the actualcautery is freely applied by the natives, with the best effects. Such

cows are frequently to be seen marked all over . the joints with these

application s ofthe red hot iron .

59

person eats immoderately of such food, for some time, it willproduce this di sease . In other. cases irregularity in eating and

fasting, mental agitation , violen t exercise, exposure to fatigue, or toogreat heat, especially after a ful l meal n ight watching with expo

sure to the night air, using n ew rice, m ilk, curds, fish, and the too

frequen t use ofpulse, radi shes, sesaman and treacle, produce lepro

sy . In others it is produced by checking natural evacuation s, or

suppressing them when artificially excited such as

.

vomiting or the

expulsion ofair, urin e or dej ections, or the irregulari ty and alternate

use of hot and cold application s . Sometimes it is produced from

eating hot or cold articles of food, first at dinner, or after fasti ng,

when the usual food is not eaten , after much perspiration , fatigue, or

fear, or when the person bathes or drinks cold water at impropertimes. In other cases the disease is produced when the food is

not digested, or when time has n ot been given for this purpose,before more is taken in to the stomach when after the use of

emetics and purgatives, the usual simple food, &c . is not employedwhen the person sleeps during the day with a loaded stomach ;

or when he visits his wife before the food is digested. The bloodand seminal secretion s of paren ts when tain ted by leprosy, affects

their offspring . Lepers in on e life, are born again with the com

plaint and the disease is supposed to be commun icable by con tact,bv breathing the same air, by eating together, by wearing the clothes,or ornamen ts, of a person labouring under the disease . Whoeverspeaks disrespectfully or does any other improper action , or commitssin s again st his guru or bip ra (pandit brahman) such as, committing adultery with a brahman

’

swife,killing a goodman , and robbing

a person ofhis estate, will be liable to be afflicted with this disease .

Such causes derange air, bile, and phlegm, by whi ch the skin ,blood,

flesh, and watery parts of the blood (ambu) are deranged, and

produce the eighteen forms ofleprosy : of these seven are severe,and eleven are mild.

Before leprosy appears the skin becomes glossy, thin , and rough,

and ofan unnatural colour ; there is much perspiration , or a sup

pression ofit, itchin ess and occasional horripilation the body feels

hot, parts of the surface become in sensible, and the blood in the

vein s becomes blacker than usual, while other parts ofthe surfacebecome discoloured, painful, swell quickly, remain so for a long time,

and slowly heal . In such a person any injury turn s to a sore, is

verypainful, heals with great difficulty, and a rough cicatrix is

left . The person has fits ofgiddiness, with impaired, or an irreg tflar

state ofthe appetite . The seven severe forms ofleprosy are pro

duced by deranged air, bile, or phlegm 3 they are thus described.

2 G 2

260

1 . Sidhma, is produced by deranged(

phlegm and air, and is

characterized by small, white, coppery, or red spots, which spreadover large surfaces accompanied with a thin mealy dust . This isthe Lepra Vulgaris, or L . Alphos.

2 . Audumbaroi . In this form the blotches are livid, and resemblethe ripe fig, or Ficus glomerata . This form is accompan ied withmuch pain , and a burn ing on the surface . The hair becomes tawnyand the morbid humor is bil e .

3 . R ishwajihwa the patches oftubercles, are shaped like thetongue ofa bear ; hard and red round their edges, dark in the cen

tre and are accompan ied with severe pain . This form is produced

by a derangemen t ofthe air, and bile .

4 . Kap ala is covered with black and purplish patches re

sembling the broken pieces ofa black earthen vessel . These blotches

are irregular, hard, and dry, and are accompan ied with pricking and

pain . The air is the humor principally affected.

5 . t anaha, resembles the seed ofhunch (Abrus precatorius) ,with red and black spots in the centre . The blotches are extremelypainful, and often terminate in suppuration . The three humors arederanged in this variety which is incurable .

6 . Pundarika . The patches in this variety are pale red in the

cen tre, with dark dull red edges, and resemble the petals of the lotus,when exposod to the sun . This variety is produced by derange

ments ofthe phlegm and bile .

7 . Dadruhushtha . The patches in this variety are elevated,black, round, and spreading there are many sorts, which are

accompan ied with much itching, burn ing, and pain ; and are pro

duced by derangemen ts of the phlegm, and bile . These are thegen eral symptoms of the severe forms of leprosy.

The slighter varieties of leprosy, Kshudra, are according to

Sushruta as follows1 Sthaldrusha .

2 . Mahdkushtha .

3 . Ekshguhushtha .

4 . Charmadala .

5 . Bisarp a .

6 . Parisarp a .

7 . Sidhma .

8 . Bicharchikci .

9 . Kitima .

1 0 . Pdmci .

l 1 . R akashci .

Charaka has the following arrangement .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

26 2

one part of the body to another, and the symptoms ofdiseased fleshappear also in this formWhen the bones and marrow are leprous, the nose falls in , the

eyes become red, andworms breed in the sores. The voice becomesunnatural, and hoarse . When the leprosy is in the skin , blood, orflesh, or in the air or phlegm, it may be cured. When in the fat,

with two ofthe humors deranged, as air and phlegm, or air and

bile, the person will not be cured, nor will it soon destroy the in

dividual . When the bon es and marrow are affected and two or

three humors are viciated, on e of them b eing the bile, it is incurable .Fatal symptoms of leprosy occur with worms in the sores, or with

the painful disease ofthe heart (Angina pectoris) with di spepsia, orwith symptoms ofdiseased air, bile, and phlegm with sores whichdischarge copiously with inflamed eyes, the voice hoarse, and altered, and with weakness so that the person is not able to bear the em

ploymen t ofthe five forms ofmedicin e, as purgatives, emetics, &c .

The white, and the red leprosy (shitra and hilcisa) , are distin

guished from the black leprosy by their not being accompan iedwith any discharge, and only affecting the skin . Gharaka adds, thatthey sometimes affect the shin, blood, phlegm, andfa t .

When the white leprosy is not produced by burns, and when thehair is not white but remain s ofthe natural colour over the whitepatches when the patches are not large and do not join each other,and when recen t, the disease may be cured. When produced byburn s, and the above symptoms are absent, these kinds ofwhiteleprosy are incurable .

When s1tuated about the extel nal genitals, palms ofthe hands,

or lips, the white leprosy i s incurable although recent .

The leprosy, with fever, and the drying up or emaciation ofthebody, and other symptoms ofpulmonary con sumption (shosha) a

variety ofOphthalmia (Netrabhishganda) , and those diseases produced

by the influence ofthe plan ets, such as small-pox, &c . are con tagious.

Treatment .

Leprosy commences first in the skin , and gradually extends deeperand deeper affecting the differen t essen tial parts, as flesh, blood, fat,&c . Thus like the small shoots ofthe Ban ian tree, which are at firstconfined to the surface, they advance deeper and deeper, un til theyextend over the whole body . In the first stage, when it is superfi

cial, the use ofproper diet and medicines may cure it ; but whenit has extended to a greater distance, the difficulty ofcuring it

becomes much greater .

fi iet . In leprosy, flesh, with the exception ofthat ofwild an imals,

2 63

and oleaginous articles of food are not to be used ; as also hardfood, milk, curdled milk, certain kinds of pulse ; sour articles, or

Sweet, prepared from sugar-can e . Improper and indigestable

articles of food, or eating too often ofroasted or heating food are

to be avoided, and also sleeping in the day time, and connexionwith woman . Good and old rice is to be used with barley, flour,and peas (mugh) boiled in water, and mixed with the leaves of

nimba . Such vegetables as con tain a bitter principle are useful .In other cases, barley is recommended to be steeped in cow

’

s urin efor a n ight and then dried in the sun . This is to be repeated sevendays then fry it, and some ofit is to be taken every morn ing with:

a decoction of the following bitters,Kantihciri, (Solanum Jacquin i,) andNimba, (Melia Azadirachta, &c .)

Prepared oils are to be used to anoin t the body with .

The ulcers are to be clean ed with astringen t decoctions ; withan oily preparation called Vajraka, and a paste or liniment of the

aragbadha (Cassia fistula) . The water withwhich the person washesor bathes should be impregnated with hhagar, catechu, which alsoshould be m ixed with the drinking water .In the begin n ing ofthe disease purgatives and emetics are first to

be admini stered. If the leprosy is confined to the skin evacuan tmedicines, and smearing the body with different sorts of medicin esare ofuse . If confined to the blood it is to be purified by evacu

an ts, smearing the body wi th proper medicin es, drinking bitter andastringen t decoctions, and ven esection . When confined to the

flesh the remedies are the same as those of blood, with ton ic

tinctures, ofvarious kinds . When confin ed to the fat it is incurable ; but the progress oft he di sease may be checked by proper

diet and medi cines, especially ton ics . When the bon es are affect

ed it is incurable, and should not be treated.

When marrow is diseased the man will soon di e . In the seven

severe forms ofleprosy, besides emetics and purgatives, glysters,

supposotories, with errhines are to be used. If these five forms

of medicines have been employed without effect, the case may becon sidered as hopeless.

When air produces leprosy, prepared ghee, with astringent tonics

are to be used ; when p hlegm, emetics ; when bile, blood is to

be removed from the person , and purgatives are to be admin istered.

The following mixtures are much recommended in leprosy.

Take equal parts ofMeshashring i, (Asclepias geminata, &c .)Shwadangshtroi, (Flacourtia catafracta,)

264

Gulancha; (Minispermum glabrum,)Shdng ashthoi, (Leea hirta, )

mix with Panchamuli . This"

mixture consists of equal parts of

the bark'

of

Bilwa, (E gle marmelos,)Sand/ca, (Bignon ia indi ca,)Gambhciri, (Gmelina arborea,)Pdtalci, (Bignon ia suaveolens,) and

Ganikdrihci, (Premna spinosa . )These medi cines are to be boiled in water, shaken , mixedwith ghee,and boiled down till the watery part is di ssipated. This to be

taken in ternally, mixed with oil, and rubbed over the body . In

other cases the ghee is prepared in the same way with

Bhalldtaha, (Marking Nut,)Abhagai, (Myrobalan ,)

and a vermifuge plan t called birang a . It resembles black-pepper,is prepared as above, and used for the cure of all the differen tforms ofleprosy .

Blood-letting is used frequen tly in the cure of leprosy, and is

abstracted from differen t veins. When prominent patches form,

scarifications, leeches or caustics, are to be used.

Various medicin es are recommended for rubbing over the body .

They are usually of a stimulating nature . The following is one of

these . Take of

Haritcila, (Yellow arsen ic,)Manahshilci, (Red arsen ic,)the juice ofthe Madar, (Ar/ten)a kind ofhorse-raddish called Sig ra or Shobhcinjana,black-pepper

,and the seeds ofSesamum, (Til,)

mix together, in equal parts . These are to be rubbed withwater,and applied to the surface affected. There are seven other varieties of such mixtures . The following is recommended. Takeofthe leaves ofCassia fistula (sandril) , and mix them with buttermilk, and rub it over the diseased part, particularly where thereare tubercles . Others recommend the froth of the sea (samudra

phena) , after it has been dried, to be rubbed over the diseased parts.

The following may therefore be considered as the best mean s of

curing leprosy . Use freely catechu by mixing it with the waterof the patien t’s bath, in his drinks, food and medicine, while heavoids an imal food, win e, and intercourse with women . When thedisease is subdued, use purgatives freely to prevent a relapse .With these means, certain diet, wearing clean clothing, and a

proper degree of exercise is to be used. Such treatment will gene

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

266

in equal proportion s. Mix to the consistence of paste, withthe urine of the cow, and apply to the part affected; The ashesofthe skin of elephan ts and tigers ; and the powder ofthe flying

bug (p oidap ohci) , is also used. Another remedy is the faeces ofa

fowl which has been kept fasting for three days during which timeit is only to receive a mixture ofthe seed ofCassia tora (prep unara) ,and licquoriCe root . The faeces is to be rubbed over the part and

repeat the application daily for a month, during which time the

same mixture is occasionally to be given to the fowl . Anotherexternal application is prepared as follows The juice ofthe mangotree is to be m ixed with the bark and leaves ofthe murabuli, the

mixture is to be put in to a copper vessel, and mixed with the juiceof the Ficus Indica (bot tree) . It is then burn t, and the ashes areto be m ixed with a decoction ofmyrobalan , and mustard oil . Thismedicin e is to be rubbed over the affected part .The In ternal Medicines employed for white leprosy are very

numerous . The followingmixture may be taken as an example Take‘

of the powder of the root ofPlumbago Z eylen ica (Chitralcah) , blackpepper, dry-ginger, and long-pepper macerate them in cow

’

s urinein an earthen water-pot, in which ghee had been kept, and somehon ey keep the mixture for a fortn ight, strain , and give on e tolafor a dose .

ORDER XI .

A kind ofLep rosy,*(Bdta-rakta . )

This disease is produced by the blood being diseased with air

(bayu) . Its exciting causes are using sour food, and alkalin e salts.

In like mann er spices, or other hot articles, indigestable articlesof food, putrified, or dry m eats, as the flesh of crocodiles, of

the buffalo, ofthe rhinoceros, or the like . Til oil-cake, and other

indigestable articles of food, curdled or butter-milk, bad wines,and excess in eating and drinking, the passion s, unhealthy and

improper mixtures offood, eating too often , or sleeping during the

day produce this disease . Delicate con stitution s, andfat people, wholead a seden tary life are predisposed to this disease . Long con tinued

riding on horses, elephan ts, or camels, and whatever produces greatheat of the body ; by these causes the blood is di seased, and

is conveyed by the air to the feet, where it accumulates, and

produces this disease, first in the feet, and then in other parts

Under this head several diseases are described ; such as certainforms of rheumatism , abscesses ;

"

and siJch cachectic states as may ,

they say, terminate in true leprosy.

267

of the body. Bdta-rahta is ushered in somet1mes by free, at

o ther times by a cessation of perspirations ; the body becomes ofa dark hue , and parts have no feeling . Ifthere are sores they are

very painful ; the join ts are loose, the person feels languid, and

c annot work ; and small pimples appear over the body, with painofa gnawi ng or lancinating kind, as if an ts were eating the flesh,or n eedles thrust into the skin . The knees, legs, thighs, loins,shoulders, hands, and arms, are so affected. The pain in termits,and these parts become heavy, without feeling, and the skin has

patches ofan unusual colour .

When air is much deranged there is severe pain ofthe body, asif ants were eating the flesh, and the vessels, nails, fingers, and

j oin ts are con tracted. The patien t has n o appetite, and if not

treated the symptoms increase . The person cannot work, and the

body shakes, with rigidi ty ofthe join ts .

When blood is much deranged swellings appears over the body,with much pain . The skin is of a copperish colour with slight

stinging pain ( chin chin) . If the patien t take oil and dry food, in

small quan tities, he feels better .When bile is deranged the body feels hot, with a burning sensa~

tion ,and duln ess of in tellect . He perspires much, has fain ting

fits, with an appearance of drunkenn ess and thirst ; pressure of

the part produces great pain , with redness, heat, swelling, and

sometimes abscesses are formed.

When p hlegm is deranged the body is very cold, as if a cold wetc loth was applied over the body, which feels heavy, and withoutfeeling . The skin is smooth, shin ing and itchy, and feels cold,with slight pain .

When two or three ofthe above humors are affected the symptoms resemble the two or three form s, as above enumerated.

In some cases the ankles and wrists are first affected, and then itextends over the body like the poison ofcertain an imals .

The disease is in curable, when accompan ied with a sore from the

ankle to the kn ee, or when it is Open ed and pus escapes in largequan tities . When the person is very weak and reduced the disease

will be fatal but ifthe person lives for a year, or it is chron ic, he

will live . When the disease is severe the person cannot”

obtain

sleep, has n o appetite, has a difficulty in breathing, parts of the

body slough, he complain s ofhead-ache, fain ting, delirium, pain in

the body, thirst, fever, has no sense, with shaking, hiccough, con

trac tion of the fingers and toes, so that he cannot walk nor work,and erysipelas appears with vascular eruptions . Severe pain is felt

in the vital parts, tumors appear over the body, want of memory ,

2 H 2

68

fatigue, and delirium follow, and precede death . When all the

symptoms of this severe form ofthe disease are not presen t, thedisease may n ot be fatal . Ifnon e ofthe severe symptoms are presen t, the disease may be cured. When only one of the humors

is deranged ; as air, bile, &c . and the disease is recent, it may be

cured ; but, if two of the humors are deranged, the disease willremain , when three are affected .the disease is incurable, and whenall the severe symptoms are present the disease will be fatal .The treatmen t of this disease is to be commenced by general

and local bleeding when the patien t is not weak, or much reducedin flesh . Emetics and purgatives are then to be used. Ifthe air

is much deranged old ghee is to be administered, with the milk of

goats, prepared with liquorice, hon ey, and sugar . In other casesequal quan tities ofthe following m edi cines are recommended

Supt, ” (dry ginger,) mixed with

Sing a taha, (Trapa bispinose, )Kaseriha, (Scirpus kysoor . )

In other cases a decoction preparedwith milk and the five followingmedicines, is recommended

Sdlp arn i, (Hedysarum gangetic, )Prisn ip arni, (Hemion ites cordiflora,)Kan tihciri, (Solanum jacquini,)Bherhoti, (Solanum melongena, )Kokarti, (Ruellia longifolia, )

equal parts of these plan ts, are mixed together, to form the decoc

tion . This mixture is called p anchamuli, and may be used as fol

lows. Take ofPanchamuli, and

Mahri p anchamuli, with liquorice,Meshasring i, (Asclepias gem1nata, )Sahala, (Pinus longifolia,)Bdsaha, (Justicia ganderussa,)Debdotru, (Ovaria longifolia,) andKan tihdri, (Solanum jacquini .)

These are to be mixed and formed into a decoction in the usualway. Til oil may also be prepared in the same way as the above .These mixtures are to be administered in ternally and applied externally . In other cases the powder ofmyrobalan with sugar is admin istered. A powder composed offive corns oflong pepper, is to betaken daily for ten days, and is to be decreased by degrees for a fortn ight, during which time the patien t should live on rice and m ilk .

The diet in this di sease should con sist of the simplest food insmall quan tities ; as old rice, barley, flour, milk, broth of wild

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

70

ral days the person takes the powder ofmyrobalan (amlaki) , liquoriceroot with sugar ; or Legusticum ajwaen (jawcini) with sugar, and

uses the proper diet he will be cured ofthe disease . The juice

of fresh ginger, with old impure sugar (jag ary) , is also used. In

Sitap ita, the same treatmen t is to be employed ; in Kha ta, tonicmedicines are to be given with blood letting . The powder of then imba leaves, and Emblic myrobalan (amlaki) , are to be taken in

ternally . He should also take rice prepared with horse raddish,

and the gravy ofbirds . Cooling diet is to be used in the two last

forms and in Sitap i ta, heating food is to be employed, and everything cooling avoided.

ORDER XIII .

Erysip elas, carbuncle .

7 (Bisharp a) .

Wh en air, bile andp hlegm are all deranged in the skin,

flesh,or blood, they produce a slight swelling ofthe whole body, whichpasses from on e part to an other . When produced by air, the partbecomes black, soft, and un equal ; accompan ied with pain , as if

n eedles were thrust in to the part, and the fever produced byderanged air. Wh en surrounded with vesication s it is incurable .Wh en the disease is produced by bile it spreads quickly, and is

accompan ied with inflammatory fever . This form is accompan iedwith redn ess, and vesication s . When the inflammation is deep,the flesh and vessels are destroyed, and it discharges a matter likea mixture ofwater and clay. Such cases are incurable .

Wh en produced by p hlegm it Spreads slowly, has an oily appear

ance, and is white . There is little pain in such cases, with consider

able itching .When produced by the derangemen t .of the three

humors the symptoms are of a mixed nature . When this diseasepasses -to suppuration it is incurable . When produced by sharp

instrumen ts, or such like injuries, the bile and blood are deranged

and produces a swelling ofthe part which becomes black and red,

and is accompan ied with violen t inflammatory fever . The affected

part is surrounded by a black edge, and eruption s like peas.

The first three forms of this disease are curable, and the two last

are in curable .

Treatment . When produced by air different preparations ofghee,and decoction s andplasters are applied to the part . The medicinesused are the same in all the above forms as follows : take equal

parts of

Musta, (Cyperus rotundus, )Sotciobha, (Anethum sowa,)

27 1

Debddru, (Pinus debdaru,)Kusta, ( Costus speciosus,)Kustumbru, (Coriander seeds, )Cig ruh, (Hyperan thera morunga, )

mix them with water and ghee, the mixture is then to be boiled,strain ed, and applied to the part . It is sometimes used as a decoc

tion .

Stimulating medicin es are likewise applied to the part, when thedisease is produced by bile . The application in this form should be

used cold. Thus take equal parts of

Bibera,

Lcimojaka,Chandana,

R asanjana, (Sulphurate ofAntimony,)Gaeriha,

mix them together wi th milk, and apply it to the part . In somecases cold water, or water mixed with hon ey or sugar, or the juiceofthe sugar-can e may be used with advan tage .Wh en erysipelas is produced by phlegm the following medicin es

should be used. Take of

Ajag andci, (Ocymum gratissimum,)Ashwag anda, (Physalis flexuosa,)Sahala, (Pinus longifolia,)Tribrit, (Convolvulus turpethum,)4 7

'

a8 ring i,

mix them with cow’

s urin e to the thickn ess ofcream, and apply itto the part . Another application is as follows. Take of

Kalciner sarg a,

Agura, (Aquilaria agallocha,)Kacha, (Arum colocasia,)Gunghd, (Morunga hyperanthera,)R a

’

samci,

Bassan, (Pan icum italicum,)Sz

’

tasiba,

Indrap arm’

,

Mahihaclamba,

Pralendu,

Manjdta, (Saccharum munja,)these medicines are to be mixed with cow

’

s urin e to the consistenceofcream, and then applied to the part .

Besides these external application s, purgatives, and blood-letting

are recommended. When abscesses are formed, or the part ulcerates,the usual plan oftreatment for abscesses, and ulcers is to be followed.

2 72

ORDER XIV.

Bails, pustules, Erysip elas .7 (Bishphotaha)

The causes of this form ofdisease are using too much heating,sour, or acid substances —heavy and indigestable or salt foodeating too freely, and exposure to the sun—or to too sudden alter

ation s of the weather . By such cause, air, bile, and p hlegm are

deranged, which affect the blood, flesh, bon es, and skin and pro

duce large bullae, accompan ied with fever . This part appears as if

burn t . Sometimes these bullae appear over all the body, and in

other cases they are confined to particular parts . When the air

is much deranged in this disease it is accompan ied with head-ache,fever, thirst, pain in the join ts, and the bullaebecome black, aecom

pan ied with much pain . When produced by deranged bile there ismuch fever, burn ing ofthe body, and a large discharge offluidfromthe bullae . They then become red, or yellow.

When produced by deranged phlegm it is accompanied withvomiting, di spepsia, languor, and the affected parts become itchy,hard, and white, without pain . Suppuration often takes place, and

con tinues for a long time .When the three humors are deranged the disease is incurable ;

and also when the bullae are depressed in the centre and hard. The

patien t in such cases complains ofa burn ing sensation , thirst, fain t

ing, vomiting, fever, delirium, rigors, and drowsiness. These are

unfavourable symptoms, as also when the bullae become red.

When the disease is produced by blood, the tubercles are like

the seed of the gunja ( that is red with a black spot . ) This

form is incurable (Charaka) .

The treatment ofthis disease is the same as that described under

the head of (Bisharp a) . The bark and leaves of the (Sabanjana)tree (Morunga) is to make in to a paste with old conj ee, and appliedto the parts with salt ; bitters are also ofmuch use, such as the decoc

tion ofneemba bark and ofgulancha .

ORDER XV.

Haemorrhag ia, (Rahtap itta . )

This order of disease is divided in to those which occur from the

mouth, nose, ears, eyes from the anus, urethra or vagina ; or from

the skin .

Hemorrhage is caused by anger, grief, fear, wrestling, and othersevere exercises too much intercourse with women or too free use

ofhot things, as pepper and salt, or sour articles, when taken in con

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

274

dispepsia, leprosy, enlargement of the spleen, fever, and gulmah.

When the blood is evacuated from the urethra or anus, emetics are

to be admin istered ; and when from the mouth or nose, purgatives

are to be used. Ifthe person is very weak, the discharge ofblood

may be stopped by admin istering astringen t articles.

When air, bile, and phlegm are much deranged, and the person

strong, such a person should fast for some days, after which he is

to drink conj ee with a little rice, with sugar, lemon juice, and the

juice ofgrapes.

Several decoctions and electuaries are recommendedwi th preparations ofghee, to cure this complain t . The purgatives are to be

mixed with the juice of grapes and liquorice root, sugar, and the

juice of other sweet fruits . Emetics are always to be used with

hon ey , water, and the decoction ofliquorice .

The diet should be cold water, and the flesh of wild animals,boiled rice, brothsmade ofgram (mung ) , potatoes, and different othervegetables, season edwith ghee, andmixedwith the juice ofthe pomegranate, (umliha) myrobalan , with the broth ofpigeon s, turtles, and

shell-fish . Differen t preparation s of rice as conj ee with ghee may

also be used.

The body should be anointed with cold oil, and cold application s

are to be made to the body . In this disease the juice of the roseapple leaves, ormangoe leaves, or organo and the juice ofthe fruit offigs may be usedwith rice water, and the root ofcucumber ( trip od )In other cases halfa tola of liquorice root in water ; the pulp of the

seeds ofing oclah with liquorice root, and sugar-can e bruised, are to

be kept in a new earthen pot for one n ight steeped in cold water,with the flower ofwater-lily, and taken with hon ey .

Ifthe blood proceeds from the nose he should snuff the powderof myrobalan . After a great loss of blood, the patien t may drinkthe blood ofan imals with hon ey, or he may eat the flesh and un

prepared liver ofa goat with the bile . The juice ofhorse-dung withhon ey and sugar is also recommended. The powder of fried ricewith hon ey, sugar, and the white concretion ( tobashia) ofthe ham

boo is also used. A decoction ofthe bark ofrose-apple, mangoe,

and org ono trees, are to be taken with hon ey ; and cold and sweetapplication s, both in ternally and externally are recommended.

2 75

SECTI ON III .

D iseases of the reg ions of the Body .

CLA S S III .

D iseases af ecting the mind.

The di seases of the mind are swoon ing, epilepsy, madness, anddevil madn ess .

ORDER I .

l .—Swooning , (Murchha. )

Wh en the person is weak, or when the air, bile, and p hlegm are

very much deranged, by eating improper mixtures offood, such

as milk and fish,or flesh

, &c . , by con stipation , &c . , this disease is

produced ; in which the organs ofsense, both external and internalare deranged, with fain tn ess .

When the derangemen ts ofair, bile andp hlegm close the passages

ofthe vessels, the person cannot see, and falls down as a piece of

wood : this disease is called mu’rchha or moha .

There are six varieties of this disease, but in all the bile is

deranged. The six are produced by derangemen ts of a ir, bile, or

p hlegm, by blood, by drinking spirits, and by poison .

The approach of this disease is known by pain in the breast,gaping, languor, loss ofsen se, and strength . These symptoms are

the same in all the varieties .

When produced by derangemen ts of air, every thing appears

ofa dark-blue or red colour, or like the sky . The person cannot

see, andfain ts, but the senses soon return . There is shivering, pain

ofthe body and breast, weakness, and the skin becomes dirty, and

ofa reddish, or green colour .

Bile . The person sees every thing ofa yellow, or green colour

he cannot see, and fain ts . He is soon restored to his sen ses, withperspiration . When he recovers, the skin becomes yellow, the bodybecomes hot, eyes red, and dejections yellow .

Phlegm. He sees every thing ofthe colour ofclouds ; the sky

appears misty and dark, followed by fain ting, in wh ich sensationremain s long absen t . The body feels like as if a piece of soakedleather had been put upon it : and phlegm is di scharged from the

mouth and n ose, followed by nausea and vomiting .

4 . When these three humors are deranged at the same time,they produce all the symptoms of the three separate diseases ; but

2 I 2

276

without the symptoms of Epilepsy . When these diseases occur,and the person does n ot feel when n eedles are thrust in to hi s flesh,red hot iron s put upon the surface, or hot substances put into hismouth, the person will soon die .

5 . Seeing blood often produces swoon ing from its contain ingearth and water, which possess the properties of tamaguna, the

cause ofdarkn ess . In this mann er the Hindus explain the occurrence offain ting, on seeing blood, by the quality ofdarkn ess whichit possesses .

6 . When swoon ing is produced by p oison there is shivering,drowsin ess, thirst, followed by weakn ess and in sen sibility . Thereare vari ous kinds of this variety, but all produce these symptoms .

Fainting is gen erally produced by deranged bile, when m ixed withtamaguna, or darkn ess . When bile and air are mixed with rajoguna,it produces swooning, and drowsin ess ; coma is produced when air

and phlegm are mixed with tamaguna and phlegm and tamogunawhen m ixed together produce sleep . Drinking spirits derange the

air, bile andp hlegm, and produce swoon ing, which con tinues un til

the effects of the spiri ts cease .

Another form ofthis disease is called sang ngdsa (apoplexy) . Itis produced by the deranged air, bile, and phlegm, which pass tothe place in which life is retained, and overpowers all the fun ction sofboth mind and body, and the person sudden ly falls down , and

remain s as ifdead, or like a piece ofwood. Ifnot immediately,and properly treated, such a person will die .

Treatment . In gen eral all the symptoms ofswooningwill disappearin a fewminutes, with the exception ofsangngdsa, which requires immediate treatmen t . In all forms of swoon ing throw cold water uponthe face and body, rub the bodywith the hand, allow a free circulationofair, and assist th is by mean s ofthep anhha

’

. Wet the mouth withcold water, and approach sweet smelling substan ces to the nose .

Such as the juice of sweet fruits, as ofgrapes, pom egranates, dates,

(khurma,) the juice ofwild an imals, barley, and good rice ; in like

mann er prepared ghee wi th a decoction of myrobalan, or a decoc ~

tion ofImblic myrobalan or a m ixture offried rice, grapes, hon ey,sugar, and the juice ofthe pomegranate, with the petals ofthe waterlily . The treatmen t followed in bilious fever is also recommended.

The treatmen t of sangng cisa is difficult, and requires prompti

tude . Should the person not soon recover from the swoon, n eedlesare to be thrust 1mder the nails, and remedies which produce strongirritation, are to be applied, such as sweet music ; and when theperson is restored to sen sibility, he is to have an emetic, and a purgative followed by the exhibition of silajatu . If these mean s do not

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

278

n a,

Pirsoto, and

Cow’

s urine .

This preparation is to be taken in ternally, and applied externallyover the body .

—The ghee may also be prepared in a decoction of

Tribrit, (Convolbulus turpethum,)

Pathet,

Haridra,

Ddr-haridra, (Zanthorrhizon, )Anantamul, (Periploca Indica, )Push/cam ,

Kata/ca, (Strychnos potatorum, )Bacha, (Acorns calamus, )Sulence,

with cow’

s urin e and milk, and some of its dung and curdled

milk . This may be used for all kinds of epilepsy . Ven esection is

also recommended. Another remedy is, giving a vvild boar purgativesfor three days, then rice and milk when this has been digested, heis to be destroyed, and the chyle in the vessels removed, and mixedwith thin parts. It is to be put in a n ew pot, and when it has arrived at the vinous fermen tation , it is to be given to the patien t .When phlegm is deranged the symptoms are whi teness ofthe

countenan ce and body, the saliva and foam are of the samecolour, the body is cold, and the patien t sh ivers . The person seesevery thing white, and as it appears to approach n ear him, he fain ts .

These fits cease very slowly .

The gen eral indi cation s of cure are to give enemas in derange

ments ofair, purgatives in bile, and emetics in the form produced

by deranged phlegm .

When air, bile , and phlegm are deranged together, all the symp

toms ofthe separate forms are presen t . This di sease is incurable

if n ot recent, as the person becomes weak and emaciated, and the

fits are frequen t, and accompan ied with severe convulsive movemen ts

ofthe body . The eye-brows con tract frequen tly with the eyelids,

and the eyes move rapidly . In such cases the patient will die . The

fits come after ten days, a fortnight, or mon thly . In other cases

they occur very often . As some seeds thrown in the ground duringthe rain s do not germinate for a lon g time after, so in this diseasethe deranged air, bile, and phlegm produce the disease after longin tervals . In the form of epilepsy the body should b e anoin tedwith tituh, which is to be taken in ternally, and at the same timeadmin ister strong errhines, emetics, and purgatives.

2 79

ORDER III .

Madness, ( UnmddaJ

The causes producing this di sease are improper food, endea

vouring to perform impossibili ties, strong passion s of the mind,

cursing the gods, brahman s, and spiritual guides ; eating poi

son , &c .

The air, bile, andphlegm are affected by the above causes, which

deranged knowledge (satwagun) , affects the seat of understandi ng

and the heart, and pass through the vessels conveying sense (mana)when the person becomes mad, speaks foolishly, is restless, and hiseyes are con tinually moving about .There are six kinds of madness. Three being produced by

derangemen ts ofair, bile, and phlegm ; one by the combinationofthese ; another by the violen t action s of the passion s ; and the

last by poison .

Air is deranged and the mind is thus affected by the use ofdry,

cooling, articles of food ; by food in small quan tities ; by strongpurgatives ; by the causes dimin ishing the humors (dhatu) , or bv

fasting . By these causes the air is deranged, producing madn ess ;

in whi ch the man laughs, dances, and sings unreasonably, and

moves his limbs about . At other times he cries without cause ;the skin ofhis body becomes dry, rough, and ofa dark-red colour .These symptoms are more violen t after the digestion of food ;

and the patien t becomes greatly emaciated.

When bile is gen erally deranged by the use of indigestible food,and the use ofpungen t and heating substan ces, the symptoms it

produces are impatien ce ofcon trol, and anger the person wishes to

use violence to others ; he remains naked, prefers cooling food,and wishes to live under the shade, or in water . The body is

yellow, and hot .

When p hlegm is deranged by the usual causes, as a too seden tarylife, and taking too much nourishing food by which the phlegm

is deranged, affecting the fun ction s of the heart, and producingthe following symptoms A love of solitude, taciturn ity, and lossofappetite the person has a desire for wom en , enjoys deep sleep,and has vomiting, or expectoration . After eating any thing thesymptoms are very violen t, and the body as well as the nails and

coun tenan ce are whitish .

When air, bile, and phlegm are deranged together, all the separate

symptoms are produced, and the disease becomes ofvery difficult

cure .

280

When the disease is produced by the passions as when

frighten ed by a robber, a tyrann ical official, &c . by the loss of

wealth, and friends, or by the love ofparticular women, the symp

toms are characterized by talking, laughing, singing, and sometimescrying . This variety terminates in Idiocy .

The treatment ofthe above five forms of madn ess should consist

of cleaning, and anoin ting the body with mustard oil of eatingghee for some days, and then strong purgatives and emetics are to

be given, wi th errhin es, and mustard oil . Curious, or wonderful exhibition s are to be made before the patien t andhe should be informedofthe death ofrelatives, and friends . He should also be frighten ed

by the alarm ofrobbers, by the approach of elephan ts, and harmlessserpen ts . The person should be beat with a whip, when he acts improperly andhe should live on light food, such as barley, and conj ee

water, made agreeable by the addition ofcarminatives . Ghee shouldbe prepared, a decoction of the following medicin e : take of

Samap ,

Elabciluha,

Eld, (Cardamoms, )Chandana,

Debddru, (Erythroxylon siduoxylloides

Haridra, (Turmerick,)Kughtha, (Costus speciosus,)Furmint,

Lariha,

Haranuha,

Tribrit, (Convolvulus turpethum,)Danti,

Bacha,

l isa, (Corypha,)Nabup isara .

These are to be prepared, in the usual way, with ghee and milk .

During the cure the person should be treated, as much as possi

ble, with kindn ess, and con sideration .

6 .When madn ess is produced by poison , the person becomes

fain t, from the sudden loss ofstrength his eyes becomes red, and the

countenan ce and the body become yellow or blue . The unfavourable

symptoms are when the person is weak and emaciated, remai n s i n

one position , and is always looking‘downwards, or upwards . When

the patien t has no sleep, and is so courageous that he will throwhimselffrom a height, the disease will be fatal .The treatment in thi s variety is the same as that for poisons. in

g en eral .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

282

cing, and laughing . These . are the choristers ofheaven (demigods).

who wear sacred flowers, put -marks on their person , and have agreat love for adorn ing their persons. They speak little but properly, and agreeably;

4 . Jahshgag raha . This class ofdemigods are fabled to super1utend the treasures, and gardens of heaven . When he entersthe body, the person

’

s eyes become yellowish red like copper . TheyWear thin red clothes, talk little, but are profoundly intelligen t,and have much patien ce such a person walks fast, is n ever revengeful, though very strong, and is always wan ting to bestow his meansup

'

on others.

5 . Pitrig raha . These are spirits which are separated afterdeath from the bodies ofmankind. When an ancestor thus en ters thebody, the person is always preparing prayers for them, and perform

ing the differen t ceremon ies ( shrciddha) for ancestors . Such a patien t

i s qui et and peaceable, and is fond of an imal food, and sweetmeats.

6 . Sarp agraha . When the serpent devil en ters the body,the person walks irregularly, or from one side to another, like

a serpent ; his tongue is thrust from one side of the mouth to

the other , and he i s passionate, and 1 s fond of treacle, hon ey, andSweetmeats .

7 . Rahshgasag raha, or cann ibal-devil . When one of thesedevils en ters the body ofa person , he is fond of eating flesh, blood,and wine . He has no shame,his appearan ce is disagreeable, and

he is very strong, and passionate . Such a person walks about atnight, is un clean , and is always performing bad action s .

8 . Pishcicha, or fiend, is known to have entered the body, bythe person always stretching out his hands . His body is thin ,

and is disagreeable to look upon , and he speaks fast, and without‘

meaning . His body has a disagreeable smell, and he is un clean ,restless, and covetous . Such a person eats much, prefers livingin jungles and retired places he walks with an unnatural motionofthe limbs and is sorrowful, and frequen tly cries .

The unfavourable symptoms of such person s possessed withdevils are ; his eyes are swollen , he walks fast, and his tongue

is passed rapidly, and con tinually, from one side ofthe mouthto the other ; he is always sleepy and sometimes falls down ;

and at other"

times he is affected with severe shivering .When the

madness is produced by falls from high places, such as fromelephan ts, or trees, they are more difficult to cure . It 1 5 also dan ~

gerons in old age, and when hereditary . When the disease hascon tinued 13 years it will not be cured.

The devils invade the body ofperson s on differen t days according

283

to the Species . Debtainvade at full moon , and devils (Asur) ,en ter in the morn ing and even ing , The Gandarba en ters on the

eighth, and Jahshga on the first day ofthe moon . Sarp ag raha, or

serpen t-devils, en ter on the fifth day after n ew and full moon .

Rahshgasa en ter at nigh t . Pishcicha en ter on the 1 5th day afternew and full moon . We cannot see when a spirit en ters the body,in the same mann er as the soul en ters, and leaves the body without being seen as ligh t en ters the water in a glass, or as heat orcold en ters a body, wi thout our being aware how it takes place .Unmdda, and Bhutonmdda, are said to be cured when the fun c‘

tions of the sense, judgm en t, and heart, are restored to a perfect

state, and the tissues are natural .

Treatment . During the cure the patien t should be treatedkindly . A physician should commen ce the cure of a personpossessed with a devil, by cleaning and anoin ting his body withmustard oil, he should be dressed in n ew clothes, and he shouldrepeat the proper prayers, and act agreeably to the shastras

so as to satisfy the devil (g raha) who is the cause of the madn ess.

The usual red and white pigmen ts are to be applied over the forehead, red clothing and garlands of red shoe-flower are to be worn,and hon ey, ghee, flesh, win e, milk, and articles offood are to bepresen ted, for performing the p i

’

tjd with . Some g raha are satisfiedwi th win e, some with goat

’

s milk, &c . , as stated in the shastras .

From the day ofthe invasion , find out when the devilwill destroythe person , as each has a day particularly con secrated to him, and

on that day use the proper means for removing the devil . The

puja is to be performed at the temple of one of the gods, by the

physician, who if possible conveys there the person diseased ;a fire is prepared, and flesh, &c . , are thrown upon it, with suitableprayers . Some husa grass (used for fun erals) is to be sprinkledover the ground, a preparation of coloured ground rice, a cakeofunleaven ed bread, ghee, and an umbrella is to be given to the

devil . Amixture ofsugar, milk, and rice boiled, is also to be pre

sen ted.

When devils (Asur) afflict a person , the above remedies are to

be administered in the square of the house . The removal of

t shyasa devils is to be accomplished at themeeting offour roads,

and in deep jungles . The p i’

tia of Pishacha devils is to beperformed in empty houses . When the devil has not been expelled

by these means, with the prescribed prayers, other remedies are to

be used. The smoke from,

leather, and hair, from the skin of a

bear, or goat, from asafoetida, with goat’

s urin e, are to be burnt;when even strong devils will be removed.

2 x 2

284

The other remedies are long-pepper,“ black-pepper, dry-ginger;

rock-salt, asafoetida, myrobalan , and bach, with the urin e of goats;and the bile offishes. These are to be used as errhines. Ghee

and oil should be prepared, with the faeces, skin, hair, fat, urin e,blood, bile and nails of the following an imals : a lion , tiger, bear,

cat, leopard, elephan t, horse, and cow. These are to be mixed and

used for anoin ting the body with, as errhines, or cold cream is to

be mixed with these . Numerous other mixtures ofthe same kind

are also used in this disease .

Person s n ot liable to be afflicted by devils are, prophets, charitable persons, those who speak the truth, and those who attend to

the orders ofthe shdstras, and perform particular duties, and employproper terms in addressing holy men . Those who have the eight

qualities ofthe body, are always pure, humble, and wise, visit holy

places, always govern their passions, and speak the truth ; and

those who pray, and attend to the prescribed ceremon ies and are

charitable, over such person s devils have no power . Devils only”

go about at n ight, and they live, under their eight chiefs, on blood,fat, flesh, and disgusting an imals .

CLAss IV.

Disease of the Head and Neck.

ORDER I .

Diseases of theHead, (Sirarog a . )

Under this order will be arranged the varieties of Head-ache;and the diseases of the organ s ofsense .Head—ache .

—There are eleven varieties ofhead-ache which are

produced by derangemen ts of the air, bile, and phlegm ; by the

mixture ofthe three by di seased blood by a deranged or dimin ished

state ofthe humors, by worms, the eighth is named Surjyabartta‘

,

the n in th, Anantabcita, tenth, Ardhciyabhedaha, and the eleventhSanhhaha .

1 . When air is di seased in the head, it is sudden ly affectedwi th pain , whi ch is severe at n ight ; but it is dimin ished by hotapplication s, and bandages . To cure this variety ofhead-ache, takeghee, m ilk, and mudg a (a kind of pea) , and boil them in watermashalcii at n ight will“ also be useful . Avoid bitters, hot milk,warm baths and douches applied to the head. A hot poultice composed offish, and the expressed oil ofsesamum will be ofuse .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

286

it will cause the worms to become stupid. Stimulating snufl'

s are; of

use, such as the powder ofthe seeds ofshring i, and biranga, mixedwith cow

’

s urine, and other vermifuge medicin es . By these means

the worms will be expelled.

8 . Surjgabartta . In this variety, when the sun rises the eyes

and brow feel painful ; and it con tinues, and increases, while the sunis above the horizon . It dimin ishes in the evening, and towards

n ight . It is produced by derangement in the air, phlegm, and

bile . For curing it use old ghee, and other medicines, as above

men tion ed ; and the food is to consist ofmilk and rice, with broths

made ofwild an imals.

9 . Anantabdta . When air, bile, and phlegm are deranged in

the vessels ofthe n eck, they produce great pain , particularly in theeyebrows, temples, and cheeks . It also produces shaking ofthe

head, pain in the lower jaw, and diseases ofthe eyes (neuralg ia) .

This variety is to be treated in the same mann er as Shry'

ycibar'

tta,

but particularly by the pun cture of the diseased vessel . The diet

sh ould be sweetmeats prepared with ghee, honey, sugar, and flour,with the remedies which cure bile and air.

1 0 . Ardhdgabhedaha, (hemip leg im) When much dry food istaken it produces this di sease or eating without an appetite, or toofrequent ; exposure to the easterly wind, or to dew, and the abuse

of ven ery . When the urin e and bowels are constipated, and the

person has been subj ected to much grief, or severe exertion, he isliable to the attacks of this disease as also by derangemen ts of

air, bile, and phlegm. The attack occurs sometimes every fort:

night, in other cases every ten th day, or in other cases every day,

The halfof the n eck, brow, temples, ears, eyes, are very painful .When severe, as it often is, like that ofpoison , or as ifburn t, and

the sight and hearing become imperfect . This disease is veryobstinate, andmost di stressing ; so that a thousandphysician s cannotsometimes cure it . In this form errhin es prepared with the powderofthe seeds of Sirisa,

Mulahd, camphor,

Pip ala, long-pepper, andBacha, are to be exhibited. An external application

is made by mixing together the paste ofSciliba,

Kusta,

Pip ala andMadhaha, liquorice,with the juice ofacid fruits, ghee, and oil . This is applied over thehead. The broths ofwild animals, with ghee, and cold applications,are also useful . The head should, in this disease, be always kept

287

well anointed wi th mustard oil . If by the above means the

head-ache is not checked, blood-letting should be performed.

1 1 . Sank haha . When air, bile, and phlegm, with blood are

deranged, it produces severe pain in the temples and head, whichbecomes hot . This form is dangerous, like poison . When the

person cannot swallow, he will die in three days. But ifhe livesbeyond this tim e, medi cin es may then be given for the cure . The

treatment is the same as ofthe last variety .

ORDER II .

Diseases of the Ears, (Karnaroga . )

The more copious secretion from the external ears, and the mostchanges oftemperature ofthe air, render di seases ofthis organ offre

quen t occurrence in thi s coun try . They produce much suffering,

and much atten tion seems to have been paid by the Hindus to their

nature and cure .

There are twen ty-eight s di seases of the ear. The corporeal air

is the cause ofall these di seases . When it is deranged in the ear,

and is confin ed in its passage by the other humors, it produces

severe pain in the organ , which is called harnashula, and is verydifficult to cure . When air is deranged in the passages of the ear,

“

several kinds ofsounds are heard, like those ofcertain instrumen ts

called karnandda . When air is deranged with phlegm in the

ear passages, and if not treated it will produce deafn ess called

badhiry'

ga .

Fatigue, or eating hot or astringen t substances, or the frequen tuse oferrhines produce a derangemen t of the air in the ear passagescalled harnahshyera, which con sist in a peculiar ringing noise . In

others the disease is produced by blows on the ear, by bathing in

water during which water en ters the ears, or by a boil in the part

which suppurates. This disease is called harnasangsrdba .

When air and p hlegm are deranged in the ear it produces itchi~

ness ; and bile being deranged dries up the phlegm, and wax in

the car. This di sease is named harnaguthaka . When the wax

melts it passes out ofthe nose (sursuta) , or mouth (n idan) , and

the di sease is called p ratinctha, and is accompan ied with much

pain in the head.

If worms form in the ear by fli es depositing their eggs in the

ear, the disease is called hrimiharnaha .

When the ear is wounded or otherwise injured it is called bidra-e

dhi . In other cases there is great pain ,burn ing, and tightn ess

in the part, with a discharge ofyellow pus or blood ; it is then

tealled karnabidradhi By the derangements ofbile abscesses are

formed, which is called harnap dha .

When p hlegm is deranged and dried up by the heat of the bile,

it melts, and then is discharged from the ear, with a di sagreeablesmell . It is called p ritiharnaha . There are also four kinds of

bloody tumors, seven varieties of other tumors, and four kindsofswellings to which the ear is liable .

In defects ofthe external ear, Susruta recommends the surgeon

to prepare a new ear, by removing skin from the n eighbouring part,leaving a conn ection to keep up its vitality . Cutting off ears was

a frequent method of pun ishmen t and the formation of a n ew car

removed the deformity, which was the more striking in the Hindu,as the ear was the place for hanging ornamen ts, especially among

the rich .

Treatment . In these di seases ghee is to be used with the diet,with rest, and bathing, not including the head, while intercourse

with women is avoided. In harnashula, p ranada, bddhirjga, and

ham the treatmen t is the same . Give oleaginous purgatives, and

apply steam ofwater impregnatedwith differen t herbs which cure

air di seases . This is conveyed to the external ear by mean s of a

tube . Fish, cook’

s flesh, and that of a bird called laba are to be

mixed, and applied hot to the ear . The leaves of the ban ian tree,

are to be made in the form ofa cup, which is to be heated over

a fire, and the drops ofjuice which ooze through the leaf, are to be

applied hot to the ear . The juice ofgarlic and ginger is also to be

applied to the external ear. Other stimulating and narcotic medi

cines, and differen t oils, are recommended for these di seases ofthe

ear. Strong errhines are also to be used.

In deafness the oil is to be prepared with cow’

s urin e mixed witha decoction ofbillah, and applied to the ear. Milk and water are

also ofuse . For curing the diseases n amed harnashrciba, putiharna

and hrz’

miharnaha are the same remedies as above enumerated.

Strong errhin es and fumigations, washing, oils dropped into the ear,

and various astringen t decoctionswill be found ofuse . Gum,raisin,

frankin cense (dhunci) , powdered with the juice of the wild cottontree, are to be appli ed to the ear . Worms are to be removed by theapplication of such medicin es as expel them . The sulphurate of

arsen ic, with cow’

s urine, is found ofuse . For removing the bad

smell from th e car, use fragran t fumigations. Mustard oil willremove the ringing of the ears . Inflammation s ofthe ear are to be

treated as in other local inflammations. For the morbid secretiono f wax remove it by instrumen ts, and fomentations ; and emeticsand errhines are to be administered for the itching cfthe ear. For

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

299

nose is th in . The voice becomes altered, with occasional vomitingand weakn ess of the body . When chron ic, the phlegm as it isdischarged from the nose, thickens, and the voice becomes natural .The 0610 11 1' Of the skin is natural, and the discharged phlegm isthick, and very adhesive.

Pritisyaiah resembles Ap innasa and is sometimes produced bythe neglect in the calls ofnature, by eating indigestable food, and

allowing the accumulation of dust in the nostrils speaking or

crying much ; frequent fits ofanger, unusual and sudden alteration

in the seasons, such as want of the accustomed rain , and exposure

to the sun , watching or sleeping during the day, being wet withvery coldwater or dew, and excessive ven ery produce the diseases of

the nose ; as also hot tears passing into the nostrils . By these

causes the humors are deranged in the head, producing the usual

symptoms ofcatarrh ; the general symptoms ofwhich are sn eezing,

heaviness ofthe head, languor and pain , and stiflness over the body(Gusesha) .When produced by air the nostrils become filled up, there is a

thin discharge with dryn ess of the throat, palate, and lips, with

severe throbbing pain of the temples, and hoarsen ess .

When bile is deranged the symptoms are a hot discharge of a

yellow colour, the body is weak, ofa gray colour, and hot . There

is much thirst, and w hat is vomited is hot, and like smoke .

When p hlegm is deranged the discharge is white or grayish, and

is copious and cold. The body becomes pale, eyelids swollen , head

very heavy, and the throat, palate, lips, andhead, are itchy.

When air, bile and p hlegm are deranged the symptoms occur

rapidly, disappear, and recur again, whether they be acute or chro

nic . At one time the nose is clean but it again becomes dirty, dry,

and closes with foetid breath, and loss of smell . This is the bad

form of the disease, and is cured with difficulty. Ifneglected this

disease passes in to Pz’

nasa . When it has continued for a long time

it produces deafn ess, blindness, loss ofsmell, cough, and dispepsia. 4

When blood is deranged, and is discharged from the nostrils, the

eyes are reddish . This form is produced by injuries of the chest,

and both the mouth and nostrils have a bad smell . He loses the

sense of smell, and worms are produced in the nostrils. Theseworms

‘

are small and of a black and white colour . The difl'

eren t

forms ofPrahsiciha, ifnot seen by the practitioner early, are.not

curable .There are five forms ofArbuda, or tumors attacking the nose, and

four ofSota (swellings) , fourkinds ofArsa (Polypus) , and R ahtap itta

(hemorrhage ) all these form so many diseases of the nose . They

2 9 1

have already, or will be hereafter described under the head of

Surgery.

Trea tment . In Putinasha ghee is to be introduced into the

nostrils with fomen tations Emetics and errhines are .also to beused, with light food, and warm water as drink . Smoking witharomatic herbs is also recommended. In this disease mustard oil is

to be used it should be prepared wi th the following medicinesHingu, (asafoetida,) black and long pepper, and

dry ginger,Bachaha,

Shibati,

Katp hala,

t shyd, (Butea frondosa,)Bacha, (Acorns calamus, )Kusta, (Costus speciosus,) andBiranga .

These are m ixed, and used as an errhine .Ndsz

’

lcdpaha . In this case an tiphlogistic means are to be Used,as the application ofleeches, and the paste made of the bark ofthe

trees which produce a milky juice, as the banian tree .In Puerahta, when pus and blood are discharged, it is to be

treated as fistulae in other parts ofthe body .

In Pt’

nasa hot substan ces are to be eaten, as ginger with salt, soas to thicken the mucus, and when chroni c ghee is to be taken

internally with emetics. When the mucus becomes thick it is tobe discharged bymean s oferrhin es, purgatives, gargles, and smokingwith aromatic substances . The person should remain in a shut upplace . His head should be kept warm, and he should avoid coldwater and venery . He should also avoid grief, dry food and new

wine ; when accompan ied with fever, vomiting, languor, and diar~

rhoea, fasting is recommendedwith ton ics and carminatives.

ORDER IV.

D iseases of the Eyes, (AhirOg ah. )It is related that Janaha, réja ofMithila or Tirhoot, did not

perform the usual ceremon ies and prayers to the sun, for which he

was afli icted with the di seases of the eye . By abstin ence and

humiliation before the sun , however he was cured of the diseaseand since then , by proper offerings he obtain ed the favor of, and wasin structed by, Surya concern ing these diseases. He afterwardswrote a Shastra on the subject, called Scilaha Tantra, which isstated to be “ in profundity like the ocean .

”

There are 76 diseases ofthe eye, of these 10 are air diseases,2 L 2

2 92

1 0 bile, 13” phlegm, 25 are produced by the derangement of the

three humors, 1 6 by blood, and 2 external diseases . These diseases

are again subdivided into 9 of the joinings of the eye, 2 1 of

the eyelids, 1 1 of the white part of the eye, 4 of the black part,1 7 ofthe eye in general, 1 2 diseases of the true organs of vision

(Dristi) , and two external diseases from injuries.

1 . Descrip tion of the Eye . After a description ofthe size of theeye it is stated that it is formed by a combination ofall the elemen ts.

The flesh being produced by the earth, blood from the fire, the

black part from the air, the white part from the water, and the

differen t canals for the tears are produced by ether or sky . The

black part extends over on e-third ofthe eye, and the pupil about oneseven th part ofthe black part . The tun ics are the two eyelids, and

of the glob e ofthe eye . The first surrounds the vitreous humor

(Tezajala, or glisten ing water) , the second is covered with flesh, the

third with fat, and the fourth with bon e . They distinguish five

circles, the eyelashes, eyelids, the white sclerotic coat, the iris, and

the pupil . There are five joinings, the eyelashes with the eyelids,the eyelids and white ofthe eye (sclerotic) , the white with the tran sparent corn ea, and this with the pupil, and the corunculo lachryma

lis. The humors are carried into the eye by the vessels, and

produce many diseases .

The causes of these diseases are bathing when the body is veryhot, inten sely regardingminute objects, or those at a great distance,or sleeping at irregular periods, frequen t crying, grief, anger, exter

nal injuries, excessive venery, constipated or sour articles of food,

or a kind ofpea (Mdshalaz.) Irregularities ofseason s produce them,

retaining the tears in the eye, smoke and dust, profuse vomiting, orstopping it sudden ly . These causes with derangements ofair, bileand phlegm or blood, produce di seases of the eye . The derangedhumors are conveyed into the eye by the vessels, and produce thedifferent diseases in the different parts of the eye . The gen eralsymptoms ofdiseases of the eye are its changing its natural colour,

pain , redn ess, a discharge oftears, and there is a burn ing sen sationin the eye as ifthere was an external body in it . The eyelids feelpainful, as ifthorns were under the eyelid, and there is intolleranceoflight .2 . Inflammation . There are four varieties ofinflammation ofthe

eye, produced by derangement in the air, bile, phlegm, and blood.

The ten diseases ofthe air are characterized by severe pain in the

eye, which remains immoveable, a feeling ofsand in the eye, whichis dry, with an inclination to rub it . The patient complains Of

head-ache, and the tears are cold.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

94?

eye, which becomes red. When n eglected this form is called Si

rdharsa, when the discharge is ofa copper colour, and the person

cannot see . These are the general diseases ofthe eye.

2 . The diseases of the blackpart of the Eye.

Ulcers of the Cornea, (Brnna-suhra .) In this disease the black

part appears spotted, the di scharge is very hot, and if it is not n ear

the pupil and there is only one spot, which is without pain and anydischarge, it

‘

may sometimes be cured.

When the ulcer is of long standing, exten sive, and deep-seated,it is difficult to cure . When depressed in the middle and the mar

gin elevated it will destroy vision . When both coats (cornea and

iris) are destroyed by the ulcer, which has a red margin, and has

been oflong standing, it is incurable .Abrnna-suhra . When the inflammation is in the black part ofthe

eye with a burning sensation , it is very white like the moon ,

‘it iscurable . Ifofold standing, is white, large, and deep-seated, it willbe cured with difficulty.

Pdhdtiya, or Opacity ofthe cornea following inflammation .

Ajahdycita, small tumors like the litter of goats, slightly red,

which protrudes through the cornea, from which a bloody discharge

proceeds mixed with pus.

The Dristi (crystallin e len s) is the principal part of the organ of

vision . It is like the form ofa pea and is produced by a

mixture of the essen tial parts of the five elemen ts. It resembles

the firefly, and it is largely supplied with the eternal fire (Abaytazi) .It is covered by the external tun ic of the eye, and has externally an

Opening (pupil By cold it is kept in a healthy state . The diseases

ofthis part ofthe eye are very tedious in their cure .

3 . D iseases of the membranes of the Eye .

When the first tun ic (Pratarnap atala) is deranged, the vision is

indistinct . When the second tun ic is affected the sight is very im

perfect, and the person sees an appearance ofmotes, musquitoes,

hairs, and n ets. In other cases it is in the form ofa circle like

spectres, rays, and as every thing were indistinct and immersed in

water, or like rain, clouds, and darkn ess . The person cannot dis

tingui sh distance, so that near obj ects seem at a distanbe .

When the th ird membrane is deranged he can n either see above

nor below ;large objects appear covered, and he cannot distinguish

the features ofa person placed before him . Such a person has often

double vision .

Ling ancisa . In this form the whole crystalline lens (Brista’

) is

95

affected, and ifnot very deep the person can see the moon, star, andlightn ing . When air is much increased the patient sees every obj ectred and when bile is affected, he can see the sun , the rainbow,

and lightn ing . In other cases every thing appears black, variegated,and like the feather ofa peacock . When affected by phlegm everyobject appears as ifcovered with oil and white . When the three

humors are deranged, every thing appears spotted as of a mixtureof differen t colours . When blood is deranged every object appearsred and dark . In Linyanoisa the colour is made ofsix differen t tin ts .

When the eye is affected with deranged bile it is called Pittabidagdha dristi, which is characterized by the yellowness, and images

appearing yellow . Ifit affects the third membran e he cannot see

during the day, but can see at night .

Wh en phlegm is affected it is called Sleshmabidaydha dristz’

which

is characterized by the white appearance, and every thing seems

white . When deranged in the three membranes ofthe eye it is calledNyctalop ia, or n ight blindness. He can see during the day . Grief,fever, vexation , severe diseases of the head, cause this disease of

the eye, in which every object appears enveloped in smoke hence itis called Samadarsher . In other cases the person cannot see smallobj ects during the day, but sees every thing at night . This is calledR asajdta .

When air, bile, and phlegm are deranged, and produce a change

in the iris like the mungoose eye (which is very red) every thingappears ofa mottled appearance during the day. It is named.

Nahu

landha .

Gambirahci . When air is deranged it produces the disease inwhich the pupil of the eye is contracted, and it dimin ishes the sizeofthe eye, and is accompan ied with great pain .

Linganésa is of two kinds. The first is called Sanimita andthe second Animita the first is produced by inflammation of the

eye, and the second by the sight of holy sages, by regarding a kindof large snake (Maharaza) , or luminous obj ects by which vision isdestroyed. The eye in thi s disease does not lose its natural appearance .Abiycita hataalristi is producedby acciden ts or injuries to the eye,

by which the person cannot see the organ becomes red like coral,and severe pain is felt as ifa person was tearing the eye out .

4 , Diseases of the white p art of the Eye .

Prasta’

zrijarma . In this disease there i s a thin red or dark.

coloured membran e covering the white part ofthe eye .

Suklcirma . The enlargements in this disease are white and soft,and it advances slowly .

296

R akta’

rma is characterized by fleshy growths ofa red colour .Adimansarma (Ptergium) is a liver-coloured thicken ing of the

white part ofthe eye . It is stationary. Another form is thick, and

fleshy , and ofa white colour .

S tarjarma is fleshy swelling ofthe white ofthe eye .

Sahti, when there are many small spots ofa green flesh colour .Ariana is when there is a red spot .

Pistaha is a round white elevation of the white of the eye

like a drop ofwater .

Jcila . The white part in this case is like a net-Work, with hard

small vessels ofa red colour .

Sircija, in which white pimples appear in the white ofthe eye,

surrounded by enlarged vessels .

Baldsaha is a silvery copper-coloured spot surrounded by vessels.

5 . Diseases of thejoinings of the eyes—of the eyeball, cornea and

sclerotica, eyelids, eyelashes, &c .

These"

di seases are n in e in number . The parts sometimes swell,suppurate and are painful ; the disease is called Payalisa . Bloodand thick pus are discharged in these cases. Another form swellsmuch, but does not suppurate is itchy, but without pain . It is

called Up andha .

When air, bile, and phlegm are deranged at the joints, and the

passage ofthe tears are discharged over the eyelids in the form of

tears, it is called Netranriri (Fistula Lachrymalis) , ofwhich thereare four varieties according to the nature of their discharges . When

pus alon e is discharged it is called Parsa’sarba . When phlegm is

alone diseased, and the join t suppurates without pain , the discharge

is ofa white colour, thick, and shining like oil : it is then calledSleshmasrdba . Diseased blood sometimes produces this di sease, and

when there is a hot discharge mixed with much blood it is called

R ahtasrciba . When bile is diseased, the discharge has a yellowcolour, and it is called Pittasrciba .

When small pimples appear at the joints ofthe eye, ofa red colour,they burn and are painful . They are called Parban ihci . Sometimesthis occurs at the juncture of the cornea and sclerotica, and are

accompan ied by the same symptoms as the last. They are ofa

red colour, and are

“

called Alayhi .

Krimcig ranti . Sometimes worms are produced at the junctureof the eyelids, and eyelashes. They produce much itching ; and

sometimes they form between the eyelid and the white part ofthe

eye . They are of different colours and forms, and destroy the

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

‘

298

When the eyelids are shut, and they cannot be open ed withouttheir being previously soaked in water, on account ofthe secretion ,

the dise ase is called Ahhnabarta .

When the joints of the eyelids become immoveable, and evertedi t is called Britahattabarta (En tropium . )When a pendulous swelling forms in the in side of the eyelid

without pain , and is caused by blood, it is namedArbada .

When the vessels which move the eyelids are deranged theyproduce winking, or a con tinual movemen t of the eyes, when it iscalledNimassa .

When the small fleshy excrescences, situated in the eyelids, are

Ofa red colour, soft, painful, and grow again when removed by thekn ife, they are produced by diseased blood, and are called Sani

tarsa . Another form oftumor forms on the eyelids like a plum,

hard, soft, moist, and does not suppurate, but becomes large and

knotted it is called Layannah .

When air, bile and phlegm are deranged the swelling appearsabove the eyelid, breaks, and blood, water and pus are dischargedthrough many openings. The pain is so severe as to resemblepoison, and is called Bishabarta . In other cases these derangements

con tract the eyelids so that the person cannot see distinctly . Thisdisease is called Kaneharna .

When ai r 1 3 deranged the eyelashes are turn ed inwards, and

inflame the eye, and the person is always rubbing them . It iscalled Pahahap a t, (EntrOpeon ,) and is a difl

‘icult disease to cure .

Bile when deranged in the eye produces the falling Off of the

eyelashes when the eyelids are itchy and hot, the disease is calledPahahscita .

Treatment of the diseases of the eye . Eleven of these diseases

are curedby the excision ofthe diseased part n in e by scarifications

five by incisions fifteen by punctures twelve by the use ofdiffer

ent in strumen ts ; seven are cured with difficulty ; and fifteen dis

eases are in curable . The two general diseases Of the eyes are

con sidered incurable .

In treating Ophthalmia (Abisanda) , the patien t is to have hisbody anointed, and fomented according to custom and in both

Adimanta and Adisanda ven esection is to be employed, followed byOleaginous glysters and purgatives. Cooling washes, and the vapourofcertain medicines, with errhines, are to be applied to the diseasedeye . It is then to be covered with a yellow-coloured cloth . Warmfomen tations, and boiled hot flesh is to be applied to the eye, withpoultices made ofmilk and rice. The patien t should drink milk

boiled with - thecdecoction Of those plants which cure diseased air.

299

G oat’

s milk, boiled with the decoction of the root and leaves Of

the castor oil shrub is to be applied to the eye while warm .

When the ophthalmia is produced by derangemen t of the bile,”

blood-letting, purgatives, and the applications recommended in otherinflammations are to be used. In other cases ghee and goat’s milkare to be prepared wi th the following medicin es . Take of

Gandrci, (Cyperus pertenuis,)

Shaibala, (Vallisn eria octandra,)Loelobido,

Da’

rbi, (Z anthorrizon , )Ela

’

, (Cardamoms, )

R odhra,

Musta/ha, (Cyperus rotundus, )and the leaves ofthe water-lily and other cooling medicines . Ghee

is to be used as an external application . The other parts of the

antibilious treatmen t is to be followed ; and gold rubbed in the

milk of a woman , and mixed with honey, may also be applied.

Liquorice root, mixed with woman’

s milk or sugar and water or a

p iece ofcloth made ofthe wild silk is to be first mo isten ed with

water, and then applied to the eye .

When Ophthalmia is produced by phlegm, blood-letting, fomen

tations, errhines, and collet ia, wi th the application ofvapour are tobe used. Differen t gargles

,and irritants for the discharge ofmucus

from the n ose are recommended. The colleria, &c . are to be prepared with medicin es which cure phlegm . The patien t should eatofsuch substances as do not increase phlegm, the ghee should beprepared with bitter plan ts . This should be repeated daily . The

fomentations should be prepared with the decoction s OfBa

’

lci, (Hibiscus tortuosus,)Sun tz

’

, (Dry ginger,)D ebcla

’

ra, (Erythroxylon sideroxcylloides, )Kushta, (Costus speciosus . )

The vapour of these medicines is to be applied to the eye . At

other times various medicin es are formed in to a mixture, and appliedexternally to the eye : such as myrobalan , hariclrci, ( turmerick,) maduha, (liquorice, ) anjana, andantimony . These medicines are driedin the sun , and when the mixture is to be used, moisten it and

apply it upon the eyelids .

When blood produces diseases of the eye, it is recommended to

use general and local bleeding, strong and frequen t purgatives,errhin es, cold applications, and to apply a mixture of differ

2 M 2

300

ent medicin es upon the eyelids. When there is much pain use

soothing fomentations, leeches, and the usual treatmen t for bile .

The juice Ofnimba leaves’

mixedwith iron and copper are also recom

mended. The juice of sugar-can e, honey, sugar, woman’

s milk,clarbia, and madulca, (liquorice,) are to be applied externally, with

the juice ofthe pomegranate . Water and sugar, rock-salt, andwheyare also used as external applications .

Besides the seven ty-six diseases, which are common both to childrenand to the adult, there is another which is peculiar to the former .This is called Kahundha or purulen t Ophthalmia . It is caused bythe bad milk ofthe mother, and also by the derangement ofphlegm,

air, bile, or blood, singly, or collectively. It affects the eyelids.

The symptoms are the continual rubbing the eye, aswell as the noseand forehead great intollerance oflight, and a copious discharge .

In the treatmen t bleeding is first recommendedwith scarifications

of the eyelids. Then apply stimulating substances mixed'

withhon ey, in order to discharge the bad humors. With this theusual medicines recommendedfor the mother and child, for purifying

the humors and improving health are to be given such as emetics,&c . are to be used. A decoction ofthe young leaves ofjumba (rose

apple), amra (mangoe) , datree mulica, and myrobalan trees, are also

recommended. The eyes are to be washed with this, as well as

with other astringent medicines. The following mixture is also

recommended. Take OfNip cilaja, (red sulph . OfArsen ic,) maricha, (black pepper, ) burnt

hunch, (a shell,) rasanjana, (sulph . ofAn timony,) and saindhaba,

( rock-salt,) with jagary and hon ey . These medicin es are mixed

with the hon ey and treacle, and applied with a probe to the eye .

There are many peculiarities in the diseases of the eyes, thatcannot be described in a book ; but by these general precepts an

in telligen t person will be able to vary his treatment according to

the circumstan ce of each particular case .The diseases of the eye in which the use of instrumen ts is re

quired are

Utsinyzni,

Baha labcirta,

Harolamabrirta,

Shdbabcirta,

Bandabasta,

K listabcirta,

Pataha,

Kambz’

hz’

ni, and

Bdtasarhcird.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

302

ed rock-salt with the sulphate Of zinc, long-pepper, red sul

phurate ofarsen ic with hon ey, to the part, and put on a bandage .In Layana divide the parts and then apply the powder Oc ieha

na’

s ( supposed to be the concrete bile of the cow) , saltpetre,sulphate of Copper, and honey . In other cases the actual cauterymust be applied. Treatmen t Of Unjctndmehd, ( styr,) consists infomen ting the abscess, and then applying the sulphurate ofan timonywith hon ey .

For the cure ofBishayrenta, first foment, Open the part, and then

apply the powder ofthe three kinds ofmatabah, tn to, (sulphate of

copper,) ha’

sz’

s, ( sulphate ofiron ,) and rock-salt . These medicinesirritate, and increase the secretion Of tears, and clear the organ .

Then use astringen t application s.

In Up andha cut off the diseased part, and then apply fomenta

tion s and a mixture oflong-pepper, rock-salt, and honey .

Excision . In Udemdnsarnia’

, (Pterygium,) excision is to be usedfor the cure ofthis disease . First mix ghee with the patien t’s food ;then apply stimulating powder to the part, followed by fomentations.

The eye is then to be rubbed with the finger, and when the eye

-lidsare somewhat loosen ed apply a hook, and draw the fleshy growth

slightly outwards . Then pass a n eedle under the diseasedgrowth tieit, and then separate the diseased part from the corn ea and sclerotica

with a round formed kn ife . Then apply fomen tation s and a bandage .

The only diseases in which excision is employed, are

Sorbaniea,

Sarslccirsa Urbaa’a, small tumors.

In Pahalcap at, (Intr0peon .) In this distressing disease it is re

commended that from the inner to the outer can thus ofthe eye a

portion of,

the skin is to be removed, about three lin es in breadth,in the lower third ofthe upper eyelid. This Operation is partienlarly described by Susruta, who states the kind ofroom which shouldbe used as an Operating room, that in which the patien t is to beplaced, his diet, &c . After the Operation apply hon ey and ghee tothe wound, which should be brought together by hair sutors. Theseare removed on un ion taking place . If this Operation is not successful, destroy the roots Ofthe hair by the actual or poten tial cauteries .

Amaurosis, ( timra or darkn ess . ) The patien t is first to get Oleaginous purgatives prepared with Old ghee which has been kept forsome time in an iron vessel . The ghee is also recommended to beprepared from amphibious animals. It is to be rubbed up withwater and applied to the eye different preparations ofantimony are

303

likewise recommended, such as an timony, honey, sugar, red sul

phurate ofarsen ic, m ixed together, and applied to the ey e . Differen tcolleria, fomentations, errhin es and other external application s are

also to be used. These preparation s ofan timony with other stimulants are to be used. Bleedi ng is not recommended

, but errhinesare highly extolled. Various other remedi es wi th nutritive diet isrecommended, as barleywith much ghee, the juice ofmyrobalan , and

the flesh Ofwild an imals and birds .

Cataract, fling andsa .) In treatmen t Of this and other diseases

the patien t shouldfirst take ghee, as it is supposed to cure the diseases

ofair, which are supposed to derange the other humors . The weather

should n either be very hot nor very cold in which the Operation is tobe performed. The eyelids are to be kept properly separated by an

expert assistan t ; the patien t is then to be di rected to look to his

nose, and a knife with a poin t shaped like a grain ofbarley is to be

held between the fore and middle fingers, and thumb of the right

hand ifthe left eye is to be operated on, and in the left hand, if theright eye . The kn ife is then to be carried forward n ear the junction

ofthe scleroticawith the corn ea, n either high nor low in the eye, (nearthe transverse axis) and pass it on un til water escapes. Thenintroduce a probe with a hook at its extremity, which is to detachand remove the cataract . When the person sees well, immediatelyafter the operation , it has been properly done, particularly when thepupil appears clear like the other eye . After the Operation apply themilk Ofa woman to the eye, with fomen tations . Then cover the eye

;

with a bandage . For ten days after the operation hemust remain perfectly quiet in a dark room . During this time his food shouldbe light .In the treatmen t of the following diseases Ofthe eye, the knife is

not to be usedSahdhzjaciha,Kap habiclaydhaa

’ristz

’

,

Pittabialaydhadristi,

Sabra,

Urjana,Pishtaha,

A'

mlaki,

A'

hilnabarta,

Damaclarsz‘

,

Suhti’

,

Prihelnabarta,

Baldsabasta .

In external injuries, and their consequences, following diseasesare cured by bleeding

04

Sirdycila,

Sirciharsa,

Nainap ctlca,

Pabanancttah,

Paedlcisa,

Also in acute and purulent Ophthalmia .

ORDER V.

Diseases of the Mouth, (Mahharoga )The diseases of the mouth are sixty-five : viz . eight diseases of

ths lips fifteen Ofthe gums eight ofthe teeth ; four ofthe tongue

n ine ofthe palate seventeen Ofthe throat ; and three gen eral diseases .

Diseases of the Lips. By using too much food, such as fish, the

flesh of buffaloes, milk, curdled milk, &c . the three humors are

deranged producing diseases of the Lips . They become rough,hard, and stiff. When the bile is much deranged they are verypainful, and small eruptions appear upon the surface . When bile isderanged, there is much inflammation , the lips become yellow, and

the eruptions are painful, and ofa yellow colour . When phlegm isderanged the lips are covered wi th a thin oleaginous looking matter,are cold, stifi, and ofa dark yellow, white, or mixed colour . Theeruptions are likewise Ofdifferen t colours .

When blood is deranged in the lips they become red, swollen , and

very painful . They often bleed. When the flesh is affected theybecome swollen , heavy, sometimes ulceration takes place, andworms

form in it . When fat is affected the lips become glisten ing, likethe surface of ghee . They are also itchy and heavy, and the

discharge is like pure water . These ulcers do not heal easily.

Treatmen t. When air produces diseases in the lips the treatmen tis to apply equal parts ofgoat’s fat, sesamum Oil, ghee,

.

and wax,

to the diseased part . Fomentations are also to be used to the

lips. When ulceration takes place, apply frankincen se, greenrosin, ( dhunci) , a kind of gum and powdered liquorice .

Mix and apply them to the ulcers in the form of powder . When

the disease is produced by di seased bile, apply leeches and otherlocal and general antiphlogistic remedies . When phlegm is dis

eased after local bleeding, use fomen tations, gargles, and errhines,with fumigation s. Powder oflong and black pepper, ginger, impure

soda (sarg i’

ltd kdra) , n itre and black salt, mix them together withhon ey, and apply to the part .When fat is diseased in the lips, foment, and if the lips ulcerate

apply the actual cautery, after which apply powdered p ring i’

, ladra

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

306

phlegm . In this variety . the teeth become loose, with severe painabout the palate ; Matter is formed in the gums, and the inside of

the mouth is inflamed. This form is to be treated as the last .

Pam’

darah is produced by derangement Of bile, blood, and

phlegm ; and is characterized by blood being discharged from the

gums which are flabby, and separate from the teeth . This form is

to be treated as seen .

Ap ahusa is produced by derangemen t Of bile and blood. In

this disease, abscesses form in the gums with little pain the teethbecome loose, and when the gums are touched, they bleed. There

is faetor of the mouth, and after the discharge of blood from the

gums, they again swell .In the treatment use purgatives, emetics, and errhines. Sca-rify

the part by rubbing the rough border Ofthe fig, or other such leav es.

Then mix the powder of long and black pepper, ginger, salt, andhoney together, and apply it to the part . As a wash use the powderoflong

-pepper, mustard, dry ginger with tepidwater . Prepared gheewith sweet and astringen t medicin es are to be used as a detergen t .Baidurba . This disease is causedby external injury, as by clean

ing the teeth with too hard a tooth-brush . In this disease theteeth become loose .Treatment . Any sloughing parts are to be removed with the

knife, and the use ofthe caustic prepared from potassa . After which

the an tiphlogistic form oftreatment is to be used.

Adidan ta . When the air is deranged it produces irregularityin the growth of the teeth, with much pain ; such teeth should beextracted, apply the actual cautery, and then treat it as ofa caries

ofthe tooth .

Adimctnsiha is the swelling round the w isdom-teeth, producing

much pain and swelling, with the discharge of saliva . It is produccd by diseased phlegm .

Treatmen t . Scarify the swelled part, then apply powderedBacha, (Acorus calamus, )Tejoba tz

’

, (Pothos Officinalis,)Pa

’

thci, (a sort ofplan t,) andSarjelfa

’

, ( impure soda and n itre . )Mix them with honey, and apply to the part . A powder oflongpepper mixed with honey may be used, and the wash of astringen t

and bitter decoctions is to be used frequen tly .

Susruta also states that there are five differen t fistulas connectedwith the gums .

In the treatment scarify the fistulous open ings, and then use

astringent and bitter gargles. Actual and p otential cauteries a re

307

also to be used. Should such fistulas be neglected they will extend

to the bone, and the teeth should be extracted, and the part treated

as a fractured bon e .Ifon removing the last molar tooth there occurs much hemorrha

ge, pain , and paralysis ofpart of the face, they prove that the tooth

should not be extracted. When this has been don e, use a decoc .

tion of

J a’

tz'

, (Grandiflorum,)Madana, (Mimosa catechu, )c iduhan taha, and

Khaa’ira, (Catechu .)

7 . Diseases of the Teeth .

*

Tooth-ache (Ddlana) , in which the tooth becomes very painful .This is caused by the derangement of air. When there is a smallblack decayed part of the tooth which is painful, and discharges

matter with swelling, and much pain, it is called Krimia’an taka, or

worm-eaten tooth . The treatmen t ofthis disease should consist ofstimulant applications, and Oleaginous mixtures . If the tooth isloose it should be extracted. After the above medicine the actualcautery is to be applied to the di seased part .When the mouth is turned to a side, and the teeth broken, as in

spasms, it is produced by phlegm, and is called Bang ana .

Sensible teeth, (Dantaharsa .) In this disease the person cannotbear cold, or hot application s ; cool air, and sour articles producemuch pain . Diseased bile and air produce this form of disease .

For the cure Of this disease apply hot ghee, and a decoction of

It is curious to compare the Oplmons ofthe ancient European authorson the n ature and diseases of the teeth . Homer calls them Barriersopposed by nature to slips Of the tongue, and the abuse ofspeech .

”In

the temple of Apollo a tooth-in strumen t made oflead was suspended to

shew that only those teeth should be pulled out which could b e removedby so weak an instrument . Aristotle asserts that men have more teeththan women , and that this is the case with several an imals, as sheep,

g oats, and pig s ! Aretaeus declares,“ God alon e kn ows the cause of

tooth-ache . Pliny assures us that human teeth contain a perniciousvirus, and that a b ite from them will destroy weak animals. Sylviushaving copied the anatomical errors of Galen , and the discoveries of

Vesalius, which exposed those errors ; objection s having been made tothem, he replied that Galen could not have been wrong , and that thehuman organ ization must have chang ed sin ce his time.

” ThomasBartholm saw a man in whose jaw there grew an iron tooth ; and heenters into an argument to show how such a thing may be .

2 N 2

308

medicines which cure diseased air. The application of the usualfumigationswill be useful . The food should be animal broths, milk,ghee, and different preparations ofrice, with Oil to the head.

Whenthe teeth are dirty, and phlegm and air are diseased, dried up anddeformed, like the scale of fishes, or a piece of broken pot, it iscalled Dantasarhara. In this disease remove the tartar, and applypowdered stick-lac ( laka) , with hon ey . This tartar increases, andthe teeth become loose, and eventually drop out . It is then calledKap dlihci, which is cured by following the same treatment as the

other varieties.

When bile and blood are deranged, the teeth become Of a darkcolour, as ifburnt in the fire, and the disease is named Sidbadantaha .

Ai r when deranged, may produce dislocation of the lower jaw,

which is called Hanamaha, and the symptoms and treatment are

the same as the form ofthe disease namedArdita .

The following articles Offood are to be avoided in diseases of theteeth acid fruits, cold water, hot, dry, and hard food, clean ingthe teeth with a hard piece ofwood, and not the soft recent branchofa tree as usually employed.

8 . Diseases of the Tongue .

When air is deranged in the tongue the person has no sense offeeling or taste in the organ , which is rough and divided in tofissures. This form should be treated like the disease of the lip

produced by diseased air. Bile . In this variety there is great heat,long and red papillae spread over its surface . The part is to berubbed hard to discharge blood, and when the bad blood has beenremoved, sweet application s are to be used with collyria and washesfor the mon th . When Phlegm is deranged the tongue becomesheavy, thick, and the papillae, over the surface of the tongueenlarge .The treatment should con sist in rubbing the tongue with the

rough leaves ofcertain trees, or by scarifications, and then applyingto the part, the powder of long and black pepper with hon ey .

Water, in which the powder of mustard seed and salt have beenmixed, is to be used for clean ing the mouth .

Aldsa . This form of disease is produced by deranged phlegm

and blood, and is characterized by swelling on the upper surface ofthe tongue, particularly n ear its root . In thi s disease the tonguecannot be moved, and sometimes abscesses form .

Ap asz’

bci is produced by diseased phlegm and blood, under thetongue . It is like a second tongue . In this disease there is a profusedischarge of saliva, accompan ied with itchiness and burning pai n .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

6 . l ap cika is produced by deranged bile, and is characterizedby suppuration in the soft palate .

7 . l ashosh. In this disease the palate is very dry; and is

accompan ied with difli culty in breathing, and much pain . These

six last diseases are to be treated by the use ofthe same medicines

as the first . Fumigation s are used for two days in the diseaseproduced by deranged phlegm . The operations to be performed in

the differen t forms oft he swelling vary according to their nature .

Sometimes a part Of the diseased part is excised ; others requireto

’

be Open ed, others scarified, &c . The diet in all these forms

ofdisease should be milk, and a decoction ofmudga or pulse . In

all these forms of di sease sigars are made of those aromatic sub

stances which are best suited to the nature Of the di sease, and

smoked by the patien t .

ORDER III .

D iseases of the Neeh .

These diseases consist of 1 . Diseases of the throat ; 2 . Hoarsen ess ; 3 . Goitre ; 4 . Scrofulous swellings ; and 5 . Tumors of the

'

n eck .

1 . Throat .

There are five forms ofdiseases Ofthe throat .When air, bile and phlegm are deranged in the throat separately

or combin ed, or when the blood is di seased they form the fivevarieties Of this disease . These produce a swelling in the throat,which shuts up the wind-pipe, and produces sudden death .

It iscalled R ahinz

’

. In such cases the treatment is to bleed the patientgenerally and locally give an emetic, apply fumigations, and use

gargles and errhin es.

When the air is deranged, in the severe forms all the symptoms

ofderanged air are produced. After the discharge of blood, applyrock salt over thewounds, and warm ghee ; fat, andmarrow warmedare to be used as a gargle and retained in the mouth . ThlS IS to berepeated frequen tly.

Bile. In this form papillae of. flesh quickly enlarge, become hot,and ripen, wi th sev ere fever . After

"

bleeding, sugar, red sandal-wood,and hon ey are to be applied to the part, with a decoction ofgrapesand Parnsaha .

Phlegm. The passage of the throat is closed,“

and the swellingremai ns long and at length suppurates. Fleshy elevations are

3 1 1

formed. After bleeding, soot, m ixed with hot articles, as long and

black pepper, &c . is to be applied to the part . Oil prepared with

S iyata’

, (Arabian jasmin e,)Birang a, and

Dan ti, (Croton polyandrum,)to be used as a gargle .When air, bile and phlegm are deranged at the same time, the

swelling suppurates to a great depth in the tongue . It is incurable,and the three forms ofsymptoms of diseased air, bile, and phlegmappear . The treatmen t is the same as for the separate form .

When blood is derangedmany small swellings form upon the tongue,and n ear its root, accompan ied with symptoms of deranged bile .

This form may be cured. The treatmen t is the same as the last

When a swelling like a plum is situated in the throat. and pro

duces difficul ty in breathing, and a hard and rough swelling, it iscaused by phlegm, and is named Kan tascilaha . In this formscarification s are to be made on the swelling . The treatment shouldbe the same as that ofTan taharci, or disease ofthe palate . Adijz

’

ba

is a swelling at the root of the tongue like a second tongue, (this isprobably a swelling ofthe epiglottis, ) and is produced by the phlegm

and blood. When it suppurates it is in curable . The treatment is the

same as that ofAp azibiha on e ofthe diseases ofthemouth . Various

other swellings of the throat are also men tion ed, such as Balcisa, a

swelling of the throat which prevents swallowing, and is produced

by phlegm . It is in curable . Phelgm and air produce the swelling

in the throat, which is accompan ied with severe pain , and difficultyin breathing . This is also a very dangerous form ofdisease.

Diseased phlegm and blood produce a swelling in the throat

accompan ied with itchin ess, and a burn ing sen sation . It IS soft,heavy, and does not suppurate . It is called Ehabrinda . In this

form scarifications are to be made, and astringent gargles are to be

used. When it is accompan ied with fever, it is calledBrinda . This

is an in curable disease .

A thick swelling ofthe throat, causing difficulty in breathing, and

surrounded by small papulae like piles with much pain, is produc

ed by air, bile and phlegm ; it is called Satagni, (or it is like the

instrumen t of this name which at once kills 1 00 persons it is

incurable .Gilin . The swelling in this di sease is like the ston e of a plum,

not painful, but hard ; and is produced by diseased phlegm, and

blood. It is cured by being removed by a kn ife .Sarungna (Croup When phleghm stops the passage ofair, this

3 1 2

produces dryness of the throat, hoarseness, difficulty in breathingand great uneasin ess. It is incurable .*

Mansatdna, is a swelling in the throat which produces suffoca

tion . It is always dangerous.

Bidari . The swelling is accompan ied with great pain , redness,followed by sloughing . This is an incurable disease .Ga llagha, is a large swelling in the throat extending over the

throat with great pain , and high fever . The patient cannot swal

low food nor drink water . It is produced by phlegm and blood,and is considered incurable . In gen eral the forms of di sease produced by bile should be treated by the antiphlogistic treatmen t, andthose by phlegm by astringen t and hot applications . When pro

duced by air the applications should be ofghee, Oil, and other medicines for the cure ofair.

2 . Hoarseness, (Swarabheda .)

The causes Of this di sease are loud speaking, poison, long conti

nued reading, external injuries, exposure to cold, &c . When air,

bile, and phlegm are deranged in the air-passages they produce

the six varieties Of hoarsen ess. One is produced by derangements

of the air, bile, or phlegm ; by the combination Of the three ; byfatness and by weakn ess.

l st . Air when deranged produces this disease, when the per

son’

s eyes, mouth, urine, and dej ections become black, and his

ton e ofSpeaking is slow, and like an ass braying .

2nd. When bile is deranged, the eyes, mouth, urin e, and dejec

tions are ofa yellowish colour, and the patient speaking from the

throat, with a sense ofburn ing pain in the part .3rd. Phlegm when deranged, the throat is filled with mucus,

and the person speaks little and that slowly and with difficulty, particularly at n ight .When air, bile, and phlegm are deranged, the combined symp

toms Of the three varieties are presen t and the patient speaks soindistinctly that he cannot be understood. This form is incurable .4th . When weakn ess or diminution Of the essential parts (dha

’

tu)produce the disease, the patient cannot speak, and when he tries,smoke appears to proceed from the mouth, with pain . He speaks

very little . This form is also incurable .5th . When it is produced by fatness the person speaking is

indistinct, andhe thinks his throat and palate are coveredwith something . Such disease will not be cured when the person is weak, Old,

Group is no t unfrequent in Hindustan but it is less dang erous, being ofa more chronic nature than in Europe .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

3 I4.

with a small root . The swelling increases, and dimi n ishesw ith

changes in the size ofthe body . The face is shin ing as ifanointed.

The swelling is heavy, Ofa yellowish colour, and ofa bad smell . It

i s itchyand painful, accompan ied with a peculiar change in the voice .The unfavourable symptoms are difficulty in breathing, softn ess of

the part, and after it has continued for on e year, it is accompan iedwith dispepsia, and hoarseness.. When the person is thin and weakhe will die .

Treatment . Foment the parts with steam, by means of a tubeproceeding from a vessel, in which those vegetable remedies areL

boiling which cure diseased air. When air is deranged, the steamOf warm milk is used and warm poultices prepared with flesh

and Oil are to be applied, and an Open ing made in to it, and it is then

to be treated like a common inflammation . The following external

applications are also recommended. The seeds of

Sana,

Atasi’

, (Linum usitatissinum, )Mil laha, (Raphanus sativus,)Sigra , the pulp Ofthe

Pila , and

Tila, Sesamumseed, are made into a poultice

and applied to the swelling . A paste made With urine, and the

juice ofacid fruits, such as

Aga iseka,

Brihshaha, (Wrightea antidysenterica,) and

Tilaka, are recommended.

Oil prepared withBala, (Sida cordifolia,)Shwetbalci, (Vallisn eria octandra,) and

Pitabalci or withAmartabaloi,

Nimba, (Melia azadirachta,)Hansiabia,

Trihaha,

and long pepper is used in ternally .

When produced by phlegm, fomen tations are to be applied as

above ; Open the swelling, and Oil prepared with differen t salts, and

with the ashes oflong pepper, and o ther heating m edicin es is to beexhibited in ternally . Use also externally, paste made ofganja withthe water ofthe ashes Ofp a ldsa , and applied to the part hot .

Diet—use barley, a decoction ofmadg a with cow’

s urine, or with

powdered long and black pepper, ginger, and honey.

When caused by fat apply a paste made of

Mandara,

Dantz, (Croton polyandrum,) andR asa

’

njana, (Sulphurate ofan timony . )The gum rosin ofthe sail tree, with cow

’

s urine may be used dai lyormake an incision ,

remove the fat, and sow up the wound ; then"

apply ghee and hon ey to _ the part, or hot Oil . The patien t is tolive on a preparation of barley, and apply a tight bandage to the

part . The decoction ofthe three kinds ofmyrobalan is also recommended.

4 . Scrofulous swellings,

When many small tumors like plums appear in the axilla, n eck,back, and groins, they are produced by diseased fat, and phlegm .

They suppurate slowly, and con tinue to appear and suppurate for along period, when it is called Ap aehl. When n ot attended by anybad con stitution al disease it is curable, but when accompan ied withCoriza, with pain in the sides, cough

, fever, and vomiting,it '

is

incurable .

Treatmen t . When indolent and recent, follow the same treatmentas oflocal inflammation, support his strength ghee, fat and mar

row, are to be prepared with a decoction of

Ap ehibati'

, and

Dasamula,

and applied to the part . Differen t fomentations, fumigation s, andpoultices are to be applied, andwhen they suppurate, open and dis

charge the matter wash the woundwith a decoction of

Bilma, (ZEgle marmelos, )Arha, (Calotropis gigan tea,) andArjuna, (Pentaptera arjuna.)

A poultice made ofTila, and the leaves Ofthe Castor-Oil tree mlxedwith salt, and applied to the part . Then apply oil which has beenprepared with a decoction of

Rasnci, (Mimosa octandra,) and ,

Sarala, (Pinus longifolia . )When the disease is produced by bile, apply leeches, with milk

and water, and other cold application s. Aperien ts are likewise tobe given , and a paste made of

Madhaha, (Bassia latifolia,)Jambi, or

Jana, and

Betasa, withSugar

3 16

When it suppurates open , and wash with a decoction of astringentbarks. Then apply a poultice, and ghee prepared with liquorice,and other sweet medicines as

Kdlcolz’

, (Coolus Indicus,)Kshcirahdholi, &c .

When produced by phlegm use rubbing with the finger, orwith

iron, ston e, or a piece ofbamboo make also a paste ofBehantahci,

Arihbada,Ga nja, (Abrus precatorius,)Kahcidmi, and

Tap asabirha,

and apply to the part . If not situated in a vital part remove thetumor with the knife, and when the blood is stopped treat it as a

simple wound.

5 . Tumors of the Neck, (Manshancler)

Is a variety ofthe Gandamalci or scrofulous swellings. They are

hard and large, and when they suppurate they should be Open ed .

After which the cavity is to be cleaned with astringen t washes .

Detergent medicin es are also to be used, as honey, ghee, and causticpreparations. Then apply Oil prepared with a decoction of

Birang a,

Pathci, a plan t called Ahnaoli, andR asant

’

, (or turmerick. )When the tumors are produced by fat apply a paste made of

Sesamum seed. Then two folds Ofcloth are to be placed over the

part, and a hot iron is to be applied frequen tly over the part . Ifthetumor is not removed in this way, the kn ife must be had recourse

to . In this and in all scrofulous affections, emetics and purgativesare to be occasionally exhibited. Errhines are also of use . The

actual cautery is to be applied across the arm immediately abovethe wrist leaving an in terval ofthe breadth ofa finger between each

application .

CLAss V.

Diseases of the Chest .

OR D isR I .Asthma, (Swdsa .)

This disease is produced by the same causes as produce hiccough .

It IS by the Fran-bayu changing its place, and being confined in its

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

3 18

forms Pratamaha . When produced or increased by”

Uda‘

barta,

( constipation,) Ajirna, (dyspepsia,) R ajah, (or dust) and darkness.In this form cold things give relief, and the person sees imperfectlylike one in darkn ess. This is called Sang tamaha .

5 . Khudra-swcisa . It is produced by dry food and exercise .

In this form there is less difficulty in breathing, and there is no painor un easin ess. It does not prevent diglutition, n or the action of

the senses, and only produces difli culty in breathing on runn ing, &c.

NO other di sease is produced by this on e, and it is curable unlesswhen combin ed with some other disease .Treatmen t . In Asthma mild purgatives and emetics are to be

given . Old ghee prepared with myrobalan , black salt, and asafoe

tida, with p owder of long pepper . Ghee prepared wi th the five

salts, as rock, black, common salt,Sabarita lla, and

Sambari .

In other cases the ghee is to be prepared with the decoction of

Basaba, (Justicia ganderussa,)or ghee prepared with Turmerick, Liquorice,

Sring z’

,

M adariha, (Anithum sowa, )Bya

’

ghrz’

, (Solanum jacquin i, )Shan thi, (Dry ginger,)R asanjana, (Sulphurate ofantimony,)Banlochana, and

Musta/ta, (Cyperus rotundus.)Acid fruits are recommended, with broths made ofthe flesh ofbirdswhich pick their food, as fowls, pigeons, &c .

‘

The heads ofdeerprepared with peas, and m ixed with ghee are also used.

The following electuary is recommended. Take ofthe powder

Ofthe bark ofBycighri, (Solanum jacquini,)Sring abira, (Ginger, )Sarhara, (Sugar,)

The a shes of the quills ofthe porcupin e, and the seeds OfTrikan ~

t aha . These are to be mixed with the jul ee .Ofthe litter ofthe

cow, honey, and the powder of long pepper, and admin istered in

the usual manner .

ORDER II

This disease is p roduced, by smoke or dust entering the mouthandn ostrils, by fighting, by great fatigue, by dry food, by articles .of

1 9

food entering the air passages, by sneezing, or by resisting the callsof nature . These causes derange the vital air (Pra

’

n-bdya) in

the chest, and the Udctn-bctya which is situated in the trachea, bywhich the air which passes through the air passages to the mouth,

produces a peculiar n oise, like a broken metallic vessel .The disease may likewise be produced by air, bil e, andphlegm, by

ruptures of the respiratory organ s, or by the loss Ofparticular hu~

mors. All these varieties ofcough, pass to con sumption ifn eglected.

The disease commen ces with a feeling in the mouth and throat as ifit was covered with some irritating substan ce . It feels itchy, or

there is a stinging whi ch prevents the passage ofthe food in to the

stomach .

The symptoms of cough are produced by deranged air, the

change ofvoice, the dry and frequen t cough, distresses the patien t,with pain in the temples, head, stomach, and chest . The face hecomes sallow, and the person becomes weak .

When bile is deranged the mouth is dry and bitter, and the

breath is hot with fever the person complain s of thirst, and severepain over the body ; the expectoration is sour, and of a yellowish

colour, and the skin becomes yellow and hot .

When p hlegm is deranged, the mouth is full ofmucus with head

ache, loss ofappetite, languor, frequen t cough, with thick mucous

expectoration . The person cannot labour, has frequen t fits Of

coughing, the body is heavy and weak, he has no appetite, the

frequency ofcoughing increases, and much phlegm is expectorated.

Katazoa’

t Kaisa is caused by excessive venery, fatigue, carrying

heavy weights, going great distances when unaccustomed, and

violen t exercise upon horseback or elephan ts. By these causes the

air passages are injured or ulcerated, when the patien t is first affected

wi th dry cough followed by spitting of blood, much pain in the

throat and chest, which is in creased by pressure . The joints and

other parts of the body are painful, as ifpin s were pen etrating it ;pain in the muscles, fever, difficulty ofbreathing, thirst, hoarsen ess,and change in the voice, so that it resembles that Ofwild pigeon .

Khyd Kafsa (Pn eumonia ?) This form ofthe disease is producedby taking improper food, at improper, or unusual times exces-a

sive ven ery, and n eglect of the calls ofnature . In other cases thedisease is produced by grief, by food which has a bad taste, or

produces disgust by which the in ternal heat is diminished and de

ranged, with the air, bile, and phlegm . This disease is characterizedby the person being affected with severe pain and emaciation of the

body, fever, and a burn ing sensation of the body. His intellect

becomes affected, and the person loses his strength .

”

The cough is at

320

first dry, is accompan ied with vomiting, and isfollowed by purulentand bloody expectoration . When these symptoms are present they

are rarely cured and in weak persons the disease is generally fatal,

unless when recent . In Old age the cough (Jarci Elisa) will remain ,

and not be removed.

When Kataeoa and Khyci Khsa are recent, with the assistance Ofa

good physician ,and proper remedies, a cure may be obtain ed.

When air, bile and phlegm produce these diseases separately, it

may be cured.

The Treatment of Khya Kasa isthe same as that of Jahhcih.

The treatmen t of Katazoa d a is as follows z—When the cough is

deranged air it is first to be treated by Oleaginousproduced byglysters,

differen t an imal broths,medicines, such as prepared ghee,

milk, and fruit . The patien t may also take the decocti on of

Shcilp arnz’

, (Hedysarum gangeticum,)

Prishniparn i’

,

Brihatt, (Solanum melongena,) and

Kantikdri, (Flacourtia sapida,)

with the powder oflong pepper .

Another electuary is prepared ofpowder of

Shunthi , (Dry ginger,)Shring i,

Kanci,

Long pepper,Bargha l,

Jagry, with Tila Oil .

When produced by bile give a purgative with sweet substances,

as

Tiori

Tribrit, (ConvolvulusTurpethum,) and

Sugar .

He should likewise take a decoction Of

Sara’

cli,

Panchamula,

with long pepper and raisins . His food should be the broth of

wild an imals, good rice, and b itter vegetables. His drink should

be prepared withBala, (Sida cordifolia,)Brihati

’

, (Solanum melongena,)Bdsaha, (Justicia ganderussa,) andDrdhshci, (Grapes )

These are to be mixed with two seers of water, which are to

be reduced by boiling to one : take this frequently. Milk with

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

22

being diminished. There is also derangement Ofthe mind, jaundice,cough with expectoration , and the loss oftaste, and smell . The patient sleeps con tinually, and the eyes become ofa pearl white colour .The person is fond of an imal food, and is desirous Of intercoursewith women . The following symptoms indicate the presence of

this disease when the patient’s voice changes, he sees in his dreamcrows, parrots, porcupines, peacocks, vultures, monkeys, and lizardsand he supposes he is mounted upon these an imals . He sees alsodry beds ofrivers, dry trees, as ifdestroyed by storms, and by fire .The characteristic symptoms are pain in the shoulders, and sides

ofthe chest . A burn ing feverish feel Of the palms of the hands

and soles ofthe feet is felt, which extends over the body .

Con sumption is sometimes produced by derangemen ts ofone of

the three humors. The symptoms produced by derangemen t Oftheair are hoarsen ess pain, particularly in the shoulders and sides ofthe

chest, and a hen t form ofthe body . The symptoms Ofbile are fever,the body burn ing, diarrhoea, and hemoptisis . The symptoms of

phlegm are a fuln ess and heaviness of the head, no appetite, cough,and the windpipe ispainful as ifbruised, with a change in the voice .When all the above symptoms are presen t at the same time, and in

the same person ; or when there is cough, diarrhaea, pain of the

chest and sides, hoarsen ess, loss of appetite and fever, or when

cough, asthma, and the discharge ofblood is present, with emaciation,the person will die . When these bad symptoms are absent the

physician may attend the person , but when the person has a strong

appetite, the food does not produce strength, flesh, or diarrhoea ; or

when the testicles or stomach swell, the person will not recover .When the person is strong, the di sease recent, and he has slight

fever ; when he can work, has a good appetite, is equal to the treat

men t, andfollows the judicious in structions ofthe physician, such a

person may recover .When the eye is white, when there is no appetite, with great

derangemen t ofbreathing ; when there is a great secretion Ofurine,with pain, the person will not recover . The other form ofcon sumption is produced by excessive ven ery, grief, old age, great fatigue, bytaking long journies on foot, by the debility produced by Old ulcers,and by the rupture ofthe organs ofrespiration, by which the bodywill become thin , and the disease declare itself. By excessive venerythe body becomes emaciated, debilitated, with the other symptoms

Ofdiminished semen, such as pain in the “

scrotum and pen is, impo~

teney, or a slight discharge Ofsemen , mixed with blood, when the

body becomes yellow, and the other humors are dimin ished.

When consumption is produced by g riefthe person remains com

‘ J

323

plain ing, with the other symptoms ofthe last form ; but without theevacuation and the symptoms Ofderanged semen . When the diseaseis produced by Old age the body becomes very thin, the person can

not labour, his organ s ofsen se and strength are dimini shed, hisbody shakes, he has no appetite, and his voice is like a broken pewterplate when struck . There is always a flow Of saliva from the

mouth, weakness, and heaviness and his eyes, nose, andmouth dis

chargemucus. The dejections, and surface ofthe body are in these

patients dry and rough . When the body is thin from great fatigue,

or walking the person cannot get up, his body changes in colour,

is painful and some parts lose their sensibility. The palate, throat,and mouth are dry. When produced by other kinds Of violen texercise or by a rupture ofthe lungs, the symptoms are the same as

above.When Old ulcers debili tate the body, by the great loss of blood,

when there is much pain, and there is little nourishment in . the

food which is taken, the disease is incurable . When consumption is produced by a rupture of the respiratory organs, as by the

frequent use ofthe bow and arrow, by carrying great weights, when

a weak person fights with a strong man, when jumping from a great

height, or when a person attempts to run after and seize an UK, a

horse, or a dacoit, or pull at a bow, or throw pieces ofwood or ston e,the disease is dangerous. In like mann er, loud reading, walkingquickly and to a great di stance, or swimming much, much horse ex

crcise, or running up a height or to a great distance, dancing'

quick

ly, or other bad customs, eating very dry articles, or very little food,

or only one kind offood, wi ll produce the disease . When thi s disease

is presen t there is great pain in the breast as ifit was wounded, pain

in the sides, and the body dries up, and shakes. By degrees the spiritand strength fail, and the colour ofthe skin is diminished or unnatu~

ral, there is no appetite, with fever, pain, dej ection ofmind, diarrhoeaand loss ofappetite . The sputa is ofa light blue or yellow colour,with a bad smell, and like the knot ofa piece ofrope, being unequal .At other times the sputa is mixed with blood. These symptoms in

crease daily, with pain in the chest, more blood is vomited, and thecough becomes more severe . When the body is much emaciatedfrom the drying up of the juices, indicated by the parched drymouth, &c ., the urine has the colour ofblood, and the sides, back

and thighs are painful . Consumption Often occurs in the progressof other diseases, and is always accompanied with danger, being

cured with much difficulty . When the internal heat is natural, andthe symptoms not severe, and remain but a few days, the person

{will be cured. Ifit continues one. year the cure will not be accom»

2 P 2

32 4

plished, and when the severe symptoms above enumerated are

presen t the person will die.

Treatment . When the appetite is good, and the person is not

very thin, and is careful, the physician may treat him . Ghee is tobe taken in ternally, which had been preparedwith Stiran, and othersweet, and nourishing medicines. This is to be followed by the use .

ofmild purgatives, and emetics. En emas are also to be given , anderrhin es to clean the head. The diet should consist of preparedbarley, flour, rice, with an imal broths when his appetite is good,

give nourishing food, particularly the flesh ofcrows, owls, brahmanykites, rats, mongooses, wild-cats, earth-worms, and all an imals thatburrow under the earth . These are to be boiled with Oil, salt,and peas. The bodies of the an imals are to be cut and bruised,andjuice extracted. Win e made ofgrapes is to be given, with fleshof asses, mules, horses, camels, elephants, prepared in the usualway. The ghee ofgoats and sheep, with preparations of barley, arevery proper . A mixture of ghee, honey, long-pepper, black pep

per, with chabba (a pungent bulbous root) , and Biranga (a vermif'

uge kind ofseed) , mixed with honey is also ofuse . The Tubushin

(or salt ofbalum, or carbonate Ofallumina) is mixedwith honey and

Til oil. Another mixture is made by the powder of

A'

saganda, (Physalis flexuosa, )Tila, (Sesamum orientale,) and

Masa, (Phaseolus radiatus, )with ghee ofgoats and honey . Garlick, pepper, &c ., are given in

gradually increased doses, and continued as alternative medicin es .

There are various mixtures recommended to nourish and give toneto the body, non e Ofwhich it is n ecessary to enumerate .It is recommended to eat the flesh, dej ections, and blood, and

live in the same house and in the same room with goats. The patient should carefully abstain from venery, avoid grief, anger, fatigue,and the other causes which produce the disease . He should also

court the society of brahmans, physicians, gurus, and study the

sacred writings. This is recommended in consequence ofthe danger

ofthe disease.

This disease is produced by nearly the same causes as Swdsa

(asthma) , and d a (cough) . Such as heavy and indigestable

food, or roasted, hot, and dry food or much food, or an impropermixture of food, or articles that increase cough, &c ., so as to pro

"

duce constipation . In other cases very dry things, cold things, orsituations, exposure to dust, smoke entering the mouth

‘

or anostrils ;

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

326

emetic and use fumigations with gram, raism, and other fragrant

medicines. The ashes of the bones of an imals, with hon ey, are

also used for the same purpose or the ashes of the feathers of

peacocks, with hon ey and ghee . Impure soda with lemon juice alsocures hiccup, and hot barley water with ghee gives relief. A de

coction ofmyrobalan is ofmuch use, as also long-pepper, sugar,Emblicamyrobalan, and ginger with hon ey . The fried flesh ofwild

pigeons, and ofdifferent birds, porcupines, deer, granhas, formed intobroths with acid fruits and ghee should be used. Purgatives, withsalt or sugar, and clysters are also in some cases usedwith advantage .

5 . Diseases of tfie Heart .

Painful affections of the heart R idraga (Angina pectoris are

produced by wan t ofattention to the calls ofnature, the use ofhotand dry food ; the improper mixture of food ; an intemperance ineating, or unusual food ; which causes indigestion, andderanges thehumors. The impure chyle is received into the heart, and pro

duces this painful disease ofwhich there are five varieties.When

produced by deranged air the patient feels various acute kinds of

pains, sometimes it is lancinating, at other times as ifthe heart wascut or torn . When produced by deranged 6ile there is much painin the heart, with thirst, heart-burning and dryness. This is succeeded by fainting, much sweating, dryn ess of the mouth, and

smoke appears to come out of the mouth . When produced byp filegm the patien t feels a heaviness of the heart, a discharge ofmucus from the mouth and nose, loss ofappetite, and a sweet taste

in the mouth .

When produced by worms there is a lancinating, or piercing painin the region of the heart nausea, vomiting, belching and loss of

appetite . The eyes become dark greenish, with emaciation of the

body. All these diseases of the heart terminate in emaciation,languor, loss ofappetite and strength, with giddiness.

Treatment . When produced by derangements of the air, the

patient should first have his body anointed with oil, and he should

take an oleaginous purgat ive followed by an emetic . He should n exttake the following mixture : Powdered long-pepper, cardamums,Bacha, asafoetida, saltpetre, rock-salt, dry ginger, and Jawdm

’

, with

the juice of acid fruits and whey-wine or vinegar . He should eat

good rice, with the broth ofwild animals properly prepared, and

occasionally use oleaginous glysters.

Wh en bite is deranged the patient should be treated as m

bilious fever, and all the decoctions and mixtures recommendedin this disease are

)

to be used. When p roduced by deranged

327

p lzlegm, take an emetic with a decoction ofnimb leaves and bacfia

with the mixture recommended above for derangements of the air.

He should also take a purgative ofTribri t with ghee .When produced by worms, the patien t should eat meats prepared

with ghee and rice, for three days and then he should take purga

tives,of salt, and a decoction ofaromatic plants. He should after

wards take wine with powdered Biranga . By thismeans the worms

will come out of the heart . He should n ext eat Biranga powder

( the best anthelmintic medicine) , with barley for food.

CLASS VI.

D iseases of the Abdomen .

l . Dysp ep sia, (Agni Mcindya .)

This disease is supposed to be produced by derangements oftheinternal fire . It has four varieties.

l st . When there is too little fire, it is called Manda Agni

when food is not digested, or only imperfectly . In this form, the

diseases ofphlegm are often present .

2ud. When the fire is too strong, as when bile is deranged, it

is called Tilt/ma Agni. In thi s case, little or even large quantities

offood are digested and the diseases ofbile are liable to occur .3rd. When the air is deranged the food is sometimes digested

and sometimes not ; from fire being sometimes in the natural state,and at other times it is deranged. In this case the disease is called

Bis/zama Agni, when other diseases ofair are present .

4th . Bfiasma Agni, (Bulimia,) when pungen t, sour anddry food

are taken for some time ; phlegm is diminished, and air is much

increased ; the internal fire, with the deranged air, absorbs the

liquid part of the body, and the food when taken is soon digested,

or reduced to ashes, and the person is not satisfied. This disease

is accompan ied with great thirst, dry cough, fainting, giddin ess,burning of the body and emaciation, with severe constipation, and

much perspiration .

When there is no increase or diminution of the air, bile, .

and phlegm, in the same person ; the fire remains in the naturalstate, and is called Sama Agni. This is not a disease, but is the

most favourable state of digestion, and is the condition in which !

food is properly digested ; when not taken in too small, or too .

large quantities. The divisions of the digestive organs into the

parts in which the food are received, Amasia, (stomach Agniaria,

‘

328

( the duodenum and in which the digested food is removedPakasia, (the small intestines,) is probably from the known struc~

ture ofthe intestines ofthe inferior animals .

This disease is produced by drinking much water, and eatingat unusual hours, when very little food is taken , and the callsof nature are resisted when the person is sleepy or is in a

passion, or is afraid, grieved, or fatigued at the time of eating ;and when he dislikes the food during the time ofeating . It is alsoproduced, when the person sleeps during the day, insteadofat n ight,or 1 8 i rregular in the time ofsleeping, and when at the usual time of

dinner, little is eaten . By such causes the food is not digested in

the‘

proper manner . When phlegm is deranged the food tastessweet, and is indigested when bile, the taste is sour, and the foodin the stomach produces eructations ; and air when deranged. causesthe partially digested food to be driedup, with pain in the stomach .

2 . Ajirna, (Indig estion )

This disease isdivided in to three varieties, A’

ma Ajirna, Bistabdha

Ajirna, and Bidagdiia Ajirna . When digestion is good, the foodis properly prepared for the use ofthe body, the eructations are free

and without taste, and the dejections are natural ; the body is lightand elastic, and the person is inclined to exertion , he has a good appetite and the food is tasty, and is accompan ied with thirst.When digestion is imperfect the person

’

s temper becomes bad,he is subj ect to anger, is fearful, and becomes covetous. The

’

food

of persons with a bad and hasty temper is not properly digested.

When indigestion occurs, there is a disinclination to exertion, with

giddiness the body is heavy, the colour ofthe skin bad, and thereis no passage ofair ; such a person does not like his food, hisunder

standing is impaired, and his bowels are either constipated or thereare 00pious dej ections.

The unfavourable symptoms ofthis disease are fainting, delirium,

vomiting, a c0pious discharge ofsaliva from themouth, with languor,and giddiness .

A’rna Ajirna . In this disease the body feels heavy, with a flow

of saliva and phlegm from the nose . The eyelids swell, and thereare eructations ofthe substances eaten, some time before . .

In BistabdfiaAjirna, the air is deranged, and produces severe painin the stomach, with flatulency . The stomach swells, there are no

dejections, no air escapes, and the person remains stupid, with hisunderstanding impaired, and pain over the body .

In Bidagdfia Ajirna, the bile is deranged, the person has soureructations, complains ofthirst, is giddy and often dozes.

~He com

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

30

Ginger,Ajamoda, (Ligusticum ajwaen, )Rock-salt,J irai t, (Cumin seed,)Krishnajiraka, (Nigella Indica or Sativa,) andH ingu, (Asafoetida,)

ofeach equal parts. Mix and reduce them to powder ; dose two scruples. Small quan tities of win e and hon ey mixed with water may

also be administered.

In despepsia, should the patien t have sour eructation s, with heartburn, dried grapes ( lt ismis) with myrobalan and honey, are to be

given in the form ofan electuary .

In Bhasma’

gni (Bulimia) the treatmen t should consist in takingpurgatives frequently followed by heavy, i ndigestable, and oily food

”

;

unleaven ed cakes ofrice, ghee, and sugar ; the flesh ofamphibious

an imals, as the buffalo, tortoise, &c . Fish is also recommended,mutton prepared with cocoanuts, &c . , barley with wax-flower and

water, ghee and sugar ; oily fruits, as walnuts, almonds, &c . , so as

to weaken the digestive powers which will cure the disease .

3 . A'

lasalca, (drum-belly. ) The abdomen in this disease be

comes enlarged and tight, with a rumbling noise, and the air passes

upwards, followed by a con stipation of faeces and air ; with greatthirst, eructations, and pain in the stomach .

4 . Bilambilra, or constipation , is somewhat different fromdrum-belly, as there is no swelling nor tightness of the abdomennor is the indigested food either rej ected by vomiting n or by stool

but is retained in the abdomen causing much pain there, and

likewise producing various diseases in differen t parts of the body .

Constipation is always difficult to cure .

5 . Bisitehilca, (Cholera ) The person first feels pain, as from in

digestion, in the abdomenhfollowed by frequent stools and vomiting,

great thirst, and pain ,in the abdomen, fainting, giddiness, yawning,

and cramps in the legs. The colour ofthe body is altered, aecom

pani ed with shivering, pain in the chest, and head-ache . The

unfavourable symptoms of cholera are, the lips, teeth and nailsbecome blackish, the person insen sible, with frequen t vomiting .

The eyes become sunken , voice feeble, and the joints loose, withgreat debility. Such a person may be taken out to be burn t,as he will not recover . The most fatal symptoms of cholera

are, wan t ofsleep, restlessn ess, shivering, no secretion ofurin e, and

insensibility.

This is certainly the same cholera which is still so common , and

fatal in this country ; but as a sporadic disease . It did not then

33 1

appear to have taken on that wide spreading epidemic form, whichit has done so frequen tly since the year 1 8 1 7 .

The treatmen t ofdrum-belly, con stipation and cholera are n earlythe same . In all it is to be commenced by exhibiting a strongemetic . In cholera it is recommended to apply the actual cauteryto the inner side of each ankle joint ; and hot external applicationsto the body . In all these casesfasting is enjoined, and after the eme

tics, medicines for correcting and soothing the pain in the stomach

are to be used, followed by purgatives. When the faintness and

purging has ceased, light easily digested food is to be given whenhungry ; such as conj ee mixed with stomachics, &c . clysters, withpurgatives, such as a decoction ofZ owkori (Convolvulus turpethum) ,castor oil, &c .

For internal exhibition, Sushruta recommends the followingTake of

Myrobalan,Bacha, (Orris root,)H ingu, (Asafoetida,)Indrajab, (Wrightea antidysenterica seed, )Gring lza, (small variety ofgarlic ofa red colour,)Sabara’ala, (rock-salt, ) and

Atibislza, (Atis or Bitula . )

The powder of these is to be mixed with warm water for use .

Mustard seed with sugar is likewise recommended, also Barlzolc or

Bz’

tlaban, or black salt .

Saindbaba, (rock-salt,)H inga, (Asafoetida,) with acid fruits .

These are to be mixed in water and taken two or three times a

day .

The treatmen t ofcholera must vary, and hence it is that so many

differen t plans of treatmen t are recommended according to the

prominent symptoms that are presen t .

Vomiting is to be produced by a decoction ofBae/za and salt .When there is much vomiting it is to be stopped by the followingpreparation : Take thirty-two ratis of each of the following me

dicines

Caranja, (Galedupa arborea, Roxb . )Nimba, (Melia azadirachta,)Gluei n

’

, (Minespermum glabrum,)Arjuna, (Pen taptera Arjuna,)Bacfia, (Orris root,)

with one pint ofwater boil to a quarter .2 Q. 2

332

check the vomiting . For cramps, take mustard oil, rock salt, and

Kasta, (Costus speciosus. ) Mix when warm, and rub it in to theparts effected

6 . Chardi, or Vomiting

Deranged air, bile, and phlegm, produce this disease as alsowh en the three humors are deranged, or when the person takes too

much fluid, or bad articles of food. When disgusting obj ects ar

seen , smelt, or eaten, itmay produce this disease . In other persons

it is produced by eating food too fast, or at unusual times, and by

great fatigue, grief, indigestion, andworms. The state ofpregnancylikewise produces vomiting .

Before vomiting occurs, the person complains of nausea, a cessation ofbelching, a watery and saltish discharge from the mouth, hedislikes food, becomes weak and unsteady in walking, which is followed by vomiting .

When produced by air the vomiting is frothy and scan ty, much

pain is felt in the back, and sides ofthe abdomen ; great exhaustion ,

and vomiting occurs, with a loud noise, and an astringen t taste inthe month . When bile produces vomiting, the person feels faint,thirsty, the mouth is dry and the head, palate, and eyes hot . He

sees indistinctly as if he was in darkness, his body turns round,

andhe vomits a bitter matter ofa yellow, hot, green , or sour nature .When phlegm is the cause the patient is heavy and dozes, his mouthis sweet, phleg m is discharged, thick, white, and copiously mixed

with mucus, and a horripilation is felt . The person has no appetite,and the fluid vomited is n either sal t, sour, nor bitter . When air,

bile, and phlegm are deranged, all the above symptoms are present .When produced by the sight ofdisagreeable objects, pregnancy or

worms, the humors will be deranged, and the variety of the disease

will be distinguished by their peculiar symptoms. When producedbyworms, there is frequen t eructation s, andmuch pain, accompan iedwith the symptoms of those diseases of the chest which are pro

duced by worms .

The unfavourable symptoms are great debility, and the mattervomited being mixed with blood and pus, or resembles the varie

gated colour of the peacock’s tail . There is also frequent vomitingin other dangerous diseases. All the varieties of vomiting are pro

duced by disorders of the stomach, and in the treatmen t fasting isalways to be enjoined. When vomiting is caused by indigestable

matter in the stomach, emetics and purgatives are recommended.

In all the varieties, light, dry and agreeable food shouldbe exhibited .

Different decoctions are also to be used according to the derange

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

34

There are six varieties ofthis disease, as when the air, bile, and

phlegm are deranged, it forms so many kinds when the three arederanged together, when produced by grief, and when caused bymucus in the abdomen . Dhanan twari says, there are many othervarieties as the symptoms vary from time to time .Before this disease developes itself a sharp pain is felt in the

chest, umbiliacus, and anus, and in the abdomen under the falseribs, which is succeeded by want ofappetite, languor, and lassitude

ofthe body ; no air passed by the anus, the patien t is costive, the

abdomen swelled, and every thing taken remain s undigested. Whenair produces the disease it commences with great pain the dej ectionsare ofa dark yellow colour, frothy, dry and frequen t, and in smallquan tities mixed with the indigested substan ces, which have beeneaten, pain is felt in the anus on the expulsion ofair, and the urineis scanty.

2 . When bile is deranged, the dej ections are expelled with an

effort . They have a bad smell, are hot, and ofa redyellowish colour,like the water in which flesh had been steeped. In other cases theyare ofa blue or red colour, and are accompan ied with thirst, dozing,heat ofbody, free perspirations, and t enesmus at the time oftheevacuation . There is often in such cases inflammation ofthe rectum

with violen t fever .

3 .When phlegm is deranged, the person dozes, the dejections are

white, thick, and constipated, mixed with phlegm . He has no appctite, complain s of languor and lassitude with dozing, and has fre

quent calls to stool, which are passed without any noise .

4 . When the above three humors are deranged the dej ectionsare of differen t colours. The patien t is very thirsty with languor,dejection ofmind, and drowsin ess . This kind ofdysen tery is fatal

when children and old people are attacked ; and in all cases it isdifficult to cure, and will cause much vexation to the physician :The symptoms will vary according as one or other of the aboveforms predominate . The cause of the disease will likewise varythe symptoms .

5 . When grief produces dysentery, the person has the in ternalfire ofp akasia deranged by the watery vapours, which are formed bygrief, and passing into p alcasia mixes with thefire, and deranges thebright blood of the part . This blood is mixed with the dej ection s

,

often becomes putrid, and is expelled with them . In other cases itis discharged by itself. Sometimes it has a bad smell, in other casesit has not . The cure is tedious, and physicians are vexed by itsobstinacy . Ifthe dej ections are frequent, the cure will be very difficult .

335

6 . The sixth form is when it is produced by mucus, which deranges the stomach and is discharged frequently ofvarious colours.

There are also two forms ofdysen tery, on e being acute (A'

ma

ap cilca) or crude, and the other chron ic (Pa/raftisar) or mature .

Acute Dysentery,

This form is known by the dej ection s sinking in water, and beingvery foetid. In the p alca variety the Opposite symptoms to the

above are most prominen t, and the abdomen does not feel heavy .

The unfavourable symptoms are a stiffness ofthe body, dej ections

ofa dark bluish colour, like the ripe rose-apple in other cases the

colour ofthe dej ections is like that ofthe lime, ofghee, or ofoil, of

tallow or marrow ; in other cases they are like milk or curds ; or

like water in which flesh had been washed or black, blue, oryellowor like the colour of these three mixed together in different proportions or like thewater ofMadar . In other cases they are very thin ,ofa foetid smell, and cold or of the colour ofpeacock’s feathers, orthat ofthe rainbow, or dry and hot . Sometimes the dej ections are

consistent, or like the brain, or like the refuse of well washed and

beaten bark (fibrous) , or its decoction , and are evacuated in largequan tities .

When the sick person is thirsty and hot, breathes through

the nose, has hiccough, and pain in the side, and skin , with loss of

memory, dosing and stupor, the disease will be fatal . Such a person

has no inclination to do any thing, and remains stupid and complains

ofpain in the anus, like that ofa ripe boil . He speaks incoheren tlyand becomes insensible, with an involun tary discharge from the anus

such person s will not live . When the person is very much reduced

in flesh, is cold and the abdomen distended, with pain in the anus

such a person should not be attended by the practitioner, as the dis

ease is incurable .

The physician should be able to distinguish the symptoms of

A'

ma, or acute, from those ofchron ic dysentery . Without this he

will not be able to treat the disease properly.

In the acute form the person should abstain from food, and verylight medicines should be admin istered to improve the dej ections.

Ifthere is much pain and flatulency, he should take an emetic of

salt, long-pepper, and hot water . After vomiting, very light food,ofa farinacious kind, is to be given . The physician should be care

ful in the acute stage not to stop the stools by astringen ts, or the

like, as it will produce Gulma, anasarca, dispepsia, piles, and drumbelly. When the stools are frequen t, and very scan ty, he may take

myrobalan If the watery stools are copious, emetics,and the following medicines are to be administered. A specimen

336

of these will only be given , as so very numerous receipts of this

kind are given in the Hindu MSS. Take equal parts of

Hari talci, (Myrobalan , )Atibisa, (Atis or Batula,)H ingu, (Asafoetida,)Soubor chullon, (rock-salt, )Bacha, (Orris root, Acorus calamus,)

powder, mix, and give halfa told or more, according to the ag e

ofthe patien t, for a dose, with a little hot water, wine, or conj ee .

When deranged bile produces this disease, heating and stimulat

ing medicines are not to be given but he should take conj ee, and

agreeable bitter medicines. After some days offasting, when he has

some appetite, such bitters as

Atis, (turmerick,)Atibislia, (a plant A/cnud/i i, B .)Indrajab, ( the seed ofWrightea antidysenterica,)Pata,

Rascinjana, (Sulphurate ofan timony, )

are to be formed into a decoction , and given two or three times a day

with honey. In cases ofbloody flux, boiled rice is given for food

without water . In this mann er the acrimony of the disease is

supposed to be absorbed by the dry rice .When the symptoms yield to these remedies the urine increases,

and is discharged without the passage offaeces, which are dischargedfreely and without pain , the appetite is restored, and when thereis no uneasiness in the abdomen the person will recover . Whenthere is swelling of the hands, feet, and joints, without any secretion ofurine, and the dej ections are very hot, the disease is con

sidered to be increasing in violen ce .In the chron ic state when the stools are frequent,

astringent medicin es are to be given as follows . Take of

Sa’

mang ai, (Lycopodium imbricatum, a sensative plan t,)Datalcip usp a, (the flowers ofGrislea tomentosa, )Manjistai, (Madar, )Lodra, (Symplocus racemosa, )Musta/ca, (Cyperus rotundus,)Sdlmulibesta, (a kind ofkino,)R od/am , (a tree called Led/z) ,Darimata, (bark or shell of the pomegranate fruit,)

mix equal parts ofthesemedicin es in powder, and give halfa told twoor three times a day . When there is much pain, with costiveness,and blood is passed with mucus, take milk boiled with three pints

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

338

chest and the abdomen , (scrobiculus cordis,) sometimes the swell~

ing is fixed, and at other times it is moveable .

* There are fourkinds of this disease in the male, three by the derangemen t of air,

bile, and phlegm, another by the morbid mixture of the three, and

the fifth kind is peculiar to females from the reten tion of the

menses .

Gulma is ushered in by much belching, costiven ess, loss ofappc

tite, difficulty ofmaking water, fulness ofthe body, with flatulence,

and indigestion . These symptoms are followed by others produc ~

ed by the use of food and drink ofa dry n ature, by a kind ofwine

which produces roughn ess ofthe surface ofthe body, by improperfood, or by eating it at irregular times, or eating too much , by takingunsuitable exercise, and by n eglecting the calls ofnature, such as

sneezing, and dej ections, grief, accidents, bruises, or by too great

evacuations or fasting . The symptoms ofGulma, produced by air,

are its being situated in the abdomen, in the umbiliacus, or sides,and its moving about . It is sometimes small, and at other timeslarge ; sometimes round, at other times long sometimes the pain isslight, at other times severe, with constipation , dryness ofthe throatand mouth the skin ofthe body having a dark yellow colour, andfever commencingwith chilliness. The pain in the breast and sidesof the abdomen, shoulders, or head are con siderable, particularlyafter the food is digested, but the person feels better immediatelyafter eating . Astringen t, dry, bitter, or pungent things increase the

complaint .Bile . When the disease is produced by eating sour, bitter, hot,

or other things ofthe same kind ; by living on dry food ; by anger

by drinking much win e, remaining much in the sun , or n ear thefire by collections of indigestedfood, or diseased blood in the abdomen

, the bile'

is deranged producing the Pitta Gulma with thefollowing symptoms . The disease commenceswith fever, thirst, and

a red colour ofthe mouth and skin . When digestion is going on,there is much pain , andperspiration, with a severe burn ing sensation

in the pit ofthe stomach, which is tender on being touched, or it is

followed by a swelling in the stomach, which is painful like a boil .

Pli legm is deranged by cold, or by eating indigestable or

oleaginous articles of food particularly when the person does nottake exercise, eats too much, and sleeps too long during the day .

When phlegm is thus deranged it produces coldn ess and languor

Under the term Gulma are arranged very different diseases : as

tumors of the pylorus, partial enlargements of the liver, and diseases ofthe large intestines.

339

of the body, with low fever, nausea, cough, no appetite, and henvin ess ofthe body, without much pain . The ball gradually becomesharder, and larger .When air, bile, and phlegm are deranged, and are produced by

the causes given above, there will be severe pain , great heat of

body, and the Gulma or swelling feels hard like a stone, and islarge, and quickly produces the heat of the body —so severe isthis form of the complai n t, that the person is in great distress .

His body becomes thin, with a bad colour, and he has no appetite,

nor strength . Such a disease is incurable .

There is a kind of Gulma so like pregnancy that it may deceivephysicians, unless they observe the precaution of not giving medicine until after the tenth mon th, ( the supposed time ofutero-gesta

The unfavourable symptoms ofGulma are its enlarging so as to

fill the abdomen and the increase being rapid, and the swellingbeing surrounded by vessels, with much pain in the breast, as well

as in the part . When the swelling is of the figure of a turtle,when there is much debility, loss ofappetite, nausea, cough, vomit

ing, restlessness, fever, thirst, coma, and the discharge of mucus

from the mouth and n ose, without either taste or smell, such

'

a

person will n ot recover .When a person with Gulma has fever, asthma, vomiting, diarrhoea,

and swelling ofthe breast, umbiliacus, wi th swelling of the hand or

feet, the disease will be fatal .When after asthma, cough , thirst, with no appetite, much pain ,

and the swelling has suddenly disappeared with much weakness,

My Pandit related an instructive case in point . A young woman he

came pregnant, andfor the un comfortable sensations attending that stateconsulted a physician ,

who after trying various remedies , without effect,one ofwhich was thrusting a red hot iron in to the tumor, which is fre

quently done for spleen , and sometimes with good effect by raising itsactivity : but in the present case the woman escaped. The physician finding that the disease did not yield to his treatment declared the case to beone ofGulma, for which n othing could be done, and that it would ihcrease, and she would die with much pain, and violent shrinking . As

this frightened very much the other females the patient was removed toa distan t room, and in that state ofanxiety passed some months, untilparturition commen ced. That was con sidered as the approach ofdeath,and not to defile the house she was put out into the compound upon a

mat and her female friends deserted her. In this state she was deli

vered ofa female child to the astonishment ofall, and to'

thedisgrace of

the medical man .

2 R 2

40

the person will soon die . Such cases are in some of the HinduMSS. said to be cured by the use of a few medicin es, many

ofwhich have very little effect on the system, and consequently on

the di sease .Treatment . When air is deranged the application ofunctious

substan ces to the surface of the body are to be used ; but parti

cularly over the tumor, after which oily purgatives are to be used,such as castor-oil, and oily clysters .

When bile produces Gu lma unctious remedies are to be usedexternally, and he should take in ternally Kdlcalcidi * preparedwith ghee, followed by purgatives m ixed with sugar .When the bowels are constipated, milk with ginger is to be given

and the application to the abdomen ofan earthen pot filled withwarm water wi ll be useful .

Phlegm. In this form, ghee prepared with a decoction of Pi

p ulcidi, a mixture composed of long-pepper, and other heating

medicines. These are to be taken for some time internally, followedby strong purgatives and en emas . When air, bile, and phlegm, are

diseased at the same time, the class of symptoms that appear most

promin ent will decide which of the above forms of treatment is tobe preferred. When the disease is produced by reten tion of the

menses, as sometimes occurs in women soon after delivery, eatingimproper food, or after abortion , or during the flow of the menses

air is deranged, which preven ts the flow of the menses, and pro

duces Gulma . The symptoms of this form are the same as thatproduced by diseased bile, an d at the same time the swelling

moves about like a ball of clay, with the symptoms ofpregnancy.When a round swelling is felt in the abdomen ofa woman , the same

as in utero-gestation, and it is so painful that the part cannot be

touched, you are not to use remedies for the cure of this disease

for ten months, and then you may prescribe medicines for it . The

treatment of this variety is the same as that for derangemen ts ofthe three humors in other parts of the body, combin ed with those

for Gulma produced by bile with amenagoge medicines, such as

potassa prepared from the Palcisa tree (Butea frondosa) . This isto be mixed with ghee and taken in ternally, so as to separate anddischarge the coagulated blood, which is supposed to be pen t up,and produce the disease . Inj ections in to the vagina of the female

,

with ghee prepared with long-pepper, black-pepper, and other hotmedicines, are also recommended.

Amedicinal mixture ofan antibilious nature . It is principally composed ofa medicine said to be brought from Nepal.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

342

Birang a, (a vermifuge seed like black-pepper,)Sig ri, (Silvius singio,)Kamp ila, (a purgative root like rhubarb,)F ateci, (yellow myrobalan ,)Tribrit, (Convolvulus turpethum,)Amblabitasa, (Rumex vincarius,)Surussafl, (Ophiorrhiza mangos, )Ashwalcarna, (Shorea robusta,)Souborclisilofi, (an impure soda, )

one tola IS a dose, and may be taken with wine . This will atrelieve the pain . The following is another mixture . Take of,

Pri ti/ca, (Nigella Indi ca,)Agjagki, (Cumin seed, )Cbobilrci, (Orris root, Piper chavya,)Jawcin i, (Ligusticum ajwaen ,)Marion, (black-pepper, )Pip a li, (long -pepper, )Sunti, (dry ginger, )Chitra/ca, (Plumbago zeylan ica, )

powder, and take it with warm water, wi n e, or hot conj ee or with

the juice ofthe lemon , a decoction ofprun es, or with asafoetida, or

sugar .The Diet in this disease should be milk and oleaginous sub

s tances, and soup made ofthe flesh ofwild birds, and ofburrowinganimals.

-VVine-whey is also ofuse with butter-milk, curdled-milk,black-salt, and vin egar, with diaphoretics and purgatives .

2 . When the disease is produced by fasting the person may takehotmilk, light rice puddings, or an imal brothswith ghee . When deranged bile produces this disease, it is causedby eating n itre or heating salts ofthe same kind, hot food like white mustard-seed, pepper,or the like different kinds ofwines roasted articles or oils, or shootsof the young bamboo, or oil cake, sour or bitter articles ; greatanger, remain ing near the fire, exposure to the sun, great fatigue,excess in ven ery, or any thing that is very

“

heating is to be care

fully avoided. These differen t causes derange bile, and produce that

form of Sul which is felt in the umbiliacus . In this case it pro

duces thirst, his senses are dull, body hot, with great grief, and se

vere pain in the umbiliacus . He perspires much; and he is giddy and

sometimes faints, with dryness ofthe mouth, is eager to remain iné

a

cold situation , and to take cold articles offood. Accessions ofpainoccur at noon andmidnight, during great heat of the weather, andat the beginning ofthe rains. The pain is diminished during the

343

cold hours of the day, when the body is cool ; and when cold or

bitter things are taken , especially when they feel grateful theymitigate the symptoms .

In the treatmen t mild vomits are to be used, and then drink cold

water, and every thi ng cooling, while warm articles are avoided .

Cooling things are to be applied to the pain ed part, as ston e, silver,copper, or vessels filled with cold water . He should use purgativesand barley, rice, milk, ghee, the juice of the flesh ofwi ld animals,

birds and aqueous plan ts andmedicines that diminish bile, such as

the juice of

Parasalca, an acid fruit, (Xylocarpus granatum,)Mirdilcci, grapes,)Kharjura, ( the fruit ofPhoenix Sylvestris . )

3 . When deranged phlegm produces Sul, it is caused by eatingthe flesh ofthe rhinoceros or buffalo, fish or any kind offood obtainedfrom water, whey, milk, or butter-milk or sugarcandy, rice cakes,or sesamum-seed, oil, rice, and other articles of food which are

of a cooling or heavy nature, as Mds/cala’

i . All these articlesincrease phlegm, and thus may produce Sul . In these cases the

patien t complains ofn ausea, cough, langour, and wan t ofappetite,

phlegm proceeds from his nose andmouth, the pit of the stomach

is cold, and his body is very heavy with head-ache . In such casesafter eating great pain occurs, especially at sun o rise, and during thespring or dew mon ths .

The cure of Sul produced by phlegm is to commen ce by exhi

biting eu emetic so as to remove from the stomach what he haseaten . For this purpose, long-pepper, boiled in water may be used,and apply hot and dry remedies to the part . A hot regimen is to be

followed ; such as the use of long -pepper, and dry ginger, withthe following mixture . Take equal parts ofthe root of the

Golrra, (Ruellia longifolia,)Marietta

, (black-pepper, )Pip ula, ( long-pepper,)Sunti, (dry ginger,)Bacfia, (Orris root,)Pé tai, (Akunda, a plant, )Ka trafiini, (black Hellbore, )Chitra/ca, (Plumbago zeylan ica, )

mix together in water, whi ch is to be boiled until reduced to a quarter . This is given internally with n itre .

This last decoction will be found ofgreat use in that kind ofSat

which is p roduced by derangements ofair, phlegm, and bile . It willcure it, as wind disperses clouds. - Inall formsofthe disease castor~

344

oil, wine, whey, milk or lemon juice, will be ofuse . There are also

differen t remedies, recommended according to the situation of the

pain, whether it be in the scrobiculus cordis, bladder, or region

ofthe heart.4 . When air, bile, and phlegm are deranged together the symp

toms of the three above forms are combined in one person . Whenso deranged in one spot a physician will know it by examining thepart . This form gives much distress, like poison or thunder, and

such a person should be avoided by the physician as incurable .

The treatmen t of this form is the same as above, varying the

remedies according to the severity of the symptoms of air, bile,and phlegm .

5 . When Sul is produced by indigestion the symptoms are the

same as produced by deranged phlegm . There is a rumbling nmse

heard in the abdomen , nausea and vomiting, the body feels heavyand cold, as if covered with a wet cloth, and the breathing is difficult . The person can get n either appetite nor sleep, he is costivewith severe pain in the abdom en , and there is a discharge ofphlegm,

from the nose, mouth, &c .

In thi s variety first use a vomit,enjoin total fasting, with such

remedies as increase the internal heat or appetite . The other re

medics “seafor Gulma may be given with advan tage, particularlywhen the symptoms stated under the form produced by derangemen ts in phlegm, appear in this variety .

In order to distinguish the differen t forms ofSul the practitionershould know that air is chiefly affected when the pain is principallyconfined to the pelvic region . When bile is much deranged, thepain is principally felt in the umbiliacal region and when phlegmis deranged it produces pain in the breast, sides of the abdomen,and in the scrobiculus cordis. When air, bile, and phlegm are

deranged the pain is felt in all the above situations. When phlegmand air are deranged there is severe pain in the pelvic region, sidesofthe abdomen , and back . When bile and phlegm are deranged thepain is in the scrobiculus cordis, and between the chest and the umbiliacus. When air and bile are deranged there is great heat ofthebody, and inflammatory fever . Sul may be curedwhen it is producedby either air, bile, or phlegm, being deranged singly . When two are

diseased, with difficulty but when all the three are deranged at thesame time it is incurable . In Sal some other forms of diseasemayaccompany and complicate it such as severe pain , thirst, fain tingfits, spasm ofthe intestines with costiveness, the body is heavy and

there is no appetite, with cough, asthma, and hiccough . O the rshastras enumerate the following symptoms, severe pain in the

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

346

variety are, when air is deranged, the abdomen swells, a gurglingnoise is heard in the abdomen , the dejections and urine are constipated, with lassitude and shivering, and oleaginous and hot medicin es give relief. Bile, when much deranged in this form of Sul,

produces thirst, heat, restlessness, and copious perspirations ; and

when sour, pungent, or salt things are eaten the pain is increased,and when cold food is eaten they give relief. When phlegm is.

much deranged there is vomiting, nausea and dulness ofthe intel

l ect, with pain ,not severe, but remains many hours in which case

pungen t or bitter things give relief. When two of these are de

ranged the respective symptoms are combined, and when three are

In the intermissions the patient feels well, and all the fun ctions areperformed as when in perfect health . The tongue is clean , but some

times parched, appetite good, and alvine secretion s healthy and regular.

I have n ot been able to obtain any certain eviden ces of the causes

which produce this disease . It appears to be the effect ofa combination ,

individually slight but when occurring in a peculiar constitution , pro

duces this distressing complaint . I have generally known it to occur

in. the young and robust male ; to be aggravated by exposure to the

weather, and by eating indigestable food, sleeping on the damp ground,&c . The accession seems often er to occur when the organs are in a stateofinactivity, than from causes increasing the n ervous susceptibility. Ihave not seen it in females, although there is n o reason why they shouldnot be also effected; and I am informed that they are sometimes attacked but in a lessviolent degree . Person s ofa n ervous temperament are ingeneral n ot so liable to this disease as might be supposed.

The severe pain which occurs in paroxysms, the relief obtained bypressure, and the absence of participation in the circulating sys

tem,

indicates, with sufficient accuracy, the disease being of a nervous na

ture . But we are still unacquainted with the peculiar diseases ofthe largeplexuses of the sympathetic n erve, situated in the scrobiculus cordisand its n eighbourhood, with those ofthe 8th pair

, &c . These n erves seemto be affected in this disease, much in the same manner as we sometimesfind those of the face, arm, thigh, &c . The resemblan ce of paroxysmsofgastroperiodynia to those ofTic-douloureux is marked, n ot only in thenature and severity ofthe pain, but in the means ofrelief, and the difficulty of curing both diseases. The severe paroxysms ofotolg ia, whichso frequently occur in this country, some varieties ofcolic, &c . form examples ofthe same species, varying more from the situation , an d nature of

the parts affected, than from any difference in the disease itself.The diet I have found most efficacious in gastroperiodynia is liquid

farinacious food, with boiled milk, which in some cases I have seen di

minish the violen ce of the paroxysms . In strong and plethoric personsblood should be taken from the arm and may sometimes be repeated

g enerally, or locally with advantage . During the paroxysms, pressure,

347

deranged the person will die . When such a person’

s flesh, strengthand intern al fire are much diminished the disease will be fatal .The treatment should consist of emetics followed by bitters,

purgatives, and enemas. The following powders are also recom

mended. Take equal parts of

Birang a, (virmifuge seed,)Sunti, (dry ginger,)Pz

'

p ulz’

, (long-pepper,)Marz

’

cfia, (black-pepper,)Dan tz

'

, (Croton polyandrum, )Tribrit, (Convolvulus turpethum, )Cfiitraka, (Plumbago zeylan ica, )

make them into an electuary with sugar, and take it every morning

with warm water .Another remedy in this form ofthe diseases is

Sunti, (dried ginger,)Tila, (Til-seed, ) andjagry, which is made into an electua

ry with milk .

Annadraba’

lca, is another form ofSal, in which the pain occursafter eating, or during or after digestion . When present itis not removed by following a proper regimen

, or eating good or bad

food but after vomiting bile the patient feels better, but the paincon tinues under all circumstan ces of food, &c .

This form is to be treated with fasting, and the administration of

emetics . A mixture of Emblic myrobalan , yellow myrobalan , and

ginger, with the mixture ofiron (carbonate) is ofuse .

Another mixture is formed by mixing equal parts of

Birang a, (vermifuge seed, )flfusta, (Cyperus rotundus, )Haritaki, (Myrobalan , )

heat, tinctures, ether, peppermint, anodynes, particularly opium, henbaneand camphor, are of use in dimin ishing the severity of the pain smalldoses ofcalomel and opium are also ofuse .

During the intervals the oxyd of zinc and bismuth, carbonate ofiron ,sulphate of qu

inine , are also in some cases of use ; but it must be ac

knowledged that the relief is often ofa temporary nature ; and i n some

patients dimin ish, in effect, or in some cases seem to aggravate and pro

long the succeeding paroxysms . I have found the appli cation ofmoxa,blisters to the loins, and fomentations only ofuse temporarily ; and that

the probability ofeffecting the cure ofthis disease by medicine, depends

on the severity and frequen cy of the attacks, and particularly on the

length oftime the disease has existed.

2 s 2

348

A'

mla/ti, (Emblic myrobalan,)Bibitaka, (Belerie myrobalan)

Gulancha, (Menispermum glabrum, )

Dantz’

, (Croton polyandrum,)Tribrit, (Convolvulus turpethum,)Santz

'

, (dry ginger,)Pip ulz

’

, (long-pepper,) and

Maricfi, (black-pepper . ) These medicines are to be

mixedwith the powder ofJawdm’

, (Ligusticum ajwaen ,) and the carbonate of iron and water . The regimen in this form of the disease

should consist of prepared rice in the form of conj ee, and sugar

and ghee with conj ee .

Other shdstras recommend promoting perspiration by hot baths,or vapour baths, by medicines to promote digestion, such as n itre,impure soda, and alum . It is also recommended to take eight mcisd

ofdried ginger, the root ofthe castor oil plan t and barley, andmix

them in a mortar with halfa ser ofwater . This is boiled down to

a quarter, and is to be tried as a dose and it will gen erally relieve,

or remove the pain ofSul.

1 1 . Worms,

There is an internal sort ofworms, and another which appears

Upon the surface of the body . Others say that there are four

kinds one is external and produced by filth on the surface others

are internal and are produced by phlegm,by blood, andby the faeces .

There are twen ty varieties of worms, each ofwhi ch has a particular

name . When produced externally by fil th, the insect is like a

small Til-seed wi th many feet, and is gen erally found in the hair

and clothes.They are called juka (lice) . They produce small very

itchy pimples, and sometimes a large boil .

When phlegm produces the worms internally, it is deranged byindigestable food,

particularlywhen taken at improper times, or wi th

much sugar, or sweetmeats, ormuch liquids, as vinegar or sour food,

curdled milk, vegetables, and unleavened flour when taken daily and

frequently. A sedentary life, and sleeping during the day predi s

poses to worms.

When blood produces worms many diseases are the consequence .

In this case it is caused by improper mixtures, or by indigestable

food, or certain vegetables, &c . The worms are produced in the blood.

The general symptoms of internal worms are fever, palen ess, and

discoloration of the surface, severe pain , or Sul, especially in the

breast, with languor, giddiness, loss of appetite, and diarrhoea .

When produced by phlegm they are usually found in the stomach

andresemble earth-worms, andwhen very large they pass,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

350

The thirteen first kinds of internal worms are curable, but theseven last are very difficult, or are incurable . The treatment in thiscase is to commence with the admin istration of an emetic preparedwith ghee and Samsddz

’

,which is amixture formed ofvarious stimu

lants and bitter remedies . Strong cathartics are then to be given with

clysters. The oil ofBirang a, made of vermifuge seeds, is to be

given with salt, and with the decoction ofBiranga . The patien t

should at the same time be careful to avoid such food, and other causes

which promote the generation of worms . He should take of the

juice or paste ofthe Pala’

sa seeds (Butea frondosa) , with the decoction ofthe Balanga seeds. The juice ofthe leaves ofParibadraka

(Erythrina fulgens) , with honey or the juice ofthe leaves ofPa iu

m (Salincha B.) or the powder ofBiranga with hon ey . Birang a

powder should be mixed with the bread and used by the patient .

Differen t preparations of iron , or the powdered root oflong-peppertaken with goat’s urin e are of use . Tin is recommended to be -rub

bed upon a rough ston e, and the small particles thus removed from

the mass is taken in whey . The treatmen t in cases ofinsects at theroots of the hair, causing them to fall of, is the same as that for

baldness. The worms in the blood are to be treated, as for Le

prosy.

Patients with worms should live on food mixed with pungen t

andbitter food, while the following articles offood are avoided milk,flesh, ghee, curdled-milk, vegetables with leaves, acids, sweetmeats,and/

cold articles offood.

1 2 . R etention ofDiscfiar’

g es, (Addbarta) .

If a man wish long life he should attend to the calls of nature,

while he avoids indulgence ofthe passions, particularly anger, pride,lust, revenge, and covetousness .

There are thirteen kinds of diseases produced by checking theefforts ofnature to relieve herself. As by stopping the evacuationofair, faeces, urin e, by yawning, tears, sneezing, belching, vomiting,semen , appetite, thirst and abstain ing ‘

from liquids, the stoppingofbreath, watching, and another variety ofindisposition is producedby taking badfood. When these are not indulged in

,it produces

the constipation which forms this class ofdiseases .

1 . When air (Ap anna brig/u) is stopped in its passage through theanus it produces a swelling in the abdomen , severe pain, difficulty of

breathing, head-ache, hiccough, cough, discharge ofmucus, difficulty ofdiglutition anda vomiting ofbile, phlegm, orfaeces with

‘

consti

pation , and severe pain in the anus followed by a discharge of‘

air.

2 . Dejections. When the faeces are confined a gurgling noise is

35 1

heard in the abdomen, with pain in the anus, as ifthe part was cut ;the dejection s are confined, as air ascends, and sometimes stercoraceous vomiting occurs. It is to be treated as for An imal .3 . Urine . When confined, there is severe pain in the pelvis,

urethra, anus, scrotum , groin s, navel, and sometimes in the head,when the urin e is discharged in small quan tities with pain . The

bladder swells, and the body remain sbent forward. Sabarciiala, (impure soda,) and other such salts, wine, cardamum seeds, with win eand milk, are to be given . The juice ofthe fruits ofA

'

mlalcz’

, (Emblicmyrobalan ) with water or the juice ofthe sugar-can e, and the juiceofthe faeces ofa horse or ass are recommended ; as also the seeds ofcucumber with water and salt, and other diuretics .

4 . When g ap ing is checked the diseases of the n eck, throat,and of the head are produced ; with other diseases of air, such as

diseases ofthe eyes, nose, ears, and mouth . To remove this anoin t

the body with oil or ghee, previously heated.

p

a . When tears are confin ed they flow when the person is veryhappy, or very sorrowful and when confined the head becomesheavy, and various severe eye diseases are produced. In such patients the phlegm dischargedfrom the nose andmouth is without smell

or taste . In this form anoint the body with warm oil, a pigmen t of

a hot nature is to be applied to the border of the eyes to make them

discharge the tears such as cloves rubbed up with honey and

strong errhin es, such as pungent smells will also be found useful .6 . When sneez ing is confined, diseases of the head, eyes, nose,

and ears are produced. Tickle the nose with something, so as to

produce sneezin g, and look at the sun so as to allow his rays tofall upon the mucous membran e ofthe nostrils.

7 . When belching is confined, the throat and mouth feel as if

distended, and very painful the person ’

s speech is not intelligible,

air is confined by the mouth, anus, &c . , and the disease producesthe diseases of air. A cheroot is to be formed of spices and ghee ,which is to be smoked. Wine with soda, the juice of lemon and

wine are likewise to be admin istered.

8 . Should vomiting be impeded it produces leprosy, loss of

appetite, jaundice, fever, great sensibility of the skin and nausea .

In such cases ghee is to be externally applied and internally admin

istered, mixed with saltpetre or salt . Emetics should also be

used.

9 .When semen is confined, the bladder, rectum, and testicles

swell, and become painful . The urine is confined and is discharged

in small quantities with pain, or the urin e has a white deposit, and

the semen is discharged involuntary . The other diseasesmay occur

352

that deranged Semen produces; In this case certain diuretics and

decoctions with milk are to be admin istered, and the person is to

approach his favourite wife .

10 . When the app etite is not gratified, it is followed by drowsin ess, pain as if the part was crushed, loss of appetite, fatigue, and

the eye is dim . In this disease anoint the body with warm gheeand give it in the food, with hot drinks .

1 1 . When the thirst is not gratified, the mouth and throat aredry, the hearing becomes dull, and pain is felt in the breast . To

remove this the person should take fresh conj ee or barley water,with sugar and lemon juice .

1 2 . When the breathing is difficult from being confined from

the fatigue produced by severe exercise, the food appears to stick inthe throat, the understanding is impaired which produces ( Gnlma) ,and there is afeeling ofhard lumps in the abdomen . In such cases,rest, and gruel are to be enjoined with animal broths .

13 . When sleep is not gratified, it is followed by yawning, and

pain of the body, as if it was crushed. The eyes and head feelheavy, and coma supervenes. Give milk, employ soothing language,and

“

what promotes sleep .»

The air ofthe stomach when dry, astringen t, sour, or bitter food

i s eaten, produces quickly Uddbarta, and deranges the canals ofair,urine, faeces, blood, phlegm, fat, and the vessels which feed them .

Air closes these canals and produces pain in the breast and pelvis,with heaviness of the body, and no appetite, with scanty evacua

tions.

The retention ofthe above discharges produces pain of the chest

and abdomen, nausea, lazin ess, and the air, urine, and dejectionsare evacuated with pain . Ifproduced by phlegm there is difficultand noisy breathing, and the phlegm is discharged from the mouthand nose . ( Coryza) . In this case there is n either taste nor smell ;and the body feels hot, with dej ection ofmind. The person isinsensible, and complains of thirst, fever, vomiting, hiccough, and

head-ache . The person is deaf, the body swims round, followed bythe other symptoms produced by deranged air. The life of such a

person should be considered hopeless, when there is much thirst,great weakness, and languor, severe pain in the abdomen , and ster

coraceous vomiting . All kinds ofUd’cibarta are to be treated as

diseases ofair, so as to open the closed up passages, and the bodyin such cases of disease should be anointed with oil and salt, and

p repared ghee should be taken internally, enemas should also beused. If the disease is not cured by these medicines, hot applications are to be placed upon the abdomen, followed by oleaginous

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

354

are burning . The person has a dn ust for food, is feverish, and

itchy eruptions, andpatches appear over the body .

Ifthis disease be recent it may be curedwith difficulty and if

old, it will often be incurable . There are three forms ofthe disease

when air or phlegm are deranged ; when air and phlegm or whenphlegm alon e is deranged, which will be distinguished by the ex

perienced physician .

When a ir i s diseased the person speaks foolishly, IS affected withsynCOpy, and his body i s languid, with slight uneasiness and pain ;

The room he is in appears dark —in oth er cases he is still, is always

forgetting, and complains ofsevere pain ofthe bodyPhlegm. In this form phlegm is always discharged from the

mouth, the body feels heavy, the person is languid, has n o appetite,

the body is cold, and the person is lazy and vomits. The surface

of the body feels as if it was rubbed with something, it is itchy,the patient looses his appetite, and he takes much sleep .

When air and phlegm are deranged in one place, the symptoms of

the two above forms ofdisease are present .

Treatment . In this disease emetics are first to be used, followed

bylaxatives. When the patient has vomited, and has been purged,

anoint his body with oil, and exhibit enemas. His food should be

taken with bitter substan ces, but without any heating mixture . He

should eat a preparation ofbarley and flour, and the powder of iod

rice, with hon ey and milk . He should likewise take a decoction of

the Patal leaves, ginger and coriander seeds, when there is much

itching pain , and indigestion . When there ismuch fever and vomit

i ng, accompaniedwith pain , take a decoction ofthePa tal leaves with

ginger, myrobalan, and Gulancha . Ton ics are also ofgreat use, with

carminatives

1 5 . En largement of the Abdomen, (Udara )

This disease is divided into eight varieties, three of these are pro

duced by derangements ofthe air, bile, and phlegm, and one by the

combination of the three .

‘

The fifth is accompan ied by en largemen t

of the . spleen the sixth is called Baddagada, concretions the

seven th Parisrdbgualara, or Agantuha, or acciden tal and the eighth

Dahoclara, or Asitis.

This disease ( Udara) is produced by eating bad food without an

appetite ; eating dry putrid food, and the improper admin istration

ofpurgatives, emetics, and other active medicines by which the air,

bile, and phlegm are deranged in the abdomen . The first symp

toms of this disease resemble Gulma followed by swelling ofthe

abdomen . It is produced by the taking up of the, fluid part of the

355

chyle, which is conveyed by air into the surface, and produces swelling under the skin, and enlargemen t ofthe

‘

abdomen .

The disease is ushered in by weakness, unhealthy colour of the

skin , languor, and wan t ofappetite . There are n o wrinkles on the

abdomen , which swells, while the rest ofthe body is thin , and pro

minen t veins appear over the surface ofthe abdomen . He has painin the pelvis ; fulness in the abdomen , wi th burn ing ; the feet swell,and the person is weak and cannot walk . By degrees the body swells,the air and dej ections are stopped, the body is hot, and the personcomplain s offain tness. The forms ofthis disease, called Busrabi

’

, and

Baddagada are in curable the other forms are curedwith much dif

ficulty . In the latter stages of this disease manual assistance or

operations are sometimes required for the cure of the disease .

At the commencemen t of the disease the person should carefullyavoid heavy food, or when not properly prepared, likewise oleag inous, dry, indigestable food, and an imal food, bathing, &c . He

should live on barley, rice, and Wheaten flour, or the like .1 . When diseased a ir produces this disease, the hands, feet, and

abdomen are swelled, with pain in the sides of the abdomen, pit ofthe stomach, loins, and back , with pain in the j oin ts as if they werebroken . He complains of cough without expectoration, stretchingand heaviness about the loins, the dej ection s and urine are con

stipated, the skin and eyes are ofa dark yellow colour . The swellingis not always the same ; sometimes it inc reases, and at other timesdecreases, with severe pain in, and over the abdomen . Dark colouredvessels are prominen t over the abdomen , which is swelled like a leather bottle, and makes a noise like it when it is struck . The treatmen t in this form should consist in taking preparations ofghee,laxatives with ghee, oleaginous enemas, and the abdomen should berubbedwith hot preparations m incedmeat boiled and appliedwarmover the pained part is recommended or rice and milk may be ap

plied in the same way . He should also take m ilk with a decoctionofBiddri

’

g anda, and the broth made ofwild animals.

2 . Bile . The symptoms of this variety are fever, fain tness,burning, thirst, and an acid taste in the mouth ; the head swingsround, looseness is produced, the eyes and skin are of a yellow

colour, the abdomen is ofa green colour, and small yellow vessels

appear upon the surface, with much perspiration ; the body burns,there is a feeling as ifsmoke was rising in his throat, and the symp

toms ofbilious diseases ; as well as the peculiar symptoms ofthis

disease are quickly developed.

Treatment . Take prepared ghee, with a decoction ofsweet medi

c inal plants, such as Kai/colt, Kirohaholi, prepared ghee, with

2 T 2

356

Tawarhi, (Myrobalan ,) A'

mlahz’

(Emblic myrobalan, ) and Bibhi’

taha,

as a purgative . Then take a decoction ofBotah, and other astringen tplants, with sugar, honey, and ghee . Boiled rice andmilk, is to be

applied to the abdominal region .

3 . Phlegm (Shleshmoelara) when much deranged the person cannot

work, is always sleepy, the abdomen swells, and there is no feeling inthe abdomen , heaviness, sickn ess, no appetite, difficulty ofbreathing,cough, the eyes and skin are pale, abdomen cold, and the bowels are

con stipated andwhite vessels appear upon its surface ? After many

days the swelling is completely formed, and is very difficult to re

move . The body feels cold and hard, and the abdomen h eavy.

The treatmen t ofShleshmoa’ara consists in adm in istering ghee preparedwith long-

‘

pepper, and other stimulan t and carminitive medicines. Enemas of cow

’

s urine, oil, and a decoction of long and

black pepper and ginger, are to be exhibited. The abdomen shouldbe rubbed with the following mixture take equal parts of lin seed,hemp seed, and mustard seeds with the seeds ofMalalca (horse .

raddish) . These are to be formed into a plaster, and applied withother hot medicin es to the part . When there is much pain ,

”

con

stipation and swelling of the abdomen, it proves that air is derangedwhen faintn ess, thirst, heat, and fever are presen t, the bile is deranged ; and when there is a sense ofweight with no appetite, andhard abdomen, the phlegm is deranged.

4 . The derangemen ts of the air, bile, and phlegm are said bythe moderns to he often caused by enchan tmen t, or by the use of

Philters, as ofa woman to her husband, or lover . For this purpose

the parings of nails, the cuttings of hair, faeces, urin e, men strualblood, &c . are used, on the absurd supposition ofin creasing their lovetowards them . Certain poisons admin istered by an en emy are saidalso to produce this disease . These causes not only derange thethree. humors, but also the blood. This form ofdisease is increased

by cloudy weather, when the abdomen is swelled ; and when the

air is cold, it is also increased in violence, and the person be

comes fain t, the body yellow, the person very thin and dry, and he

complains ofthirst . This form ofdisease is called Dahodara

The treatment of this disease is very difficult . The physicianshould, b efore commencing it, inform the friends that th e disease isincurable ; then he may try the effects of remedies. Administerstrong purgatives repeatedly for

'

a fortn ight or a mon th . The root

of Aswamoiriha, with Jang ri, and Kd/aidini, may be formed in to a

paste with wine, with which it is to be taken . Differen t forms of

Nepal poison , as Acon itum, is said sometimes to be used. In othercases a sugar-can e is to be employed to irritate a poisonous snake,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

358

tween -the c hest and umbiliacus. The person has stercoral vomits

mg, as a drain is stopped by an accumulation of filth . The air,

bile, and phlegm are derang ed at the obstructed part, and the faeces

is confined. The stools are in small quantities, and are evacuated

with great pain, the umbiliacus, and breast are much swelled.

In this disease it is recommended to give ghee in ternally, and rubit over the abdomen, while perspiration is produced by hot baths,&c . When the remedies are of no use, and the situation of the

patien t desperate, an Operation is recommended, which is to be performed in the following mann er Below and—on the left side of theumbiliacus, and four fingers breadth from the linea alba, an incisionis to be made four fingers breadth in length, and the breadth offourfingers of the gut are to be drawn out, and the substance, whether

ston e or hair, or a bad secretion , which was the cause ofthe diseaseis to be removed ; ghee and hon ey is to be rubbed over the wound inthe intestin e, and it is then return ed into the abdomen . Applysutors, and treat the external wound as recommended in such cases.

Avoid any curren ts ofair after the operation, and carefully follow thephysician

’

s prescriptions. ( Sushruta )7 . Parisrabgudara is produced by sharp substances, such as fish

bones, portions ofwood, &c . being taken with the food, and wounding the canal . Awatery discharge is evacuated by the anus, pro

ceeding from the wounded surface . The abdomen in creases in sizeunder the umbiliacuswith much pain and burning . It is to be treatedas the last but both are generally incurable . The other forms are

curedwith difficulty . Warm baths, and amilk diet are recommended.

8 . Asr'rrs, (Jalodara, or Dahodara .) When a person has takena large quantity of prepared ghee, or has

‘

had frequent enemas, or

after emetics or purgatives he drinks large quan tities of cold water,they stop . the absorben t vessels, and produce this disease . In thiscase the abdomen becomes large, the umbiliacus prominen t, and

appears shining as if anointed and full of water, and like it movesabout, and gives a sound like a leather bag .

In all these forms of diseases there is swelling, weakness, loss of

appetite, languor, and swelling ofdifferent parts ofthe body, con:

stipation, burning, and great thirst . When with these symptoms

water «collects, the disease is incurable .Treatment . In Asitis the abdomen is to be anoin ted with oil pre

pared with medicines to cure diseased air.—A friend is to hold the

patien t in a reclining posture by the arm-pits. The practition erthen introduces a trocar an inch (four fingers breath) below, and on

the left side ofthe umbiliacus . The trocar is removed, and a tube is

put in its place. The morbid fluid for 1 6 days is to be allowed

359

slowly to evacuate itself; and a light bandage is to be placed roundthe abdomen after the operation , so that the air may not swell theabdomen this bandage must be continued for a considerable time .For six mon ths after this operation m ilk is to be freely used withrice, or the broths ofwild animals, with rice and after three monthsand a half the quan tity ofwater and m ilk with rice may be takenand other three mon ths light and wholesome food. The diseasewill be cured in one year .

CLASS VII.

DISEASES o n THE URINARY ORGAN S AND ORGANS o r GENERATI ON .

ORDER I .

D iseases of the Urinary Org ans .

Under thishead will be con sidered the diseases ofthe urine, blad

der and urethra .

Morbid secretion of urine, (Prameha . )

This disease is produced by a seden tary life, as sitting, lying

down, or sleeping in the day time, using too much curdled milk,various kinds offish, amphibious animals, or the flesh of buffaloes,new rice, or n ewwater, such as rain or fresh river water, or food with

differen t preparation s ofjagry, or whatever produces phlegm . It

is also producedby the deranged phlegm of the bladder which affects

the fat, flesh, or serum of the body ; but particularly the region of

the bladder . The bile is deranged by its peculiar causes, and in likemanner the air may produce the disease, when the other humorsare deranged, and convey them to the bladder .There are twenty varieties of diseased urin e ; of which phlegm

forms ten varieties which are curable, bile forms six varieties whichare cured with great difficulty, but do not destroy life ; and air forms

four varieties, which are incurable . The causes of the differen t

degrees of facility of removing th ese differen t varieties are that all

the forms are accompan ied with deranged phlegm, and when com

bined with deranged bile the cure ofthe disease is difficult, as thoseremedies which dimin ish bile will increase the phlegm . In likemann er those remedies which decrease the air increase the phlegmtherefore the cure is difficult ; and on this account the disease pro

duced by'

air is dangerous even from the beginning . These , twen tykinds of disease are produced by derangements of air, bile, and

O

phlegm, fat, blood, semen, serum (Amber) , lymph (Bast) , the essen

tial parts ofall the humors ( Ozzo) , the flesh and the chyle .

This order of diseases is ushered in by the appearance ofmorbid

secretions about the teeth, ears, nose, and eyes. The hands and feet

are very hot and burning, and the surface of the skin is shining as

ifoil had been applied to it . This is accompan ied with thirst, and

a sweet taste in the mouth . The different varieties of this disease

are distingui shed from each other by the symptoms ofderanged hu

mors, and by the colour of the urin e .

In the disease produced by phlegm, insects approach the urin e ;the person is languid, his body becomes fat, and there is a discharge

ofmucus from the nose and mouth, with dispeptic symptoms, and

looseness ofthe skin . He is always sleepy, with cough and difficultbreathing .

When the disease is produced by bile, there is a cutting pain inthe scrotum, bladder, and pen is, wi th fever, dispepsia, vomiting,heat of the body, thirst, want ofsleep, and yellown ess of the excretions. In some cases it is accompanied with jaundice .When produced by diseased air there is pain in the chest, the

patient has a desire to eat every thing, there is watching, shivering,pain and costiven ess. The following are the names and characteris

tic symptoms ofthe twen ty varieties ofdiseased urin e

1 . Udahameha . In thi s disease the urine is n early of the

natural colour, without any sedimen t . It is white, cold, has no smell,and is like water. For its cure use a decoction ofPari

’

jcita, Ery.

thrina fulgens . )2 . Ekhgameha . The urin e is like the juice ofsugar-can e in colour

and taste and for the cure give a decoction ofBaijainti .3 . In Sandrameha the urin e becomes thick after standing some

time, and for the cure give the patien t a decoction ofNi’

mba .

4 . When the urin e is ofa white colour, is thin and pure above,and thick below,

it is named Surameha and is cured by a decoction

ofOhitra lca .

5 . Pishtameha . At the time ofmicturition the hair over thebody is erect, and the urine has a copious white powder as if

flower had been mixed with it . For the cure use a decoction of

Tamarinds.

6 . t rameha . In this variety the urin e is the colour ofsemen,which sometimes appears mixed with it . For its cure give a decco~

tion of Durba, Saiba la, Loba, and Kasernha, with other medicinesofthe like kind.

When the urine letsfall a hard and small deposit like sand it issalted Sikatdmeha, and is cured by g iving a decoction of-Chitraha .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

362

if not properlytreated, terminate in Madhameha, or sweet urine,and they are then incurable .

The following forms of Prameha may be cured when the urine

is of the natural colour, is n either shin ing on the surface, nor

white ; and is of the usual taste, or is bitter and pungent . The

following eruptions and abscesses may occur in the course of this

disease in joints, and in vital or sensible parts as the temples, or

where there is much muscle .1 . Sardbiha with a cen tral hollow, with high edges.

2 . Kachchhap z’

hi are hot, and are 1n the form of a turtle, in ap

pearance .

3 . Jwalini is hot, and part appears irregular in its sur

face .4 . Binata eruption is ofa blue colour, and is accompan ied with

severe pain . It appears in the back or abdomen , and is accompaniedwith a cepious secretion ofurin e .5 . Alag i is ofa red and dark colour, in spots .

6 . Masnriha is of a small figure with a cen tral depression ofa

yellow colour .

7 . Sarsap iha is of a light yellow colour, and has the figure of

mustard seed.

8 . Patirnz’

is elevated, and is surrounded with small eruptions.

9 . Breanne like a bulbous root, hard, and hot .

1 0 . Bridadi’

is a kind ofabscess ; and will be considered in

another chapter .These various forms of eruptions may be produced by the de

rangements of fat without the presence of Prameha and they are

not observable until they have arrived at their full size, as it does notaffect the pulse, &c . When they appear about the anus, breast,head, shoulders, back, and other sensible or vital parts, and if

accompan ied wi th had symptoms they are dangerous. When boils,are severe, and the in ternal heat is diminished, the physicianis to give the case over as desperate . At the termination of the

eruption, when there is thirst, cough, sloughing of the flesh,fainting, hiccough, delirium, slight fever, erysipelas in the temples,and the other sensible parts are very painful, so that the patien tcannot be moved, the case will be fatal . Females are n ot liableto these diseases, as by the monthly discharge the body and humorsare purified.

Treatment . There are two kinds of Prameha one of whichis congen ital, and the other is produced by the use of bad food.

In the first form the patien t becomes weak, thin , and the surfaceof the body is rough . He. eats much, and is always thirsty and

363

restless. In the second kind, or that produced b y bad food, thepatien t becomes fat, eats much, the surface of the body is smoothand oily, and he is always sitting and sleepy.

In the first form give nourishing food, and in the second lightfood, with occasional fasting . In both forms the following articlesare to be avoided, all kind of wines, m ilk, especially curdled milk,oil, ghee, sugar, or sweet cakes, and acid drink . The flesh of

domestic or amphibious an imals are to be avoided, and the variouskinds of fish . The patien t is to use good old rice, barley, and

flour, he should eat the differen t kinds of beans and peas, bitter

and astringent vegetables, the flesh of wild an imals without fat or

ghee . The treatment should be oily purgatives, as castor oil . This

is to be followed by the exhibition of emetics. If there is muchpain or scalding, give him antiphlogistic remedies, with the juiceofEmblic myrobalan , tamarinds, and honey . The physician shouldalso exhibit tonics and astringents. He should drink sharbats con

taining honey, liquorice, and an acid fruit called Kap itta, with powdered black-pepper, and ashes of the dung of camels and asses .

When the urin e is increased much in quan tity the patient shouldtake prolonged exercise, as by walking and riding on horse-back,or on elephants. He should also drink differen t kinds oftinctures,

particularly those with preparations of iron .

For the cure of Basameha, use a decoction of the bark of

Agn imanta or Sinsapa, (a tree,) Kadrameha, with Kati/t i, and

betel-nuts.

In the cure ofHastimeha use a decoction made of Tina’iha,

Kap itta, S i'

risa, Palaisa, Patti, Marbot, with hon ey. Anotherremedy is the ashes of the bones of elephants, horses, asses, andcamels.

Samaroga or Bahumutra, is a disease only men tioned in modernbooks, most probably by its being classified as a variety ofPrameha .

Some manuscripts state that it is a disease peculiar to woman and

is p robably mistaken for Lucoreah, although generally consideredto be Diabetes .

*

It is produced by excessive venery, grief, much exertion, and

poison. In this disease all the humors are deranged, and passthrough the vessels of the urinary passages ; and are dischargedcopiously, without pain, and pure like water . The woman becomesweak suddenly, and the discharge of urine becomes involuntary .

The patient becomes uneasy with giddiness, and the mouth and

palate become dry, followed by fainting and delirium. The skin is

dry and rough, with great thirst .

See Chikitsd Ratnasangraha, or the jewels oftreatment .2 U 2

364

The treatment consists in eating ripe plantains ; in taking thefresh juice of Emblic myrobalan mixed with honey, powderedmaskala

’

i, liquorice, badam, honey, ghee, and milk . The carbonate

of iron . and sulphurate ofmercury is likewise recommended with

hon ey or the seeds of the wild fig with hon ey . Differentother vegetable mixtures are also recommended with ghee in th isdisease .

a . Supp ression of Urine, (Ma traghata )The derangemen ts of air, bile, and phlegm in the bladder pro

‘

duce the thirteen forms of this disease .

Batahanclalikci . This disease is produced by eating dry articlesoffood, by reten tion of the natural discharges ; by which the air

is deranged in the bladder, which mixes with the urin e producingpain, and they turn round in a circle, and the urin e is retain ed, or itis discharged in drops . The person is very fearful in this disease .

Astila . When the air is deranged between the rectum and bladder it forms a large ball like a stone (prostate gland ?) and producessuppression of the urin e, faeces, and air ; and is accompanied with

swelling in the bladder and much pain . This disease is also called

Bdtastz’

la

Batabasti . When an ignorant person stops the evacuation of

the urin e or dej ection s, which deranges the air stops up the n eck

ofthe bladder, and produces reten tion . This disease produces pain.in the pelvis, and in the sides ; which from is cured with much

difficulty .

When a person allows the urine to flow for some time, and then”

stops; it produces the disease calledMutratz’

ta, or reten tion , when

the urine is only discharged in small quan tities.

When urine is retained by such causes as produced the sameeffect as the reten tion of air, which is situated n ear the rectum,

it produces swelling of the abdomen , with much pain under theumbiliacus. This disease is calledMa trajathara .

When the urine stops by impedimen ts in the urethra, n ear theglan s pen is or elsewhere ; or when expelled with great force mixedwith blood, sometimes with much pain, in other cases with no pain ,this variety is calledMutrasang a .

When the body is dried up by the free use ofstimulan ts, and dryfood, and great fatigue, the air and bile are deranged in the bladder,and the urine, which becomes scan ty is ofa black colour, and pro

duces severe pain and heat . This disease is calledMutra/cia .

When there is a small hard round ball at the n eck ofthe bladder,accompan ied with much pain, it may preven t the passage of theurine, . and produce the symptoms ofstone, it is calledMutrag rinti .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

366

or red colour . There ismuch scalding or burning pain in the passages ; the urine is discharged in small quan tities frequently,accompan ied with heat and un easiness.

3 . When the phlegm is deranged the pelvis, bladder, urinarypassages, and testicles feel heavy ; they are swelled, and the

urine is cold, shining like oil, and soon dries up .

4 . When the air, bile, and phlegm are deranged the separate

symp toms of each variety appear in the same person, and is cured

with difficulty.

5 . Salajah. When the parts are injured by external v iolence,the disease is accompanied with much pain, followed by other

symptoms ofderanged air.

6 . Sahmpratihatajah, when the bowels are very costive, from

air being deranged, it is accompan iedwith much swelling and pain

in the abdomen , with difficulty inmictirition .

7 . Asarijah is produced by calculi, with a difli culty and pain

in mictirition .

When a person runs quickly or jumps, is much fatigued, is fast

i ng, or the part is injured, the bladder rises out of the pelvis of a

round form, and large like the gravel uterus. It is accompan ied

with much pain and moves from side to side, and the urine is veryhot, and passes in drops. Ifthe swelling is pressed, above the pubis,the urine passes easily, and in a con tinued stream . When the per

son cannot move, it is calledBastikuntlala, and is a severe and dan

geron s di sease .

When bile produces the disease it is incurable ; when phlegm

it may be cured, especially if it continues to be discharged, except

in the case of Kundali’

bata .

” When the bladder is round

above pelvis, with thirst and insensibility and noisy breathing, it is

incurable .

Treatment . Different kinds ofdiuretics, alkalis, hon ey, wines,fomen tation s and inj ections, &c . , are recommended in this disease .

The seeds ofcucumbers bruised, and taken with salt and vinegar,or wine with salt, rum with an imal flesh and honey, saffron with

water and honey, different sharbats with acid fruits, especiallypomegranate, the fresh juice ofthe dung ofasses with the decoctionofAbagci, Debelara , Marba, andMadhaha .

Cold water is to be given to drink with the juice ofgrapes, Saltpetre, and other salts in water are to be used, and the body is to beanointed with oil, fomentations, and purgatives .

8 . Sarajah, when the semen is affected by deranged humors,and carried into the passage of the urine, it is discharged withmuch difficulty and pain .

367

9 . Asari and Sahara produced by stone or gravel . They are

produced by the same causes, and the symptoms of both are the

same . When the stone is broken and dried up with bile and air,itis discharged through the urethra . When ston e is retained in thebladder, it forms the peculiarity ofthe two diseases .

In Sahara there is shivering with severe pain in the chest and

sides, loss ofappetite, and fain ting . This is followed by a fit ofstrangury, which is a severe disease, the pain being only mitigatedwhen the urin e is not

“

discharg'

ed, and the suffering is very acute,as the gravel is passing through the urethra.

The treatment will vary.

according to the humor particularly de

ranged. The medicines prescribed for ston e are to be given in this

disease, with a preparation ofghee, oil, and fat, with a decoction of

Shadanshtra’

,

Asabiet,

Kumbhi’

,

Ap ashci,

Kan tihari’

, (Prickly nightshade, )Bala

’

, (Sida cordifolia, )Shatabari,

R a’

sna, (Mimosa octandra, )Baruna, (Capparis trifoliata,)Girikarnihd.

These are to be taken in ternally and used as glysters, and as

inj ections into the urethra .

Another remedy to alleviate the pain is prepared by the juice of

Sadanstra with jagry, and milk . A diuretic mixture called Trinadu p anchaka made by the decoction ofthe root ofsugar-cane, theroots of

Kusha, (species ofgrass,)d ha, (Saccharum spon taneum,)Shara, (Saccharum Sarah,) andUshara, (Khuskhus.)

These are to be mixed with sugar and taken frequen tly .

When bile is deranged give purgatives, with the juice of sugarcan e, grapes, and milk . A decoction ofSarasada or Barndala prepared with oil. Barley water is to be given as drink .

When phlegm is much deranged, prepare oil with the above decoctions. When the three humors are deranged, the three kindsofmedicines above stated are to be used conjoin tly as a mixture .When produced by external injuries employ the usual treatment

for such injuries.

In all these forms fomentations andwarm bathing"

should be used:

368

c . Urinary Calculi, (Ashmar i)

When air, bile, and phlegm are deranged it produces difi'

erent

forms of calculi and another kind is produced from semen .

Phlegm is the chiefcause of the disease in all its differen t forms.

This disease is produced in those who live on hard indigestablefood, and do not use evacuating remedies, by which the phlegm is

deranged, and m1x1 ng Wi th urin e passes into the bladder and forms

the ston e .O thers suppose that the calculi are produced by collections ofthe

,

impurities of the urine which sink down and form, by being dried

with the internal fire, calculi in the bladder . Others suppose theyare formed as hailstones are formed in the sky .

This disease is ushered in by pain in the bladder, especially in

its n eck, scrotum, and pen is. In some cases languor and fever arepresen t, and the urin e has the smell ofgoat’s urin e . When formed

the pain is in the umbiliacus, bladder, perin eum, pen is, partien

larly during mictirition . The urine does not pass in a stream,but

in drops : it also stops suddenly . It is sometimes mixed withblood, in other cases it is clear or mixed with gravel . The pain isincreased by walking, jumping, and riding .

Four differen t forms ofthis disease are observed. The followingare the peculiarities ofeach form.

When produced by air it is always actsompanied with derangedphlegm, and this forms the ston e . This stops n ear the n eck ofthe

bladder, and suddenly impedes the flow of urin e and is accompa

n ied with much pain . To assist the evacuation of the urin e thepatient presses the parts particularly the umbiliacus, penis, and

anus. The colour ofthe calculi are black, rough, and unequal

and are surrounded with elevations like the hadam.

Bile. In this case the bile being mixed with deranged phlegm,

become a thick mass, increases in size, passes to the neck of the

bladder, and prevents the passage ofthe urin e . In the bladder thereis a burnlng pai n , as ifproduced by the application ofheat . The air

from the anus is hot, and the stone is yellow and sometimes red,

black, or greyish, and resembles the stone ofthe marking-nut .

”

Phlegm. A person who eats much of those articles of dietwhich produce diseases of phlegm is liable to have this form ofston e . In such cases the phlegm becomes thick, and a s tone isformed in the bladder . It produces a sudden st0 p of the flow ofthe ur1n e, with severe pain in the bladder

, and the person feels as

if beaten . The bladder feels heavy, and cool ; and the stone is.

white, shining, large, like the appearance ofa h en’

s egg .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

370

pieces should be removed with a schOOp calledAgrabahra . Duringthe Operation the practitioner should carefully avoid the raphe, ,

the seminal canals, the vessels Of the spermatic cord, the anus, andthe rectum. Ifthe seminal canals, or the spermatic vessels are

wounded, the person will become impotent . Wounds Ofthe vagina

and raphe, will produce much distressing pain .

In females the bladder is situated n ear the uterus, and care musttherefore be taken not to thrust the kn ife directly forward, as it

will wound the uterus, and the urin e will pass through the vagina,forming a fistula.

The wounds ofthe'bladder are always difficult to heal up .

After the stone has been removed, place the patien t in a hip

bath Ofwarm water, to promote perspiration, and to prevent the ac

cumulation Of blood in the bladder . When this collection Ofbloodtakes place inj ect a decoction OfKshirabrilcsha (Ficus Indica) bymeans ofa syringe . To heal the urinary passages give sherbats,over the wound hon ey and ghee are to be rubbed and remedies areto be exhibited to render the urin e pure, such as barley with warmghee twice a dayfor three days after this time give sugar, rice, andmilk in small quantities for ten days. Then take acidfruits, with thebroth smade of the flesh of game an imals for ten days, and for tenmore days promote perspiration by warm fomen tation s with Oil andghee . The wound is to be clean ed with the decoction ofthe Eshira

brihsha tree, and other astringen t medicin es are to be mixed and

placed in the wound. Oil and turmerick is also usedwith muchbenefit . Ifthe wounddoes not heal up, and the urine does not pass

by the natural passages, the actual cautery is to be applied. Whenthe urine passes by the natural passages give sweet decoctions inthe form ofglysters.

When the calculi produced by semen cannot be dislodged fromthe urethra by pressure an incision is to be made over them, and

the calculi is to be removed by the assistance Ofa hook .

After the Operation of LythOtomy conn exion with women shouldbe avoided for a year, as also riding on horse-back, on elephants, or

in carriages avoid at the same time swimming in water, or eating

indigestable articles Of food.

ORDER II .

Diseases of the male Org ans of Generation .

Diseases of the Scrotum (Bridclhi) .—There are seven varieties

Qf swelling ofthe scrotum produced by air, bile, phlegm, blood,

37 l

fat, urine, and by the descent Of the: intestin e . Any Of those

deranged humors may produce the swelling Of the scrotum, or“

the testicle . The bowel on ly causes the swelling Of the scro

tum . The preceding symptoms are pains in the loins, pelvic

region , and penis, followed by the swelling ofthe scrotum .

Symp toms. When the swelling is produced by deranged air the

scrotum is extended as a bag Of air, the surface is rough, and the'

peculiar pain produced by air is felt in the scrotum .

When produced by bile the swelling is red like the red fig, has aburning sen sation and is accompanied with fever . In this form

suppuration soon takes place .When caused by diseased phlegm, the swelling is hard, is not

painful, the surface is cool, it is itchy, and is not accompanied with

fever .Producedby blood the swelling is surroundedwith black tubercles,

and is accompanied with the symptoms Ofbile .

Fat produces the disease which is characterized by softness,shining, itchin ess, and little pain . It becomes like the fruit Ofthe

palm tree that is rough and tuberculated.

The form produced by urine (yellow serum) , collected betweenthe testicle and its external covering, moves like a bag ofwater .The last form is hernia which is produced by carrying heavy

weights, by fighting with strong persons, falling or jumping, and

the like . By such causes air is deranged which propels the in

testine downwards, it remain s in the groin , and ifnot treated for‘

some days it descends still lower, and produces a swelling Of the

scrotum . The tumor is oblong, and when pressed it passes up

wards with a peculiar noise, and again descends when the pressureis removed.

Treatment. With the exception of the last form, this disease isto be treated as follows

In all these diseases riding on horse-back, sexual connexion , sedentary employmen t, and indigestable food are to be avoided. When pro

duced by air, give the patient Oleaginous food, and anoin t his body.

The parts are then to be fomented, and then give purgatives, espe

cially castor-oil and milk . This treatmen t is to be continued for one

month . The patient’s diet should be broth made of wild an imals,rice, and occasional glysters. If the swelling does not decrease bythese means, apply poultices, and when it suppurates evacuate the

pus, taking care to avoid the raphe Of the scrotum . The treat

ment is then to bethe same as that Ofabscesses in general .

When the disease is caused by bile, and ifit does n ot suppurate,it is to be treated, as other swellings produced by bile . Ifit sup

2 X 2

372

purates evacuate the pus, and apply honey and ghee . After thisuse such poultices as promote the healing action ofthe part .When produced by blood apply leeches, give purgatives with

honey and sugar ; after which it is to be treated as swellings produced by bile .

When the disease is produced by diseased phlegm apply pressurewith stimulants mixed with urine . If it suppurates, Open it, anduse such applications as will clear and heal the abscess.

In swellings when produced byfat, foment the part, and applysuch poultices as will make the swelling be absorbed, such as

Sarosddi .

This is to be mixed with urine, and applied hot to the part . Surround the upper part Ofthe scrotum with a bandage, and remove thelower and walled parts, taking care to preserve the testes and the

raphe . Then apply a mixture ofthe sulphate ofiron and rock saltto the wound, over which a bandage is to be applied. When the

wound is clean apply prepared Oil to heal it .

Mutrabriddhi (hydrocele) .—Apply the same bandage as above re

commended, then at the lower part Of the side of the raphe a

trocar is to be in troduced. Leave the canula in the wound, and

when the fluid is discharged, apply a tight bandage round the

scrotum .

An trabriddhi (Hern ia) is incurable, unless when it is recent andsituated in the groin , when it is to be treated in the same way as

when the swelling is produced by air, that is by fomentations and

Oleaginous purgatives. When by these means the gut has beenreturned into the abdomen , the groin is to be cauterized (by a half

moon cautery) over the part where the tumor was situated. In

diseases of the scrotum it is also recommended that the skin of the

right or left great toe be divided, according as the swelling is on the

right or left Side, and the wound is to be cauterized. This super

stition is followed from the supposed conn exion with the vessels Of

the scrotum and of the foot, and is in tended to prevent the recurrence Ofthe disease . It is still gen erally followed, and rings are

also worn on the great toe, for the same purpose .

Brishanahachchhi’

l, (itchin ess Ofthe scrotump ruzigo.) This is a

common and troublesome disease . Medical authors say that it isproduced by not attending to cleanliness, by which the perspirationis accumulated, which irritates and produces an eruption on the

part . This sometimes degenerate into sores. The treatmen t consists in cleaning the part well , and applying simple Ointment prepared with wax and bruised mustard seed, and Satrah (a small seedlike aniseed) these are mixed, strained, and applied to the part .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

374

tion . O pen a vein Of the penis, or apply leeches to that organ, Soas to remove any unhealthy humors that may be there ; and for

the same purpose administer strong purgatives and emetics. For

the former medicine, glysters may be substituted when the patientisweak . The parts are n ext to be fomented, and then apply to them

poultices Offlour, mixed with the powder Ofthe castor-oil seed.

Paittiha . In this variety apply fomentations Ofmilk and water,sugar and water, or honey and water . The following poultices are

then to be applied z—Take OfGairiha, (yellow earth,)Anjana, (sulphate ofan timony,)Luharna,

Samba, (Echites frutescens,)Jashtimadhu, (liquorice,)Ushi

’

ra,

Kusha, (grass,)Padmaha, (a fragrant wood,)Sandal-wood and water-lily.

Mix these together with ghee and use it as a poultice .

Shleshmiha is produced by a diseased state Of the phlegm in the

part, and is treated by fomentingwith a decoction made Ofthe bark ofSala, (Sal tree,)Ashwalcarna, (a kind OfSala tree, ) andDhaba, (Grislea tomemtosa. )

The same barks may b e mixed with win e andmustard oil, andused as a poultice .By thus employing bleeding and other antiphlogistic means,

according to the nature Ofthe case ; by the use Offomentations and

poultices, with the assistance Ofemetics and purgatives, this disease

will be most easily cured. Washing the sores with astringent

decoctions, will also be found ofmuch use . Much care is requiredin the treatment, when accompaniedwith sloughing or suppurationOfthe parts. In this case the abscess is to be immediately Opened;as soon as it is discovered ; and then apply til, hon ey, and ghee. A

fomentation Ofthe leaves of

Karabira, (Oleander,)Jan, (Jasmin ,) andArahbada, (Cassia fistula,) is then to be applied to

the part . Variousmixtures Ofpowders are recommended to be appliedwith honey to these sores Ofthe genitals. The following may be

given as an example . Take ofSaurastra mirtihd, (a kind ofearth,)Gaeriha,

375

Tute, ( sulphate ofcopper,)Pushp aha, (sulphate Ofzinc,)Kasisa, ( sulphate of iron,)Saindhaba, (rock-salt .)

These, and other medicines Of the same kind, with variousastringent powders and decoctions, are used. When the disease isproduced by a derangemen t Ofthe three humors the treatmen t re

commended for foul ulcers is to be followed. If the parts havesloughed, or gangrene has taken place, the dead part is to be separated, the actual cautery applied, and the part is to be dressed with

honey and ghee .

History ofSyphi lis

The history Of Syphilis is so peculiar, and various Opinions as

to its origin has produced so much discussion in Europe, that I

shall here add a few remarks on the subject .

From the above account Of these diseases of the genital or

gans, as given in the ancien t Sanskrit writings, it appears thatthere were only five

, or rather six, varieties Oflocal sores to which

they were liable . These are stated to have been produced by inju

ries, or other causes Ofirritation, such as want Ofcleanliness, &c .

which are qui te sufficient to accoun t for the varieties of these sores,and resemble those recordedby the Jews. They are quite different

from the peculiar di sease known by the name of syphilis, or the

venereal disease . The history Ofthis disease in Europe affords theexplanation ofthese peculiarities.

The veneral disease, as it now appears in its characteristic local

and general features, seems to have been unknown before the return

OfColumbus to Spain ,after the discovery ofAmerica when

the sailors introduced the disease into Spain . Astruc asserts, on the

authority ofOviedo, the historian, and Ofmany contemporary physi

cian s, who flourished a short time after that period, that the disease

was communicated to the Spaniards by the Indian women OfHis~

paniola, when Columbus first arrived in that country and they, in

their turn , commun icated it to their coun try-women .

In like manner, Sapelvida, a Spaniard, who flourished towards the

middle ofthe sixteen th century, asserts, ex-Barbaricarummulierum

consuetudine Hispan i morbum contraxerunt .

”In the course of a

year or two afterwards ( 1495) Ferdinand, king of Spain, sen t an

army under the command Of the great Consalva de Cordova to the

assistance OftheNeapolitans, at that time engaged in a war with the

French. The Spaniards infected theNeapolitans, who communica

376

ted the disease to the French . As tney had not had the diseasebefore they attributed it to the climate, and called it the Mal de

Naples. The Neapolitans, as much astonished as the French, and

treating them as the hostile power, imagin ed that they had brought

it to the country, and called it the Fren ch disease .I regret not having had an opportunity Of referring to a late

work en titled “ Lettere sulla Storia de mali Venerei, di Dominica

Thiene, Venezia, 1823 in which Mr. Prescott states that theauthor has assembled all the early notices Of the disease of anyauthority, and discussed their import with great integrity and

This classic historian supposes that this loathsomedisease was not brought from America —hut his evidence does notappear to me to be conclusive ; particularly when the low state Ofthe medical profession, at the time, is considered, and the mild

form in which this disgusting disease may be supposed to have

appeared among the abstemious natives ofAmerica, in a fine tropical

climate . Besides the active and healthy sailors Ofthe expedition

were obliged to live on farinacious food and vegetables, which would

prevent the disease appearing in a virulent form so as to attract theirparticular notice ; and explain s the reason Ofthe silence OfColum

bus and his son, on the subject Ofthis loathsome disease in their

correspondence . Nor can we suppose that the disease would be

noticed un til it began to commit ravages in,

its epidemic form .

Before this occurred there is no description Ofthis peculiar disease,previous to the discovery ofAmerica nor could it be expected thatsuch writers would trace it to its origin , until more attention was

called to the nature of the disease . During such an age we can'

easily understand how the disease should be rapidly propagatedover Europe when in troduced into an army Ofmercinary soldiers,composed of n early every nation of Europe, who thus conveyedthe infection with them on their return to their respective homesand explains many circumstances related ofits progress in differen t

countries . It was from the great intercourse at that time subsiste

ing between the French and Scots that the disease first appeared inScotland, and it was n ot until a year afterwards that it ap

peared in England. Astruc assigns another cause in the licen

tious manners Of the age, for the rapid spreading Of the venereal

disease, on its first appearance in Europe . SO much was this the

case that Popes, Cardinals, Bishops, and the lesser dignitaries Ofthe Church, were alike its victims. All ranks, and few ages wereexempt from the disease .

See his History Of the reign ofFerdinand and Isabella, vol. iii. p.

’

50 : London, 1 838 .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

378

The disease is attributed to connection with the Portuguese, whether

male or female, and it was supposed that it could only be cured bythe use ofmercury . The same author likewise states that after the

mercurial treatment has been completed, Top chinz’

, or China-root ,must be admin istered to complete the cure .

We have thus a disease presen ting characteristic appearances,and Of peculiar virulence, without a Sanskrit name—not even

mentioned by the ancien t Hindu medical writers ; and still called

by the name Of the people who first visited these shores from

Europe . But as the disease was also introduced into Hindus

tan from the south-east by the Portuguese, it was called the Portu

guese or European (faringhz’

) disease ; and -likewise from Persia in

the north-west, when the disease was n amed the Persian pox .

”

It was only after the disease was introduced from the north and

south OfHindustan, that an accoun t is recorded Ofthe characteristic disease, by modern compilers, in cluding both the local and con

stitutional symptoms. Hence it would appear that this disease wasintroduced from America to Europe and Asia, as the small-poxand measles seem to have first appeared in Asia, from whence

they spread, and committed such ravages in Africa, Europe, and

America.

The following proofsmay be thus adduced Ofthe ven ereal diseasehaving been brought from Americal st . The Opinion of ancien t authors who have left us minute

descriptions of disease, such as Moses, Charaka, Sushruta, Hip

p ocrates, Celsus, &c . , not having men tion ed the ven ereal disease .Local sores on the genitals, and even the occurrence Ofbuboes, &c .

being no proof Of the presen ce Ofthis disease , without its specificsecondary symptoms . Any irritating cause applied to the genitals

would produce local sores, and ifnot properly attended to would inflame the inguinal glands as sores on the feet are Often found to

produce the same swellings .

2nd. The consternation into which all Europe was thrown bythe rapid progress Of this fearful disease . Like all n ew diseases,soon after its introduction in to Europe, by the followers OfColum

bus, it spread in the most alarming mann er ; or like that leprosyfrom the east, which at one time filled the Lazar-houses OfEurope

with its victims. Masses, prayers, and alms, were Offered up to

avert the anger of offended heaven as the superstitious notions Of

the age made people believe that it was—a dispensation from God,

toms ofSyphilis probably from their not being considered as Ofcon

sequence, or as having a connection with each other .

379

to correct the‘

licentious, and wicked manners ofthe times. The

severity ofa n ew disease when it occurs in a coun try is seen in thev isits Ofthe small pox, to islands, and distan t coun tries as occurredin the Mauritius in our day, and committed such dreadful ravagesat first, and slowly appeared to wear itselfout . Such was th e casewith Syphilis when it first appeared in Europe, compared with them ittigated symptoms Of the present times . This is certainly inpart owing to ourfollowing a better plan Oftreatmen t

, but still moreto this disease being Ofa less virulen t nature than before .

3rd. The progress Ofthe syphilitic disease indicates that it wasfirst brought to Spain , from whence it spread over Europe, Africa,and Asia .

4 th . The analogy Ofother diseases prove that new diseases may

so appear, and spread as the small-pox, measles, &c . from Asia and

perhaps the croup and sweating sickn ess ofBritain, &c .

Paribarttilca—Phymosis . This disease is produced by pressure,or external injuries, by which the prepuce is swollen by the diseased

air, and covers the glans. When it remain s swollen, hard, and verypainful, the inflammation sometimes passes to suppuration .

Abapatiha—Pariphymosis . When much force is used during

connection with a young girl, or when the prepuce is forced back with

force, it remains there, and is followedwith much swelling and pain .

Another variety ofthe above disease is calledNiruddap ra/casha, orstricture , or diminution Ofthe urethra . In some cases this is produced by an adhesion of the prepuce to the glan s, impeding thepassage Ofthe urin e, which in some cases only passes in drops.

In Phymosis ghee is to be applied to the part with warm fomentation s followed by poultices, which are to be continued for fromthree to five days. Ghee is again to be applied, and the skin is thento be pulled gently backwards . When in its natural position applyfomentations, administer Oleaginous food, with an imal broths, and

ghee .

The same treatment is to be followed in Pariphymosis, only instead ofbackwards, pull the prepuce forward.

In Niruddap rahasha in troduce a metalio, wooden, or gumelastic

canula, after the parts have been rubbed with Oil . Then the sizeOf the canula is to be increased every third day, so as to increasethe size Ofthe passage Of the urethra .

Should the prepuce adhere to the glans divide them, and heal

the wound in the ordinary way .

2 Y 2

380

Shuhadosha, inflammation ofthe penis, is a common di sease in this

coun try, from the pernicious habit Ofapplying stimulants to enlarge

the organ . There are eighteen forms of this disease, Sarshap ihci,Ashthz

’

liha, Grathita, Kumbhi’

lca, Aladz’

, Mridita, Sammi’

trhap iraha,

Abaman tha, Pushhariha, Sp arshaha’

ni, Uttama, Shatapanaha, Twaha ~

p aha, Sanitarbuda, Mangsapaka, Bidradhi, Tilalcalalra, Mangsar

buda, &c .

Sarshap ihaare small pimples, likemustard seed round the penis,which are produced by the presence ofa kind Of insect, which is

sometimes applied to the part with the inten tion Ofincreasing the

Size Ofthe organ .

The other forms Of inflammation are produced by the application of other stimulan ts which cause inflammation Of a chronic oracute form. Sometimes abscess and mortification Ofthe part occur

so as sometimes to destroy the pen is. The other varieties are merely modifications Ofthese inflammations, and their terminations.

Treatment . Astringent decoction s and oils are to be used, afterthe application ofleeches, fomen tation s, andpoultices . When matter

forms it is to be evacuated, and the abscess clean ed with tonicdecoctions. The ulcers are to be healed by the application Of prepared Oil .

When sloughing takes place it is to be treated, as when it occursin other parts . In all these forms ofdisease the an tiphlogistictreatment is to be employed, particularly purgatives, and the local

application Of astringent, and healing powders.

ORDER III .

Diseases of the Female Org ans of Generation .

There are twenty forms Of these diseases, which are produced

by using bad food, or taking improper exercise . They are also

caused by diseased menses, or semen . In other cases they are

produced without any apparen t causes.

1 . Udaberta. When the men ses are discharged with great pain,and are frothy .

2 . Bandhya. Difficultmenstruation , Dismenorrhagaea (nostar

toboh) where the men ses are stopped, by the accumulation Of un

healthy humors in the part . When the woman is barren, the diseaseis called Bandhyci .

3 . Biplutci . Continued pain in the gen ital organ s.

4 . Pamplutd. Severe pain during conn ection .

5 . Bdtala. In this disease the vagina is con tracted and rough,accompan ied with pain . In these five diseases air is locally deranged,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

382

9 . Patrag am’

. When the infant has died, or abortion has

taken place with a great discharge Of blood. In all these casesbile is much diseased, and is accompan ied with fever .

1 0 . Pittala. When bile is deranged, there is much heat of

the part, which suppurates and is accompanied with fever . These

five last diseases are the symptoms of bile .

The following are the diseases produced by deranged phlegm .

1 1 . Atyanandci . When the woman has no pleasure in the

embraces of her husband.

1 2 . Karni’

ni’

. When phlegm and blood are deranged in the

vagina, small granulations form, like the grains Of rice from deran

ged phlegm and blood.

1 3 . Churuna. When the semen Of the male is more OOpiousthan that Ofthe female .14 . Charana. When the male semen does not enter the uterus.

1 5 . Shleshmala. It is produced by diseasedphlegm with itchi

n ess and coldness, and the part appears as ifcovered with Oil .

1 6 . Sandi . In this variety the menses are not discharged, thebreasts do n ot swell, and the parts are hard, and rough like a file .1 7 . Palam

’

. When a large man has conn ection with a small,and young female he injures the parts, and produces this disease .1 8 . Mahatt

’

. When the vagina is very large .1 9 . Suchz

’

buhtra . When the entrance is very small .20 . Sarbalingasamutp annd. Different varieties Ofpain , &c . pro

duced by the derangemen t Ofthe three humors in the part .The five last forms Ofthese diseases are cured with difficulty.

The treatment Of these diseases will vary according to the hu

mor diseased.

When the air is diseased apply warm fomentations such as steam

baths, &c .

, and poultices, use also inj ection s Of Oleaginous and

other medicines heated, which cure diseased air. A piece Of cloth

soaked in Oil is to be kept in the vagina.

When bile is deranged with much bearing down and inflamma

tion, use cold lotions. Ifthere is a b ad smell, use the decoctions

ofastringen t barks.

When phlegm is deranged take the ju1ce Of garlic every morning,with food made Ofrice and milk, and apply differen t tinctures to the

part, as recommended under the head Ofmidwifery .

In dismenorrhagaea the patien t should live on nourishing food,fish, mdshalai, sesamum seeds ( til) , curdled milk, and drink cow’

s

urine, whey, and win e . The pubis should be well rubbed with oil

and ghee, and the vagina is to be kept distended by the introduc

tion ofa roller ofcloth .

383

The treatment ofmenorrhagia should resemble that Of homorrhag ia, such as the application Of cold and astringent medicines,avoiding ven ery, and living on cooling and simple food.

Kanda, (Utero Vag inal Tumors .)

These diseases are produced by the person Sleeping during theday, by an angry disposition, by great fatigue, and by tOO much

venery . They may also arise from mechan ical injuries Ofthe part .

These tumors are like the fruit ofthe Lahucha tree, (a kind ofBread

frui t tree, Artocarp us laeucha, orMadar. )When air produces the disease the tumor is dry, and is Ofa

dirty or yellowish colour, and has furrows on its surface .When diseased bile produces the tumor it is very hot and red,

and is accompan ied with fever .

When phlegm produces the tumor it is like the colour of theIndigo flower and is very itchy .

When air, bile, and phlegm are diseased, all the separate symptoms are presen t . When three are so diseased in one part, it is

incurable, and when produced by spirit or by phlegm, &c . it is

cured with difficulty.

Treatment . For the treatment Of these tumors use the flesh Of

shell-fish, and the pulp of tamarinds, rub them together, and applythe mixture to the tumor . A paste made with the flowers of.

Gossa, are to be applied to the part, and will be found ofgreat use .

Dhajabhang a or Claiba, (Imp otence .

There are six kinds Of Impoten cy, l st, It may be produced bydejection Ofthe mind, or connection with distasteful women .

2nd. By eating too dry and pungent food, as black-pepper,capsicum,

&c . or tOO much acid, salt, or stimulating food. By such

causes the secretion Ofsemen is diminished.

3rd. Excessive venery, and eating little food.

4th . Old diseases Of the organ s ofgeneration, or Of injuries or

diseases Ofthe vital parts.

5 th . The congen ital variety ; and the

6th . Variety is caused by avoiding sexual indulgences.

The fourth and fifth kinds are incurable . The other four kinds

may be treated. For this purpose different kinds ofn ourishing foodand drink are to be used the patient is to live in a good house,indulge in good beds, in music, in the society of beautiful women ,

in wines, and in perfumes, as all these tend to remove sterility .

The medicines to be used are as follows : Take Of the powder OfBz

’

da’

ri or Of Anulolra mixed with honey and ghee ; and eat the

384

testicles of goats roasted and prepared with Salt, ghee, and long,pepper . The preparations ofmdslcaldi and sugar, barley, wheat are

also Of use . The eggs Ofcrabs and ofcrocodiles, or Ofturtle s properly prepared will be Of great use . Flour prepared wi th ghee, and

milk, and rubbed on the feet with Oil, prepared with crocodile’

s

eggs the flesh ofrats, frogs, and the eggs of sparrows are recom

mended. The patient is to drink fresh milk with sugar, honey, and

powder OfSwayangup taand Ehuruha .

CLASS VIII .

Diseases of the R ectum and Anus.

These consist of piles, stricture Of the rectum, prolapsus ani,

ulcers near the anus, and fistula-in-ano .

OR DER 1 .

Arsa, (Piles .

There are six vareties ofthis disease according as it is produced

from deranged air, bile, phlegm, the three humors deranged at

the same time, diseased blood, and the last form is congenital orhereditary.

That part of the rectum called guda is five and a half fingersbreadth in length, and like the Spiral cavities in the sacred shell, used

in the Hindu temples, has three Spiral turns called Prabahinz’

,

which accelerates or assists in expelling its conten ts . The second is

called Bisarjinz’

, or that which expells and Sambarini’

, or sphincter .

Piles are usually situated in these parts, the causes producing themare as follows The impropermixtures offood, excessive venery, theunnatural position ofthe body when long indulged in horse riding,and the want of atten tion to the calls Of nature . By these causesthe humors are deranged in the anus and produce tubercles, orpiles.

When air is deranged it affords the following signs ; round the

anus small tumors form, which are dry, slightly painful, red, and

irregular like the leadamba fruit . The disease is accompanied withconstipation, pain in the back, loins, penis, anus, andumbiliacus and

is occasionally accompaniedwith pain in the breast, want Ofappetite,cough, and noise in breathing ; sometimes the appetite is good, atother times it is much impaired. The blood is often evacuated bya small orifice from time to time . The skin , eyes, face, mouth

,

teeth, and nails appear dirty and yellow with unhealthy yellowishdejections, and urine . Symptoms likewise appear like Gulma or

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

386

like those of piles sometimes form in the cavities of the ear, nose,

mouth, vagina, and upon the pen is .

When affecting the in ternal car, they produce deafness, pain, anda fetid'

discharge from the organ . In the eyes they cover the eye

lids and sometimes destroy the sight ofthe organ . When in the

mon th, they are attached to the throat, lips, and palate, they impair

the voice and taste, and produce other diseases of the mouth .

When in the nostrils they produce difficult breathing, a fetid smell,a change ofvoice, pain in the head, and a considerable dischargefrom the n ose .

The deranged humors produce the disease on the surface of the

body when they form tumors Ofdifferent sizes, which are called

Oharmla’

la . When the air is deranged the disease is accompaniedwith

throbbing when phlegm, the color Ofthe tumor is the colour ofthe

skin and hard. When bile and blood are deranged, producing the

disease, the tumors become black and rough . Those piles which

form externally are curable, as also those in the first and second

convolutions Ofthe rectum, but in the third the disease is incurable,

and also after they have existed for upwards ofa year .

Treatment . There are four indications for the cure ofpiles. The

first is by medicine, the second by the application of caustics, the

third by the application Of the actual cautery, and the fourth bythe knife . When the disease is recen t, and it is n ot accompan iedwith any bad symptoms, they may be cured by medicin e . Whensoft and elevated with a thick base, they are to be cured by the useOf caustic . When hard, rough, and large, by the actual cautery ;and when the base is narrow and they are elevated and moist, theyare to be removed by the kn ife .The caustics are to be applied in the following mann er the

patien t is first to take some oleaginous and bland diet, such as riceand milk ; the parts are then to be well fomented, and on a coolday, when there are no clouds in the sky, the patient is to be placedupon a table with a good light thrown upon the part . He is to be

supported by two assistan ts holding his head and Shoulders ; and

his loin s are to be elevated with a soft cushion . The knees and legsare to be raised, and separated by a bandage passing round the

kn ees, feet, and n eck . The body is thus firmly fixed, and a littleghee rubbed upon the part . The patient is n ext to press downwards,so as to press out the anus . The piles are then to be dried with a

piece Of cloth, and the caustic fluid applied over the part by a

broad poin ted probe . The caustic is allowed to remain as long as

is required to pronounce on e hundred words, when it is to be rubbed

Off, and it is only when necessary that it is to be again applied.

387

When the piles become black, and are dimin ished in size by thecaustic, the n ecessary effect has been produced. The part is then to be

washedwith a spirituous cooling application , whey, or water mixed

wi th the juice ofacid fruits . Dry the part, and then apply ghee mix

edwith the decoction ofliquorice . A warm bath is then to be given ,

and pour tepid water over the body . He is then to be left in a room

shut up, and is to live on a spare diet . When any other piles ap

pear or when there are many, the application of the caustic is to be

made every seven th day until the cure is completed. The applications

are first to be made to the piles ofthe right side, then the left, andafter that the part behind and before .If the caustic is too freely applied the anus is destroyed, with

burn ing fever, fainting, and discharge Ofblood.

When the piles are large and the person strong, they are to

be removed with the kn ife, and the actual cautery applied. The

diet is the same as after t he application Of cauteries . When the

piles are not visible internal remedies must be used, such as myrobalan with jagry everymorning . Ahundred seeds ofthe Myrobalanare to be boiled in the hot urine ofcows . Take them out after theyhave been boiled for some time, dry them, and then reduce them to

powder . Such doses are to be taken as will Operate on the bowels .

The farina Of the Sa tabim root is to be taken daily with milk .

Ton ic and bitter tinctures may also be used with advantage .When the piles are painful use fomentation s and poultices, with

purgatives, emetics, and clysters . He should also avoid stopping

the calls ofnature ; should avoid connexion with women, horse

riding, &c .

2 .-Sam

’

raguda, (Stricture of the R ectum.)This disease is produced by habitual costiveness, by which the

air Ofthe part is diseased, which diminishes the Size ofthe rectum .

The faeces are then evacuated with difficulty, and in small quantities. It is very difficult to cure .Treatmen t . Apply Oleaginous substan ces to the part, such as

hog’s lard and Oil, preparedwith a decoction ofthosemedicines whichcure air. Every third day introduce a rectum coveredwithghee, which is to be increased in size from time to time .The food is to be Ofan Oleaginous nature .

3 .—Gudabhrangsa, (Prolap sus Ani . )

The rectum is prolapsed during the evacuation Of the faeces inweak persons ; particularly when affected with long continueddiarrhoea, or much straining .

This may be made oflac, wax, wood, or metal .2 z 2

388

The treatment to be pursued is to foment the part, apply oleaginoussubstances to the prolapsedgut, and return it slowly . Then a bandage is to be applied, on which a convex piece ofhard leather is tobe placed over the anus, and retained there by means Ofa bandagetied round the loins and between the legs . . Fomen tation s are to be

occasionally exhibited, and the body Ofa rat from which the intes

tines have been removed, is to be made warm and applied to the parteffected. Milk and a decoction OfMahaPanhami

’

da are to be given .

The decoction is to be strain ed, and exhibited internally and exter

nally .

4 .—Ahip utana, (Sup erficial Ulcer round the Anus .)

Eruption s sometimes form round the anus, from want of cleanli

n ess. They become itchy, are scratched, andulcerate, producmg this

di sease . They Often occur in children .

These ulcers are to be treatedby exhibiting purgatives, and othermedicin es, to purify the milk ofthe mother . Then give a decoctionOfton ic medicines to the child consisting ofPatalap atra, the threekinds Ofmyrobalan , with prepared ghee . These are to be giveninternally . Locally, astringen t d ecoctions are to be applied, and

the sulphate ofzinc (Kap alatuta) is to be sprinkled over the ulcers

5 . Bhag andara, (F istula-in-Ano .)

This disease is called Bhag andara, because the anus, vagina, bladder, and its surrounding parts, are affected.

It is produced by deranged air, bile, and phlegm, by their combinations, and by external injuries thus five varieties ofthis diseaseare produced.

The symptoms ofthis disease are ushered in by pain in the loins,Ofan itching nature, and by a swelling n ear the anus.

1 . Sa tap anaha . This variety is produced by deranged air, fromliving on bad food, when accompan ied by a bad temper . The

swelling usually takes place a finger breadth from the anus,-by the

air deranging the flesh, and producing swelling and pain Of different kinds. When not properly treated the swelling suppurates, and

is perforated by many holes, through which a OOpious discharge of

matter with air takes place . Sometimes the pain is as if the part

was torn, or n eedles were thrust into it . Towards the termination

air, urin e, faeces, and semen is di scharged from the open ing .

2 . Utrag raba is produced by deranged bile, which affects the

part, and produces a large red swelling resembling the shape Of the

n eck ofa camel . It produces a burn ing and painful sen sation , like

those produced by deranged bile . When n eglected it suppurates,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

390

communicate with each other Open them all, if external, so that

they be all formed into one wound. But when they do not com

municate with each other, the open ing is to be made separately into

the gut. After the Operation the actual cautery is to be applied,by mean s Of a red hot probe .The form called Satap anaha is incurable in a weak and fearful

person . When the person will not submit to an Operation applyfomentations and poultices, and give him tonic medicines, and

apply ghee, and Oil to the part . By these means the fistulous

Open ing may be healed up .

In Utrag raba use a similar plan Oftreatment as in the last case,but the actual cautery is not required. Caustic in this case is suf

ficient ; after which apply a poultice and bandage to the part . On

the third day clean the part, and apply healing medicines.

In Parisraba the part is to be divided as in the other forms, and

apply the actual or potential cautery to the part . After whichwarm Oil is to be applied to the part, with fomentations and poultices ; aperient medicines are likewise to be given .

When a fistula-in-ano either ofthe internal or external kind, occursin children , n either caustic, cautery, nor the kn ife, are to be employed.

In this case a Small bougie is to be in troduced. It is composed of

;Arahboda, turmerick, and Ka la, mixed with ghee andhoney. Thisis to be introduced into the fistulous Open ing, which will by thismeans heal up .

In the last or accidental form Of fistula, first remove the

bone, and the fistulous Opening being enlarged in the usual way,the actual cautery is to be applied to its surface, and the meansfor removing worms are to be resorted to in this disease .The after treatment of the wounds and ulcers should resemble

those recommended under the head of surgery .

For One year after the cure the patien t Should avoid anygreat

exci tement, ashorse exercise, fatigue, conn ection with women , anger,and heavy indigestable food, which might produce a relap se .

CLASS IX .

Diseases of the Extremities.

The diseases Ofthe upper extremities are few, and Oflittle importance, compared to those Of the lower extremities to which the

following remarks are principally confined. These diseases are

Urustambha and Slip ada, or swellings Ofthe extremities, diseases ofthe nails, ofthe soles of the feet, and ulcers ofthe axilla, and groin .

39 1

The other diseases Ofthe extremities have been already consideredunder those ofBdtabadi.U'rustambha (large abscess) . These are produced under the

fascia Ofthe thigh by cold, hot, or very liquid or dry food, heavyOleaginous or indigestable food, or other articles Of the like kind,fatigue, grief, agitation , sleeping during the day, and watching atn ight . By these means the air, phlegm, and fat are deranged and

m ixed with bile, which accumulates in the thighs, and in the external parts Of the thigh-bone . The thigh then becomes senseless

like a dead part, and is very painful .This disease produces lown ess of spirits, pain over the body,

drowsin ess, and chillin ess, cold, vomiting, loss ofappetite and fever .The thigh cannot bemoved, and it is raised with difficulty, and as ifasleep . Other practition ers call the disease Adabcita .

Before the accumulation Ofhumors in the thigh, the person feelssleepy, is in low spirits, the body cold, with fever, loss .of appetiteand vomiting . Both legs and thighs are heavy and weak . Whenthe pain is supposed to be rheumatic, and the part is rubbed withOleaginous medicines, the disease increases, affects the feet and prevents the person walking ; and is accompan ied with much pain,swelling, and inflammation , followed by insen sibility, and the legfeels as ifit was broken . When there is much lan cinating pain ,inflammation , and shivering, the patien t will die . When these symptoms are absent, or the disease is recent, the patien t may be curedby the practitioner, as the disease under this circumstance is n ot

always'

fatal .Treatmen t . Give such medicines as decrease ph legm, but which

do not increase bile . Avoid Oleaginous applications, give emeticsand purgatives, and apply hot applications to the part . Mustardand Coringo seeds, honey, and the earth ofthe white-an t’s n ests areto be mixed together, and applied to the part . Give at the sametime Silag ita, Guguli, long-pepper, and ginger . These are to be

mixed with the urin e of the cow . This form may be varied with

the following . Take Ofcastor-Oil and Gaguli, mix, and take in ter

nally : or a decoction ofDasamula with cow’

s urine, which may

also be used.

Shlip ada, (Elep hantiasis .)

The Short and indistinct account of this disease in the ancient

Hindu writers, seems to he intended as merely to suit the writerisown peculiar theory. Elephantiasi s is so common in Bengal and is SO

peculiar that we should have expected something more than a short

account Ofthe leading symptoms. In the Madhab Niddn it ismerely

392

Stated that the patient’s -groin . first swells, and become very pain a

ful, with fever . The swelling then slowly descends to the foot, pro

ducing this disease . In other MSS. it is stated that the same

disease may occur in the hands, ears, eye-lids, nose, lips, andpen is.

When it occurs in the groin, and descends to the leg and foot, or

when situated in the hand it is produced by bad flesh and fat and

the parts affected become hard and rough .

When air produces this disease the swelling is ofa black colour,rough, dry, with cracks and small sores . This form is very painful, —and occurs sudden ly, with much fever .When produced by diseased bile it is Ofa yellowish colour

, hot,

soft, and accompan ied with fever .When produced by diseased phlegm, the skin is shin ing, Ofa white

or grey colour, the part is very heavy, hard, fixed to one place, and

has the appearance ofa large white-an t’

s hill, ofan irregular Sharpu

pointed appearance . This form is difficult to cure after it has beenpresent a year, when very large, when it discharges con tinually,

is itchy, and when all the above symptoms are presen t, as this indi

cates that air, bile, and phlegm are diseased.

Elephan tiasis is most frequen t in those countries where there is

much stagnan t water, and in cold damp situations, such as Rungpore, Furridpore, &c .

In the above description the marked accessions and remissionsare not men tioned, but it is stated that the damp and cold situation sproduce this disease, that it attacks different parts of the body, andthat it is incurable, after it has remained upwards of a year, or isvery large . It is also Observed that it is incurable, when the skinis much affected, as indicated by the con tinual discharge, the itchyor painful nature Of the swelling, and its discolouration .

Treatment . When air is deranged in the part oleaginous sub

stances are to be applied to the part to promote perspiration . Fourfingers breadth above the ankle join t a vein is to be Opened, and

some blood is to be removedfrom the part . Ifthe person be strong,give purgatives and enemas, which promote urine . Give castor-Oilin cow

’

s urine for a month, then take rice andmilk, with the infusionOfdry

-ginger . The actual cautery may also be applied round theleg n ear its m iddle .When bile produces the disease Open a vein below the ankle

joint, and use an tiphlogistic and other medicines to cure diseasedbile . The treatment followed in erysipelas should also be used.

In phlegm Open a vein of the great too, give astringen t decoc

tions with hon ey, such as myrobalan with cow’

s urine and rub the

swelled part with a mixture of

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

394

accompanied with much pain , and a considerable discharge, it is

calledKaclara . When the space between the toesulcerate (Rhagas)the disease is called Alasa . The other diseases of the leg are

described under Badohaa’z’.Sometimes ulcers form n ear the axilla or groin , which become

hard, red, and sinuous ; in such cases the deep seated parts areso affected that when Opened they discharge frothy matter like a

mixture of honey and ghee . The part then becomes dry, irregular, and discharges foetid matter of different colours with

blood. Sometimes the hemorrhage is sudden and great . This dis

case is called Sharhararhuda, (Sarhara, a piece of earthen pot, andArbada, tumor .) This is probably an an eurismal tumor .

CLASS X .

Poisons and their Antidotes, (Panata )

The origin ofpoisons is explained in the following manner . Soon

after the creation of the world, Bramha was displeased at the vio

lence OfKaitaha, one of the demon s (Asura) , and in his anger

poison was generated anddestroyed Kaitaba . The poison increased

so much that the debtcts were afraid that itwould destroy the whole

animated creation . They prayed to Bramha to relieve them, and

petitioned that he would distribute the poison over the an imal,vegetable, and mineral kingdoms. This was done ; and when thepoison is introduced into the living body it is not digested, and

produces languor,*and deranges all the humors Ofthe body .

It is necessary for the practitioner to have a knowledge of the

symptoms ofthe different poisons, and their antidotes. As the

enemies ofthe Raja, bad women, and ungrateful servants sometimesmix poison with food. On this accoun t the cook should be ofa goodfamily, virtuous, faithful, and not covetous, not subject to anger,pride, or lazin ess. He should also be cleanly, and skilful in

his business. The practitioner should have like qualities with an

intimate knowledge of poison s and should examine the food to beeaten by aRajain the cooking-room . This shouldbe large, airy, light,and surrounded with faithful servan ts, and no one should be allowed

to enter unless he is first examined. In the Mitcihshara shastra there

are copious directions regarding themann er ofdetecting a person whogives poison He does not an swer questions, or they are evasive answers ; he speaks nonsense, rubs the great toe along the ground, andshivers hisface is discoloured he rubs the roots ofthe hair with hisfingers ; and he tries by every means to leave the house. The food

Hence the name Bisak‘

.

395

which is suspected should be first given to certain animals, and ifthey die, it is to be avoided. The authority the brahmans assumed,and the confidence they inspired, has no doubt Often had the best

effect, in making the wicked shrink from perpetrating deeds, whichwould be detected and exposed by them .

The long accoun t which is given of these poisons, and the means

ofpreventing their bad effects seems to prove the frequency withwhich they were employed with bad intentions, at a very earlyperiod.

All poisons have the following qualities they are drying, heating,and stimulating ; their effects quickly extend over all the body ;they destroy very quickly, are not digested, and from the rapiditywith which they produce bad symptoms it is difli cult to use remedies with sufli cien t quickness. The following stages of the effectsofpoisons are observed. l st . The tongue becomes black and rigid,the person faints, and breathes with difficulty .

2ud. Shivering, perspiration ,heat, and pain in the stomach, and

chest .3rd. Severe pain in the stomach, the eye changes its colour,

becomes yellow and swells, and when the poison has extended to

the intestines pain of the part, hiccough, coughing, and a peculiar

noise is heard in the in testin es .

4th . Heaviness ofthe head.

5 th . Discharge of saliva from the mouth ; change of colour of

the skin, and pain in the join ts and belly .

6 th . Insensibility and purging .

7th . R igidity and death .

Vegetable poisons (Dushihisha) when dried by the fire, by the

air, or by the sun, may be given in solution , or in any other

way in which their effects are less powerful . In this case thepoison does not produce immediate death, but remain s in the

system for a long time ; and the first effect is looseness, foetid smell

of the mouth, great thirst, fainting, vomiting, and paralysis of thetongue . These are followed when taken into the stomach by dis

eases of phlegm and air, and in the intestines, by diseases of the

bile and air. The person ’

s hair falls off, and he becomes like a birdwithout feathers. When mixed with the humors Of the body as

chyle, blood, &c . , the poison produces diseases of the humors, asleprosy, and various other kinds of symptoms, as languor, weakn essofthe joints, and pa n over the body ; swelling ofthe legs and face,dropsy, andin other cases vomiting and diarrhoea, intermittent fever,discoloration ofthebody, madness, impotency, and other like diseases .

All these symptoms are aggravated in cloudy anddamp weather.

3 A 2

396

Such effectsmaybe removed by proper treatment, and a year after

the person has taken the poison he will either be cured, or get

worse. When weak, and the patient does not Observe his diet, thepoison will destroy him.

Poisons are usually arranged into two classes, the first consisting

of vegetable and mineral poisons, are named Staharah and the

second animal poisons, Jangamah. They are not used in ternally,

as medicin es.

I . Veg etahle, and Mineral Poisons.

The general symptoms produced by vegetable poison s are fever,hiccough, grinding ofthe teeth, suffocation , foaming at the mouth ,

vomiting, want ofappetite, difficulty Ofbreathing and fainting .

The Mineralp oisons produce drowsin ess, languor, burning ofthe

body, indigestion, horripilation, swelling, and dysentery . The

dej ections Ofa person who has taken poison are ofa black colour,large, and are discharged wi th wind.

Veg etable p oisons are divided into nine varieties, which are de

rived from the roots, leaves, fruits, flowers, bark, milky juice, gum,

and pith ofplants.

1 .—The R oots ofthe following plants are poisonous —andwhen

eaten they produce pain over the body, delerium, and stupidity.

Klitaha, (Olibanum, )Asamctsa, (Andropogon muricatum,)Ganja, (Abrus precatorius,)Suganolct, (Alpin ia galanga, )Gargarahci, (Cissus glauca,)Karagdta,

Bidguchchilchd,

Bijagat, (Cyperus difformis.)2 .—The Leaves of the following vegetables produce gaping,

shivering, and difficulty in breathing .

Bisap utrihci, (Vangueria,)Alumbci, (Arum campanulatum,)Abaddrnka, (Sideroxylon spinosum,)Karamba, (Dalbergia arborea,)Mahci Karamba, (An tirrhinum cymbalaria,)

13.—The following poisonous Fruits cause a loss ofappetite, heatOfthe body, and a swelling ofthe testicles.

Kamadati, (Nelumbium speciosum,)Bindhai,

Karamba, (Dalbergia arborea,)Mahci Karamba, (An tirrhinum cymbalaria,)Karahataka, (Cleome viscosa,)

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

398

TheMineral p oisons are,Phendshmabhasma, (white oxide of arsenic,)Harttatla, (yellow

‘

sulphurate Ofarsenic Sushruta .)Other authors have added the following poisons

Tn ta, (sulphurate ofcopper .)

Dea’

mahci, (white oxide ofarsenic .)There are others ofthe same kind.

These poisons when administered to a person, produce pain in thechest and body, fainting, shivering, followed by a burning and

swelling Of the body, but particularly Of the throat . These symp

toms are succeeded by diarrhoea, languor, coma, and insensibility .

When these symptoms are present, the disease will be fatal .

Antidotes for Veg etable and Mineral Poisons.

In the first stage ofthe effects of these poisons, give cold waterto drink, with an emetic . In the second stage, give an emetic witha preparation calledAg ada . This medicine is prepared with ghee,and the following vegetable decoctions

Madaha, (Bassia latifolia,)Tajara, (Amaranthus,)Knsta, (Costus speciosus, )Badraddra, (Phrynium dichotomum,)Harana, (Trophis aspera.)Panndja,Alla,

Albalak,

n ap nsp a, (Bauhinia anguina,)Utp ala, (Nymphoea caerulea, )Si

’

ti’

ti, (Lycopodium phlegmaria, )Balang a, (Ocymum,)Chandana, (Sirium myrtifolium .)

Mix this with honey and ghee . Soon after a purgative is to begiven . In the third stage give Agada internally as an errhine,and collyrium .

In the fourth stage give Ag ada, and ghee .

In the fifth stage give Agada with honey, and a decoction of

liquorice.

The sixth stage is to be treated as a case ofDysentery.

In the seventh, errhines ofAgada alone,are to be used.

In all the stages the antiphlogistic treatment is to be followed,with ghee and honey. Conj ee water is also to b e given, mixed

with a decoction Of

399

Kaha’

lnln’

, (Diospyros tomentosa,)Ag ni/fa, (Premna integrifolia,)Pdtd, (Sida lanceolaria,)Surgz

’

balz’

, (Cleome pentaphylla,)Amertci, (Menispermum cordifolium,)Abayed,

Sum’

sa, (Sinapis dichotoma, )

(Achyranthes aspera,)Sala, (Shorea robusta, )Haridrci, (Curcuma longa,)Dar Haridrci, (Curcuma Zanthorrhizon,)Pananabbci, (Trianthema monogynia,)Hurann,

Trz’

lcatz’

, (Monetia barleroides)Sdriba, (Periploca Indica,) andBalla

’

, (Pavon ia odorata.)Poisons introduced into a wound, as by a p oisoned arrow. The

part quickly swells, blood flows, and from time to time pus is

evacuated. The wound becomes Ofa black colour, and dirty roundit, with a bad smell and sloughing . The person is very thirsty,fain tish, with fever, and the body becomes very hot . The same

symptoms will be produced when poison is placed over a sore .

II . Animal Poisons.

Serp ents. Poison is found in all parts of the serpen t, but whenthey are irritated the poison collects in the hood like teeth, whenthey snap with the head erect, they lodge the poison in the wound

but when the head is turned upside down they do not conveythe poison into the wound. The poison is very acid and hot, and

for preventing its effects, every thing cooling should be employed.

There are some serpents (Dibga or heaven ly) which poison the air

by their breathing, and by their sight . Others are called Bhanma,which live in holes in the ground, and the poison is in their

teeth .

Sushruta does not mention the symptoms, and cure of the firstkind ; as they kill by their breathing and sight, and the method Of

preventing their effects is not known . The Bdsnhi, Talchgah, &c .

belong to the first kind of serpents. It is this class, that are sup

posed to support the world on their heads, and when angry maydestroy thewhole world. Ofthe second class, their names, the symptoms which their bites produce, and their an tidotes are as follows

There are eighty kinds ofBhauma, serpents, which are again di

vided into five classes.

400

l . Dabz’lcara, or hooded snakes.

2 . Mandala, with figures ofround arches on their bodies.

3 . R ag’

alamanta, with longitudinal lines.

4 . Nz’

rbz’

sa, without poison .

5 . Qntranja, or mixed class which combine the peculiarities of

several ofthe others.

Certain animalshave poison in their teeth and nails such as dogs,

monkeys, cats, snub-nosed aligators, frogs, a kind of fish called

p dka mucha, guanas, a shell-fish (sambaha) , and lizards.

Others have poisonous urin e and faeces, asChip ita ,

Phi’

chatalca,

Kashdgabdsz’

ka,

Sarsap abcisz’

ka,

Totaka, and

Kaundilyaka .

Mnsi’

ha or rats have poisonous semen . Spiders (I/ata) have poison

ous saliva, urine, and faeces and their bites, and scratches are

poisonous.

Brischiha (centipede) , Bissambara, Raji’

bdmacha (a fish) , Uchi’

rang ci and Samudra Brischiha have poisonous stings.

The Chitrasira, Sarabahurdz’

, Satadarnha, An imadaha, and Sari

hamnhha, convey poison by breathing, by biting, by urin e, and

by faeces. The bones Of animals killed by poisonous arrows, and

the like ; the bones ofserpents, and ofthe fish called Baratz’, produce

poisonous effects when eaten .

Mahla’

ka, a kind of flea, Kanaba, and Jalihd (a kind ofleech) ,are poi sonous by biting .

The fishes called Sciknlz’

andRahtardji’

, have poisonous bile .General n p toms.

—There are some kinds ofserpents that onlyproduce di seases ofair, others ofbile, and a third kind ofphlegmaccordi ngly di seases Ofair are produced by serpents of the Baghzs

or hooded kind, the diseases ofbile by those of the

Mandala kind, and the derangement of phlegm is produced by thoseofthe R ajald kind.

TheBaghi’ leaves a black colour in the wound, with the symptoms

of various air diseases. They are known by being hooded. The

following symptoms are present . The skin, eyes, nails, teeth, urine,and faeces, and the part which is bitten , become black, with roughness ofthe body and heaviness ofthe head ; pain in the joints, weakness in the loins, back, and neck ; gaping, shivering, alteration of

voice, languor, hiccough, thirst, foaming and sluggishness ofthe circulation and the secretions, and all the external passages are closed.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

402

3 . It next affects the fat .4 . It enters the viscera and organs.

5 . The bones.

6 . The marrow and lastly semen, which is followed by death .

Treatment of Snake bites. When the extremities are bittenimmediately apply a tight bandage above the bitten part . This maybe a piece ofcloth , a piece ofleather, the flexible bark ofa tree, or

the like ; so as to prevent the poison en tering into the system .

When a bandage cannot be so applied the bitten part is to be cut

out . In all cases cutting out the part, sucking the wound with a

horn, or burning the part is highly proper . When the mouth is

used for sucking place a piece Ofbladder over it first, and then suck .

Different prayers (mantras) are to be used as the bandage is appli

ed ; but a scientific man should not rely on mantras, as othermeansshould be used, as antidotes, &c . to prevent the effects ofthe poison .

When the poison has reached the head, the person should be bled

and cold water prepared with Chandana (Sirium myrtifolium, a fra

gran t wood) , and Usz’

ra (Andropogon muricatum, a cooling root) ,

is to be used for bathing, and internally the different antidotes

are to be given mixed with honey. Ifthese an tidotes are not at

hand, give the black earth Of ants n ests, or Sirisa (Mimosa Siris) ,and Karbndcira (black helibore) and avoid spirits or wines.

Fluids that cause vomiting are of use, as the poison is thus

removed from the system . If these means do not succeed, then

bleed the person, and give Asida with honey and ghee . The

errhin es and collyria are likewise Of use, when made Of different

antidotes. In the fourth stage give emetics, followed by barleycorn for food. In the fifth and sixth stages use an an tiphlogistictreatment, and in the seven th give strong errhines, as ammonia, &c .

The above treatment is applicable to the other, as well as to thehooded-snake bites ; but when the class Of Baji

’

la serpents have

inflicted the bite, bleed, and then give the antidotes as above men

tion ed. When the treatment is not successful, and the person is

i nsensible, make a crucial incision on the crown of the head, and

apply to it a piece ofrecent flesh ofan an imal then exhibit errhines,make a loud noise to rouse the person, and when his sense'sreturn give him a strong purgative . The antidotes should be continned for some time after the symptoms have disappeared, otherW1sethe violent symptoms will be liable to recur .The following are varieties ofAsi’da, ormixtures ofantidotes for

the cures ofpoisons, particularly ofsnakes. Take ofTrib rit, (Convolvulus turpethum,)Bishala, (Acon itum ferox,)

403

Mada/ta, (Bassia latifolia,)Haridra, (Curcuma longa, )Dara Haridrci, (Zanthorrhizon, )R akta, (Nymphoea odorata,)Arji

’

ina, (Terminalia alata,)The five salts, with long-pepper, black-pepper, and ginger powder,

are to be mixed with honey, and kept in a close vessel . They are

to be given in ternally in water, and used at the same time as a collyrium, and errhine . This is considered as the most efficaciousan tidote known .

The following is an antidote for an imal and vegetable poison

Take OfBirang a, (Verbesina prostrata, )Pdtd, (Sida lanceolaria,)Trifold, ( the varieties Ofmyrobalan ,)Ajamodci,B ing i l , (Asafoetida,)Chakra

’

, (Citrus decumanus,)Mix with black-pepper, long-pepper, dry ginger, and the dif

ferent kinds ofsalt . Reduce them to a powder, mix them well withhoney, and keep them in the horn of a cow. This is to be shutwi th a piece ofp ith, and keep it so for a month . It may be usedas an an tidote for animal, vegetable, and mineral poisons. It iscalled Asita, or n ever failing an tidote .Differen t other varieties of these an tidotes are given in Sushruta,

&c . but these two are con sidered the most efficacious.

When animals are affectedby an imal poisons, their bodies become

swollen ,they are sluggish, and saliva proceeds from their mouths,

with pain in the chest . In the third stage there is pain in the head

they cannot support and

4th . The body shivers, they become insensible and die .

Birds when affected with poison first become sluggish, senseless,and die .

Poisons do not affect cats, nor the mongoose .

Poisonous rats. The symptoms Of different kinds Of these poi

sons is given in the medical shastras. When they discharge their

semen upon any part of the body, the blood is affected, and pro

duces differen t glandular swellings, blotches, and eruptions . In

other cases erysipelas accompan ied with pain, fever and fainting,

followed by debility, loss ofappetite, difficult breathing, and vomit

ing . In these cases Sirisa, (Mimosa Siris, ) and Kusta , (Strychnos

Nux Vomica,) are to be takenin ternally, wi th impure potassa made

ofthe wood Paldsa . In these cases bleeding is recommended, with

3 13 2

404

purgatives and emetics. The parts first touched by the poison are

to be burned or scarified, and over the part a mixture ofSirisa

(Mimosa Siris) , R ajani (Cleome corocana) , Kasta, (Strychnos Nux

Vomica) , Kunhuma (Crocus sativus) , and Amrita (Menispermum

cordifolium) , is to be applied.

The Bites of Mad Dogs.

When a dog, a jackal, a fox, a wolf, a bear, or a tiger become madthey foam at the mouth, which remain s open , their tails hang down ,they do not hear or see well, and saliva flows from their mon ths .

In such a state they snap and bite each other . The part that is.bitten becomes senseless, blood flows from the wound which be

comes black, and the other appearances are observed, as when wound

ed with a poisoned arrow. The person bitten makes the same kind

ofnoise andmovements, as that Ofthe animal which has bitten him .

When such a person sees the shape Of the an imal which has bittenhim either in water, or in a glass, it is an unfavourable symptom .

It is also unfavourable when the person is afraid ofwater, and dreadseither seeing or hearing it . This is called Jalatrcisa or hydrOpho

bia, the fear of water . When the person dreams of the rabidan imal, it is unfavourable . Towards the termination of the

disease the person is convulsed, becomes insensible, powerless, anddies.

Treatment . In all cases the first part ofthe treatment should be

to scarify the part, and squeeze out the blood, after which the part is i

to be burnt by means ofhot ghee . Then apply to the wounded part

Asida, or a mixture of antidotes, and give old ghee internally .

Errhines are also to be given with the milk Of the Ar/ca plant,

(Calotropis gigantea. ) Apply also the Sitci, Punarnabd, (Trian

thema monogyn ia,) Dhatnra, (Daturametel,) or the flesh Ofanimals

and Til Oil, jagry, milk Of Bap ika’

, mixed and applied to the wound.

By such means the poison may be destroyed soon after the infliction

ofthe wounds. In other cases take two tolds ofthe following root

Sharap nnhhd, (Trophis aspera,)Dhatura, (Datura metel . )

Let one told be mixed with flour ofrice and water, and wrap up in

the leaves of stramon ium . Roast it into cakes, and give it to

the patient . The quan tity is not stated. After taking this medicineother bad symptoms may occur, which may however disappearwithout any other remedies. During the treatmen t the patien tshould be kept in a cool situation, without any water . When thesymptoms disappear the person should then bathe, and on the

third and fifth days the above cakes are to be admin istered in halfthe dose given at first . He is then to take rice and milk. It is

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

406

Treatment . In mild cases apply oil (Chakartaila) warm water

preparedwith Bidari, (GmelinaAsiatica,) and other sedative vegetables. Apply to the part a poultice made ofthe antidotes, the powder ofturmeric, salt, long and

'

black pepper, dry-ginger, and Sirisa,

(Mimosa Siris. ) It is also recommended to apply the juic e of thelemon, cow

’

s urine, with the leaves of S irisa or apply cow-dung

after it has been heated. Give in ternally honey with ghee, or milk

with sugar, or cold water with sugar, and different kinds ofsherbats.

Sp iders. It is stated that Bishwamitra made Bashistha angry on

some occasion , and the perspiration which fell from his head fell indrops upon the grass, and in it the spiders were generated. These

spiders are therefore cal led La td, from being gen erated in grass intended for the cow. There are sixteen varieties, eight are curedwith

difficulty, and eight are incurable . The names ofthe first eight are

given, and they produce head-ache, itchiness, pain, and swelling of

the part, followed by hot fever and diarrhoea, with derangement of

phlegm and air. The eight other varieties produce sloughing of

the part , discharge ofblood, fever, burning, looseness, and diseases

of the three humors. The gen eral appearance Of these eruptions

over the body, are in the form of blotches or swellings. Some ofthem are large, others are soft or red, and others black They pass

from one part ofthe body to another . The first day after the bitethere is no . change of colour in the part, which feels itchy. The

second day the part swells, and the third the characteristic symp

toms ofthe poison develope themselves. The constitution is affected

on the fourth day, and on the fifth and sixth all the severe symptoms

appear . On the seventh day the person dies, when the poison is

strong . Ifthe poison remains in the upper part of the stomach it

produces diseases of phlegm and air ; and if in the stomach , the

diseases of air and bile, when the hair falls Off. Cloudy, windy,and cold weather increase the violence ofthe poison . These poisons

produce drowsiness, languor, and pain in differen t parts of the body,and indigestion . Blotches appear over the body, the person losesflesh, his hands and feet swell, followed by faintn ess, vomiting,diarrhoea, sonorous breathing, thirst, fever, spasm, and swelling of

the abdomen (Andha) with delirium . Each variety is treated in a

particular manner according to the symptoms. It is, however, unn e

cessary to descend to these particulars. The part shouldbe cut out,and the actual cautery should be applied to the wound. The partis then to be rubbed with honey, and salt, _

or Azida . The person isalso to have purgatives, and emetics admin istered to him and

should there be much swelling, apply leeches. In all the varieties ofspider-bites apply Asida to the part .

407

The red lizard produces a black tinge and grey colour, or mottled

colour over the body. This is accompan ied with delirium and

diarrhoea.

Frogs if seized by a serpent and escape, and bite a person, theperson ’s hair stands on end, severe pain is felt over the body, and

the part is insen sible . The part swells, a nd small pimples appear

on the part, with vomiting and drowsiness.

Fish poison produces great heat, swelling, and severe pain .

Leeches when poisonous produce an itchiness, and swelling ofthe

part, with fever and fainting .

When poisons .have been taken and the person gets well, it is

known by his feeling well, the different fluids are healthy, his appctite, urine, dejection s are of the natural colour, the body has the

natural appearance, as also the senses and mind, and they act pro

perly.

Emetics for Poison . Drink goat’s milk, after the poison has

been taken, un til the person vomits ; this is to be repeated un til

it does not produce this effect, when no more poison is present .Black coloured poison is n ever to be used as medicine .WeakPoisons, There are seven varieties ofthese

poisons.

Veg etable Poisons.

Hemp , ( Ganj a or Grinjci .) The extract Ofhemp combin ed with

Opium is employed by theHindus, for enabling them to commit fearless action s. It throws them in to a state offerociousmadness, whenno crime stops, and no danger terrifies. The fanatics whom the Old

man of the moun tain intoxicated in this mann er to prepare them to commit assassinations .

* Amixture Of tobacco and

the extract of hemp, ( Ganja p ita) acts as a poison of a very!

strong kind. For preventing these effects, ghee, the juice of the

sugar-cane, raisins, sugar, water and hon ey are recommended ; after

sour articles have been given to produce vomiting . The symptoms

it produces are fever, insensibility, thirst, swelling ofthe abdomen ,difli culty of breathing, cough, dryness of the mouth, &c . The

mouth is to be washed with sweet, sour, and bitter substances,which will improve the senses, and its effects on the heart ; and

the bad particles ofthe poison which get into the brain will be discharged. For doing this more effectually, as is supposed, - i

sions are sometimes made in to the crown Of the head, with thefanciful intention ofdischarging the pernicious smoke . During thecure hot articles offood are avoided, and light food and ghee, andthe like is proper.

J. Hammer Mem : de l’orient.

408

Dhatara, (DaturaAmrita, (Acon itum,)Ai

’

p hena, (Opium,)Karabira root, (Nirium odorum,)Arka

, (CalotrOpis gigantea,)Langalt

’

, (Gloriosa superba.)All these poisons are purified by being boiled in hot milk, or in

water mixed with cow-dung for halfan hour and the kernel ofthe

seed is generally used internally, m ixedwith other stimulating me

dicines. Thus Jagp al (Croton seeds) , when it has been so boiled, ismixed with pepper, vermilion, and other medicines. Thismixture isgiven in small doses in the beginn ing offever . Datura is preparedin this same way, mixed with other medicines and used as a nar

cotic and stimulant . Euphorbium and the root of theAbrus precatorius, Oleander Helibore (Kata hi) , and thedifferent varieties of acon itum are prepared by reducing the rootsto small pieces, soaking them in cow

’

s urine, and three days before

it is to be used removing it from the liquid dry it in a strong heat,andadminister it at first in doses the size ofa mustard seed, increasing

it for seven days, and then diminish the dose . A leprous person may

take one ganja, which is about the weight of on e rati, or one and a

half grains. When this poison has been administered in too large

doses give goat’s milk, which will produce vomiting, and thus remove

the poison from the stomach . The dried bile Of fish, of goats,buffaloes, wild boars, and peacocks are used, and are admin istered as

stimulating medicines . These five varieties Ofbile are much employed as stimulants. They are purified by being macerated in the

juice of lemon . (These different poisons with Croton seeds are thechiefingredients in the celebrated bis bari

”or poisonous pills. )

NamVomica (Kasta, Kap ila) is prepared by being steeped forthree days in conj ee-water . It is then mixed with mustard oil and

other medicines, and is used by the moderns as a powerful internal

medicine in small doses, and as an external application for the

cure ofleprosy.

Bitumen (Silagata) , Pe troliam (Booma tglam) , are got in hills inwhich gold and silver are found. It has the smell ofcow’

s urine,and is bitter, salt, and cold. It is usually mixed with different othermedicines, ls supposed to have an alterative effect, and may be advan tageously used in the cure ofall diseases.

The most common mann er in which it is employed is as an external application in rheumatic complaints, and in cases of epilepsy,hysteria, and palsy. See Celsus, lib . 3, cap . 5 .

Poisons should be taken internally in the quantity of a mustard

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

4 10

increase semen . When in large quantities these qualities act unfa~

vourably on the humors, and instead of strengthening the bodythey will destroy

- it. Spirits, like medicin e, when taken in a

proper manner, restore appetite and strength to the body. When

taken with butter and rice, flesh, or other food, they increase the

person ’

s life beyond the periodwritten at the individual’s birth, bystrengthening, and increasing the person

’

s health . When drank inlarge quantities it increases so much the internal heat, that it

deranges the humors, and the person becomes mad. His sensebecomes deranged, and whatever he fancies to do he will not desist

from ; as singing, telling secrets, Speaking nonsense, &c . When

spirits are not drank according to rule, it produces difl'

erent effects.

There are three stages of drunkenness . In the first stage the

person feels very happy, and strong . The energy ofhis body is increased, as also the acuteness ofthe senses, memory, appetite, andsleep . The person can apply to abstruse books, can play on instruments, and sing better than usual .2nd. After these symptoms, the mind is obscured and memory

deficient, the person speaks and works badly, and the person becomeslike a fool . At his work his mind is not quiet, he is always lazy,sleepy, and is like a drunkard.

3rd. Then he goes after women , or person s that are respected ;his father, mother, &c . unnatural articles are eaten , and the

person speaks every thing, and takes n o care ofhis body or goods.

4th . He becomes quite foolish, and falls to the earth like apiece of broken wood. He can do nothing, knows nothing, andlives like a dead man . Ifa good man, he can no longer performgood actions.

When cooling substances are eaten, or such food as does not increase phlegm, as oleaginous substances, the person will not becomeso easily drunk . Habit diminishes the susceptibility very much, butbecomes liable to the attacks ofthe most fatal diseases, with severe

pain . He also becomes passionate, fearful, thirsty, and melancholy .

His body becomes covered with sores, &c . is constipated, and he isfond of. eating sour things. In weak persons the body becomeshot, and the habit so bad as to produce various diseases .

When nothing is eaten with the spirit, he soon becomes drunk,accompanied with the diseases produced by great grief. When the

person is very angry, and drinks Spirit as also when very fearful,severe diseases are produced ; when very thirsty, or when thereis great grief, or when he is very hungry and spirits alone are

taken . When violent exercise, as fencing, &c . is taken, or whenfatigued with walking, spirits are very bad as also when the

4 1 1

stomach, urine, &c . are constipated, or when very sour things

have been taken , or what has been eaten is not digested, spirits

will produce dangerous diseases. When the person is weak,when the body is very hot from the sun , &c . When ;the air is

deranged, different substances ofa heating nature may be given

with the spirit and salt . Spirits with emetics, are also used ;avoiding sour articles . All these produce severe di seases Ofvariouskinds. Such asPdndtga, Parammada, Pa

’

ncirjtrna andPdndrbibhra

ma, in which the body is hot and heavy, has no taste, and

there is much cough, no appetite, with a constipated state of thedejections and urine . In Pdndrjirna the bodyis hot, head-ache

,thirst,

pain in the joints, swelling ofthe abdomen , sour belching, &c .

When air is diseased by spirits, there is pain in the limbs, and themind is deranged, hiccough, noisy breathing, head-ache, and severepain in the side, such a person has no sleep

,becoming delirious .

When bile is deranged, thirst, heat ofthe body, fever, sweating, andmeha are produced. When urin e is deranged, Atisctr (diarrhoea) ,Abaran (no memory) , and the skin becomes ofa green colour . In

such cases phlegm is vomited, the person has no appetite, with

nausea, anddozing . He has coldfits, and the body is heavy .

When the three are deranged, they produce all the symptoms of

the separate diseases, with one named Pa’ndtga . The secondaryeffects of ardent spirits are Parammada with deranged phlegm,

which is dischargedfrom the body, and the mouth . The body feelsheavy, and the mouth has a bad taste with constipation

, dozing, noappetite, thirst, head-ache, and the joints are pained.

Pa’

narjirna, or Indigestion , is a consequence of the free use Ofspirits. The stomach swells, with much vomiting, the body is hot,he complains of head-ache, the spirit is not digested, andAjirna,in all its forms are produced.

Pcindrbibhrama . Symptoms ofderanged bile with pain ofthe

chest and body, vomiting, fever, head-ache, and cough ; muaus isdischarged from the mouth and nose the trachea feels like smoketo the person , and the body hot . In such cases none of the usual

food, especially Ofrice and articles from which spirits are produced,is to be given . When a person in this disease appears as if drunk

he will die of it . When the mouth of such a person is twistedor otherwise unnatural, the body is cold, but is supposed by theperson to be hot, the mouth the colour ofOil, the tongue, lips,

’

teeth, of a dark colour, or blue, and eyes yellow or red, hiccough,or fever, vomiting, or shivering, pain in the sides, cough, forgetful

ness, he will not recover .Daha (Inflammation) , spirits producing heat, derange the blood,

3 c 2

4 12

and bile of the skin and produce this disease . The medi cines that

cure bile when deranged, cure this disease . The following varieties

are described1 . The first variety affects the skin .

2 . This variety affects the blood producing a wrinkled anddrystate and copper colour of the skin with thirst . The smell ofthebody andmouth resembles that of blood, and the body is hot, likethat produced by fever .3 . When bile is deranged it is like the fever which this produces

when deranged and the varieties are the sam e .4 . This resembles the last . The thirst is not gratified from the

person ’

s foolishn ess, the heat Ofthe internal and external surface of

the body is increased. The throat, palate and lips are dry, and the

tongue is thrust out Ofthe mouth with shivering ofthe body.

5 . When much blood is collected in the abdomen , great heat is

produced.

6 . When much Of the elements are discharged from the body,a form of this disease is produced. When ddha occurs the personswoons, is thirsty, mucus is discharged from the nose and throat,and he cannot work . In other cases when severe, and a physiciandoes not see the patient, he dies .

7 . Sensible partswhen wounded or bruised produce a kind ofthisdisease, which is not cured, as blows on the temples . In all the

above forms when the interior of the body is hot, and the exterioris cold, the disease is always dangerous.

CLASS XI .Small diseases are arrang ed under the following heads.l . Ajag alliha.

—Small tuberculous eruptions of the form of

peas. It occurs in children .

2 . Jabap rahhia are hard fleshy eruptions, like the grains of

barley. They are produced by diseased phlegm and air.

3 . Andalaji.—Round elevated pimples containing matter, produced by di seased phlegm and air.

4 . Bibritd.—An eruption like the ripe fig with inflammation .

5 . Kachhap ikd.—Five or six tumors of the shape of turtles ;

produced by diseased phlegm and air.

6 . Balmihd, are tumors in the soles of the feet or palms of

the hand, or in a joint, or in the neck, axilla, and other parts . They

increase by degrees, like the hills ofwhite ants ; and are surroundedwith painful and itchy ulcers, and accompan ied with a discharge .7 . Indrabriddha.

—Tumors surroundedby small eruptions, likethe inside ofa water-lily.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

4 14

35 . Nilihaé—Bluish coloured Spotsin the face.

36 . Paribartika.—Swelling of the prepuce, (Phymosis, see

37 Abapcitiha .-When the prepuce turns backwards, and swells

(Paraphymosis, see before . )37 Niradhop rohasa .

—Stricture ofthe '

urethra, (see before .)38 . Sanniradagada .

—Stricture ofthe anus, (see before .)39 . Ahipatana .

- Small eruptions round the anus, particularlyin children

40 . Brisandhacha .—Peculiar itch of the scrotum produced by

uncleanness.

4 1 . Gadabhransa .—Prolapsus ani .

42 . Shahdrddanstraha.—Swellingswith inflammation ofthe skin .

43 . Granthi .—Tumors and diseases ofglands.

44 . Bisharp a .—Erysipelatous inflammation, (see before . )

B O O K V

MIDWIFERY, AND DISEASES OF WOMEN AND

CHILDREN.

CHAPTER I .

Treatment ofwomen daring p regnancy and labour .

From the time of conception the woman should be happy, sheshould remain pure, shouldwear ornaments andwhite clothes, andthenames ofthe gods, guru, and brahmans should be frequently repeat

ed and worshipped. Such a female must not touch dirty, diseased,or imperfectly formed individuals. Things wi th a bad smell, andevery thing bad, or disagreeable to the sight, are to be avoided she

should avoid fasting, the use of dry articles of food, food preparedthe day before, or putrid, or food that had been moistened.

This last remark refers particularly to rice . The female shouldremain at home in order to avoid devils, and avoid houses in whichthe possessors have died ; or enter temples, or where bodies areburn t, or under trees. Anger also is to be avoided. She should avoidfatigue, venery, carrying heavy weights, sleeping in the day time,watching at night, grief, blood letting, or violent exercise, as horseexercise . She should live on well boiled, and easily digested foodis not to speak loud, or exert herself so as to be fatigued, which

may affect the foetus ; should not besmear the body with oil, or tur

meric . Her bed should be soft and low. Such food is to begiven as she wants, but it must be soft, thin, sweet, Oleaginous, and

what promotes the internal heat . Such directions are to be Obser

ved un til She is delivered. During the three first months the foodshould be very sweet, cool, and thin, as rice andmilk ; the fourthmonth she should take curdledmilk ; the fifth milk ; sixth ghee and

during the seventh month ghee with milk, prepared with a decoc

4 1 6

tion of Pratachp urace, &c ., should be given, as it will retain the

foetus happy, and nourish it . During the eighth month give ene

mas with a decoction of

Badara , ( a kind of plum,)Bald, (Pavonla odorata,)Atibald, (Annona squamosa,)

with milk, whey, Oil, and ghee . By this means the bowels are

cleared, the air will be retained in a favourable state for assist

ing at the delivery ofthe infant, and will ensure its proper position .

After these enemas give barley or ri ce, with the juice ofwild ani

mals.

The woman is to be removed on the 9th month to the room in

which she is to be delivered. This is generally a temporary shedbuilt for the purpose near the house, and is afterwards destroyed.

The removal must be on a favourable day. The house in which a

Brahman woman is to be delivered must have a white floor a

Khetriga woman a red floor ; Baishya, yellow floor and a Sudra,

a floor ofblack earth .

* The house is to be made ofBel wood, if

the woman is a Brahman ifa Khetriya, the wood of the sacred

(Ngagrodha) fig tree the Baishya house is to be made ofthe Tendraka tree, andfor the Sudra ofthe Bablci tree . The house and cotare to be made of the same wood, the walls must be clean , and thefurniture properly arranged. The door should be either to the eastor south, and eight cubits long by four broad.

The approach of delivery is known by the descent of the uterus,and the more flaccid state Of the abdomen, the breasts becomerelaxed, and pain commences in the loins, back, and inside of the

thighs . When it is approaching, pain is felt in the sides and back,there is a frequen t inclination to stool, andmictirition, followed by amucous di scharge from the vagina. She should have male children

to surround her bed, and she shouldhold in her hand flowers and

fruits of a masculine kind. Her body is to be well anointed withOil, and bathed in warm water, and then sour gruel is given in

large quan tities to assist by its weight and quality in expelling the

child. The bed is to be soft, with high pillows under her head,she is to lie on her back, her thighs are to be separated, and her

legs ben t . Four Old experienced women are to attend. They should

have short nails, and know the art of delivering and before whomthe patient has no shame or fear .

‘When labour has commenced,

these women must tell the patien t that her infant, like an extrane

ous substance, must be expelled, and that the proper time hasarrived. The patient must be directed to press downwards, by re

The emblems of the degree of purity of the individual .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

4 18

skin ofserpents, with sour milk, oil, &c . Other articles are appliedto the vagina for the same purpose, as the root ofthe Kasta-langa lz

’

(Nama zeylan ica) , and alvine evacuations mixed with urin e, andwine . These are boiled in white mustard or ghee, Oil is to be added,and the mixture is rubbed over the belly .

The first milk of the mother appears about the fourth day, andis to be thrown away and as much as can be retained in the palmof the hand is to be mixed with honey and ghee

, and given to the

infan t at two periods. After this the child should obtain nourishmen t from the mother .

After delivery the mother’s body should be anointed with oil

preparedwith a decoction ofBallet (Terminalia bellerica) , or a decoc

tion ofsuch articles as remove an excess ofair. Should any excess

of air, bile, or phlegm exist, long-peper and its root, Hasti-p ipp ali’

(Arum macrohizon ) , Chitraha (Limon ia pentagyna) , Sering abera

(Quercus lanceofolia) , are to be powdered, mixed with water Oftreacle, and given warm. For two or three days this is the only food

to be given , orun til the hadblood is removed andwhen it is purified,give a decoction ofrice and barley gruel, prepared with Beddrz

’

g anda

(Bauhinia variegata andother plants, withmilk . This decoction is

to be continued for three days then give rice with the juice ofwild

animals.This regimen is to be con tinued for 1 5 days, or until the

mother’s strength is restored. After this period, she will leave thetemporary house in which she was delivered, and return to her

usual occupations.

If the woman does not observe these rul es Of diet and regimen

after -delivery but lives on improper or poor food, exercises herself

.too early after delivery, exposes herselfto fatigue or to changes in

.the weather, she is liable to other and dangerous diseases ; such as

fever, diarrhoea, dysentery, anasarca ; and in other cases to pain, costiveness,weakn ess, dispepsia andall diseases producedby deranged airandphlegm . These diseases after parturition are called Sutika-roga,and are cured with much difficulty, or when the woman is weak theyare incurable . These are likewise produced by grief, and when theyhave occurred, they are to be treated according to the custom,

nature, place, and age ofthe patien t and when judiciously treated,she may be cured.

After delivery the body is dry, if hot things are given, and bad‘blood remains, and is collected by the air in the uterus, it producesswelling in the umbiliacus, Sides, and in , and above the bladder ;.with great pain in the pelvis, head, andbreast, as ifthese partswerepiercedwith n eedles. In other cases it stops the urine, and is aecom

p aniedwith fever, pain over the body, thirst, shivering, heaviness,

41 9

and causes Swelling Of the abdomen’

and dysentery. This disease

resembles Mahalah .

Certain decoctions, such as Biratari’

t (Sida cordifolia) are given for

the cure ofthis disease, as also the powder ofn itre, with warmwater, and ghee . Powdered long-pepper, and other such articles,with wine, are also given .

These are the complicated and dangerous diseases of the puerperal state, which are less marked among the weak Asiatics, anddo

not require those prompt and en ergetic measures so n ecessary when

the European female is the subject ofthese diseases .

Treatment of the Infant .

The infan t is to be covered with silk cloth, and the bed shouldbe properly made, and of soft materials. It is to be fanned

with the bran ch of a Nimp ila tree , is to have the oiled cloth

daily applied to its head and face, and always kept in the roomwith the mother . The room is to be smoked with a mixtureof several sweet-scen ted gums and woods, accompanied with a

suitable prayer . White mustard seed is to be thrown round the

child to preven t the approach of evil spirits, and such charms are tobe applied to the n eck, head, arms, and legs as will preven t theirapproach . Lin seed and mustard seed are also to be sprinkled overand around the infant for the same purpose . After ten days the father and mother, with the prescribed ceremon ies, are to name thechild according to their pleasure, or the star whi ch is in the ascendan ce at the time of birth . During this time the paren ts are to

remain pure and happy .

Wet Nurse. The nurse should have a perfect body, ofa yellowish tinge, be n either long nor short, neither lean nor fat, ofa mid

dle age, without disease ofa good temper, ofa stayed good dispositiou, and without covetousness. The milk should be good and

flow easily from the n ipple, which should n ot be long, not too large,nor too small, nor the mammae large . If good the milk will becold, clean, white, like a white shell, should mix with water withoutbubbles ofair, and should not be glutinous.

When the woman is very hungry, is grieved, fatigued, has badhumors, is again pregnan t, is feverish, very thin, or very stout,and eats roasted things and unhealthy mixtures or when the n ip:

ples are not long, and the mammae large and pendulous, the milkwill not be so good.

The nurse should have pleasure in children, ifnot, the milk willdry up soon . She should not work at a low occupation, and should“

be Ofa good family. The more ofthese qualities the nurse possesses3 D 2

420

the better . A fortunate day is to be found out upon which the infant

is first to get the breast . Before this is don e the nurse is to bathe,

and have new clothes given to her. She is then to sit down with

her face towards the east, with the child’s to the north . Then the

right mammae is to be washed, and a little milk removed. If the

breast is given the child without this precaution the milk producesdifficulty ofbreathing, coughing, and vomiting .

This is to be avoided, and the n ext milk given with a prayer, for

an abundance of good milk, which will afford strength, and health

to the infant, like that of the gods. If these directions are not

observed, and the milk of different nurses given, diseases will be

produced in the child. The nurse must avoid heavy things, must

eat her food at regular intervals, and avoid whatever will derange

air, bile, or phlegm as this will render the milk bad, and produce

diseases in the infant . She also should avoid bad mixtures and

situations, such as anger, grief and care, as by these mean s the

milk is diminished and rendered unhealthy. To increase the milk

she should be encouraged, and made happy. For this purpose sheShould live on nourishing and easily digested food, such as barley,flour, rice, the broths ofan imals, fish and good vegetables.

If a nurse uses bad food, her milk is affected, and pro

duces pain and derangemen t in the humors of the infan t . A

good physician should observe the signs of all such diseases.

The infant, if pained in a part, will touch it frequen tly, and if

it is pressed it will cry. If the head be diseased, the infan t

will keep his eyes closed, and he will not be able to support

the head. If the bladder be diseased the urine will be suppressed

with pain , thirst, and fain tn ess. If the urin e and dejections are

discoloured, the colour ofthe body is unnatural, with vomiting and

swelling of the abdomen . When the air is accompanied with noise

in the intestines and crying, the whole body is affected. In such

cases give soft and mild medicines, with the milk of the mother or

nurse . The medicine which will soon cure deranged air, bile, and

phlegm is to be used. Ifmilk is given alon e to the infan t, any medi

cin e that may be required to be given during this time must like

v'

Vise be given to the nurse .

Ifthe infant lives on m ilk and rice, the nurse is to take medicine

at the same time but should the child live on rice alon e, medicine

is not to be given to the nurse when the child is diseased. Ifup

wards of one month Old, and the child live on milk, a pinch of

medicine is only to be given ; if it live on milk and rice, the doseofmedicine is to be ofthe size ofa stone of a plumb . Ifonly rice,the size ofa plumb is to be given .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

422

the fifth year, his studies must be commenced, and will be regulated according to his caste and condition . The marriage state should“

not be consummated before the twelfth year in the female, andtwenty-fifth year of the male . If a male before the twen ty-fifth

year has a child with a woman before the sixteenth year, the off

spring will die in the uterus or if it is born alive, it wi ll not livelong, or ifit lives, the mental as well as bodily organs will be defec a

tive . Connection is to be avoided with very old or young males orfemales, or those who labour under chronic diseases.

CHAPTER II .

Means ofp reventing abortion .

Abortion is threatened when there is severe pain in the uterus,loins, groin and bladder, and blood is discharged from the vagina .

In such cases the effusion of cold water and cold bathing is to be

used, and cooling things are to be applied to the surface of the

body . In ternally milk and ghee, prepared with the class ofmedi»

cin e called Geboneo are useful or that which preserves life . Ifthe

movement of the infant be considerable, exhibit milk preparedwith Utp oladz

’

. If the pain is severe, with a discharge of blood,costiven ess and retention of urine, or the displacement of the

foetus, give oleaginous medicin es internally, and apply them externally . If the pain is very severe take milk prepared with the

decoction of

Mafiasz'

a, (Jessaminum pubescens, )Kudrosia, (Paspalum scrob iculatum,)Mada/co, (Phaseolus mungo, ),Sodonstra, (Tribulus terrestris,) and

Kanti/tdrz’

, (Solariumjacquini, )Mixwith sugar and honey. Ifthere be reten tion ofurine, give milk

prepared with diuretic decoctions, if the costiven ess is severe give

asafoetida, Sauburecfiulla(a kind ofsalt) , back (orris root) , preparedwith milk . If there is much discharge of blood give the followingmixtures :

Kostagciralai, (Corchorus capsularis, )Somongd, (Triticum aestivum,)Ddtula

’

, (Andropogon , )Nabamcilz

‘

lca, (Webera tetrandra,)Guerz

’

lca, ,Leucocephala graminifolia,z)

423

Sarg arasa, (Brassica rapuR asanjana, (sulphurate of antimony,)

mix these with honey . In other cases a mixture of astringentmedicines is given, the an tiphlogistic diet and treatment followed, and a piece of cloth soaked in astringen t decoctions is to

be stuffed into the vagina. If abortion is thus prevented, the

female is afterwards to live on a strict diet, consisting ofmilkprepared with a decoction of Urambara (fig) . Boiled rice and

barley, without salt or ghee, is also to be given . If there be

much pain in the belly give old jagry with other carminatives.

Sometimes by deranged air the foetus is retained more than ten

months, which will destroy it . In such cases the mother should

have nourishing food and oleaginous medicin es, such as broths

made of. the flesh of Utlcrosa (a bird) , with ghee and rice, &c . In

like manner the mother should exercise herself, particularly in

raising and lowering her head and body, as in humming, &c . , and

should ride over a place which has inequalities on its surface . If

the air dries up the foetus, the belly does not enlarge, and the

foetusmoves little about . In such cases strengthening broths, and

other food with milk is to be used. Sometimes the fruit of the

conception is removed by the influence of devils . In such cases the

symptoms of pregnancy suddenly disappear .

Food during the déferent mon ths of Utero Gestation .

The food of the mother should be regulated so as to prevent

abortion . During the i st mon th giveJastimadfiu, (liquorice,)the seed of the teak tree,Salsa p oisa, (Centaureamuschata or

Kirkdkolz’

, (Cucumis utilissimus, ) and

Saradciru, (Phyllan thus ramnoides,)in a decoction with milk .

2nd month . Asantaka, (Terminalia alata,)Tila, (Momordica monodelpha, )Pip ulz

’

, (Ficus religiosa,)Tammarabuli, (Tamarindus Indicum,) and

Satagarz'

, (Nelumbium speciosum,)in a decoction prepared with milk .

3rd month . Berka’

dum’

, (Asclepias rosea,)Kirka

’

lcolz’

, (Cucumis utilissimus,)Ananta, (Justicia adhatoda, )

as before, with milk .

4th month . Anantd, (Justicia adhatoda,)

424

Sumdlaf, (Sarcostema viminialis,)Raslmd, (Dolichos sinensis,)Pada, (Nelumbium Speciosum,)Madulta, (Bassia latifolia, )

5 th month . Berui t'

, (Volkamerea infortunata,)

(Solanum jacquini,)d sarz

'

, (Euonymus tingens,)Kirisung , (Butea frondosa,)

( the roots andbark ofbanyan, or bot tree) preparedwithghee andmilk.

6th month . Decoction of

Pristap urnz’

.7

Balld, (Pavon ia odorata,)Sigrn, (Hyperanthera moringa,) with milk .

7th month .

‘ Siringatakafi, (Quercus lanceofolia,)Minala, (Erythrina suberosa,)Draksfiya, (grapes, )Kaseru, (Euonymus tingens, )Madulca, (liquorice,)

and sugar mix, and prepare the decoction with milk .

Shouldabortion threaten,moremilk is to be added to themedicines .

8th month . Kap ittalt, (Dolichos pruriens, )Biratz

’

, (Volkameria infortunata,)Balla, (Pavonia odorata, )Pa tala, (Trichosan thes lacin iosa,)I/clthu, (Saccharum oflicinale,) and

Kantilcarilca (Solanum jacquini . )The roots ofthesemedicines are to be boiled, and usedwith milk .

9th month . Liquorice ,Ananta, (Justicia adhatoda,)Kirkalcolz

'

, (Cucumis utilissimus,)Sciat

'

ta, (Rosa glandulifera,)are to be given in the form ofa decoction with milk .

1 0th mon th . Milk with dry ginger and Ktrlra/tolz'

are to be

boiled together . If pain i s felt in the stomach take dry ginger,Jastimadiza (liquorice) , which are to be boiled together . By these

medicines pain will be prevented and removed, and the child will

be nourished.

If the woman becomes pregnant six years after the first pregnancy. the second infant will live -a short time . Ifsevere and dan

gerons disease occur during p regnancy, mild medicines mixed in

sweet and sour vehicles are to be given with'

soft, digestable, and

nourishing food, as rice, milk, &c. If emet ics or purgativesare

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

426

The foetus may die in the uterus, by great griefor other passionsby injuries of the abdomen , by eating very hot things, or by dis

eases of the child. Such causes will naturally separate, and thusdestroy the child, as worms and storms destroy the fruits of trees.

When this takes place the signs are the cessasion ofthe movementsof the child, the absence of the peculiar pains of labour, the lividcolour of the face, the foetid smell of the breath, and pain in thevagina . When abortion takes place within the four first months,when it has received a soul, it is called Garbhabichyuti should it

occur after thi s period, when the parts are all perfect, it is called

Garhhapata .

When air isderanged in the abdomen er vagina, severe pain is ex

perienced, and it produces Ma trahrichchhra, (Strangury. ) Monstersare produced by the sinful actions ofthe parents, and twins are pro «

duced by the air in the uterus .

Under ordinary circumstances, parturition is promoted by the

action ofthe air, but when the air is deranged it produces unnatu

ral presen tations, and unusual parts of the child presen t, and it isimpeded in its birth . When a prominent blue vein appears upon

the abdomen ofthe mother, or when the body is very cold, and the

mother is without shame, the foetus will die . Both mother”

and

child will die, when she is attacked during utero-gestation with a

bad disease .When the childdies from any cause, or delivery cannot be accom

plished by the ordinary means, the woman is always to be consider

ed to be in amost dangerous state . The woman’

s protector, whether

a husband or father, and the raja ofthe place is to be told the state

she is in , and that the only hope the practi tioner can hold out to

save the mother’s life, or give a chance to the infant being preserved,is the performance of a difficult and dangerous Operation as it is“

performed on an internal organ , in wh ich the position of the child

is liable to change, and is in the dark.

There are three cases which may impede deliveryl st . By a deformity ofthe head.

2nd. By the shoulders presenting .

3rd. By the thighs presenting .

Should the infant be alive in the abdomen , the mother should tryto expel it herself. If she cannot do that, prayers are to be repeat

ed over some water which the woman is to drink, calling on the

gods to produce natural delivery . As this prayer is pronounced,and the water drank, the various medicines for facilitating the eXpulsion of the child are to be given , while she lies on her back, withher legs bent, and the loins somewhat elevated. The hand of the

427

practitioner is to be well covered with ghee, and introduced into the

vagina, and thus remove the infan t. Should the thigh presen t, thefeets are to be brought straight together by the hand introduced intothe uterus, and the infan t thus extracted.

Ifthe breach presents it is to be pushed upwards with the hands,and the legs extracted first . If the foetus is transverse the lowerpart is to be pressed up, and the upper is to be brought down , and

thus delivered. Should the side of the body or shoulder presen t,they are to be pushed upward, and the head is first to be delivered.

If both hands present, push them upwards, and bring the head

towards the vagina . The two last Operat ions are performed with

much diflflculty . Ifit cannot be thus removed, the kn ife is to be

used. Ifthe hand cannot be so employed, the body Ofthe infant is

to be divi ded, and thus removed in pieces but this is n ever to be done

when the infant is alive, as by this Operation both will be killed.

When a pregnan t woman , n ear the full time, is sudden ly killed asa goat is killed before the altar, and should the child move in the

uterus, an incision is to be made in the abdomen , and the infan t

If the dead child cannot be removed the kn ife is to be used.

The woman is to be encouraged with hope by kind language, and

the Mandalag rd (or Ung li Shcistra, see plate) kn ife is to be intro «

duced through the vagina, the head is first to be divided, andthe bones are to be separated and removed. A hook is to be fixedin the orbit or cheeks, and it is to be extracted. Then the hook isto be fixed in the breast, belly, or axilla, and the child is to bethus removed. Ifthe infant be dead, and the shoulders presen t first,divide them at the shoulder-join t, and then deliver . When the ah

domen Ofthe foetus is much swelled divide it, remove the in testines,and extract . Ifthe breech presents, divide the bon es of the pelvis

and extract . In this manner any part which impedes labour is to

be divided, and removed, so as to save the mother . For this pur

pose much care is required. As soon as the foetus is known to be

dead, a skilful practitioner will lose no time in completing delivery,as the woman will die very soon ifthe dead foetus is left in the ute

One ofmy Pandits informed me that in a case that came under hisObservation , in which delivery could not b e accomplished, and the child

was alive, the physician told the husband that unless an Operation was

performedboth would die . It was referred to the woman , who with

heroism answered, do not mind me , save the life of my child ! The

operation was performed, the wound in the abdomen sewedup, and both

child and mother recovered.

428

rus. A pointed instrument should not be employed in performingthis operation, as it is liable to wound the mother .

Ifthe secondines do not come away, they are to be removed, bymanual assistance . The abdomen is to be gently pressed on each

side, and the patient is to be shaken by a strong person seizing herbehind, after Oil has been applied to the passages.

When the foetus and secondines have been removed the womanis to have tepid water thrown over the body, and it is then to beanointed with oil, and a piece ofcloth dipped in Oil is to be applied

to the external parts, which will diminish the after-pai ns, and

keep the parts shut . After this give the mother the following mix

tures to diminish the after-pains, and to disperse the bad humors

collected in the part . A mixture of long-pepper, and its root,dry

-ginger, asafoetida, cardamum seeds,

Bycighri, (Ficus Indica,)Jawani

’

, (Hedysarum alhagi .)Bach, (Iris Germanica,)Atibisha, (Annona squamosa,)Bassia, (Dolichos sinensis,) andChaba, (Cicer arietinum, )

which is to be given in powder with ghee, as a decoction or as a paste.

This is to be repeated daily for three, five, or seven days, according to circumstances. Mild tinctures and wines are to be given at

n ight . Ifany other disease appears at this period, the usual treatmen t is to be followed. The parts are to be washedwith a decoc

tion of

Girisa, (Achyranthes aspera,) andKahuba . (Diospyros melanoxylon . )

The body must be kept perfectly clean . She should live on light

milk food, and use daily warm Oleaginous frictions, with the hand.

Numerous prepared Oils are used after parturition , till four mon ths

after . The patient should avoid anger, use milk with medicineswhich dimin ish air, for ten days. She may then take broths. If

the strength and appearance ofthe body is completely restored, sheis to return in four months to her usual diet.

Diseases of the Mammce .

When air, bile, and phlegm are deranged, and fall on these parts,whether there be milk or not, they derange the flesh and blood, andproduce different diseases of the mammae . There are five forms Of

these diseases, one Of which is produced by each of the diseasedhumors, and another by their combination . The symptoms and

treatment of all these forms of diseases resemble other inflamma

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

430

child, until he is a year old. From 1 to 16 years the above will

answer ; and other medicines, ofa stronger description should beemployed according to the constitution , and nature Ofthe sickness.

, Errhines should not be given to a childunder seven years, smoking under twelve years, medicinal waters to clean the mouth until

the child has passed his fifth year, nor a brush to clean his teethbefore his twelfth year .

Purulent Ophthalmia of Infants, (Kuhzinaha )

Bad milk produces disease Ofthe eyelids, which, with the neighbouring parts, are very itchy tears flow copiously, the eyesare verysensible to light, and they cannot open their eyelids.

Marasmus, (Parig arbhihaj

When a pregnant woman continues to give suck to a child, it produces cough, bad appetite, vomiting, drowsiness, and emaciation .

The child loses its vivacity, and the abdomen swells. In this casethe milk is to be changed, and ton ics are to be given . When phlegmis diseased in the soft palate small pointed elevation s form there

, by

which the fontanell becomes depressed, the soft palate is destroyed,the child cannot suck, and there is a difficulty in swallowing, greatthirst, and pain in the throat and mon th . He cannot sit up, and

he vomits. This disease is called Taluhan taha . In this case the

mother’s milk is not wan ted, and very thin food is to be given invery small quantities, when the child is thirsty . Children are sub

jcet to erysepelas, which is always a most dangerous disease, andrequires much attention and care .

In other cases the temples swell, like the leafOfa water-lily, anddescends to the breast . It is produced by a disease of the air,

bile, and phlegm . In other cases it commences in the thorax or

abdomen , anddescends to the anus. Other diseases, ofthe class of

small diseases, are produced. Fever, and other diseases of adults

may occur in infan ts, and the medicines to be admin istered mustbe varied by the experienced practition er according to the circumstances Ofeach case .

Diseases p roduced by Devils.

These diseases are numerous, as they not only enabled the

practition er to accoun t for various and unusal forms Of diseases,which they did not understand, but also afforded a favourableOpportunity for the brahmans to reap a rich harvest from the

ignoran t people . I have before given a full account of these devils,from its forming such a curious chapter of the history of me

dioine . Infants are supposed to be liable to be affectedby n ine kinds

43 1

ofspirits or devils, which may assume various forms at will . Theyare produced from the mother, or the nurse having committed cer

tain improprieties, by which the devil enters their bodies, in order toamuse himself. When a devil distresses an infan t, it becomes depressed in spirits, and starts from fear . The eyes ofthe child swell, hecries, his fingers are contracted, and at other times he tears his bodyand clothes with his nails, and bites with his teeth, both himselfandnurse . The child turns his face to one side, and moves about

his eyes grinds his teeth together, makes a noise like a person

who cannot speak from the severity ofthe disease, and he frequently

yawn s. His eyelids and eyebrows are in continual movement, and

the two foreteeth and lips\

remain shut, and foam proceeds from

the mouth . The child becomes thinner, cann ot sleep, his eyes

swell, has frequent motions, and an unnatural noise proceeds from

the throat. The smell ofthe body resembles that ofblood, or flesh

and the child will not take his usual food. These are the usualsymptoms indicating the presence ofa devil .

THE END.